Installation and Start-Up Guide 11/2002 Edition

Installation and Start-Up Guide 11/2002 Edition

HMI/MMC SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Updates/

AE1

Supplements Expanding the

BE1

Operator Interface

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Online Help

HE1

HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide

Starting Up

IM2

HMI Embedded Starting Up

Installation and Start-Up Guide

IM4

HMI Advanced Creating Foreign

TX1

Language Texts Appendix

Index

Valid for Control Software version SINUMERIK 840D 6 SINUMERIK 840DE (Export Version) 6 SINUMERIK 840D powerline 6 SINUMERIK 840DE powerline (Export Version) 6 SINUMERIK 840Di 2 SINUMERIK 840DiE (Export Version) 2 SINUMERIK 810D 3 SINUMERIK 810DE (Export Version) 3 SINUMERIK 810D powerline 6 SINUMERIK 810DE powerline (Export Version) 6 HMI Advanced 6 HMI Embedded 6

11.02 Edition

A I

SINUMERIK® Documentation

Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" column. The status of each edition is shown by the code in the "Remarks" columns: A .... B .... C ....

New documentation Unrevised reprint with new order number Revised edition with new status. If technical details have changed compared to the previous edition, this will be indicated by a new status date in the header of each page.

Edition

Order No.

Remarks

12.98 08.99 02.01 11.01 11.02

6FC5 297-5AE20-0BP0 6FC5 297-5AE20-0BP1 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP0 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP1 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2

A C C C C

This manual is included in the documentation on CD-ROM (DOCONCD) Edition Order No. Remarks C 11.02 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG3 (Read) C 11.02 6FC5 298-6CB00-0BG3 (Print) C 11.02 6FC5 298-6CA00-8BG3 (Net)

Further information is available on the Internet under: http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik

This publication was produced with WinWord V 8.0 and Designer V 7.0 and DokuTool AutWinDoc.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing.

The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. Nonetheless, differences might exist and, therefore, we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this documentation is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement.

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved

Subject to change without prior notice

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2 Printed in Germany

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft

11.02

Preface

Preface Structure of the documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in three parts: • General Documentation • User Documentation • Manufacturer/Service Documentation.

Target group This documentation is intended for manufacturers of machine tools with the SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D control.

Hotline If you have any queries, please contact the following hotline: A&D Technical Support

Phone: +49-(0)180-5050-222 Fax: +49-(0)180-5050-223 E-Mail: [email protected]

If you have queries regarding documentation (suggestions, corrections), please send a fax or e-mail to the following addresses: Fax: +49-(0)0131-98-2176 E-Mail: [email protected] Fax form: See the feedback page at the end of the document.

Internet address http://www.ad.siemens.de/sinumerik

SINUMERIK 840D powerline From 09.2001 the following controls with improved performance are available: • SINUMERIK 840D powerline and • SINUMERIK 840DE powerline. You can find a list of available powerline modules in the hardware description: References: /PHD/ Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 840D

© Siemens AG, 2002. All rights reserved SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAM) – 11.02 Edition

v

Preface

11.02

SINUMERIK 810D powerline From 12.2001 the following controls with improved performance are available: • SINUMERIK 810D powerline and • SINUMERIK 810DE powerline. You can find a list of available powerline modules in the hardware description: References: /PHC/ Configuring Manual SINUMERIK 810D

Objectives • To support the machine manufacturer in the commissioning and parameterization of the HMI/MMC. • To inform the machine manufacturer / end user of the various ways of expanding the standard help system. • The instructions explain how the HMI/MMC user interface provided by Siemens / the machine manufacturer, can be modified easily by the machine manufacturer / end user to meet their specific requirements. Neither the MMCOEM tool package nor any other additional software tools are required to do this.

Standard scope The printed version consists of the following manuals: • /AE1/ Updates/supplements • /BE1/ Expanding the Operator Interface • /HE1/ Help in the editor • /IM2/ Starting up HMI Embedded • /IM4/ Starting up HMI Advanced • /TX1/ Creating foreign language texts.

Search aids To help you find your way around, there is a full list of contents together with a list of chapter contents for each part as well as the following aids in the appendix: 1. References 2. List of abbreviations 3. Index per manual.

!

vi

Important This Installation and Start-Up Guide is valid for HMI Embedded and HMI Advanced.


11.02

Preface

Notes The following notes with a special meaning are used in the documentation: Note Appears in the documentation wherever further references are made.

!

Important Appears in the documentation wherever an important fact has to be taken into account. Additional ordering options This symbol refers to additional ordering options in the documentation. However, the function can be operated only if the control has the option on it.

Warning notes The following warning notes with varying degrees of severity are used in the documentation:

!

Danger

!

Warning

!

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury or in substantial property damage. Caution Used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage. Caution Used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in property damage.


vii

Preface

11.02

Notice Used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state.

Technical references

Trademarks IBM® is a registered trademark of the International Business Corporation. MS-DOS® and WINDOWS™ are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.

Effectiveness of changes When changing data (e.g. machine data) please also check their effectiveness (e.g. after power ON or IMMEDIATELY). For that reason, time and date are always quoted.

n

viii


11.02

Updates/Supplements (AE1) Contents

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide

Updates/Supplements (AE1)

1 Changes in SW 5.1 (12.98) compared to SW 4.4 (05.98) ...................................................... AE1/1-3 2 Changes in SW 5.1 (12.98) compared to SW 4.4 (05.98) ...................................................... AE1/2-9 3 Changes in SW 5.2 (08.99) compared to SW 5.1 (12.98) .................................................... AE1/3-13 4 Changes in SW 5.3 (04.00) compared to SW 5.2 (08.99) .................................................... AE1/4-19 5 Changes in SW 6.1/6.2 (10.00) compared to SW 5.3 (04.00) .............................................. AE1/5-23 6 Changes to NC-SW 6.1 (10.00) vis-à-vis SW 6.3 (11.01) and HMI-SW 6.1 vis-à-vis SW 6.2 .................................................................................................................................... AE1/6-29 7 Changes to NC-SW 6.3 (09.01) vis-à-vis SW 6.4 (11.02) and HMI-SW 6.2 vis-à-vis SW 6.3 .................................................................................................................................... AE1/7-33

I Index ........................................................................................................................................ AE1/I-41 I.1 Index ..................................................................................................................................... AE1/I-41


AE1/i

Updates/Supplements (AE1) Contents

AE1/ii

11.02


11.02

Updates/Supplements (AE1) 1 Changes in SW 5.1 (12.98) compared to SW 4.4 (05.98)

1

1 Changes in SW 5.1 (12.98) compared to SW 4.4 (05.98)

Introduction The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix. No.

Topic: HW SW 4.4

Target document(s)

4.4_01

NCU561.2: Two axes

Yellow Pages (P4.4) Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (PHD) Chapter 4

4.4_02

Digitizing: Mapping the connector interface for laser technology

Description of Functions, Digitizing (FBD), Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (PHD)

4.4_03

MMC103: Spare hard disk

Operator Components Manual (BH)

4.4_04

Disconnecting the HHU/HPU during operation

Operator Components Manual (BH) HHU and HPU

4.4_05

OP032L: Replacing the monitor version by a 10.4" flat screen; integrated floppy disk drive possible


4.4_06

810D single I/O module: Dimension drawing changed

Manual Configuring (PHC)


AE1/1-3


11.02

No.

Topic: NC-SW 4.4

Target document(s)

4.4_07

WRITE/DELETE command: Storing the WRITE command for measurement results in the log file

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA): Sections 1.21, 1.22

4.4_08

Description of Functions, Computer Link SINCOM SINCOM 2 parts: Computer link (FBR) SINCOM - corrections, installation and start-up examples

4.4_09

SINTDI: Tool Data Information System SINTDI – corrections

Description of Functions, Tool Data Information System SINTDI (FBTD)

4.4_10

Safety Integrated Smoothing/supplements

Description of Functions, SINUMERIK (FBSI)

4.4_11

Cycles on PCMCIA Backing up data via memory card, providing/exchanging cycles on PC card

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD)

4.4_12

Measuring cycles: New measuring cycles and revision

User Guide, Measuring Cycles (BNM)

4.4_13

Path reference: GGroup for SPATH, UPATH changeover Explanation of the differences, notes for the user, SPLINE, COMPRES. POLY

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG)

4.4_14

MMC 100.2: Updating the software upgrade

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 12, SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAC): Chapter 13

4.4_15

MMC 102/3: Extensions (tool MMC Operator's Guide (BA) management, basic frame, alarm log)

4.4_16

Data backup: MD 11210 extended, special series start-up possible from SW4.3, moving the scaling MD to parameterization of the control

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 11 SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD): Chapters 12, 6

4.4_17

Code carrier by Balluff

Description of Functions (FB)

4.4_18

NEWCONF

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA): Section 1.20

4.4_19

List of actions in Diagnostic Guide

Diagnostic Guide (DA): Section 1.6

AE1/1-4


11.02


4.4_20

Channel menu and m:n: revised

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapters 3 & 13, SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAC): Chapters 3 & 12, FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 2

4.4_21

G91 extension

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG): Subsection 3.2.1

4.4_22

Blueprint programming extended

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 6

4.4_23

Block search

FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, ... , Chapters 2 &6

4.4_24

PHG: Configuring PLC alarms

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAC)

4.4_25

FB Remote Diagnosis: revised

FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs

4.4_26

Description of Functions, Tool Management (FBW) Tool management: Improved performance, manual tools, manually unloading disabled tool, new PIs: search for empty location or tool, testing with SINCOM

4.4_27

ShopMill: Manual tools; tool management with 2nd toolholding magazine

Description of Functions, ShopMill (FBSP)

4.4_28

Frames: extensions

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA): Chapter 6

4.4_29

5-axis machining: extensions


4.4_30

Optimized drive: Automatic controller setting; funct. for 810D not yet available.

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 10


AE1/1-5


11.02

No.

Topic: MMC-SW 4.4

4.4_31

OP032S: US keyboard layout and MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Sections 2.2 - 2.4, key description in parallel Operator Components Manual (BH)

4.4_32

Configuring Caps-Lock/Num-Lock SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 13 SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD): Chapter 14

4.4_33

NC series start-up via PC card


4.4_34

SINUCOPY extensions The software was extended for start-up with PC card

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter MMC, SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAC): Chapter MMC

4.4_35

Extended MMC 103 simulation

MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

4.4_36

SHOPMILL simulation support, SHOPMILL

Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP), MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

4.4_37

Skipping axes Skipping axes in the display

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) MMC, MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 4

4.4_38

Zero offset and tool offset: Activating


4.4_39

Tool offset: One-level D no. structure

4.4_40

Interactive programming: Free input identification

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 2, Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG): Chapter 8 MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

4.4_41

Replacing Preset by basic offset


4.4_42

Flexible GUD, MAC editing/activating

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 5, Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA): Chapter 3

4.4_43

ManualTurn: Supporting Mask Edit Tool

Description of Functions, ManualTurn (FBMA)

4.4_44

Configuring the Shift key


AE1/1-6

Target document(s)


11.02


4.4_45

MMC 103: Tips and Tricks

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 13 SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD): Chapter 14

4.4_46

Block search when executing from hard disk: extensions


4.4_47

TEACHIN: extensions


4.4_48

Configuring dialog displays

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD): Chapter MMC

4.4_49

Selective program protection

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD): Chapter MMC

■


AE1/1-7


AE1/1-8

11.02


11.02


2

2 Changes in SW 5.1 (12.98) compared to SW 4.4 (05.98) Introduction The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix. No.

Topic HW-SW 5

Target document(s)

51_01

Link module for NCU573.2

Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 840D (PHD)

51_02

OP032S: Redesign Flat MCP


51_03

DX4-100 for NCU561.2, NCU571.2, NCU572


51_04

MLFB of the NCUs changed


51_05

Terminal Block


51_06

Qwerty OP


51_07

New NCU573.2


51_08

10.4" monitor for OP032L


51_09

MMC103, spare hard disk


51_10

810D: new CCU box

Manual Configuring (PHC)

51_11

OP032S


51_12

8MB Flash cards

Operator Components Manual (BH), Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 840D (PHD), Configuring Manual (PHC)

51_13

Mini Operator Components Manual



AE1/2-9


11.02

51_14

Distributor box


51_15

OP032S


51_16

NCU 561.2 special configuration


No.

Topic NC-SW 5

Target document(s)

51_17

Orientable toolholders

FB1/W1: Tool Compensation

51_18

Soft approach/retraction


51_19

Fanuc compatibility

Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA)

51_20

Flash File System, SINUCOPY FFS

MMC Operator's Guide (BA), SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD)

51_21

NCU global frames

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

51_22

TRC extensions P5, G460 – G462 Orientation axes


51_23

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB3/F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, Lists (LIS)

51_24

Geometry axes, TRAFO extensions

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB3/F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, Lists (LIS): Alarms

51_25

Geometry axis motion control extensions

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and Look Ahead

51_26

Compressor

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

51_27

Manual Turn

FB1/K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Lists (LIS), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), Operator's Guide ManualTurn (BAM), Programming Guide Cycles (PGZ), FB1/R1: Reference Point Approach

51_28

Inch/metric

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), Programming Guide Advanced (PGA), Lists (LIS), FB1/A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones, FB1/G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Values, FB1/P3: Basic PLC Program

AE1/2-10


11.02


51_29

NCU link


51_30

Axis container


51_31

Channel axis gaps

SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD); SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems, Axis Types, ...

51_32

Programming


51_33

$P_SUBPAR

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

No.

Topic NC-SW 5

Target document(s)

51_34

Program Global Variables (PUD)

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), MMC Operator's Guide (BA), SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAC); SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD)

51_35

Starting up gantry axes

51_36

Safety Integrated

FB3/G1: Gantry Axes, SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), MMC Operator's Guide (BA) Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (FBSI)

51_37

ShopMill

Description of Functions, ShopMill (FBSP)

51_38

Extended spindle functions

FB1/S1: Spindles

51_39

Synchronized actions

51_40

Auxiliary function output

Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions (FBSY) FB1/H2: Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC

51_41

Gearing

FB3/M3: Coupled Axes and ESR Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

51_42

Extension stop/retract (gearing)

FB3/M3: Coupled Axes and ESR

51_43

Measuring cycles


51_44

Cycles

Programming Guide, Cycles (PGZ)

51_45

Basic PLC program, P5

FB1/P3: Basic PLC Program

51_46

NCK-PLC interface



AE1/2-11


11.02

51_47

Tool mirroring, plane selection

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB1/W1: Tool Compensation

51_48

Single axis dynamics program

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

51_49

Skippable program levels

FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation; Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG): Chapter 2

51_50

PLC via RS232

IAM/IM1: Start-Up Functions for MMC100.2, IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103

No.

Topic MMC-SW 5.1

Target document(s)

51_51

Block search


51_52

Tool management

FB1/W1: Tool Compensation, MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

51_53

Complete hard disk backup

Installation and Start-Up Guide 810 D (IAC), Installation and Start-Up Guide 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D (IAD)

51_54

SBL3: Stop in the cycle

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapters 2 & 4

■

AE1/2-12


06.02


3


Introduction The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix. No.

Topic

Target document(s)

52_01 Simulation support

Description of Functions ShopMill (FBSP), MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

52_02 Online MD 5.2

Online Help in the control

52_03 Digitizing

Description of Functions, Digitizing (FBD)

52_04 OP030

Description of Functions, Configuring the User Interface OP030 (FBO)

52_05 611D, extensions

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), Description of Functions, Drive Functions (FBA)

52_06 Generating lists

Lists (LIS)

52_07 Alarms

Diagnostic Guide (DA)

No.

Target document(s)

Topic HW P5.2 (05.99)

52_08 Qwerty OP


52_09 New NCU573.2

Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 (PHD)

52_10 OP032S

MMC Operator's Guide (BA), Operator Components Manual (BH)

52_11 Mini HHU


52_12 Distributor box



AE1/3-13


52_13 Distribution Board (DSB)


52_14 A&D PC: PC box, PC panel


52_15 NCU 572.3


52_16 NCU link, Profibus


52_17 PP031-MC


No.

Target document(s)

Topic NC SW 5.2 (05.99)

06.02

52_18 Program execution time/workpiece Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), counter Lists (LIS), Diagnostic Guide (DA): Alarms 52_19 Fanuc compatibility

Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG)

52_20 NCU global frames

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

52_21 Orientation axes

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB3/F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, Lists (LIS)

52_22 Geometry axes, TRAFO extensions

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB3/F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, Lists (LIS): Alarms

52_23 5-axis transformer

FB3/F2: 3 to 5 Axis Transformation, Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

52_24 Transformations

FB2/M1: Kinematic Transformation

52_25 SOFT/BRISK

FB1/B1: Continuous Path Mode, Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

52_26 Phases/fillets

FB1/V1: Feeds

52_27 Job list


52_28 NCU link


52_29 Axis container


AE1/3-14


06.02


52_30 Channel axis gaps

SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems, Axis Types, ...

52_31 READ


52_32 ISFILE


52_33 CHECKSUM


52_34 $P_PATH


52_35 2 encoder referencing, synchronization 52_36 Safety Integrated level 2

Description of Functions, Drive Functions (FBA)

52_37 Extended spindle functions

FB1/G2: Velocities..., FB1/S1: Spindles

52_38 Tool management

FBW, MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

52_39 Extension stop/retract (gearing)

FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR

52_40 Measuring cycles


52_41 Cycles


52_42 Troubleshooting P4

All documents

52_43 Troubleshooting P5

All documents

52_44 Basic PLC program P5.2


52_45 NCK-PLC interface


52_46 New user MDs

FB1/A2: Interface Signals

52_47 Single block dynamics program

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

52_48 Setpoint exchange

FB3/TE5: Setpoint Exchange

52_49 Coupled axis motion

FB3/TE6: MCS Coupling

52_50 Exchange sets of parameters

Description of Functions, Drive Functions (FBA)

Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (FBSI)


AE1/3-15


06.02

52_51 Exact stop via synchronized action Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions (FBSY) 52_52 SINUCOPY FFS, direct writing to SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation NC card and Start-Up Guide (IAD) 52_53 Remote diagnosis


No.

Target document(s)

Topic MMC SW 5.2 (05.99)

52_54 Basic offset


52_55 Turning/milling simulation


52_56 Hydraulic linear drive and analog drive

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD) MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

52_57 Blueprint programming

Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

52_58 Teleservice for MMC 100.2

FB2/F3: Remote Diagnosis

52_59 Tool management SW 5.2


52_60 Free contour programming


52_61 Cycles


52_62 HPU operation, new functions

Operator's Guide, Handheld Programming Unit (BAP) SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD)

52_63 Gantry axis graphics 52_64 pdf call in the control

MMC Operator's Guide (BA), IAM/HE1: Online Help

52_65 Tool management


52_66 Actual values in WOS/SZS


52_67 Step7 as AddOn

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103

52_68 Active data backup


52_69 Network drive in program/machine IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103 52_70 Skipping Wizard blocks

IAM/BE1: Supplement Operator Interface

52_71 Service display Safety Integr.


52_72 Return from cycle support


AE1/3-16


06.02


52_73 Installation of MMC Win with install SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation shield and Start-Up Guide (IAD) Chapter 11 52_74 Win3.11 and Win95 on one MMC

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103

52_75 4.8 Gbyte hard disk


52_76 Geometry processor extension


52_77 Action log

IAM/IM1: Start-Up Functions for MMC 100.2, IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC 103

52_78 More than 5,000 alarm texts

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC 103

52_79 Filter for Fanuc MDs


52_80 Safety Integrated Alarm log


52_81 NCU link display


52_82 m : n, distributed concept

FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs, MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

52_83 Pocket milling cycle from ShopMill


52_84 NonWin: Milling simulation


52_85 Win: ShopMill program simulation


52_86 Find/replace all in the editor


52_87 Diagnosis: S/SQ alarm extension


52_88 Long file names for network drives MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 6 52_89 Increased number of workpiece/files 52_90 AutoTurn SW 4.4

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Chapter 6 Short Guide AutoTurn Operation (AUK), AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (AUE), AutoTurn Graphic Programming System (AUP)

■


AE1/3-17


AE1/3-18

06.02


11.02


4


Introduction The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix.

No.

Topic: General tasks

Target document(s)

53_01 Working in DDTS corrections

All documents

53_02 Online MD update

Online Help

53_03 Digitizing

Description of Functions, Digitizing (FBD)


Lists (LIS)

53_05 Alarms update

Diagnostic Guide (DA)

53_06 DNC NT 2000 update

System for NC Data Management and Data Distribution (FBDN)

No.

Target document(s)

Topic: HW SW 5.3 (04.00)

53_07 PCU 50


53_08 OP012, OP015


53_09 Distributor box: extensions


53_10 NCU link, Profibus


53_11 PP031-MC: extensions



AE1/4-19


No.

Topic: NC-SW 5.3 (04.00)

11.02

Target document(s)

53_12 Program execution time/ workpiece counter

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA): Section 13.8

53_13 To fixed stop: extensions

FB1/F1: Travel to Fixed Stop

53_14 Fanuc compatibility

Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK (FBFA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG)

53_15 NCU global frames

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG), FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems, Axis Types,..., MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

53_16 Inclined machining with 3+2 axes

FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems, Axis Types, ... FB1/W1: Tool Compensation

53_17 m : n, distributed concept


53_18 Block-internal smoothing

Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA), Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

53_19 Profibus connection

FB1/K4: Communication

53_20 Optimized closed-loop control

FB1/G2: Velocities

53_21 2 encoder referencing synchronization 53_22 Safety Integrated SPL, external stops

FB1/R1: Reference Point Approach

53_23 Tool path velocity smoothing

FB1/G2: Velocities

53_24 Feed per block

FB1/V1: Feeds

53_25 Spindle: gear change to fixed position

FB1/S1: Spindles, Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

53_26 No spindle help function output after block search

FB1/S1: Spindles, Programming Guide, Fundamentals (PG),

53_27 Tool management: extensions

Description of Functions Tool Management (FBW), MMC Operator's Guide (BA)

53_28 Extension stop/retract (gearing)

FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR

53_29 Measuring cycles: measuring in JOG


AE1/4-20

Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated (FBSI)


11.02


53_30 Cycles: extended stock removal, pocket milling with islands


53_31 Basic PLC program


53_32 NCK-PLC interface


53_33 Programmable single axis dynamics

FB1/V1: Feeds, Programming Guide, Advanced (PGA)

53_34 Skip block via program

FB1/A2: Various Interface Signals

53_35 Path smoothing

FB1/B1: Continuous Path Mode

53_36 Fanuc function for default


53_37 SINUCOPY FFS, direct writing to NC card

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD)

53_38 Remote diagnosis: corrections

FB2/F3: Remote Diagnosis

53_39 PHG: 12-axis teach-in, PTP teach- Operator's Guide, Handheld Programming Unit in (BAP)

No.

Topic MMC 103 SW 5.3 (04.00)

Target document(s)

53_40 Tool management SW 5.3

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Section 5.3

53_41 pdf call in the control

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): IAM/HE1: Online Help

53_42 MMC103 under WinNT 4.0

OEM documentation

53_43 Install C-Win with install shield

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC 103: Chapter 13

53_44 Win3.11 and Win95 on one MMC


53_45 Thread recutting


53_46 Scratch display


53_47 4.8 Gbyte hard disk

Operator Components Manual (BH) Chapter MMC103

53_48 Editing large programs


53_49 ShopMill tool management in default

Description of Functions Tool Management (FBW), MMC Operator's Guide (BA) Section 5.4


AE1/4-21


No.

Topic MMC 100.2 SW 5.3 (04.00)

11.02

Target document(s)

53_50 Rapid traverse override in the display 53_51 Automatic master spindle display


53_52 Magazine list from ShopMill


53_53 Extensions for MMC Wizard


53_54 Editing and activating GUDs and MACs


53_55 Utilization display for Non-Win in percent


53_56 Extension: free contour programming


53_57 Original condition via NC card

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Subsection 7.5.10

53_58 Screen position configuring

IAM/IM1: Start-Up Functions for MMC100.2: Section 2.4 MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Section 8.6

53_59 Utilization display in percent


53_60 Setting date/hour of the PLC

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Subsection 9.3.2; IAM/IM1: Start-Up Functions for MMC100.2: Chapter 7

53_61 Override display in G0


53_62 Calculator help + extension

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Subsection 2.6.9;

MMC Operator's Guide (BA): Section 9.4 53_63 Changing the language with "Change language" independent of the language

■

AE1/4-22


11.02

Updates/Supplements (AE1) 5 Changes in SW 6.1/6.2 (10.00) compared to SW 5.3 (04.00)

5

5 Changes in SW 6.1/6.2 (10.00) compared to SW 5.3 (04.00)

Introduction The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document(s)" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix.

No.


Target document(s)

61_01 New MDs in Online MD

Online Help


LIS: Lists

61_03 New alarms

DA: Diagnostic Guide

No.

Target document(s)

Topic: HW P6.1

61_04 Qwerty OP: key labeling

BH: Operator Components Manual

61_05 NCU573.3: tech. data update

PHD: Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2

61_06 PCU 20

BA: MMC Operator's Guide BH: Operator Components Manual

61_07 OP010, OP010C, OP010S


61_08 NCU 572.3: tech. data update


61_09 NCU link, Profibus: extension


61_10 PP031-MC: updated



AE1/5-23


No.

Topic: NC SW 6.1/2 (10.00)

61_11 NCK-PLC interface updated

11.02

Target document(s) LIS: Lists

61_12 Functionality of the NCUs 571-573 PHD: Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.2 updated IAD: SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide 61_13 Block search via program testing Supplements in (ASUBs in all modes and travel to fixed stop)

FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation

61_14 Time of block change can be set in G0

FB2/P2: Positioning Axes FB1/S1: Spindles FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals

61_15 Spindle extensions: gear stage change, synchronous spindle

FB1/S1: Spindles FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions

61_16 Electronic stop and retraction by the NC

FB3/M3: Coupled Axes

61_17 Non-linear axis coupling in ELG

FB3/M3: Coupled Axes

61_18 Lead link axis ("reading" axis)


61_19 Sequence control system for the NCU link

FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs FB1/G2: Velocities, ..., BA: Operator's Guide MMC

61_20 Drive status for synchronized actions

FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs PGA Programming Guide, Advanced

61_21 New NC commands

PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced

61_22 Block search extensions

FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation

61_23 ISO dialects: extensions

FBFA: Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK

61_24 5th order polynomial (acceleration- FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program steady axis motions) Operation PGA Programming Guide, Advanced HW in FB2/B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs 61_25 Dynamic response adaptation: increasing the dynamics limit values, keeping the program execution time

AE1/5-24



11.02


61_26 Automatic change of the exact stop operation G601-G603


61_27 Compressor Compcad for smooth surfaces

PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced

61_28 Tool path velocity smoothing


61_29 Smoothing with contour tolerance


61_30 Non-circular turning


61_31 Frame extensions (system frames) FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems, FB1/S1: Spindles, FB2/M5: Kinematic Transformation, FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions PGA Programming Guide, Advanced 61_32 Location-of-use and workpiece specific tool offsets

FB1/W1: Tool Compensation, FB1/K2: Coordinate Systems

61_33 Master/slave as standard solution

FB3/TE3: Master/Slave for drives

61_34 Measuring functions on the Profibus 61_35 Retrofit-capable SM/MT

FB1/M5: Measurements

No.

Topic PLC SW 6.1 (10.00)

FBMA: Description of Functions, ManualTurn FBSP: Description of Functions, ShopMill

Target document(s)

61_36 Basic PLC program, extensions


No.

Target document(s)

Topic 611D SW 5.1 (10.00)

61_37 Descriptions of drive functions extended by SSI encoder

FBA: Description of Functions, Drive Functions DG1

61_38 1FE1 motor MD pulse rate

PJU: Planning Guide Interverters

61_39 Additional measuring system without additional closed-loop control module with power module

IAD: SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAD), Chapters 6 and 10 IAC: SINUMERIK 810D Installation and Start-Up Guide, Chapters 6 and 11


AE1/5-25


No.

Topic MMC SW 5.3 (10.00)

11.02

Target document(s)

61_40 Software selection before initial booting

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103, Chapter 13

61_41 Accelerated external block search

BA: MMC Operator's Guide, Chapter 4

61_42 Multi-channel block search in program test mode 61_43 Automatic master spindle display

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103, Chapter 16 BA: MMC Operator's Guide, Chapter 4 BA: MMC Operator's Guide, Chapter 4

61_44 Additional states of skip levels

BA: MMC Operator's Guide, Section 4.6

61_45 Rapid traverse override in the display

BA: Operator's Guide, Section 4.4

61_46 Tool management: code carrier with OEM data and new tool data

FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management

61_47 Extended tool parameters


61_48 Access protection for basic softkey IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103, offset Section 12.4 61_49 Tool management: filtered lists/order processing

BA : MMC Operator's Guide, Section 5.3

61_50 Extensions for MMC Wizard


61_51 Simulation: Match data with NC


61_52 Change-language softkey, independent of the language


61_53 Finishing m:n: distributed concept (server)


61_54 NCU-specific alarm texts for m:n:

IAM/IM3: Start-Up Functions for MMC103, Section 4.5

61_55 Changing the Alarm Help and MD Help to pdf Help

IAM/HE1: Online Help, Chapter 4

AE1/5-26


11.02

No.


Topic HMI Advanced SW 6.1 (02.01)

Target document(s)

61_56 Conversion of display MDs

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced, Installation and Start-Up IAM/IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced

61_57 Accelerated external block search

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced, Section 4.6

61_58 Multi-channel block search in program test mode

IAM/IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced: Chapter 5 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced, Section 4.6

61_59 Automatic master spindle display


61_60 Additional states of skip levels


61_61 Rapid traverse override in the display


61_62 Extended tool parameters


61_63 Access protection for basic softkey IAM/IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced: offset Chapter 5 61_64 Tool management: filtered lists/order processing

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced, Subsection 5.3.8 FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management

61_65 Tool management: order of replacement tools

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced, Section 5.3 FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management

61_66 Simulation: Match data with NC

IAM/IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced: Chapter 5

61_67 Change-language softkey, independent of the language


61_68 NCU-specific alarm texts for m:n:

IAM/IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced: Section 6.2


AE1/5-27


No.

Topic HMI Embedded SW 6.1 (02.01)

Target document(s)

61_69

Rapid traverse override in the display

BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 4.4

61_70

Automatic master spindle display BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 4.4 Tool and magazine list from BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, ShopMill Section 5.4

61_71

11.02

61_72

Extensions for MMC Wizard


61_73

Editing and activating GUDs and MACs


61_74

Utilization display for Non-Win in percent


61_75

Extension: free contour programming


61_76

Original condition via NC card

61_77

Screen position configuring

61_78

Utilization display in percent

61_79

Setting date/hour of the PLC

BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 7.5 IAM/IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded Chapter 5 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 8.6 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 9.3 IAM/IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded: Chapter 5

61_80

Override display in G0

61_81

Calculator help + extension

61_82

Changing the language with "Change language" independent of the language

BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 4.4 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Subsection 2.6.9 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded, Section 9.4

■

AE1/5-28


11.02

Updates/Supplements (AE1) 6 Changes to NC-SW 6.1 (10.00) vis-à-vis SW 6.3 (11.01) and HMI-SW 6.1 vis-à-vis SW 6.2

6

6 Changes to NC-SW 6.1 (10.00) vis-à-vis SW 6.3 (11.01) and HMI-SW 6.1 vis-à-vis SW 6.2

The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document(s)" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix. Note Reference is made only to those functions and components that are not included in Chapter 5 and that have been updated.

No.


Target document(s)

63_01

New MDs in Online MD

Online Help

63_02

Generating lists

LIS: Lists

63_03

New alarms


No.

Topic: HW Release 09.01

Target document(s)

63_04 63_05 63_06

Qwerty OP: key labeling SINUMERIK HT6 NCU 573.4

63_07

NCU 572.4

63_08 63_09

810D CCU3 PCU 50

BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual PHD: Configuration NCU 561.2-573.4 Manual (HW) PHD: Configuration NCU 561.2-573.4 Manual (HW) PHC: Configuring Manual CCU BH: Operator Components Manual


AE1/6-29


No.

Topic: NC SW 6.3

Target document(s)

63_10 63_11 63_12 63_13

NCK-PLC interface updated Single axes Spindle logic DRAM file system for cycle storage Contour handwheel System frame 3D measurement of inclined surfaces Generic 5-axis transformations Orientation compression Rotation of orientation vector Temperature compensation override for programmed motion in real time Include offsets for specific location/workpiece Extended system parameters for orientated toolholder Modular rotary axes

LIS: Lists FB2, P2: Positioning Axes FB1, S1: Spindles IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide

63_14 63_15 63_16 63_17 63_18 63_19 63_20 63_21 63_22 63_23 63_24 63_25 63_26 63_27 63_28 63_29 63_30

63_31 63_32

11.02

FB2, H1: Jog with/without Handwheel FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames FB2, M5: Measurements FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation FB1, W1: Tool Compensation FB1, W1: Tool Compensation FB1, W1: Tool Compensation

FB1, R1: Reference Point Approach FB2, R2: Rotary Axes Expansions to SW cams FB2, N3: Software cams, Position Switching Signals Gantry synchronization FB3, G1: Gantry Axes Extended electronic stop and FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR retraction by the NC PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced Nonlinear couplings, cascading, FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR curve tables PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced System variables stored in SRAM FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized for synchronized actions Actions IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide Involute interpolation PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals Path acceleration by FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, Look synchronized action Ahead FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions Dry run feedrate mode FB1, V1: Feeds Control of interpolation buffer FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation

AE1/6-30


11.02


No.

Topic: HMI SW 6.2

Target document(s)

63_33

Network boot PCU50

63_34

Step7 installation directory, optional PCMCIA cards and SW

IAM, IM4: Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC IAM, IM4: Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC IAM, IM4: Installation and Start-Up Guide HMI/MMC BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 2.5.1 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 2.5.1 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 4.6.5 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 4.6.1, 6.11 IAM/IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 3.5 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 5.3.3 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 5.1 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 5.3.4 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.6.12 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 5.3.5

63_35 63_36 63_37

63_38 63_39 63_40 63_41 63_42 63_43 63_44 63_45 63_46 63_47

63_48 63_49 63_50 63_51 63_52

Diameter symbol for transverse axes Multi-block display with Extcall

Inclusion of wear EC/SC Extension of tool types Extended display for grinding tools Relocate tools, old location as default Polar coordinates for contour prog. Undercut Settable access rights for part program creation Secured communication protocol Storable RS232C interface parameters Softkey layout for network drives

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 6.5.6 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 6.5.7 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 4.3.2, 5.6.8 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 7.4 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.6.6 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 7.5.2

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 4.6.4, 4.6.6 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.4 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 6.3 IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 5.26 Channel display selection by PLC IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.1.15, 5.1.18 Status display selection in IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.1.15 operating screens Provide HMI task number for PLC IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.1.4 Mouse operation with HMI BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 2.1.7 Embedded Win 32 IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 5.27 ATA card as logical drive BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 6.10, 9.8 IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 8.5


AE1/6-31


63_53 63_54

63_55 63_56

63_57 63_58

11.02

Tool management: ShopTurn tools and tool list Plaintexts for system frames

BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 5.5 IAM/IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 5.15 BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 4.4.7 IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 5.1.3 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced 4.4.8 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.3.3 Network links, network drives and BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 7.5.9, 9.8 floppies, protection levels IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 3.4, 5.26 Service Safety Integrated BEM: Operator's Guide: HMI Embedded 4.4.5, 8.3.3 IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 5.12 BAD: Operator's Guide: HMI Advanced 4.4.5, 8.3.3 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 5.1.11 "Powerline" boot screen IAM, IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded 4.2 IAM, IM4: Start-Up HMI Advanced 4.3.1 Editing the HMI interface BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 9.5 ■

AE1/6-32


11.02


7

7 Changes to NC-SW 6.3 (09.01) vis-à-vis SW 6.4 (11.02) and HMI-SW 6.2 vis-à-vis SW 6.3 The abbreviations listed below in column "Target document" are listed and explained in the list of references in the appendix. Note Reference is made only to those functions and components that are not included in Chapter 6 and that have been updated.

No.


Target document(s)

64_01

New MDs in Online MD

Online Help

64_02

Generating lists

LIS: Lists

64_03

New alarms


No.

Topic: HW Release 11.02

Target document(s)

64_04


64_05 64_06 64_07 64_08 64_09 64_10 64_11 64_12 64_13

OP015 TFT width 416 mm (DMG operator panel) Machine control panel (MCP) PCU 70 Distributed configuration PCU 50 (V2) with 512 MB New MCP OP015A TP012 PP012 NCU 571.3

64_14

NCU 572.4

64_15

NCU 561.3

64_16

810D CCU3

BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual BH: Operator Components Manual PHD: Configuration NCU 561.2-573.4 Manual (HW) PHD: Configuration NCU 561.2-573.4 Manual (HW) PHD: Configuration NCU 561.2-573.4 Manual (HW) PHC: Configuring Manual CCU


AE1/7-33


64_16 64_17 64_18 64_19 64_20 64_21 64_22

64_23

64_24

64_25 64_26 64_27 64_28 64_29 64_30 64_31 64_32 64_33 64_34 64_35 64_36 64_37

Functionality of the NCUs 571573 Global measurement DRAM file system for cycle storage Wait mark for REPOS

11.02

PHD: Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.4 IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide FB2, M5: Measurements IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide

FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation System variable SP_SEARCH_S FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Block search via program testing FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Supplements in (ASUBs in all FB1, F1: Travel to Fixed Stop modes and travel to fixed stop) Single axes and spindle logic FB2, S3: Synchronous spindles FB2, R2: Rotary Axes, P2: Positioning Axes FB1, P3: Basic PLC Program FB1, S1: Spindles, W1: Tool Compensation FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Progr. Operation, VDI Interface Lists Overlaid movements FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, W1: Tool Compensation FB2, S5: Synchronized Actions (up to SW 3) FBSY: Descr. of Functions, Synchronized Actions PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals Block change FB2, P2: Positioning Axes FB1, S1: Spindles FBSY: Descr. of Functions, Synchronized Actions PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals Display of handwheels in the VDI FB2, H1: Jog with/without Handwheel interface Contour handwheel FB2, H1: Jog with/without Handwheel Rotary table, 2 methods of FB2, H1: Jog with/without Handwheel operation Expansions to SW cams FB2, N3: Software cams, Position Switching Signals Spindle extensions FB1, S1: Spindles FBSY: Description of Functions No gear change during dry run FB1, S1: Spindles, FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Progr. Operation Automatic gantry synchronization Electronic stop and retraction FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR (NC-ESR): extensions EGON with curve tables PLU V0015 Non-linear coupling in the ELG FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR Drive signal dir. from the VDI FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs Drive status for synchronized FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs actions PGA Programming Guide, Advanced Lead link axis FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs

AE1/7-34


11.02


64_38

Sequence control system for the NCU link

64_39

NC language P6

64_40

Ext. f. block search P6

64_41

Synchronized actions extensions

64_42

Synchronized action for indexed access 5th order polynomial

64_43

64_44 64_45 64_46

64_47 64_48 64_49 64_50 64_51

64_52 64_53 64_54 64_55 64_56 64_57

FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs FB1, G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control BA: MMC Operator's Guide FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation FB1, S1: Spindles FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation FBSY: Description of Functions IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide FBSY: Description of Functions

FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced HW in FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs Automatic change of exact stop FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and operation Look Ahead Smoothing with contour tolerance FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and Look Ahead Path acceleration by SYNACT FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and Look Ahead, FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized Actions Tool path velocity smoothing FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and Look Ahead Dynamic response adaptation FB1, B1: Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop, and Look Ahead Compressor COMPCAD: PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced extensions Non-circular turning FB2, B3: Several Operator Panels and NCUs Frame extensions FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, Zero Offset External, FB1, S1: Spindles, W1: Tool Compensation FB2, M5: Measurements FBSY: Descr. of Functions, Synchronized Actions PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced System frame for cycles FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, Zero Offset External 3D measurement of inclined FB2, M5: Measurements surfaces Generic 5-axis transformation FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation Using compressor better for FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation orient. tool Rotations of orientation vector FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation Tool length offset for Traori in tool FB1, W1: Tool Compensation orient. PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced


AE1/7-35


64_58

64_59 64_60 64_61 64_62

64_63 64_64 64_65 64_66 64_67 64_68 64_69 64_70 64_71 64_72 64_73 64_74 64_75

64_76 64_77 64_78 64_79

11.02

Tool offset tool system

FB1, W1: Tool Compensation FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, Zero Offset External Inclined machining with 3+2 axes FB1, W1: Tool Compensation PGA: Programming Guide Dry run feedrate mode Control of interpolation buffer FB, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Master-slave extensions FB3, TE3: Speed/Torque Coupling, Master-Slave (TE1: Clearance Control -TE3: Speed/Torque Coupling, Master-Slave) (TE5: Setpoint Exchange -TE6: MCS Coupling) Adaptation for 611D Onyx module IAD: Installation & Start-up Guide FBA: Description of Functions, Drive Functions Referencing in follow-up mode FB1, R1: Reference Point Approach Measuring functions on the FB2, M5: Measurements Profibus Tool management - new FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management commands Remote diagnosis: extensions FBFE: Description of Functions, Remote Diagnosis Retrace Support FB3, TE7: Retrace Support FB3, TE8: Cycle-Independent Path-Synchronous Cycle-independent pathSwitching Signal Output synchronous switching signal output Retroloadability of compile cycles FB3, TE0: Installation and Activation of Compile Cycles REDEF PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced Block search and multiple FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program channels, SERUPRO approach Operation Fast block change on exact stop FB2,P2: Positioning Axes Block change fillets PGA: Programming Guide Advanced Chapter 5, FB2, P2: Positioning Axes Axis replacement extensions PGA: Programming Guide Advanced Chapter 1 FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation FB2, K5: Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement, P2: Positioning Axes, P5: Oscillation B-axis movable in parallel with FB2, P2: Positioning Axes, P5: Oscillation, tool change FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR LIS: Lists Acceleration pattern of following FB1, B2: Acceleration axis PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced TANGDEL PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced FB3 T3: Speed/Torque Coupling, Master-Slave Deletion of all curve tables with PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced, CTABDEL FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR

AE1/7-36


11.02

64_80


Electronic gear synchronization

PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals, PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced, FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR 64_81 Diagnosis of coupled axes and PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced 9.3 curve tables FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR Section 2.2 64_82 Synchr. run difference with sign PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced (automatically generated) FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR 64_83 Curve tables extended: PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced, CTABSSV and CTABSEV FB3 M3: Coupled Axes and ESR 64_84 Block display with absolute value FB, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation, BAD: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded 64_85 Precompilation of selected cycles FB3, V2: Preprocessing 64_86 Block search extensions P6 FB1, K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation 64_87 ISO 16-G code compatibility G62 FBFA: Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK, PGM: Programming Guide ISO Milling PGT: Programming Guide ISO Turning 64_88 ISO dialect extensions FBFA: Description of Functions, ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK, PGM: Programming Guide ISO Milling PGT: Programming Guide ISO Turning 64_89 G33 thread cutting FB1, V1: Feeds 64_90 Extension of synchronized FB1, H2: Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC actions 64_91 Extension of synchronized FBSY: Description of Functions, Synchronized actions Actions 64_92 Checking clamping tolerance FB1, A2: Various Interface Signals and A3: Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones 64_93 Example LOOVR and JERKOVR PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced 64_94 Frame chain new FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, Zero Offset External FB2, M5: Measurements, BNM: User Guide, Measuring Cycles 64_95 Frame conversion FB1, K2: Axis Types, Coordinate Systems, Frames, Actual-Value System for Workpiece, Zero Offset External 64_96 Coordinate transformations FB2, M5: Measurements 64_97 Cart. extended interpolation of FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, (PGA: orientations Programming Guide, Advanced) (PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals) 64_98 Cart. manual method FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation FB2, H1: Jog with/without Handwheel FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, (PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced) 64_99 Syst. var. for tool orientation FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced 64_100 Coupling FB2, P2: Positioning Axes


AE1/7-37


11.02

64_101 TCP functionality with 3+2 axes

64_102

64_103 64_104 64_105 64_106 64_107 64_108

64_109 64_110 64_111 64_112 64_113 64_114 64_115 64_116 64_117 64_118 64_119 64_120 64_121 64_122 64_123

FB1, W1: Tool Compensation FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation FBSY: Descr. of Functions, Synchronized Actions PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals Online tool length offset FB1, W1: Tool Compensation TRAGEN, TRAORI, TCARR FB3, F2: 3-Axis to 5-Axis-Transformation, FBSY: Descr. of Functions, Synchronized Actions PGA: Programming Guide, Advanced PG: Programming Guide, Fundamentals Referencing in follow-up mode FB1, R1: Reference Point Approach Motor change on spindle drives FB1 G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Values Systems, Closed-Loop Control Referencing with Distance-Coded FB1, R1: Reference Point Approach Encoders 611 Digital Performance 2 FBA: Description of Functions, Drive Functions IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide Identification def. 611D modules FB1, D1: Diagnostic Tools Position control with PI controller FB1, G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Values Systems, Closed-Loop Control FB3, M3: Coupled Axes and ESR, ELG -> FB1, G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control Gauging of the HLA valve characteristic Coupling and uncoupling of FB3, TE3: Speed/Torque Coupling, Master-Slave rotating spindles Measuring functions on the FB2, M5: Measurement, only MD 13210 PROFIBUS-DP supplemented, HBI: Manual SPL-EA_Timing FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated SI, Step 3 Gen. FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated SPL function blocks FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Series installation and start-up IAD: Installation and Start-Up Guide SINUMERIK HT6 IAM, IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded BAH: Operator's Guide HT6 (HPU New) Retrofittable SM/MT FBMA: Description of Functions, ManualTurn FBSP: Description of Functions, ShopMill NCK shutdown path FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Ext. safe braking FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated FB1, P3: Basic PLC Program SI I/O on Profibus FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated SI, Step 3 Diagnosis FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Acceptance test FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated SI combined with ESR FBSI: Description of Functions, SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

AE1/7-38


11.02


64_124 Alarms in XML 64_125 TCARR with workpiece-specific inclusion of wear/EC/SC 64_126 Always display buffer 64_127 SINTDC(TMS) link to PARAMTM

FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management

No.

Target document(s)

Topic: HMI-SW 6.3

64_128 64_129 64_130 64_131 64_132

Shorten start-up time Stop at end of cycle ELG parameter pattern Undo Redo in the editor Extensions for MMC Wizard Count masks, function for bit shifting, a further option bit, selection bit for function GC variant fields with variable decimal place, string processing 64_133 Geometry processor and C950 64_134 Safety: enhanced diagnosis version displays, cycles and def. 64_135 Display of simulation version 64_136 Display of symbol information 64_137 Type of feedforward control 64_138 Drive diagnosis with traffic light 64_139 Compile cycles in series installation and start-up 64_140 Hardkeys editor/program manager 64_141 SW CAD reader for CAD link 64_142 HMI Base and HMI Advanced 64_143 New design 64_144 Retroloadable compile cycles 64_145 64_146 64_147 64_148 64_149

DA: Diagnostic Guide FBW: Description of Functions, Tool Management

IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced IAM/BE1: Supplement Operator Interface

BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced Section 6.5 BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced, IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced, IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced FB1, A2: Various Interface Signals, FB1, D1: Diagnostic Tools BAD: Operator's Guide HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced

CAD: Operator's Guide CAD Reader IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced, IAM, IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded Service displays HMI ADV BAD: Operator's Guide, HMI Advanced Extended display for alarm 27090 FBSI: Description of Functions Synchronized Actions IAM, IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded Safety service pattern IAM IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded, BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded All-channel display of states with BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded symbols in the header Powerline boot screen editable IAM, IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded


AE1/7-39


64_150 Block search when executing from network 64_151 Selective program protection 64_152 Hidden lines in the editor 64_153 Double editor 64_154 Copying programs in the background 64_155 Multiple selection of files 64_156 Editing on the network drive 64_157 Geometry processor and C950: grinding allowances 64_158 System resource display of SRAM, DRAM 64_159 Entry of fits

11.02

IAM, IM2: Start-Up Functions for HMI Embedded IAM, IM4: Start-Up Functions for HMI Advanced BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded IAM: IM2: Start-Up HMI Embedded BEM: Operator's Guide, HMI Embedded

■

AE1/7-40


11.02

Updates/Supplements (AE1) I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index C Changes from SW 4.3 (12.97) to SW 4.4 (05.98) .............................................AE1/1-3 Changes from SW 4.4 (05.98) to SW 5.1 (12.98) .............................................AE1/2-9 Changes from SW 5.1 (12.98) to SW 5.2 (08.99) ...........................................AE1/3-13

Changes from SW 5.2 (08.99) to SW 5.3 (04.00) .............................. AE1/4-19 Changes from SW 5.3 (04.00) to SW 6.1/6.2 (10.00) ........................ AE1/5-23 Changes from SW 6.1 (NC) (10.00) to SW 6.3 (11.01) and from HMI-SW 6.1 to SW 6.2 ......... AE1/6-29 Changes from SW 6.3 (NC) (09.01) to SW 6.4 (11.02) and from SW 6.2 (HMI) to SW 6.3 ............................ AE1/7-33


AE1/I-41

Updates/Supplements (AE1) I Index

AE1/I-42

11.02


11.02

Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1) Contents


Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1)

1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. BE1/1-5 1.1 Objective ............................................................................................................................... BE1/1-6 1.2 Scope of functions ................................................................................................................ BE1/1-7 1.3 Method of operation .............................................................................................................. BE1/1-8 1.4 Supplementary conditions for system use ............................................................................ BE1/1-8 1.5 Syntax rules in this documentation ....................................................................................... BE1/1-9 2 First Steps ............................................................................................................................. BE1/2-13 2.1 Creating configuration files ................................................................................................. BE1/2-14 2.1.1 Principle of the screen form tree..................................................................................... BE1/2-17 2.1.2 Return to standard application........................................................................................ BE1/2-17 2.2 Define access soft key ........................................................................................................ BE1/2-18 2.3 Display selection from the PLC (SW 5.3 and higher) .......................................................... BE1/2-19 2.4 Defining a screen form........................................................................................................ BE1/2-23 2.5 Screen form properties ....................................................................................................... BE1/2-26 2.5.1 Appearance of screen forms / Differences...................................................................... BE1/2-28 2.6 Soft keys ............................................................................................................................. BE1/2-30 2.6.1 Defining a soft key .......................................................................................................... BE1/2-30 2.6.2 RECALL key ................................................................................................................... BE1/2-34 2.6.3 Defining a soft key menu ................................................................................................ BE1/2-34 2.6.4 Methods for screen form-independent soft keys............................................................. BE1/2-35 2.6.5 Functions for screen form-independent soft keys ........................................................... BE1/2-36 2.7 Screen form elements......................................................................................................... BE1/2-39 2.7.1 Displays .......................................................................................................................... BE1/2-56 2.7.2 Screen in screen............................................................................................................. BE1/2-60


BE1/i


11.02

2.8 Arrays ................................................................................................................................. BE1/2-60 2.9 Table element (grid)............................................................................................................ BE1/2-66 3 Syntax for Screen Form Definition ...................................................................................... BE1/3-73 3.1 Screen form methods.......................................................................................................... BE1/3-74 3.1.1 Version management in conjunction with OUTPUT blocks............................................. BE1/3-77 3.2 Screen form functions ......................................................................................................... BE1/3-79 3.2.1 Displaying another screen form or soft key..................................................................... BE1/3-79 3.2.2 Reading/writing PLC/NC variables ................................................................................. BE1/3-82 3.2.3 General functions ........................................................................................................... BE1/3-84 3.2.4 Subroutines .................................................................................................................... BE1/3-87 3.2.5 REFRESH function ......................................................................................................... BE1/3-89 3.2.6 File functions .................................................................................................................. BE1/3-89 3.2.7 NC functions (PI services) .............................................................................................. BE1/3-95 3.2.8 External functions (MMC 103 only)................................................................................. BE1/3-96 3.3 Language resources for syntax of methods ........................................................................ BE1/3-97 3.3.1 Binary, hexadecimal and exponential representation of numbers .................................. BE1/3-97 3.3.2 Operators and functions ................................................................................................. BE1/3-98 3.3.3 Conditions......................................................................................................................BE1/3-100 3.3.4 String handling...............................................................................................................BE1/3-100 3.4 General screen form variables ...........................................................................................BE1/3-104 3.6 Error handling, log book .....................................................................................................BE1/3-108 4 Programming Support System .......................................................................................... BE1/4-109 4.1 Objectives and functional scope of programming support .................................................BE1/4-110 4.2 Creating new screen forms ................................................................................................BE1/4-111 4.2.1 Additional functions........................................................................................................BE1/4-111 5 Configuring OP Hotkeys and PLC Keys............................................................................ BE1/5-115 5.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................BE1/5-117 5.1.1 OP hotkeys ....................................................................................................................BE1/5-118 5.1.2 Assigning functions to the keys .....................................................................................BE1/5-118 5.1.3 Configuring the M key and Menu Select as HK7, HK8 ..................................................BE1/5-125 5.1.4 Extensions in HMI Advanced.........................................................................................BE1/5-125 5.1.5 Action: Special cases in HMI Advanced ........................................................................BE1/5-126 5.1.6 Task, State and Action: Special cases in HMI Embedded .............................................BE1/5-126 5.2 Selecting screens created with "Expanding the Operator Interface" ..................................BE1/5-126 5.2.1 INI files and sections......................................................................................................BE1/5-127 5.2.2 Configuration .................................................................................................................BE1/5-128 5.3 PLC interface .....................................................................................................................BE1/5-129 5.3.1 Interface description ......................................................................................................BE1/5-129 5.3.2 Requests to the PLC program .......................................................................................BE1/5-129 5.4 Extensions for PLC keys ....................................................................................................BE1/5-130 5.5 List of selectable states in HMI Advanced .........................................................................BE1/5-130 5.5.1 Machine operating area .................................................................................................BE1/5-131 5.5.2 Parameters operating area ............................................................................................BE1/5-131

BE1/ii


11.02

5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.6 5.5.7


Program operating area.................................................................................................BE1/5-132 Services operating area.................................................................................................BE1/5-132 Diagnosis operating area...............................................................................................BE1/5-132 Start-up operating area..................................................................................................BE1/5-133 Separate Custom operating area...................................................................................BE1/5-133

5.6 List of selectable states in HMI Embedded ........................................................................BE1/5-134 5.7 List of selectable states in ShopMill ...................................................................................BE1/5-134 5.7.1 Machine Manual ............................................................................................................BE1/5-134 5.7.2 Machine Auto.................................................................................................................BE1/5-135 5.7.3 Program manager..........................................................................................................BE1/5-135 5.7.4 Program.........................................................................................................................BE1/5-135 5.7.5 Messages alarms ..........................................................................................................BE1/5-135 5.7.6 Tools/Work offsets .........................................................................................................BE1/5-135 5.7.7 Run Screen....................................................................................................................BE1/5-136 5.8 List of selectable states in ShopTurn .................................................................................BE1/5-137 5.8.1 Machine Manual ............................................................................................................BE1/5-137 5.8.2 Machine Auto.................................................................................................................BE1/5-138 5.8.3 Program manager..........................................................................................................BE1/5-138 5.8.4 Program.........................................................................................................................BE1/5-138 5.8.5 Messages alarms ..........................................................................................................BE1/5-138 5.8.6 Tools/Work offsets .........................................................................................................BE1/5-139 5.8.7 Run Screen....................................................................................................................BE1/5-139 5.9 Hotkey assignment on the MFII keyboard..........................................................................BE1/5-140 5.10 Examples .........................................................................................................................BE1/5-140 5.11 Configuration overview.....................................................................................................BE1/5-140 5.12 Terms...............................................................................................................................BE1/5-142 6 Separate Custom Operating Area (SW 6.2) ...................................................................... BE1/6-143 6.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................BE1/6-144 6.1.1 Scope of supply .............................................................................................................BE1/6-144 6.1.2 Activation on booting .....................................................................................................BE1/6-144 6.1.3 Activation via keys .........................................................................................................BE1/6-145 6.1.4 Features of the Custom area .........................................................................................BE1/6-146 6.1.5 Integrating the Custom operating area ..........................................................................BE1/6-147 6.2 Structure and functions ......................................................................................................BE1/6-148 6.2.1 Structure of the start-up screen form .............................................................................BE1/6-148 6.3 Behavior when changing operating areas..........................................................................BE1/6-149 7 Configuring and Working Environment ............................................................................ BE1/7-151 7.1 General information about configuring environment ..........................................................BE1/7-152 7.2 MMC 100.2, HMI Embedded, HT6.....................................................................................BE1/7-154 7.2.1 Structure of control file COMMON.COM........................................................................BE1/7-156 7.2.2 Storage of configuration files on NC and Flash File System..........................................BE1/7-165 7.2.3 Procedure for MMC 100.2, HMI Embedded, HT6 ..........................................................BE1/7-167 7.2.4 Testing configured screen forms in the PC/PG environment .........................................BE1/7-169 7.3 MMC 103, HMI Advanced ..................................................................................................BE1/7-170


BE1/iii


7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4

11.02

Control file entries..........................................................................................................BE1/7-170 Archiving configuration files on the hard disk of the MMC 103, HMI..............................BE1/7-170 Archiving alarm text files on the hard disk of the MMC 103, PCU50 .............................BE1/7-170 Testing configured screen forms in the PC/PG environment .........................................BE1/7-171

7.4 HMI Embedded WIN32 and HMI Advanced together on one hardware platform ...............BE1/7-172 7.4.1 General information about search functions ..................................................................BE1/7-172 7.4.2 Search function for common.com ..................................................................................BE1/7-174 7.4.3 Search functions for images ..........................................................................................BE1/7-175 7.5 Special features of the HT6................................................................................................BE1/7-177 8 Terms, Tables, Lists, Examples......................................................................................... BE1/8-179 8.1 Terms.................................................................................................................................BE1/8-180 8.2 Color table .........................................................................................................................BE1/8-183 8.3 List of accessible system variables ....................................................................................BE1/8-188 8.4 List of PI services...............................................................................................................BE1/8-199 8.5 Examples ...........................................................................................................................BE1/8-203 I Index ...................................................................................................................................... BE1/I-207 I.1 Subject index ...................................................................................................................... BE1/I-207

BE1/iv


11.02

Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1) 1 Introduction

1

1 Introduction

1.1 Objective .....................................................................................BE1/1-6 1.2 Scope of functions ......................................................................BE1/1-7 1.3 Method of operation ....................................................................BE1/1-8 1.4 Supplementary conditions for system use..................................BE1/1-8 1.5 Syntax rules in this documentation .............................................BE1/1-9


BE1/1-5


11.02

Note SW – version 6 redefines the designations for the operating software packages running on PCU 20, PCU 50 and PC with WinNT: HMI Embedded runs on PCU 20 with: OP 010 OP 010C OP 010S OP 0012 OP 015 and as HMI Embedded WIN32 on: PCU 50 and PC with WIN NT as well as HMI Advanced on: PCU 50 PC with WinNT HMI Embedded WIN32 and HMI Advanced can be combined on one hardware platform. More detailed information can be found in Chapter 7. The following synonyms apply in this reference manual: MMC 100.2 MMC 103

for HMI Embedded, HMI Embedded WIN32 for HMI Advanced

1.1 Objective "Expanding the Operator Interface" (Wizard) is implemented with an interpreter on MMC/HT6 and configuring files that contain the description of the user interfaces. The tools package for "Expanding the Operator Interface" enables you to create operator interfaces which display functional expansions designed by the machine manufacturer or end user, or simply to implement your own screen form layout. Preconfigured interfaces supplied by Siemens or the machine manufacturer can be modified or replaced. The interpreter is available in the same form in MMC100.2/HT6, ShopMill and ManualTurn as well as MMC103. In SW 6 and higher, the functions are available in HMI Embedded (equivalent to MMC 100.2) and HMI Advanced (equivalent to MMC103). The terms HMI ... are only used in combination with the functions introduced in SW 6 and higher. Parts programs can be edited on user-created operator interfaces.

BE1/1-6


11.02


Screen forms can be created directly on the control system. An additional graphics tool is needed to produce graphics/display images. For the MMC100.2/HT6 you still need the application disk and the PaintShopPro tool (http://www.jasc.com). The tool box supplied contains configuring examples for new screen forms. You can also use these examples as a template for creating your own forms.

1.2 Scope of functions 1. Open screen forms containing the following elements:

2.

3.

4. 5.

6.

7. 8.

• Soft keys • Variables, tables • Texts and Help texts • Graphics and Help displays Initiate operations in response to the following actions: • Open a screen form • Input values (variables) • Select a soft key • Exit a screen form Restructure screen forms dynamically: • Edit and delete soft keys • Define and design variable fields • Insert, exchange and delete display texts (language-dependent and independent) • Insert, exchange and delete graphics Apply protection levels according to user classes Variables • Read (NC, PLC and user variables) • Write (NC, PLC and user variables) • Combine with mathematical, comparison or logic operators Execute functions: • Subroutines • File functions • PI Services • External functions (MMC 103) Data exchange between screen forms The screen form can be invoked: • by activating (entry) soft keys • via selection from the PLC (from SW 5.3)

Expanding the Operator Interface is configured by ASCII files which can be stored either on the NC or on the MMC.


BE1/1-7


11.02

Note The programming support functions described in Chapter 4 and the operator interfaces for Siemens cycles in software version 5 and higher have been created with the system tools for expanding the operator interface. As a result, they can be modified as required by the machine manufacturer or end user within the scope described in this chapter.

1.3 Method of operation The system interprets files which contain the ASCII descriptions for • the layout of operator screen forms, • functions assigned to soft keys and • texts and images to be displayed. These configuring files which contain the description of the operator interface as a whole are created using the ASCII Editor. The syntax that must be applied in creating these files is described in the following sections.

1.4 Supplementary conditions for system use • It is only possible to switch between screen forms within one MMC operating area. • User, setting and machine data are initialized on request on the MMC 103. • User variables may not have the same names as system or PLC variables. • The screen forms activated by the PLC form a separate operating area for the MMC 103 (similar to measuring cycle displays).

Additionally with MMC 100.2/HT6: Size of configuring files The entire memory space for all configuring files including texts amounts to 256KB, of which approx. 128KB are occupied by the system; therefore, 128KB remain for the user. On the PCU 20 256 KB are available to the user.

Number of configuring files The maximum number of configuring files is 10.

BE1/1-8


11.02


Size of display files The total size of the file with packed screen forms CST.ARJ is 150KB; 94KB are occupied by the system.

Functionality The following functions are not available: Search functions: - SB (search backwards) - SF (search forwards)

File names All file names must follow DOS conventions (xxxxxxxx.eee).

Displays activated from the PLC With the MMC 100.2/HT6 it is not possible to select/deselect displays via a separate operating area.

1.5 Syntax rules in this documentation Vocabulary words Vocabulary words are interpreted as part of the syntax in the configuring file. Vocabulary words are typed in bold. Parameters

Parameters can be altered and are replaced by other words/symbols in the configuring file. Parameters are typed in italics.

Par.xy = value

Parameters with the corresponding code (ID parameters) can be altered when the system is running. Codes are typed in bold.

Note When an ID parameter is modified during operation, it is not necessary to specify the parameter if it is unambiguous: xy = value

[optional syntax]

Optional syntax can, but need not, be configured. Optional syntax is enclosed in square parentheses.

Note If the square parentheses are typed in bold ([...]), then the entry is not optional syntax, but square parentheses which form part of the syntax, i.e. square parentheses in bold must be configured.


BE1/1-9


11.02

Example Configuring examples are typed in a different font. ;Comment

Comments

• in the configuring examples in this documentation and • as syntax elements in the configuring files are preceded in each case by a semicolon (;). Positional Positional parameters are parameters that are defined by their parameters position. The slash "/" separates groups of parameters. A parameter group comprises one or several single parameters. The character "," separates individual parameters in the parameter group. Undefined parameter groups are replaced by a single character "/" as the place holder. Undefined single parameters are replaced by a single character "," as the place holder. Place holders "," are omitted after the last defined single parameter in a parameter group. //M(Identifier/[Header]/[Graphic]/[Dimension]/[System or user variable]/[Graphic position]/[Attributes]) //M(Form1/"CYC83"/"c83.bmp"/,,300,200//10) ;Identifier: Form1 ;Header: CYC83 ;Graphic: c83.bmp ;Dimension: Distance from left and top zero, width 300, height 200 ;System or user variables: None ;Graphic position: 10 ;Attributes: None Note All possible values which can be assumed by a parameter are listed for some positional parameters. Only one of the specified values can be assigned. Identifier=(Text[,Status][,Access level]) with status se0 se1 se2 se3 HS2=("thread",se1)

If alternative parameters are possible, the separator | is placed between the alternatives in the syntax description.

BE1/1-10


11.02


Note The positions and size of image parameters are specified in pixels with reference to standard displays with 640x480 pixels. The reference point for positions is the top left corner of the main section of the screen form. The display of the HT6 has a resolution of 320x240. The values are understood 1:1, i.e. they are not converted. $8xxxx

Call a text from a separate text file. Texts used in screenforms can be specified explicitly in configuring files or, particularly in cases where screenforms are to be displayed in different languages, stored separately in text files. Language-dependent texts can be used for: • • • •

Soft key labels Headings Help texts Any other texts

The screenforms refer to texts in different text files via text identification numbers (number after the $ character). Text files are usually languagedependent. Entries in control files determine which text files must be activated. The structure of the configuring environment in Chapter 5 describes how selected text files can be activated for target systems MMC 100.2/HT6 and MMC 103. The syntax for creating screen form texts in separate files is also to be found in Chapter 5. "text"

text is text defined by the user which can be entered directly as such in the configuring file.

Notations $8xxxx and "text" can be used as alternatives. Note Commands which have not yet been implemented are specified at a number of places in this document. Please refer to the Index for the corresponding command with page reference. n


BE1/1-11


11.02

Notes

BE1/1-12


11.02

Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1) 2 First Steps

2

2 First Steps

2.1 Creating configuration files .......................................................BE1/2-14 2.1.1 Principle of the screen form tree............................................BE1/2-17 2.1.2 Return to standard application...............................................BE1/2-17 2.2 Define access soft key..............................................................BE1/2-18 2.3 Display selection from the PLC (SW 5.3 and higher) ...............BE1/2-19 2.4 Defining a screen form..............................................................BE1/2-23 2.5 Screen form properties .............................................................BE1/2-26 2.5.1 Appearance of screen forms / Differences ............................BE1/2-28 2.6 Soft keys ...................................................................................BE1/2-30 2.6.1 Defining a soft key .................................................................BE1/2-30 2.6.2 RECALL key ..........................................................................BE1/2-34 2.6.3 Defining a soft key menu .......................................................BE1/2-34 2.6.4 Methods for screen form-independent soft keys ...................BE1/2-35 2.6.5 Functions for screen form-independent soft keys .................BE1/2-36 2.7 Screen form elements...............................................................BE1/2-39 2.7.1 Displays .................................................................................BE1/2-56 2.7.2 Screen in screen....................................................................BE1/2-60 2.8 Arrays........................................................................................BE1/2-60 2.9 Table element (grid)...................................................................BE1/2-66


BE1/2-13


11.02

2.1 Creating configuration files Editor You can use an ASCII editor to configure your own user interfaces.

Files The defining data for new operator interfaces are stored in configuration files. These files are automatically interpreted and displayed as screen forms. Configuration files are not stored in the software supplied and must be set up by the user.

Access Every application uses permanent (MMC100.2, HT6, ShopMill, ManualTurn) or preassigned (MMC 103) access soft keys which can be selected to open newly configured screen forms. Additional access soft keys can be configured on the MMC 103.

BE1/2-14


11.02


Table 2-1

Interrelation start soft key/configuration file (default setting)

Soft key

Configuration File

MMC 100.2/103 Main screen Machine JOG, horizontal soft key 1

MA_JOG.COM

Main screen Machine MDA, horizontal soft key 1

MA_MDA.COM

Main screen Machine Automatic, horizontal soft key 2

MA_AUTO.COM

Main screen Parameters, horizontal soft key 7

PARAM.COM

Main screen Programming, horizontal soft key 8

PROG.COM

Main screen Services, horizontal soft key 7

SERVICE.COM

Main screen Diagnosis, horizontal soft key 7

DIAG.COM

Main screen Start-up, horizontal soft key 7

STARTUP.COM

Main screen Editor, horizontal soft keys 2 to 5 (assigned)

AEDITOR.COM

Main screen Editor, horizontal soft key 6 (unassigned)

AEDITOR.COM

ShopMill Main screen Machine Auto, horizontal soft key 6

SM_AUTO.COM

Main screen Program, Drilling vertical soft key 6 Milling vertical soft key 6 Miscellaneous vertical soft key 4

SM_PROG.COM

Main screen Messages/Alarms, horizontal soft keys 7 and 8

SM_DIAG.COM

Main screen Tools/Work Offsets, horizontal soft key 7

SM_PARAM.COM

ManualTurn Soft key Operating Area Switchover, horizontal soft keys 2 to 7

MAN_TURN.COM


BE1/2-15


11.02

HT6 Soft key

Configuration File

Main screen Machine JOG, horizontal soft key 1

H_MA_JOG.COM

Main screen Machine MDA, horizontal soft key 1

H_MA_MDA.COM

Main screen Machine Automatic, horizontal soft key 2

H_MA_AUT.COM


H_PARAM.COM


H_PARAM.COM

Main screen Programming, horizontal soft key 8

H_PROG.COM

Main screen Services, horizontal soft key 7

H_SERVIC.COM

Main screen Start-up, horizontal soft key 7

H_STRTUP.COM

Main screen editor, horizontal soft keys 2–3

H_EDITOR.COM

Main screen correction editor, horizontal soft keys 2–4

H_C_EDIT.COM

User keys HT6 User key U1

H_U1.COM

User key U2

H_U2.COM

User key U3

H_U3.COM

User key U4

H_U4.COM

User key U5

H_U5.COM

User key U6

H_U6.COM

User key U7

H_U7.COM

User key U8

H_U8.COM

Special key S1

H_S1.COM

Special key S2

H_S2.COM

TEACH key

H_TEACH.COM

MMC 100.2/HT6 On the MMC 100.2, HT6, ShopMill and ManualTurn, the system first seeks to access the configuration files in the user cycle directory (NC memory), then in the standard cycle directory and finally in a special DOS directory (Flash File System).

BE1/2-16


11.02


The Flash File System is the preferable option for performance-related reasons. File COMMON.COM in the standard cycle directory/user cycle directory of the MMC 100.2 HT6 includes a setting specifying that only the files in the Flash File System should be accessed. Further information about setting the configuring and operational environments can be found in Chapter 5.

MMC 103 On the MMC 103, the system first seeks to access the configuration files in the user cycles directory and then the standard cycles directory.

2.1.1

Principle of the screen form tree Several interlinked screen forms create a screen form tree. A link exists if you can switch from one screen form into another. You can use the newly defined horizontal/vertical soft keys in your form to call the preceding or any other screen form. Access softkey

A screen form tree can be created behind each access soft key.

2.1.2

Return to standard application There are two different ways to close the new user interface and return to the standard application.


BE1/2-17


11.02

You can use the "RECALL" to close the new user interfaces if you have not configured this key for any other task. (See also Subsection 2.6.2 RECALL key.)

EXIT function See Subsections 2.6.5 Functions for screen form-independent soft keys and 3.2.1 Displaying another screen form or soft key.

2.2 Define access soft key The access soft key definition must appear before the screen form description in each configuration file. The basic structure of the access soft key definition block is as follows Start identifier of access soft key

//S(Start)

Method LM or LS function End of method

HS1=... ;horiz. SK 1 PRESS(HS1) LM... END_PRESS

End identifier of access soft key

//END

Define access soft key

//S (Start) ; Start identifier of access soft key ... //END ; End identifier The soft key is defined in the start soft key description block (see Subsection 2.6.1 Defining a Soft key) and the function "Unhide screen form" or "Unhide soft key bar" is assigned in a method. (see Subsection 2.6.4 Methods for form-independent soft keys and 2.6.5 Functions for form-independent soft keys). If the access soft key definition is designated as a comment (semicolon (;) at beginning of line) or the configuration file removed, the access soft key will not function. //S(Start) ;Start identifier HS6=("1st form") ;Label horizontal soft key 6 with "1st form" PRESS(HS6) ;PRESS method for horiz. SK 6 LM("Form1") ;Load Form 1 function END_PRESS ;End of PRESS method //END ;End identifier of access SK HS6

BE1/2-18


11.02


MMC 100.2/HT6 Note The information required to implement a soft key is to be found in Subsection 5.2.1, keyword "Access soft keys".

2.3 Display selection from the PLC (SW 5.3 and higher) There is an interface between the PLC and the MMC/HT6 to select the displays. These PLC displays offer the same means of display and functions as for the displays selected via the soft keys.

Interface description The interface contains: • The display number • Control bits from the PLC to the MMC • Control bits from the MMC to the PLC As each NCU can be addressed by up to two MMCs/HT6s at the same time in systems with multiple operator panel fronts and NCUs, this interface can exist in duplicate. References: /FB/, B3 "Several Operator Panel Fronts and NCUs" The interface is located in the operator panel front interface (DB19). The interface requires a total of 8 bytes in DB19, 4 bytes for each MMC/HT6.

Location and structure of the interface The interface between the MMC/HT6 and the PLC uses the following data: MMC 1: DB19.DBW28: DB19.DBB30: DB19.DBB31:

Display number PLC control bits à MMC, PLC byte MMC control bits à PLC , MMC byte

MMC 2: DB19.DBW78: DB19.DBB80: DB19.DBB81:

Display number Control bits PLC à MMC, PLC byte Control bits MMC à PLC, MMC byte

PLC byte: Bit0 Display selection Bit1 Display deselection


BE1/2-19


MMC byte: Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit7

11.02

Display selection/deselection accepted Display is selected/deselected Display is selected Display is deselected Error, display selection not possible Inactive bit

Two bytes are used for the display number to be transferred by the PLC, one byte respectively (PLC byte and MMC byte) for coordinating the display selection.

Interface use Table 2-2

DB 19 extract, first MMC interface

PLC à MMC DBW 28

Deselect MMC à PLC

Select

Deselect

Select/deselect accepted

1 (3) 0 (6)

1 (2)

Display is being selected

0 (3)

0 (3)

Display number (1)

Bit

DBB 30

0

Display selection

1

Select

Display deselection

DBB 31 1 (2) 0 (4) 1 (1) 0 (4)

0 (3)

1 (5)

" " deselected 2

Display is selected

0 (3)

Display is deselected

0 (3)

4

Error, display selection not possible

0

5

-

6

-

7

Inactive

3

0 (3)

1 (7) 0 (2) 1 (3) 0 (2)

0

The interface is operated by the PLC OEM program with the following functions:

BE1/2-20


11.02


Display selection The relations with the individual steps are shown in the above table by the numbers in brackets (step numbers). 1. The PLC enters the display number in the number word. 2. The PLC sets bit0 in the PLC byte for display selection, if bit0 and bit7 are set to zero in the MMC byte. 3. The MMC/HT6 acknowledges to the PLC that it has accepted the display selection by setting bit0 in the MMC byte. At the same time bit3 and bit4 are written with zero in the MMC byte. 4. The PLC resets bit0 in the PLC byte. 5. The MMC/HT6 acknowledges to the PLC that the interpreter has started by setting bit1 in the MMC byte. 6. The MMC resets bit0 in the MMC/HT6 byte. 7. Bit2 is set in the MMC byte if the corresponding display is overlaid.

Display deselection 1. The PLC sets bit1 for display deselection in the PLC byte if bit1 and bit2 are set in the MMC byte and bit7 is reset. 2. The MMC/HT6 acknowledges to the PLC that it has accepted display deselection by setting bit0 in the MMC byte. At the same time bit3 and bit4 are written with zero in the MMC byte. 3. The MMC/HT6 acknowledges the display deselection to the PLC by setting bit3 and resetting bit0, bit1 and bit2 in the MMC byte if the interpreter is terminated. 4. The PLC resets bit1 in the PLC byte. After display deselection by the PLC or the EXIT command, the MMC/HT6 switches back to the last selected MMC display.


BE1/2-21


11.02

Error on display selection Bit4 is set in the MMC byte if the interpreter has not responded after 20 seconds or if the required display cannot be opened. The PLC states of the MMCs which do not support PLC display selection are shown via bit7 in the MMC byte; e.g. the MMC 100.2 for switchover between standard and ShopMill interface.

Operating areas With the MMC 103, the displays are shown in a separate operating area similar to the measuring cycle displays. This operating area can be selected manually by means of the sixth soft key (PLC displays) on the second operating area bar. If no PLC display is active when the area is selected, the text "Currently no PLC display active" is displayed in the header. The PLC is informed when the area is selected/deselected manually via bit2 of the MMC byte. It is also possible to change to other operating areas via the MMC 103's operating area after a display has been selected by the PLC. With the MMC 100.2/HT6, it is not possible to manually select/deselect displays selected by the PLC via an operating area. The PLC display remains in the foreground even after operating area change has occurred.

Configuration of PLC displays The interface is activated by means of the section [PLC_SELECT] in the Common.com file during MMC boot. The Common.com file resides on the NC and is loaded from there during MMC boot. MMC/HT6 searches the directories for the Common.com file in the following sequence: • Use cycle directory (CUS) • Standard cycle directory (CST) • Comment directory (COM) The first file found is evaluated. Display numbers are assigned to the configured displays in the Common.com file in the section [PLC_SELECT]. In general, the syntax of an assignment line is: PCi = display name, file ; comment i Number of the display in the interface Display name Display (screen form) identifier File File in which the display is configured Example: [PLC_SELECT] ; Fixed section introduction PC1= CYCLE82, drilling.com ; assignment line PC2= CYCLE90, millthre.com PC3=...etc.

BE1/2-22


11.02


2.4 Defining a screen form A screen form is part of an operator interface consisting of a display line, form elements and/or graphic, dialog line and 8 horizontal and 8 vertical soft keys. Display line with headline and long text

Header

Form element 8 vertical softkeys Graphic

Dialog line

8 horizontal softkeys

The definition of a screen form (form definition block) is basically structured as follows: Start identifier of form

//M...

Variables

Methods Actions End of method

DEF Var1=... ... HS1=... ... PRESS(HS1) LM... END_PRESS

End identifier of form

//END

Soft keys

Within the screen form definition block, various variables that appear as form elements in the screen form, as well as horizontal and vertical soft keys, are defined first. Different types of actions are then configured in methods. The following rules must be observed when configuring screen forms: • Texts/strings, path names and system or user variables must always be enclosed in quotation marks (" ... "). • The Identifier parameter must be unique and always comprises a minimum of 2 and maximum of 32 characters. The first two characters must be two letters or an underscore and a letter (a-z, A-Z, _).


BE1/2-23


11.02

• The system does not distinguish between upper and lower case type. • Insertion of a space before or after the equals sign is optional. • If a command is configured only with a file name, then the file search strategy is as follows: Table 2-3

Entry

Search in ...

No file name, no path name

COM file of current screen form

File name

User cycles directory Standard cycles directory (including Flash File System on MMC 100.2)

File name and path name

Specified path

File name and NC path name

The system looks for the COM file on the NC, copies it to the MMC and reads it there.

Example A new screen form is called via access soft key "Example" from the Parameters operating area. //S(Start) HS7=("Example",se1, ac7) PRESS(HS7) LM("Form1") END_PRESS //END //M(Form1/"Cycles") HS1=("") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("") VS8=("") ... ; Methods //END

BE1/2-24


11.02



BE1/2-25


11.02

2.5 Screen form properties Display line with headline

Header

Main body of screen form Graphic

The properties of the screen form are defined in the start identifier line of the form screen: //M(Identifier/[Header]/[Graphic]/[Dimension]/[System or user variable]/[Graphic position]/[Attributes]) with: Identifier Name of screen form Header Header of screen form as text or text call (e.g. $85011) from a language-dependent text file (see Section 5.1 General information about configuring environment). Graph Graphic file (with path) in quotation marks. See also Subsection 2.7.1 Displays. Dimension Position and size of main body of form in pixels (distance from left, distance from top, width, height) in relation to top, left-hand corner of screen. The measurements are separated by commas. System or System or user variable to which the current cursor user variable position is assigned. The cursor position can be transferred to the NC or PLC via the system or user variable. The first variable has index 1. The order is the same as the order in which the variables were configured. Graphic position Position of graphic (distance from left, distance from top) in pixels in relation to top, left-hand corner of main body of screen form. The minimum distance from the top is 18 pixels. The measurements are separated by commas. Attributes

BE1/2-26

Column alignment CMx (Column Mode). CM0: Columns are split separately for each line.


11.02


CM1:

The column splitting on the line with the most columns applies to all lines. Default setting: CM0 //M(Form1/"CYCLE83"/"c83.bmp"/,,300,200/"$R[2]"/10,20/CM1) The properties Header, Graphic and System or User Variable can be changed in the methods when the application is running: Hd = Header Hlp = Graphic Var = System or user variable For explanation of parameters, see above. Hd = "CYCLE83 changed" Hlp = "c83_b.bmp" Var = $R[19] The screen property System can be read during runtime: Values: 0 HMI_Embedded available 1 HMI_Advanced available

Example //S(Start) HS7=("Example",se1, ac7) PRESS(HS7) LM("Form1") END_PRESS //END //M(Form1/"Example 2 : Insert graphic"/"MST.BMP") HS1=("") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("") VS8=("") ... //END


BE1/2-27


11.02

Display for example 2: overlay graphics

2.5.1

Appearance of screen forms / Differences If HMI Advanced is installed together with ShopMill on the same operator panel front, each system has a different font type. HMI Advanced has proportional fonts, whereas JobShop products and HMI Embedded use a fixed font. If the "Expanding the Operator Interface" system is used on HMI Embedded and HMI Advanced, screen forms that are defined identically will appear differently by default.

BE1/2-28


11.02


Figure 2-1

HMI Embedded screen

Below you can see how, despite being configured identically, the same screen appears differently under HMI Advanced.

Figure 2-2

HMI Advanced screen


BE1/2-29


11.02

Setting for the same screen appearance The common display mode possible for the systems referred to is fixed font. The following setting can be applied in HMI Advanced to produce the same screen form appearance: A setting must be made in file wizard.ini to effect the switch to fixed font. [FONT] FixedFont=1 The text will be displayed in the current language in fixed font format. This condition does not apply to the soft key labels. Unlike the HMI Embedded input field, the HMI Advanced input field contains an input mode pictogram. This means that the HMI Advanced input is smaller than the HMI Embedded field. As you can see above, the combination of short text, graphic text, input field and unit text is approximately the same length and contains the same information in both screens. However, individual fields can be positioned differently in the two HMI versions depending on the length of the text to be displayed and the text field within which it will be contained. In order for a common configuration file to be used for both versions, the SYSTEM screen form property was created with HMI SW 6.1. See 2.5 Screen form properties. The runtime environment can be scanned in the SYSTEM screen form property. This enables one configuration to be used for both target systems.

2.6 Soft keys The names of the soft keys are predefined. HSx x 1–8, Horizontal soft keys 1 to 8 VSy y 1–8, Vertical soft keys 1 to 8 (not for HT6) Not all soft keys need to be assigned. The names of hotkeys KH are predefined. UKz z 1–8 User keys 1 to 8 (HT6 only) SK1, SK2 Special keys 1 and 2 (HT6 only) TEACH TEACH key (HT6 only)

2.6.1

Defining a soft key Properties are assigned to soft keys in the soft key definition line: SK = (Text[, Status][, Access level]) or HK = ("", access level) with: SK soft key, e.g. HS1 to HS8, VS1 to VS8 (not for HT6) HK hotkey UK1 to UK8, SK1, SK2 and TEACH (HT6 only) Text Labeling of soft keys as described in 1.5 For creation of texts, see also Section 5.1 Display: See Subsection 2.7.1 Displays. Instead of a text, a display file name is specified in the following form:

BE1/2-30


11.02


"\\my_pic.bmp" or via a separate text file $85199 with the following text in the (language-dependent) text file: E.g. 85100 0 0 "\\c:\pic\my_pic.bmp". An image to be displayed on a soft key may be 80 * 34 pixels in size. Note A carriage return in the soft key designation is created with %n. A maximum of 2 lines of 10 characters are available in HMI Advanced and 2 lines of 9 characters in HMI Embedded. Two lines of 6 characters each are available to the HT6.

Status se2 se3

se1 visible cannot be operated (hidden) unhidden

Default setting: se1 Access level Access level: ac0 ... ac7 For meaning, see Table 2-4. Default setting: AC7 VS7=("Cancel", se3, ac1) ;define soft key VS7 and assign the designation "Cancel", the status "unhidden" and protection level 1. VS8=("OK", se2, ac6) ;Define soft key VS8 and assign label "OK", status "Inoperative" and protection level 6 The properties Text, Status and Access Level can be changed in the methods when the application is running. SK.st = Text SK.se = Status SK.ac = Access level with: Status 1 unhidden 2 cannot be operated (hidden) 3 unhidden (soft key operated last) Access level 0 ... 7 For meaning, see Table 2-4. See above for explanation of parameters. HS1.st = "Abort" ;Assign label "Abort" to soft key HS1 HS2.se = 2 ;Assign status "Inoperative" to soft key HS2 HS2.ac = 4 ;Assign protection level 4 (level for programmers and machine setters) to soft key HS2


BE1/2-31


11.02

Access level The meanings of the different protection levels are as follows: Table 2-4

Protection level

Protected by

Area

ac0

Password

Siemens

ac1

Password

Machine manufacturer

ac2

Password

Servicing personnel

ac3

Password

User

ac4

Keyswitch position 3

Programmer, machine setter

ac5


Qualified operator

ac6


Trained operator

ac7


Semi-skilled operator

ac0 is the highest protection level and ac7 the lowest. The operator can only access information on the level for which he is authorized and all lower levels.

BE1/2-32


11.02


Example //S(Start) HS7=("Example",se1,ac7) PRESS(HS7) LM("Form3") END_PRESS //END //M(Form3/"Example 3 : Graphic and soft keys"/"MST.BMP") HS1=("") HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("") VS8=("OK",SE1, AC7) PRESS(VS8) EXIT END_PRESS //END


BE1/2-33


11.02

Display for example 3: Graphic and soft key

2.6.2

RECALL key

In addition to the horizontal and vertical soft keys, a RECALL key is also available. In contrast to the soft keys, the RECALL key does not need to be defined. The properties Status and Access Level can be assigned to it during operation (see Subsection 2.6.1 Defining a soft key). PRESS(RECALL) RECALL.ac = 1 LM("Form5") END_PRESS If you do not assign any action (function, calculation of variables, property changes) to RECALL, you can use it to exit newly configured operator interfaces and return to the standard application.

2.6.3

Defining a soft key menu The term soft key menu is used to refer to all the horizontal and vertical soft keys displayed in a form. In addition to the existing soft key menus, it is possible to define other menus which partially or completely overwrite the existing menus. The definition of a soft key menu (soft key menu definition block) is basically structured as follows:

BE1/2-34


11.02


Start identifier of soft key menu

//S...

Define soft keys

HSx=...

Methods Actions End of method

PRESS(HSx) LM... END_PRESS

End identifier of soft key menu

//END

//S (Identifier) ... //END with: Identifier

;Start identifier of soft key menu ;End identifier of soft key menu

Name of soft key menu

//S(Menu1) ;Start identifier of soft key menu HS1=("OK",ac6,se0) ;Definition of 1st horizontal soft key, see soft key properties HS2=("Exit") HS3=("\\bild1.bmp") ;Display (symbol) on soft key VS2=("Sub-form") VS3=($85011, ac7, se2) PRESS(HS1) ;Start identifier of method HS1.st="Calculate" ;Change soft key label ... END_PRESS ;End identifier of method PRESS(RECALL) ;Start identifier of method LM("Form21") ;Load Form function END_PRESS ;End identifier of method //END ;End identifier of soft key

2.6.4

Methods for screen form-independent soft keys Form-independent soft keys are keys that are not called from a screen form, i.e. they are access soft keys and soft key menus which are configured before the first new screen form. Certain functions can be initiated via screen form-independent soft keys. These functions are configured in the following method.

PRESS method The PRESS method is executed when the corresponding soft key is pressed. PRESS(Identifier) ... END_PRESS


BE1/2-35


11.02

with: Identifier Name of soft key: HS1-HS8, VS1-VS8 or RECALL HS1 = ("other soft key bar") HS2 = ("no function") PRESS (HS1) LS("Menu1") ;Load a new soft key menu END_PRESS PRESS (HS2) ;Empty PRESS method END_PRESS

2.6.5

Functions for screen form-independent soft keys

LM function The LM function can be used to load another screen form. LM("Identifier"[,"File"]) with: Identifier File

Name of form Path name (MMC file system or NC file system) of configuration file Default setting: Current configuration file

PRESS(HS1) LM("FORM2",”C:\CFI\CFI.COM”) END_PRESS

LS function The LS function can be used to display another soft key menu. LS("Identifier"[, "File"][, Merge]) with: Identifier File

Merge

Name of soft key menu Path name (MMC file system or NC file system) of configuration file Default setting: Current configuration file 0:

All existing soft keys are cleared, newly configured soft keys are entered

1:

Merge, i.e. only the newly configured soft keys overwrite the existing soft keys, any other soft keys remain displayed with their existing functionality and text Default setting: 1

BE1/2-36


11.02


Note Even MMC, ShopMill or ManualTurn standard soft keys can be retained with their existing functionality.

PRESS(HS4) LS("bar2") END_PRESS

; "Bar2" will overwrite the existing list ; the system will search for "Bar2" in ; the current configuration file: ; All existing soft keys are ; deleted/overwritten.

Note As long as the interpreter has not displayed a screen form, i.e. no LM function has yet been processed, only one LS or one LM command, but no other action, can be configured in the PRESS methods of the definition blocks for the access soft key and soft key menus.

EXIT function You can use the EXIT function to leave the newly configured operator interfaces and return to the standard application. EXIT PRESS(HS1) EXIT END_PRESS

EXITLS function You can use the EXITLS function to exit the current operator interfaces and load a defined soft key menu.


BE1/2-37


11.02

EXITLS("soft key menu"[, "path name"][, action]) with: Soft key menu Path name Action

Name of the soft key menu to be loaded Directory path of soft key menu to be loaded Instruction to a soft key in the new menu (function not available in SW 5.2)

PRESS(HS1) EXITLS( "Menu1", "COM.DIR\AEDITOR.COM" ) END_PRESS

EXE function The EXE function can be used on the MMC 103 to call a program created as an application with the OEM package of the MMC 103 or to start the Free Contour Programming application. On the MMC 100.2, EXE can only be used to start the Free Contour Programming application. EXE (Program name)

; MMC 103

or

EXE (GPROC)

; MMC 100.2

with: Program name

Name of program to be executed

Note The EXE function GPROC is only available within the parts program editor. Note (MMC103) In order to start EXE, the task index of the EXE function must be entered under [CHILDS] in the application INI file as it is stored in the REGIE.INI file (see OEM documentation).

PRESS(VS3) EXE(GPROC)

; Start GPROC.EXE (Free ; Contour Programming)

END_PRESS

BE1/2-38


11.02


2.7 Screen form elements Short text

Graphics text Input/output fields

Unit text

Display line with long text Main body of the form

Form element

Screen form elements fill lines in the main body of the form. One or several screen form elements can be defined in each line (see also "Multi-column screen forms"). The term "screen form element" refers to the visible part of a variable, i.e. short text, graphics text, input/output field (I/O field) and unit text. All variables are valid only in the active screen form. Properties are assigned to a variable when it is defined:


BE1/2-39


11.02

Defining variables DEF Identifier =

1

(Variable type 2

/[Limit values or toggle field or table identifier] 3

/[Default selection] 4

/[Texts(long text, short text|display, graphic text, unit text)] 5

/[Attributes] 6

/[Help display] 7

/[System or user variable] 8

/[Position short text] 9

/[Position I/O field (left, top, width, height)] 10

/[Colors] 11

/[Help]*) *

MMC 103 only

Note The small figures above "(" and "/" are only an aid to assigning the parameter groups. They are not part of the syntax. The single parameters to be separated by commas are enclosed in round brackets.

with: Identifier Name of variable Variable type Variable type: R[x] Real (+ digit for decimal places) I Integer see also below "Integer extensions". S[x] String (+ digits for string length) C Single character B Bool V Variant (see also "Variable type Variant") The variable type must be specified. Limit values

BE1/2-40

Limit values for variables: Limit value MIN, limit value MAX The limit values are separated by commas. Limit values can be specified for the types I, C and R either decimally or as a character in the form "A", "F".


11.02


The limit values parameter works in conjunction with the Limit attribute (see Attributes, Limit). Default setting: Empty or Toggle field

Toggle field: List with predefined entries in the I/O field. The list is preceded by a *, the entries are separated by commas. A value can be assigned to the entries (see "Examples"). The entry for the limit value is interpreted as a list in toggle fields. If only an * is entered, a variable toggle field is generated (see "Variable toggle fields"). Default setting: No pre-assignment

or Table identifier

Identifier for a table containing NCK/PLC values of the same type, which can be addressed via a channel block. The table identifier is differentiated from limit values or toggle fields by the addition of a % sign in front of it. Other table element (grid) features are described in 2.9. The file containing the table description can be specified by adding a comma after the identifier and then inserting the name of the file.

Defaults

Variable defaults If no default is configured and if no system or user variable is assigned to the variable (see System or User Variable property), the first element of the toggle field is assigned. If no toggle field is defined, no value is pre-assigned to the variable, i.e. it is set to status "not calculated". Default setting: No pre-assignment See also "Pre-assignment" table.

Texts

Texts: Long text, short text, graphics text, unit text with: Long text: Text in display line Short text: Name of the screen form element Graphics text: Text refers to terms in graphic. Unit text: Unit of the screen form element (see graphic above) See also Sections 1.5 and 5.1. The sequence is predefined. Default setting: Empty

With SW 6 and higher, an image can be displayed instead of the short text.


BE1/2-41


Attributes

11.02

Attributes influence the following properties: - Input mode - Access level - Alignment of short text - Font size - Treatment of limit values

Each component can be specified. Input mode

(representation mode applies to the whole line): wr0 hidden wr1 read (line is grayed out) wr2 write wr3 wr1 with focus Default setting: wr2

Access level Empty Can always be written ac0...ac7 Protection levels (see Section 2.6.1 Defining a soft key) If the access level is not high enough, the line is grayed out. Default setting: ac7 Short text alignment al0 left-justified al1 right-justified al2 centered Default setting: al0 Font size fs1 Standard font size (8 Pt) fs2 Double font size Default setting: fs1 The line spacing is predefined. With the standard type size, 16 lines fit in onescreen form. Graphics and unit text can only be configured in the standard type size. Treatment of limit values The Limit attribute can be used to check the value of the variable for violation of the specified Min and Max limit values. li0 No limit check li1 Check against Min li2 Check against Max li3 Check against Min and Max Default setting: Determined by specified limit values Attributes are separated by commas, the programming sequence is optional. Attributes do not apply to toggle fields.

BE1/2-42


11.02


Help display

Help display file: File name The name of the help screen file appears in quotation marks. The screen will be displayed automatically (instead of the existing graphic) when the cursor is positioned on this variable. See also Subsection 2.7.1 Displays. Default setting: Empty

System or user

A system or user data on the NC/PLC variable can be assigned to the variable. The system or user variable is enclosed in quotation marks. See also Section 8.3 List of accessible system variables and References /PGA/. Position of short text (distance from left, distance from top, width) The positions are specified in pixels and refer to the top left-hand corner of the main body of the screen form. Each measurement is separated by a comma. See also "Positions".

Position of short text

Position of I/O field Position of I/O field (distance from left, distance from top, width, height). The positions are specified in pixels and refer to the top left-hand corner of the main body of the screen form. Each measurement is separated by a comma. See also "Positions". If this position is altered, the positions of the short text, graphic text and unit text also change. Colors

Colors: Foreground color, background color Range of values: 1...10 For colors, see Section 6.2, Color table. The colors are separated by commas. Default setting: Foreground color: black Background color: white

Help

MMC 103 only: Help: Help file, Index, Help text with: Help file: Index: Help text:

Path name of file (PDF format) Index in Help text file to Help text Help text for display in Help text file

The items of text are separated by commas, the text sequence is predefined. Help file and Help text are enclosed in quotation marks. Several Help references can be configured for each form element as a loop (Help loop), i.e. the references are called in succession and the first reference displayed again after the last.


BE1/2-43


11.02

If reference is made to the same File/Index/Help text in a second or further Help call, the parameters do not need to be specified (see "Examples"). The Help screen is display is the cursor is positioned on this field and the information key pressed. The PDF files must be located in directory CUS.DIR\hlp.dir or CST.DIR\hlp.dir. Corresponding PDF and text files must have the same name. The name of the PDF file must be written in capital letters in the text file. See also "Help"

Examples Example 1: Assign properties Variable Type, Texts, Help, Colors: DEF Var1 = (R///,"Actual value",,"mm"//"Var1.bmp"////8,2) Variable type: Real Limit values or toggle field entries: None Pre-assignment: None Texts: Long text: None Short text: Actual value Graphic text: None Unit text: mm Attributes: None Help display: Var1.bmp System or user variable: None Position of short text: No entries, i.e. default position Position of I/O field: No entries, i.e. default position Colors: Foreground color: 8 Background color: 2 Help: None Example 2: Assign properties Variable Type, Limit Values, Attributes, Short Text Position: DEF Var2 = (I/0,10///wr1,al1///,,300) Variable type: Integer Limit values: MIN: 0; MAX: 10 Pre-assignment: None Texts: None Attributes: Input mode: Read only Alignment of short text: Right-justified Help display: None System or user variable: None Position of short text: Distance from left: None Distance from top: none, i.e. standard distance from top left corner

BE1/2-44


11.02


Width: Position of I/O field: Colors: Help:

300 No entries, i.e. default position no entries, i.e. default position None

Example 3: Assign properties Variable Type, Pre-assignment, System or User Variable, I/O Field Position: DEF Var3 =(R//"10"////"$R[1]"//300,10,200// "Help.pdf",1,"Help1") Variable type: String Limit values or toggle field entries: None Pre-assignment: 10 Texts: None Attributes: None Help display: None System or user variable: $R[1] (R parameter 1) Position of short text: Default position relative to the I/O field Position of the I/O field: Distance from left: 300 Distance from top: 10 Width: 200 Colors: No entries, i.e. default setting Help: The help containing help text "Help1" on the page with index 1 in file Help.pdf is called when the I key is pressed. Example 4: Various entries in toggle field: DEF Var1 = (I/* 0,1,2,3) DEF Var2 = (S/* "In", "Out") DEF Var3 = (B/* 1="In", 0="Out") ;1 and 0 are values, "In" and "Out" are displayed DEF Var4 = (R/* ARR1) ;ARR1 is the name of an array Example 5: Several help calls per form element (MMC 103 only): DEF Var1 = (R//////////"Help1.pdf",1,"Help1", ,2,"Help2","Help3.pdf",3,) ;1st entry in Help loop Help file: HELP1.PDF Index: 1 Help text: Help1 2nd entry in Help loop Help file: HELP1.PDF Index: 2 Help text: Help2 3rd entry in Help loop Help file: HELP3.PDF Index: 3 Help text: Help2


BE1/2-45


11.02

Example 6: Display of an image instead of a short text DEF VAR1(V///,"\\bild1.bmp" ////160,40,50,50) The size and position of the image is defined under position I/O field (left, top, width, height).

"Variant" variable type The "Variant" variable type is determined by the data type of the last value assignment. Its current data type can be scanned with the ISNUM or ISSTR function. ISNUM (VAR) with: VAR

Name of variable whose data type must be checked The result of the scan can be either FALSE = not a numerical variable (data type = String) or TRUE = numerical variable (data type = Real)

or ISSTR (VAR) with: VAR

Name of variable whose data type must be checked The result of the scan can be either FALSE = numerical variable (data type = Real) or TRUE = not a numerical variable (data type = String) The field type "Variant" is mainly suited to write either variable names or numerical values into the NC code. IF ISNUM(VAR1) == TRUE IF ISSTR(REG[4]+2) == TRUE

Integer extensions The following extensions for determining the display in the I/O field and the memory utilization are possible for Integer types: Table 2-5

2nd character in the extension data type

Display format

BE1/2-46

B

Binary

D

Decimal with sign

H

Hexadecimal

No format specification

Decimal with sign


11.02


Changing the type of a variable With SW 6 and higher, the display mode can be changed for the type property of a variable. For integer variables this is display type: B = binary D = decimal with sign H = hexadecimal without sign

+ U for unsigned For Real, only the number of places after the decimal point can be changed. Changing the basic type is illegal and generates an error message in the file error.com.

Table 2-6

3rd and/or 4th character in extension data type

Variable format for standard limit values and calculations B

Byte

W

Word

D

Double Word

BU

Byte without sign

WU

Word without sign

DU

Double Word without sign

Examples of valid Integer type definitions: IB Integer variable 32 bits in binary representation IBD Integer variable 32 bits in binary representation IBW Integer variable 16 bits in binary representation IBB Integer variable 8 bits in binary representation I Integer variable 32 bits in decimal representation with sign IDD Integer variable 32 bits in decimal representation with sign IDW Integer variable 16 bits in decimal representation with sign IDB Integer variable 8 bits in decimal representation with sign IDDU Integer variable 32 bits in decimal representation without sign IDWU Integer variable 16 bits in decimal representation without sign IDBU Integer variable 8 bits in decimal representation without sign IH Integer variable 32 bits in hexadecimal representation IHDU Integer variable 32 bits in hexadecimal representation IHWU Integer variable 16 bits in hexadecimal representation IHBU Integer variable 8 bits in hexadecimal representation


BE1/2-47


11.02

Pre-assignment A variable can assume various states depending on whether a pre-assigned value, or a system or user variable, or both, is assigned to the variable field (I/O field or toggle field). Table 2-7

If...

Then...

Field type

Pre-assign- System or ment user variable

Reaction of field type

I/O field

Yes

Yes

Write pre-assigned value to system or user variable

No

Yes

Use system or user variable as preassigned value

Error

Yes

Not calculated, system or user variable is not written/used

Yes

No

Pre-assignment

No

No

Not calculated

Error

No

Not calculated

Yes

Error

Not calculated

No

Error

Not calculated

Error

Error

Not calculated

Yes

Yes

Write pre-assigned value to system or user variable

No

Yes

Use system or user variable as preassigned value

Error

Yes

Not calculated, system or user variable is not written/used

Yes

No

Pre-assignment

No

No

Pre-assignment = first element of toggle field

Error

No

Not calculated

Yes

Error

Not calculated

No

Error

Not calculated

Error

Error

Not calculated

Toggle

Not calculated: Toggling is not possible until a valid value is assigned to the variable

BE1/2-48


11.02


Positions The short text and graphics text and the I/O field and unit text are each treated like a unit, i.e. position settings for short text apply to the graphic text and settings for the I/O field and to the unit text. The configured position entry overwrites the default value, i.e. only one value can be changed. If no position data is configured for following screen form elements, then the position settings for the preceding screen form element are applied. If no positions have been specified for any element, then default positions are applied. The column width for the short text and I/O field is calculated as standard for each line from the number of columns and maximum line width, i.e. column width = maximum line width/number of columns. The width of the graphics and unit text is predefined and optimized to suit the requirements of programming support. If graphics or unit text has been configured, the width of the short text or I/O field is reduced accordingly. The order of short text and I/O field can be reversed by position settings.

Help The Help loop for a screen form element can be extended or deleted during runtime. These functions are available only on the MMC 103. Extending the Help loop: ADDHTX (Identifier, Help file, Index, Help text) with: Identifier Help file Index Help text

Name of the variable whose help ring will be extended Path specification of the file (PDF format) Index in the help file to the help text Help text for display in the help text file

The Help loop can be extended as required by calling the function repeatedly. ADDHTX(VAR1, ”C:\OEM\HLP\MYHLP.PDF”, 15, ”Machine data") Deleting the existing Help loop: CLRHTX (Identifier) with: Identifier Name of the variable whose help ring is to be deleted CLRHTX(VAR1)

Toggle field extension The toggle field extension function can be used to display texts (entries in toggle field) as a function of NC/PLC variables. A variable which is programmed with a toggle field extension can only be read.


BE1/2-49


11.02

DEF Identifier= (Variable type /+ $Text number | * value= "\\pic"[,value="\\pic2.bmp"][, ...] /[default] /[Texts(long text, short text, graphics text, unit text)] /[Attributes] /[Help display] /[System or user variable] /[Position of short text] /[Position of I/O field (left, top, width, height)] /[Colors] /[Help]) with: Variable type Text number

Type of variable specified in system or user variables Number (base) of language-dependent text which is selected as base number System or System or user variable (offset) user variable from which the final text number (base + offset) is derived For explanation of other parameters, see "Defining a variable". DEF VAR1=(IB/+ $85000/15////"DB90.DBB5") When the screen form is opened, the contents of text number $85015 are displayed in the I/O field. Pre-assignment value 15 is entered in system variable DB90.DBB5. If the value stored in system variable DB90.DBB5 changes, then the displayed text number $(85000 + ) is recalculated in response to every change.

Variable toggle fields It is possible to assign a variable toggle field to a screen form element, i.e. when the toggle key is actuated, a value configured in a CHANGE method is assigned to the variable. A single asterisk symbol * is entered for the Limit Values or Toggle Field property to identify a variable toggle field when a variable is defined. DEF VAR1=(S/*)

Displays dependent on toggle field The toggle field is overlaid with changing graphic. If the flag byte has the value 1, screen 1 is displayed, for value 2, screen 2. The position and size of the screen is given under position I/O field (left, top, width, height). DEF VAR1(V/*1="\\pic1.bmp", 2="\\pic2.bmp" / / , " $85000" /wr1 / /MB0 / /160,40,50,50)

BE1/2-50


11.02


Multi-column screen forms Several variables can be displayed in the main body of a form. In this instance, the variables are all defined within one definition line in the configuration file. DEF VAR11 = (S///"Var11"), VAR12 = (I///"Var12") To make individual variables in the configuration file more legible, the definition lines can be wrapped after every variable definition and following comma. The vocabulary word "DEF" always indicates the beginning of a new line. DEF Tnr1=(I//1/"","T ",""/wr1///,,10/20,,50), TOP1=(I///,"Typ="/WR2//"$TC_DP1[1,1]"/80,,30/120,,50), TOP2=(R3///,"L1="/WR2//"$TC_DP3[1,1]"/170,,30/210,,70), TOP3=(R3///,"L2="/WR2//"$TC_DP4[1,1]"/280,,30/320,,70), TOP4=(R3///,"L3="/WR2//"$TC_DP5[1,1]"/390,,30/420,,70) DEF Tnr2=(I//2/"","T ",""/wr1///,,10/20,,50), TOP21=(I///,"Typ="/WR2//"$TC_DP1[2,1]"/80,,30/120,,50), TOP22=(R3///,"L1="/WR2//"$TC_DP3[2,1]"/170,,30/210,,70), TOP23=(R3///,"L2="/WR2//"$TC_DP4[2,1]"/280,,30/320,,70), TOP24=(R3///,"L3="/WR2//"$TC_DP5[2,1]"/390,,30/420,,70) ... Screen form

When designing multi-column forms, consideration should be given to the capability of the hardware used, e.g.: HT6 max. 4 columns, max. 60 DEF instructions PCU20 max. 10 columns, max. 60 DEF instructions


BE1/2-51


11.02

Variable value The standard property of a variable is its value. When a variable is defined, a value is allocated to it in the form of a pre-assigned setting, a system or user variable or programmed in the methods, as described below. Identifier.val = Variable value or Identifier = Variable value with: Identifier Name of variable Variable value Value of variable VAR3 = VAR4 + SIN(VAR5) VAR3.VAL = VAR4 + SIN(VAR5)

Variable status The "Variable status" property can be scanned during runtime to find out whether a variable has a valid value. This property can be read and written with the FALSE = 0 setting. Identifier.vld with: Identifier Name of variable The result of the scan can be either FALSE = invalid value or TRUE = valid value IF VAR1.VLD == FALSE VAR1 = 84 ENDIF

Changing the variable properties The properties Limit Values, Texts, Attributes, Help Display, System or User Variable, Colors, Help, Variable Value and Variable Status can be changed in the methods during runtime. Identifier.min = Limit values MIN Identifier.max = Limit values MAX Identifier.lt = Long text Identifier.st = Short text Identifier.gt = Graphics text Identifier.ut = Unit text Identifier.wr = Input mode Identifier.ac = Access level Identifier.al = Alignment of form text Identifier.fs = Font size Identifier.li = Limit Identifier.hlp = Help display

BE1/2-52


11.02


Identifier.var = System or user variable Identifier.fc = Foreground color Identifier.bc = Background color Identifier.htx = Help file, Index, Help text Identifier.val = Variable value Identifier.vld = Variable status with: Input mode:

wr

Access level:

ac

Alignment of short text:

0 1 2 3 empty 0...7

hidden read (line is hidden) write must write can always be written Protection levels (see Subsection 2.6.1 Defining Soft keys)

al

0 1 2

left aligned right aligned centered

Type size:

fs

1

Limit:

li

default font size 8 Pt, MMC 103 8x12 pixels MMC 100.2/HT6 double font size none Min Max Min and max

2 0 1 2 3

For explanation of other parameters, see "Defining a variable" HS3.st = "New text" ;Change soft key label Var1.wr = 2 ;Change input mode Var4.li = 2 ;Check whether variable value is exceeding maximum limit The expression on the right of the equals sign is evaluated and assigned to the variable or variable property.

Addressing system variables indirectly A system variable can also be addressed indirectly, i.e. as a function of another variable. PRESS(HS1) AXIS=AXIS+1 WEG.VAR="$AA_DTBW[" Use color table from MMC 100 standard, cmm --> Use color table for ShopMill


11.02


Example: PCXCONV

0 0 80 36 help 2 standard

It is advisable to create a batch file that calls PCXCONV to convert all PCX files in the required size. The conversion program BMP2BIN (on the application floppy disk) should be used with software version 6.2 and higher. It supports 256 colors and faster display building. This application converts BMP bitmaps to an optimized format of the HMI Embedded. The program has the following parameters: BMP2BIN BMPfile colTab Explanation of parameters: BMP file

Name of the BMP file (wildcards can be used)

colTab

Name of the color file with color conversion table. This file can be used to assign a color of a BMP pixel to a color in the HMI Embedded. However, this is only possible with 16-color bitmaps. With 256-color bitmaps, the transfer of a color file does not have any effect. Structure of the color file (example) : [BMP] ; BMP_color

HMI_color

1

3

2

2

... The separator is at least one space

Please proceed according to the instructions in Subsection 7.2.3 (Procedure with MMC 100.2/HT6) The described procedure for conversion and archiving is applicable for all displays in the MMC 100.2/HT6. With MMC 100/WIN32, partial binary or BMP files (packed or compressed) can be processed. MMC 100.2 can process packed or unpacked BMP files. The colors are converted online. For this the files containing the color table (syscol.col, sysbw.col,...) have been extended to include Section [BMP]. This section allocates a color of a BMP pixel to a color of an MMC.


BE1/2-57


11.02

Screens without conversion With SW 5.3 and higher you can link bit maps into the screens configured with "Expanding the Operator Interface" without first converting them. It is in fact possible to introduce unconverted images, but we urgently recommend you to convert the BMP images offline using the BMP2BIN application (see further above, application floppy disk), since output is speeded up considerably by doing so.

Preconditions The screens must have previously been stored in 16-color mode. Bitmaps with 256 colors are supported in software version 6.2. and higher. You will find the corresponding color table in Section 8.2.

Storage locations The following storage locations are possible (SW 5.3): - Bitmap unpacked on Flash (WIN32 (MMC103, HMI) unpacked on hard disk) - In each case one bitmap packed in xxx.bm_, where xxx.bm_ contains file xxx.bmp SW 6 and higher: - Bitmap packed in CST.ARJ (for standard cycle images) - Bitmap packed in CUS.ARJ (for customer cycle images) - Bitmap packed in CMA.ARJ (for manufacturer cycle images)

Proceed as follows: Procedure for integrating bitmaps (customer screens): Integration on MMC 100.2 / system WIN32: - Create BMP files with Microsoft Paint Version 4.0 or higher - Archive BMP files with the supplied arj.exe (V 2.41) in archive CUS.ARJ or alternatively each individual BMP file in a separate archive under the file name of the BMP file and extension .BM_ Examples: Alternative 1: Several files per archive: arj a cus.arj my_file1.bmp my_file2.bmp my_file3.bmp my_file4.bmp Alternative 2: One file per archive: arj a my_file1.bm_ my_file1.bmp

BE1/2-58


11.02


Limit Archiving is optional. However you must ensure that the sum of customer screens does not exceed 128KB for the MMC 100.2 hardware. Archiving individual files (.bm_) has runtime advantages over archiving in a large archive (cus.arj) if you have a large number of customer screens. If you are working in a WIN32 environment we recommend that you DO NOT archive the BMP files but store them directly in the BIN directory. This saves you time unpacking them. Adding archive cus.arj, or individual .bm_ using the MMC 100.2 application environment (menu item ADD FILES) This point no longer applies in the WIN32 environment. With SW 5.3 and higher you can also assign a bitmap to any soft key by placing two backslashes in front of the soft key text. The text behind the backslashes is then interpreted as the name of the file that contains the bitmap. For example, in ALUC.TXT 85000 0 0 "\\mybitmap.bmp" Notice! The bitmap widths (number of pixels) can be specified as any number you choose in SW 6.2 and higher. There is no longer any requirement for it to be possible to divide them by 8. Note The display colors might be shown differently on the MMC 100.2/HT6 than in PaintShopPro. For further information about handling displays, see Chapter 7, Color table, Chapter 8.

Creating displays on the MMC 103 Graphics/displays and help images can have the following format: • Bitmap (BMP), • Metafile (WMF) or • Icon (ICO). Graphic programs can be freely selected provided that they are capable of creating the prescribed formats. Displays must be stored in one of the following directories: \DH\CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR (user cycles directory) \DH\COM.DIR\HLP.DIR (comment directory) \DH\CST.DIR\HLP.DIR (standard cycles directory) \DH\CMA.DIR\HLP.DIR (manufacturer directory)


BE1/2-59


2.7.2

11.02

Screen in screen You can insert further screens in the background (help screen). Even as a function of the values of the variables. Like for soft keys you can assign a graphics file to a display field. The height of the displayed graphic (of the I/O field) is specified as the fourth parameter of the positions. You can define bitmaps in fields (short text, I/O field). The definition is made with the notation used in "Defining variables" p. 2.7. Example: Short text field is overlaid with graphic DEF VAR1=(S///,"\\pic1.bmp" ////160,40,50,50) ; Type S irrelevant Toggle field overlaid with graphic, the graphic being selected with a PLC flag byte. DEF VAR1=(IDB/*1="\\pic1.bmp", 2="\\bild2.bmp"//,"$85000"/wr1//"MB[0]"//160,40,50,50)

2.8 Arrays Arrays are tables in which data can be stored. Arrays can be one- or two-dimensional. A one-dimensional array is treated like a two-dimensional array with just one line or column.

Definition Arrays have start identifier //A and end identifier //END. The number of lines and columns is optional. An array is structured in the following way: //A(Identifier) (a/b...) (c/d...) ... //END with: Identifier Name of array a, b, c, d Values of array Note Values of the String type must be enclosed in quotation marks.

BE1/2-60


11.02


//A(Thread) ; Size / Pitch (0.3 / 0.075 / (0.4 / 0.1 / (0.5 / 0.125 / (0.6 / 0.15 / (0.8 / 0.2 / (1.0 / 0.25 / (1.2 / 0.25 / (1.4 / 0.3 / (1.7 / 0.35 / //END

/ Core diameter 0.202) 0.270) 0.338) 0.406) 0.540) 0.676) 0.676) 1.010) 1.246)

Loading The LA (Load Array) function can be used to load an array from another file. LA(Identifier [, file]) with: Identifier Name of array to be loaded File File in which the array is defined Note If an array in the current configuration file must be replaced by an array from another configuration file, then both arrays must have the same name. Extract from file maske.com: DEF Var2 = (S/*ARR5/"Out"/,"Toggle field") PRESS(HS5) LA("ARR5","arrayext.com") ;Load array ARR5 from file arrayext.com VAR2 = ARR5[0] ;Instead of "Out"/"In", the toggle field of VAR2 displays "Top"/"Bottom"/"Right"/"Left" END_PRESS //A(ARR5) ("Out"/"In") //END Extract from file arrayext.com: //A(ARR5) ("Top"/"Bottom"/"Right"/"Left") //END Note Please note that a valid value must be assigned to a variable after the LA function has been used to assign another array to the toggle field of the variable.


BE1/2-61


11.02

Access The value of an array access operation can be transferred with property Value (identifier.val). Access to one-dimensional array with only one column: Identifier [Z,[M[,C]]] or Identifier [Z,[M[,C]]].val Access to one-dimensional array with only one line: Identifier [S,[M[,C]]] or Identifier [S,[M[,C]]].val Access to two-dimensional array: Identifier [Z,S,[M[,C]]] or

Identifier [Z,S,[M[,C]]].val

with: Identifier Name of array Z Line value (line index or search key) S Column value (column index or search key) M Access mode 0 = Direct 1 = Search for line, column direct 2 = Line direct, search for column 3 = Search 4 = Search for line index 5 = Search for column index C Compare mode 0 = Search key must be within value range of line or column. 1 = Exact search key must be found VAR1 = MET_G[REG[3],1,0].VAL ;Assign a value from Array MET_G to Var1 The line index (line number of the array) or column index (column number of the array) each start at 0. If a line index or column index points to outside the array, the value 0 or a blank string is output and error variable ERR set to TRUE. Error variable ERR is also set to TRUE if a search key cannot be found.

"Direct" access mode With "Direct" access mode (M = 0), the array is accessed with the line index in Z and the column index in S. Compare mode C is not evaluated.

"Search" access mode In the case of access mode M = 1, 2 or 3, the search always commences in line 0 or column 0.

Compare mode When compare mode C = 0 is used, the contents of the search line or search column must be sorted in ascending sequence. If the search key is smaller than the first element or greater than the last, a value of 0 or blank string is output and error variable ERR is set to TRUE.

BE1/2-62


11.02


When compare mode C = 1 is used, the search key must be present in the search line or search column. If the key cannot be found, a value of 0 or a blank string is output and error variable ERR is set to TRUE.

Access mode Table 2-8

Mode M

Line value Z

Column value S

Output value

0

Line Index

Column Index

Value from line Z and column S

1

Search key, Column index of column search in column 0 from which value is read

2

Line index of line from which return value is read

3

Search key, Search key, search in column 0 search in line 0

4

Search key, search in column S

Column index of search column

Line Index

5

Line index of search line

Search key, search in line Z

Column Index

Search key, search in line 0

Value from line found and column S Value from line Z and column found Value from line and column found

Example Two arrays are defined below. These are the basis for the following examples. //A(Thread) (0.3 / 0.075 (0.4 / 0.1 (0.5 / 0.125 (0.6 / 0.15 (0.8 / 0.2 (1.0 / 0.25 (1.2 / 0.25 (1.4 / 0.3 (1.7 / 0.35 //END

/ / / / / / / / /

0.202) 0.270) 0.338) 0.406) 0.540) 0.676) 0.676) 1.010) 1.246)


BE1/2-63


11.02

//A(Array2) ("DES" "PTCH" / "CDM" ) / (0.3 /

0.075 /

0.202 )

(0.4 /

0.1 /

0.270 )

(0.5 /

0.125 /

0.338 )

(0.6 /

0.15 /

0.406 )

(0.8 /

0.2 /

0.540 )

(1.0 /

0.25 /

0.676 )

(1.2 /

0.25 /

0.676 )

(1.4 /

0.3 /

1.010 )

(1.7 /

0.35 /

1.246 )

//END Example Access mode 1: The search key is in Z. This key is always sought in column 0. The value from column S is output with the line index of the search key found. VAR1 = Thread[0.5,1,1]

;The value of VAR1 is 0.125

Explanation: Search for value 0.5 in column 0 of "Thread" array and output the value found in column 1 of the same line. Example Access mode 2: The search key is in S. This key is always sought in line 0. The value from line Z is output with the column index of the search key found. VAR1

=

ARRAY2 [3,

"PTCH",

2]


Explanation: Search for column containing "PTCH" in line 0 of array "Array2". Output the value from the column found and the line with line index 3. Example Access mode 3: A search key is in each of Z and S. The line index is sought in column 0 with the key in Z and the column index in line 0 with the key in S. The value from the array is output with the line index and column index found. VAR1

=

ARRAY2 [0.6

"PTCH",

3]


Explanation: Search for the line with the contents 0.6 in column 0 of array "Array2", search for the column with the contents "STG" in line 0. Transfer the value from the line and column found to VAR1.

BE1/2-64


11.02


Example Access mode 4: The search key is in Z. S contains the column index of the column in which key is being sought. The line index of the key found is output. VAR1 = Thread[0.125,1,4]

;The value of VAR1 is 2

Explanation: Search for value 0.125 in column 1 of array "Thread" and transfer the line index of the value found to VAR1. Example Access mode 5: Z contains the line index of line in which key is being sought. The search key is in S. The column index of the search key found is output. VAR1 = Thread[4,0.2,5,1]

;The value of VAR1 is 1

Explanation: Search for value 0.2 in line 4 of array "Thread" and transfer the column index of the value found to VAR1. Compare mode 1 has been selected because the values in line 4 are not sorted in ascending sequence.

Array status The Status property can be used to scan a configuration file to find out whether an array access operation is supplying a valid value. Status is a read only property. Identifier [Z, S, [M[,C]]].vld with: Identifier Name of array The result of the scan can be either FALSE = invalid value or TRUE = valid value DEF MPIT = (R///"MPIT",,"MPIT",""/wr3) DEF PIT = (R///"PIT",,"PIT",""/wr3) PRESS(VS1) MPIT = 0.6 IF MET_G[MPIT,0,4,1].VLD == TRUE PIT = MET_G[MPIT,1,0].VAL REG[4] = PIT REG[1] = "OK" ELSE REG[1] = "ERROR" ENDIF END_PRESS


BE1/2-65


11.02

2.9 Table element (grid) Unlike an array, which displays and makes available for selection statistic data stored in tables, the values of a table element (grid) are updated continuously. The values of system variables are displayed in table format. The variables can be addressed by one block in one channel.

Assignment The table element definition is assigned to a variable definition in accordance with section 2.7 via a table identifier. The variable definition determines the values to be displayed and the table element definition determines the appearance and the assignment in the screen window. The grid uses the I/O field-specific properties from the variable definition line.

Screen window The visible area of the grid is determined by the width and height of the I/O field. Any lines or columns than cannot be seen can be displayed by scrolling horizontally and vertically.

Table description The variable description will contain a reference to a table description: DEF Identifier = 1 (Variable type 2

/[limit value or toggle field or Table identifier] 3

/[default] 4

/[Texts(long text, short text|screen, graphic text, unit text)] 5

/[Attributes] 6

/[Help image] 7

/[System or user variables] .... Other parameters are the same as those described in 2.7. Note The small figures above "(" and "/" are only intended to enhance legibility.

BE1/2-66


11.02


Table identifiers Identifiers of a table containing NCK/PLC values of the same type, which can be addressed via a channel block. The table identifier is differentiated from limit values or toggle fields by the addition of a % sign in front of it. The file containing the table description can be specified by adding a comma after the identifier and then inserting the name of the file. System or user variable The parameter remains empty for grid, because the column definition lines contain detailed information about the variables to be displayed (see below). The table description can be provided in a dynamic format.

Load Grid LG (identifier, table identifier [,file name]) The identifier is the variable identifier to which the table identifier is to be assigned. The file name can be inserted at this point. It identifies the file in which the table description (table block) is stored.

Content of the table block The table block comprises: 1. A header 2. 1 to n column descriptions

Header //G(table identifier/table type/number of lines/[fixed line attribute], [fixed column attribute]) Table identifier: The table identifier is used without a leading % sign. It can only be used once in each screen form. Table type: 0 (default value) Standard table for PLC or user data (NCK and channel-specific data) 1 Tool table (columns 1+2 are used for T and D numbers) 2 (and others reserved) Number of lines: Number of lines including header


BE1/2-67


11.02

Fixed line attribute: 1 active 0 inactive Fixed column attribute: 0 active 1 inactive The fixed line or fixed column is not scrolled. The number of columns is the number of columns configured.

Column definitions Column definition line: (type/limit values/empty/long text, column header/attributes/help image/system or OPI variable/column width/offset1, offset2, offset3) Type Limit values

Data type of the values in the column Limit values for variables: Limit value MIN, limit value MAX The limit values are separated by commas. Limit values can be specified for the types I, C and R either decimally or as a character in the form "A", "F". The limit values parameter works in conjunction with the Limit attribute (see Attributes, Limit li). Default setting: Empty Long text, column header Attributes Help image

See 2.7 See 2.7

System or OPI variables The variables should be PLC or NC variables. The system or user variable is enclosed in quotation marks. See also Section 8.3 List of accessible system variables and References/PGA/. Indexed variables are usually used for table elements. The increments to be used to accumulate each index in order to fill the column are specified in the assigned offset parameter. Column width

Column width in pixels

Offset1 Offset2 Offset3

Increments for the 1st index Increments for the 2nd index Increments for the 3rd index

The index number is important for PLC or NC variables with one or more indices. Only indexed variables will be displayed correctly in grid format.

BE1/2-68


11.02


Modifying column properties The column properties which can be modified dynamically (written) are: Limit values (min.,max.), Column header (st), Attributes (wr, ac and li), Help image (hlp) and OPI variable (var). Column properties are modified via the variable identifier in the definition list or via the column index (starting at 1). Example: Var1[1].st="Column 1" Column properties cannot be read in the Load block. The wr, ac and li attributes can be specified for column definitions. See 2.7

Column header from text file The column header can be entered as text or text numbers ($8xxxx) and is not scrolled.

String variables If the variable is a string type variable, the string length must be specified in Type. Example for a user variable: DEF CHAN string [16] TEXT[41] The column definition for the CHAN variable therefore starts

e.g.

(S16/...

Processing the values The values displayed in a grid can be modified directly by the end user within the restrictions of the rights granted by the attributes and within any limits defined. The next three examples show the assignment between cells and PLC variables in a standard table (table type=0). The first line shows the column headers. Example 1: //G(MB_TAB/0/4/,1) (I///,"MB 1 to MB 3"///"MB1"/100/1) (I///,"MB 4 to MB 6"///"MB4"/100/1) MB 1 to MB 3 Value(MB1) Value(MB2) Value(MB3)

MB 4 to MB 6 Value(MB4) Value(MB5) Value(MB6)


BE1/2-69


11.02

Example 2 with offset > 1 in the column definition: //G(MB_TAB/0/4/,1) (I///," MB1, MB3, MB5"///"MB1"/100/2) (I///," MB2, MB4, MB6"/// "MB2"/100/2) Lines and columns are assigned as follows: MB1, MB3, MB5 Value(MB1) Value(MB3) Value(MB5)

MB2, MB4, MB6 Value(MB2) Value(MB4) Value(MB6)

In each line, the index of the variable was increased by the offset (=2). Example 3 with offset and index number in the column definition: //G(MB_TAB/0/4/,1) (IB///,"M1.1, M2.1, M3.1"/// "M1.1"/100/1) (IB///,"M1.1, M1.2, M1.3"/// "M1.1"/100/,1) M1.1, M2.1, M3.1 Value(M1.1) Value(M2.1) Value(M3.1)

M1.1, M1.2, M1.3 Value(M1.1) Value(M1.2) Value(M1.3)

In the first column, the first variable index for each line was increased by 1. (Offset1 = 1) In the second column, the second variable index for each line was increased by 1. (Offset2 = 1)

Additional options • Ascending numbers can be entered in the first column. Example:

(I///,"line"///"0"/60/1)

• Consecutive texts from the language files can be entered in the first column. Example:

(S///,"line"///"$80000"/60/1)

The tool table will is designed to provide programmers with a simple visualization of complex tool data. The tool and cutting edge numbers are calculated automatically for the first two columns. The number of lines is calculated dynamically using the tool and cutting edge numbers.

BE1/2-70


11.02


The following columns must only be configured with the required cutting edge parameters. Example 4 from a tool table (table type = 1) //G(TOOL_TAB/1/30) (I///,"tool no.") (I///,"edge no.") (I///,"ISO H no."///"$TC_DP26"/100) (R///,"length1"///"$TC_DP3"/200) (R///,"length2"///"$TC_DP4"/200) Tool no. 1 1 3 6

Edge no. 1 3 2 1

ISO H-no.

Length1

Length2

Value($TC_DP26[1,1]) Value($TC_DP26[1,3]) Value($TC_DP26[3,2]) Value($TC_DP26[6,1])



Only the headline and the column width should be configured for the first two columns. Lines 2 to 5 of columns 1 and 2 can contain tool and cutting edge numbers. Lines 2 to 5 of columns 3 to 5 contain the variable names resulting from columns 1 and 2. Machine data $MN_MM_NUM_TOOL should be taken into account for the number of lines.

Focus control in the grid The Row and Col properties can be used to set and calculate the focus within a table. Syntax Row and Col properties: Identifier.Row Identifier.Col Line properties: Each line in a table has the Val and Vld properties. In order to read and write cell properties, a line and column index must be specified in addition to the variable identifiers from the definition list. Syntax Val properties: Identifier[line index, column index].Val or identifier [line index, column index] Syntax Vld properties: Identifier[line index, column index]. Vld


BE1/2-71


11.02

Example: Var1[2,3].val=1.203 If no line or column index is specified, the indices of the focussed cell apply. Example: Var1[2,3].val=1.203 where: Var1.Row =2 Var1.Col=3 Var1.val=1.203

n

BE1/2-72


11.02

Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1) 3 Syntax for Screen Form Definition

3

3 Syntax for Screen Form Definition

3.1 Screen form methods ...............................................................BE1/3-74 3.1.1 Version management in conjunction with OUTPUT blocks...BE1/3-77 3.2 Screen form functions ...............................................................BE1/3-79 3.2.1 Displaying another screen form or soft key ...........................BE1/3-79 3.2.2 Reading/writing PLC/NC variables ........................................BE1/3-82 3.2.3 General functions ..................................................................BE1/3-84 3.2.4 Subroutines............................................................................BE1/3-87 3.2.5 REFRESH function ................................................................BE1/3-89 3.2.6 File functions..........................................................................BE1/3-89 3.2.7 NC functions (PI services) .....................................................BE1/3-95 3.2.8 External functions (MMC 103 only) .......................................BE1/3-96 3.3 Language resources for syntax of methods .............................BE1/3-97 3.3.1 Binary, hexadecimal and exponential representation of numbers.................................................................................BE1/3-97 3.3.2 Operators and functions ........................................................BE1/3-98 3.3.3 Conditions........................................................................... BE1/3-100 3.3.4 String handling.................................................................... BE1/3-100 3.4 General screen form variables............................................... BE1/3-104 3.6 Error handling, log book......................................................... BE1/3-108


BE1/3-73


11.02

3.1 Screen form methods Various types of event (exit input field, actuate soft key) can initiate particular actions in screen forms and screen form-dependent soft key menus (soft key menus which are called from a newly configured screen form). These actions are configured in methods. The following table shows the basic principle used to configure a method: Method

PRESS(HS1)

Actions: - Functions (see Section 3.2, Screen form functions)

LM... LS...

- Change properties (see Subsection 2.6.1, Defining a soft key and Section 2.7, Screen form elements)

Var1.st = ...

- Calculate with variables (see Section 2.7, Screen form elements)

Var2 = Var3 + Var4... EXIT

End of method

END_PRESS

The following methods can be configured in a screen form:

PRESS method The PRESS method is executed when the corresponding soft key is pressed. See PRESS methods, soft key menus. PRESS(SK) ... END_PRESS with: SK Name of soft key: HS1-HS8, VS1-VS8, or RECALL plus the following keys:

Keys PU PageUP PD PageDown SL ScrollLeft SR ScrollRight SU ScrollUp SD ScrollDown

Screen up Screen down Cursor key " "

to left " right upward downward

The HT6 has the following additional keys: UK1 – UK8 User keys 1–8 SK1 – SK2 Special keys S1 and S2 TEACH TEACH key HS1 = ("other soft key bar") HS2 = ("no function") PRESS (HS1) LS("Menu1") ; Load a new soft key bar

BE1/3-74


11.02


Var2 = Var3 + Var1 END_PRESS PRESS (HS2) END_PRESS PRESS(PU) INDEX = INDEX -7 CALL("UP1") END_PRESS

LOAD method The LOAD method is executed after the variable and soft key definitions (DEF Var1= ..., HS1= ...) have been interpreted. At this moment, the screen form is not yet displayed. LOAD ... END_LOAD LOAD ;Start identifier of Load method Screen form1.Hd = $85111 ;Assign text from language file as screen-form header VAR1.Min = 0 ;Assign Limit Value variable MIN VAR1.Max = 1000 ;Assign Limit Value variable MAX END_LOAD ;End identifier

UNLOAD method The UNLOAD method is executed before a screen form is unloaded. UNLOAD ... END_UNLOAD UNLOAD REG[1] = VAR1 ;Place variable in register END_UNLOAD

CHANGE method CHANGE methods are executed if a variable value changes, i.e. variable calculations that are performed as soon as a variable value changes are configured within a CHANGE method. There are two types of CHANGE method, i.e. element-specific and global. The element-specific CHANGE method is executed if the value of a specified variable changes. CHANGE(Identifier) ... END_CHANGE with: Identifier Name of variable If a system or user variable is assigned to a variable, cyclic updating of the variable value can be configured in a CHANGE method.


BE1/3-75


DEF VAR1=(S//////"DB20.DBB1") CHANGE(VAR1) IF VAR1.Val 1 VAR1.st="Tool OK!" the variable short text is: Tool OK! otto=1 ELSE VAR1.st="Caution Error!" the variable short text is: Caution Error! otto=2 ENDIF VAR2.Var=2 END_CHANGE

11.02

;A system variable is assigned to VAR1 ;If the system variable has a value ≠ 1,

;If the system variable value equals = 1,

The global CHANGE method is executed if the value of any variable changes and no element-specific CHANGE method has been configured. CHANGE() ... END_CHANGE CHANGE() EXIT ;If any variable value changes, the screen form is closed END_CHANGE

FOCUS method The FOCUS method is executed if the focus (cursor) is positioned on another field in the screen form. FOCUS ... END_FOCUS FOCUS DLGL("The focus has been placed on variable " 1–31999 T number > 0 ==> 1–9 The tool edge with number 3 for the tool with number 17 in the current TO area is deleted. PI_SERVICE("_N_DELECE",17,3)


BE1/8-201

Expanding the Operator Interface (BE1) 8 Terms, Tables, Lists, Examples

Service

11.02

Explanation Parameters Example

_N_DELETO

_N_LOGIN_

_N_LOGOUT

_N_SETUFR

BE1/8-202

Deletes the tool with all tool edges in all data blocks in which it is stored. The tool is also deleted in the following blocks (if available): TO, TU, TUE, TV, TG (type 400), TD, TS. Par1 Tool number 1 to 31999 Deletion of tool with T number 21 in the current T area. PI_SERVICE("_N_DELETO",21) Par1 Identifier for search mode 1: Search without calculation 2: Search with calculation 3: Search inclusive of main blocks Start search with calculation in current channel. To start the PI Service in a meaningful manner, the data structure for the block search (block SPRAF ; addressing on MMC102 with Variable Services via /Channel/Search/..) must be filled in beforehand. PI_SERVICE("_N_FINDBL",2) A password which sets the current access level is sent to the NCK. Par1 Password (8 characters exactly, if word has less than 8 characters, blanks must be added) Transfers a password to the NCK, thus setting another access level. PI_SERVICE("_N_LOGIN_","TESTWORD") The current access level is reset. --The current access level is reset. PI_SERVICE("_N_LOGOUT") The SYSTEM OR USER variables 'linShift', 'mirrorImgActive', 'rotation' and 'scaleFact' in channel-specific data block FU can be used to define up to 8 work offsets per channel. PI Service _N_SETUFR must be called in order to activate these user-defined work offsets. --Activation of a user frame. PI_SERVICE("_N_SETUFR")


11.02


8.5 Examples //S(Start) HS7=("Example",se1,ac1) PRESS(HS7) LM("SCREEN Form4") END_PRESS //END //M(Form4/"Example 4: Machine control panel"/"MST.BMP") DEF byte=(I/0/0/"Input byte, default=0","Byte No.:",""/wr1,li1///380,40,100/480,40,50) DEF Feed=(IBB//0/"","Feed Ovrd.",""/wr1//"EB3"/20,180,100/130,180,100), Axistop=(B//0/"","Feed stop",""/wr1//"E2.2"/280,180,100/380,180,50/0,11) DEF Spin=(IBB//0/"","Spindle override",""/wr1//"EB0"/20,210,100/130,210,100), spinstop=(B//0/"","Spindle stop",""/wr1//"E2.4"/280,210,100/380,210,50/0,11) DEF custom1=(IBB//0/"","Customer keys 1",""/wr1//"EB6"/20,240,100/130,240,100) DEF custom2=(IBB//0/"","Customer keys 2",""/wr1//"EB7"/20,270,100/130,270,100) DEF By1 DEF By2 DEF By3 DEF By6 DEF By7 HS1=("Input byte", SE1, AC4) HS2=("") HS3=("") HS4=("") HS5=("") HS6=("") HS7=("") HS8=("") VS1=("") VS2=("") VS3=("") VS4=("") VS5=("") VS6=("") VS7=("") VS8=("OK", SE1, AC7) LOAD By1=1 By2=2 By3=3 By6=6 By7=7 END_LOAD


BE1/8-203


11.02

PRESS(HS1) Byte.wr=2 END_PRESS CHANGE(byte) By1=byte+1 By2=byte+2 By3=byte+3 By6=byte+6 By7=byte+7 Feed.VAR="EB" Find (Ctrl+F) Enter search term. Note If the search terms were not found, it can be due to the following: • Error during input • The texts were incorrectly converted at PDF generation, therefore they could not be found by the search function. Analysis: Highlight a search term in the Adobe Acrobat, copy it and insert it into a Word document. Remedy: •

Generate pdf again.

•

Produce the postscript file again using the Adobe printer driver PS 5.1.1 and then convert it using the Acrobat Distiller.

Search order The search order for the Help function is as follows: 1. F:\ USER\HLP 2. F:\ OEM\HLP 3. F:\ ADD_ON\HLP 4. F:\ MMC2\HLP 5. F:\ HMI_ADV\HLP 6. F:\ DH\CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR (User directory) 7. F:\ DH\CMA.DIR\HLP.DIR (Manufacturer directory) 8. F:\ DH\CST.DIR\HLP.DIR (Siemens directory) 9. F:\ DH\COM.DIR\HLP.DIR

HE1/2-28


11.02

Online Help (HE1) 2 Alarm/Machine Data Help

2.2 Alarm Help 2.2.1

Function In SW 6.1 and later, the Machine Data Help is based on the "pdf Help", i.e. a pdf file is opened when the Help function is called and the corresponding alarm is displayed in the control using Adobe Reader 4. The files containing the alarms data are stored in the following directories: • Siemens alarms F:\HMI_ADV\HLP, • Manufacturer alarms F:\DH\CMA.DIR\HLP • User alarms F:\DH\USER\HLP

File names The following file names must be used, also for additional user alarms (i.e. must not be changed): • ALARM_GR.PDF [German alarms] • ALARM_UK.PDF [English alarms] • ALARM_FR.PDF [French alarms] • ALARM_IT.PDF [Italian alarms] • ALARM_SP.PDF [Spanish alarms] The names of the associated txt files (containing the jump list) must correspond as follows: • ALARM_GR.TXT [German txt file] • ALARM_UK.TXT [English txt file] • ALARM_FR.TXT [French txt file] • ALARM_IT.TXT [Italian txt file] • ALARM_SP.TXT [Spanish txt file]

Further languages The alarm texts are available in the following languages: CH: Simplified Chinese TW: Standard Chinese KO: Korean JA: Japanese SW: Swedish HU: Hungarian PO: Portuguese CZ: Czech TR: Turkish RU: Russian PL: Polish NL: Dutch The language codes for the file names of the user alarms must be used in accordance with the naming conventions specified above (must not be changed).


HE1/2-29


2.2.2

11.02

Expanding the Alarm Help If additional user alarms are to be displayed in the Alarm Help, these must be added in the form of a pdf file and in a txt file of the same name in the C:\USER\HLP directory.

Required files • *.pdf • *.txt

e.g. alarm_gr.pdf e.g. alarm_gr.txt

1 Define jump labels in the document The jump labels must be marked with an index entry in the document (e.g. WinWord) to be displayed at the control as pdf single-colum index list (page numbers right-justified) produced. 2 Create text file Copy the single-column index created above (page number right-justified) and save it as a txt file. Example: 10702 90 The search word (alarm number) is the same as the ID No. in this case. The text file requires the following syntax to call the pdf file: Insert the name of the pdf file in front of each line. Example: ALARM_GR.PDF ALARM_GR.PDF ALARM_GR.PDF

10702 90 10703 90 10704 91

3 Generate pdf file Print your document as a postscript file and convert it to "pdf" using the Adobe Acrobat Distiller. 4 Incorporate the files to the control The generated files (*.pdf and *.txt) must be copied onto the control, e.g. to directory F:\DH\USER\HLP.

HE1/2-30


11.02

2.2.3


User comments in Help The Help for alarms (key [i] in diagnostics) offers the notepad function where customized texts can be saved for the individual alarms. These texts are stored in the directory F:\USER\RH and are retained at MMC software installation (from SW 5.1). Note Alarm-specific texts can be stored by pressing the key [i] if the MMC Help function was invoked from the alarm overview or alarm log for the respective alarm. It does not work if you select the alarm from the directory.

2.2.4

Converting the Alarm Help from "Win-Help" to PDF Help" If the Help function is to be converted from Win Help to PDF Help, the procedure is the same as the one describe in the Section "Expanding the Alarm Help" above. 1. Define jump labels in the document for each alarm number: Use an index entry to mark the jump points in the document (e.g. WinWord) that is to be displayed as pdf file at the control and create a single-column index entry (page numbers right-justified). 2. Create text file: Copy the single-colum index created above (page numbers right justified) and save it in a "txt" file. The text file for the pdf call has the following syntax: The search word (alarm number) is the same as the ID No. in this case. Add the name of the pdf file before each line. Example: ALARM_GR.PDF 10702 90 ALARM_GR.PDF 10703 90 ALARM_GR.PDF 10704 91 3. Print out the file containing the alarm texts as a Postscript file (this works on all common platforms). For example, the file extensions are ".prn" for WinWord and ".ps" for Interleaf. 4. Convert the Postscript file to pdf with adobe Acrobat 4 using the Distiller. 5. Copy the files (*.pdf and *.txt) onto the control to directory F:\DH\USER\HLP.DIR.


HE1/2-31


11.02

Note • If additional user alarms are to be displayed in the Alarm Help, these must be added in the form of a pdf file and in a txt file of the same name in the F:\USER\HLP directory. • Please observe the naming conventions stated in Section 4.1.

2.3 Machine Data Help 2.3.1

Function In SW 6.1 and later, the Machine Data Help is based on the "pdf Help", i.e. a pdf file is opened when the Help function is called and the corresponding alarm is displayed in the control using Adobe Reader 4. The files containing the machine data are stored in the following directories: • Siemens MDs F:\MMC2\HLP • User MDs F:\USER\HLP

File names The following file names must be used, also for additional user MDs (i.e. must not be changed): • • • • • • • •

N_NCK_GR.PDF [German] C_NCK_GR.PDF A_NCK_GR.PDF S_NCK_GR.PDF DISPL_GR.PDF DROT_GR.PDF DLIN_GR.PDF HYDRM_GR.PDF

N_NCK_UK.PDF [English] C_NCK_UK.PDF A_NCK_ UK.PDF S_NCK_ UK.PDF DISPL_ UK.PDF DROT_ UK.PDF DLIN_ UK.PDF HYDRM_ UK.PDF

The names of the associated txt files (containing the jump list) must correspond as follows: • • • • • • • •

HE1/2-32

N_NCK_GR.TXT [German] C_NCK_GR. TXT A_NCK_GR. TXT S_NCK_GR. TXT DISPL_GR. TXT DROT_GR. TXT DLIN_GR. TXT HYDRM_GR. TXT

N_NCK_UK. TXT [English] C_NCK_UK. TXT A_NCK_ UK. TXT S_NCK_ UK. TXT DISPL_ UK. TXT DROT_ UK. TXT DLIN_ UK. TXT HYDRM_ UK. TXT


11.02


Layout of the text file Pdf file without language code

MD No.

Page

DROT.PDF DROT.PDF DROT.PDF ...

1000 1001 1002 ...

1 1 1 ...

Explanation of names

2.3.2

Name

Significance

N_NCK_GR.PDF C_NCK_GR.PDF A_NCK_GR.PDF S_NCK_GR.PDF DISPL_GR.PDF DROT_GR.PDF DLIN_GR.PDF HYDRM_GR.PDF

General MDs Channel-specific MDs Axis-specific MDs Setting Data Display MDs Drive MDs, rotary Drive MDs, linear Drive MDs, hydraulics module

Expanding the Machine Data Help If additional user machine data are to be displayed in the MD Help, these must be added in the form of a pdf file and in a txt file of the same name in the C:\USER\HLP directory.

Required files • *.pdf • *.txt

e.g. n_nck_gr.pdf e.g. n_nck_gr.txt

1 Define jump labels in the document The jump labels must be marked with an index entry in the document (e.g. WinWord) to be displayed at the control as pdf and a single-column index list (page numbers right-justified) produced. 2 Create text file Copy the single-column index created above (page number right-justified) and save it as a txt file. Example: 10000 170


HE1/2-33


11.02

The search word (MD number) is identical to the ID No. The text file for the pdf call now needs to have the following syntax: Insert the name of the pdf file in front of each line. Example: N_NCK_gr.PDF 10000 170 N_NCK_gr.PDF 10002 170 N_NCK_gr.PDF 10010 171 3 Generate pdf file Print your document as a postscript file and convert it to "pdf" using the Adobe Acrobat Distiller. 4 Incorporate the files to the control The files created (*.pdf and *.txt) must be read to the control from the F:\USER\HLP directory. n

HE1/2-34


11.02

Online Help (HE1) I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index A Alarms Comments ..................................HE1/2-31 Alarm text variables .......................HE1/1-17

C Category ........................................HE1/1-12 Category ID ...................................HE1/1-14

D Descriptive text ..............................HE1/1-16

H Help function................. HE1/1-7, 1-17, 2-26

Help references Multiple....................................... HE1/1-16

I Initialization file If.ini ........................ HE1/1-7 Instruction...................................... HE1/1-13 Instruction definition Sections ............................HE1/1-10, 1-13 Instruction text............................... HE1/1-16

S Search order Help............................................ HE1/2-28

T Technology.................................... HE1/1-14


HE1/I-35

Online Help (HE1) I Index

HE1/I-36

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) Contents


Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2)

1 General Preparations............................................................................................................... IM2/1-7 1.1 HW/SW requirements ............................................................................................................ IM2/1-8 1.2 Documentation....................................................................................................................... IM2/1-9 1.3 EMC/ESD precautions ........................................................................................................... IM2/1-9 1.3.1 RI suppression measures .................................................................................................. IM2/1-9 1.3.2 ESD precautions.............................................................................................................. IM2/1-10 2 Overview of PCU 20 HMI Devices ......................................................................................... IM2/2-11 2.1 Mechanical and electrical design ......................................................................................... IM2/2-12 2.1.1 Component ...................................................................................................................... IM2/2-12 2.1.2 Accessories ..................................................................................................................... IM2/2-12 2.1.3 Interfaces on right-hand side of housing.......................................................................... IM2/2-13 2.1.4 Interfaces on left-hand side of housing ............................................................................ IM2/2-13 2.1.5 Operator panel fronts....................................................................................................... IM2/2-14 2.2 Installation and mounting ..................................................................................................... IM2/2-15 3 Communication/Initial Requirements................................................................................... IM2/3-17 3.1 Internal communication........................................................................................................ IM2/3-18 3.2 Shipped state ....................................................................................................................... IM2/3-18 3.3 MPI/OPI network rules ......................................................................................................... IM2/3-18 3.3.1 Standard configuration..................................................................................................... IM2/3-20 3.4 Network operation with HMI Embedded (SW 6.2 and higher).............................................. IM2/3-23 3.4.1 Network configuration data .............................................................................................. IM2/3-23 3.4.2 HMI system settings ........................................................................................................ IM2/3-24 3.4.3 Examples: Network configuration .................................................................................... IM2/3-25 3.4.4 Procedure for HMI system ............................................................................................... IM2/3-27 3.4.5 Accepting network data ................................................................................................... IM2/3-30 3.4.6 Settings in Windows NT/2000/XP .................................................................................... IM2/3-31 3.4.7 Settings in Windows 95/98/ME ........................................................................................ IM2/3-33


IM2/i


11.02

3.5 Network Manager on the server........................................................................................... IM2/3-34 3.5.1 Installing/removing the Network Manager........................................................................ IM2/3-34 3.5.2 Operating the Network Manager...................................................................................... IM2/3-35 3.5.3 Configuration ................................................................................................................... IM2/3-36 3.5.4 User management ........................................................................................................... IM2/3-37 3.5.5 Folder sharing for a PCU ................................................................................................. IM2/3-39 3.5.6 Online help ...................................................................................................................... IM2/3-41 3.5.7 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... IM2/3-41 3.6 EXTCALL ............................................................................................................................. IM2/3-42 3.7 Error status screen "Blue screen" ........................................................................................ IM2/3-43 3.7.1 Restart ............................................................................................................................ IM2/3-46 3.7.2 System data transfer times .............................................................................................. IM2/3-46 4 Switching On/Power Up ........................................................................................................ IM2/4-47 4.1 Preparation for operation ...................................................................................................... IM2/4-48 4.2 Booting................................................................................................................................. IM2/4-48 5 Functions/Parameterization .................................................................................................. IM2/5-49 5.1 NCK Reset ........................................................................................................................... IM2/5-51 5.2 Configuring Caps Lock......................................................................................................... IM2/5-51 5.3 Mouse support in HMI Embedded Win32 ............................................................................ IM2/5-51 5.4 Activating screen darkening ................................................................................................. IM2/5-51 5.5 Change Language option..................................................................................................... IM2/5-52 5.6 Activating/deactivating the pocket calculator help................................................................ IM2/5-52 5.7 Setting the time and date ..................................................................................................... IM2/5-52 5.8 Editor settings ...................................................................................................................... IM2/5-53 5.9 Displaying acknowledgement icon for PLC alarm ................................................................ IM2/5-53 5.10 Substituting the boot screen .............................................................................................. IM2/5-53 5.11 Expanding user-configurable displays with the operator interface ..................................... IM2/5-54 5.12 Switching over channels/operator units ............................................................................. IM2/5-55 5.12.1 Several channels on 1 NCU ........................................................................................... IM2/5-55 5.12.2 Configuring example....................................................................................................... IM2/5-56 5.12.3 Several channels on several NCUs ................................................................................ IM2/5-60 5.13 Inch/metric switchover ....................................................................................................... IM2/5-60 5.14 Analog spindles.................................................................................................................. IM2/5-61 5.15 Selecting tool management ............................................................................................... IM2/5-61 5.16 Fine tool offset ................................................................................................................... IM2/5-61

IM2/ii


11.02


5.17 Activating a tool offset immediately.................................................................................... IM2/5-61 5.18 Selecting tools via a D number (flat D no.)......................................................................... IM2/5-62 5.19 Workpiece template ........................................................................................................... IM2/5-62 5.20 Zero offset.......................................................................................................................... IM2/5-63 5.20.1 Switching between the new/old zero offset display......................................................... IM2/5-63 5.20.2 Fine zero offset and basic offset..................................................................................... IM2/5-63 5.20.3 Actual value setting Preset, scratching ........................................................................... IM2/5-64 5.21 Hiding axes ........................................................................................................................ IM2/5-65 5.22 Displaying geometry axes .................................................................................................. IM2/5-66 5.23 Program simulation ............................................................................................................ IM2/5-66 5.23.1 Turning simulation and program testing.......................................................................... IM2/5-66 5.23.2 Turning simulation .......................................................................................................... IM2/5-66 5.23.3 Milling simulation 3D graphic .......................................................................................... IM2/5-66 5.24 Free contour programming ................................................................................................ IM2/5-67 5.25 Coordinate systems ........................................................................................................... IM2/5-68 5.25.1 Actual-value display........................................................................................................ IM2/5-68 5.25.2 Position of coordinate system......................................................................................... IM2/5-68 5.26 Remote diagnostics for PCU 20......................................................................................... IM2/5-70 5.27 Displaying and editing system resources........................................................................... IM2/5-70 5.27.1 Static user memory (SRAM) ........................................................................................... IM2/5-71 5.27.2 Dynamic user memory (DRAM) ...................................................................................... IM2/5-74 5.28 Generally available MD for the operator panel front........................................................... IM2/5-77 6 Alarm Texts and Help Files ................................................................................................... IM2/6-91 6.1 Alarm texts ........................................................................................................................... IM2/6-92 6.1.1 Alarm text files ................................................................................................................. IM2/6-92 6.1.2 Syntax for alarm text files ................................................................................................ IM2/6-93 6.2 Configuring text files in the foreign languages ..................................................................... IM2/6-96 6.2.1 General notes .................................................................................................................. IM2/6-96 6.2.2 Supported languages....................................................................................................... IM2/6-97 7 Software Installation / Upgrade ............................................................................................ IM2/7-99 7.1 Upgrading the HMI Embedded software on a PCU 20....................................................... IM2/7-100 7.1.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ IM2/7-100 7.1.2 Installation of the system software................................................................................. IM2/7-101 7.1.3 Installing the application software .................................................................................. IM2/7-106 7.1.4 Text disk: Updating the system software language ....................................................... IM2/7-112 7.1.5 Creating a PC card ........................................................................................................ IM2/7-114 7.1.6 Updating the software via PC card and Compact Flash card ........................................ IM2/7-114 7.1.7 Saving network data to card .......................................................................................... IM2/7-116 7.2 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on a PCU 50/70...................................... IM2/7-116 7.2.1 Installing the system software........................................................................................ IM2/7-117 7.2.2 Specifying environment variable (RAMDISK) for Win32 systems.................................. IM2/7-122 7.2.3 Installation from the application diskette ........................................................................ IM2/7-123


IM2/iii


11.02

7.2.4 Text disk: Updating the system software language ....................................................... IM2/7-129 7.3 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on PC with Windows ............................... IM2/7-132 7.3.1 Overview........................................................................................................................ IM2/7-132 7.3.2 Installation of the system software................................................................................. IM2/7-133 7.3.3 Installations of the application software ......................................................................... IM2/7-135 7.3.4 Additional requirements for the installation .................................................................... IM2/7-140 7.3.5 Changing the screen position ........................................................................................ IM2/7-140 8 Data Backup ......................................................................................................................... IM2/8-141 8.1 Data backup....................................................................................................................... IM2/8-142 8.1.1 General.......................................................................................................................... IM2/8-142 8.2 Backing up data with HMI Embedded ................................................................................ IM2/8-144 8.2.1 Data backup .................................................................................................................. IM2/8-144 8.2.2 Backing up modified machine data................................................................................ IM2/8-148 8.2.3 Activating data transfer via PLC .................................................................................... IM2/8-149 8.3 Reading ISO programs in/out via RS-232-C (V.24) ........................................................... IM2/8-153 8.4 Backing up data with HMI Embedded WIN32 with the PCU 50/70 .................................... IM2/8-153 8.5 Backing up data with ATA card PC for PCU 20 ................................................................. IM2/8-154 9 Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................... IM2/9-155 9.1 Action log ........................................................................................................................... IM2/9-156 9.1.1 Log file .......................................................................................................................... IM2/9-157 9.1.2 Displaying the log file / Setting the action log ................................................................ IM2/9-158 9.1.3 Reading out the log file .................................................................................................. IM2/9-158 9.2 Software version display .................................................................................................... IM2/9-159 10 Configure Windows in the NC Program......................................................................... IM2/10-161 10.1 Structure of the instructions ........................................................................................... IM2/10-162 10.2 Application examples ..................................................................................................... IM2/10-163 10.3 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgement .................................. IM2/10-165 10.4 Example program 2: Dwell time and optional text variables........................................... IM2/10-166 10.5 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode ............................................................................................................................. IM2/10-167 10.6 Example program 4: Positioning the input and output fields........................................... IM2/10-168 10.7 Example program 5: Graphic inserts.............................................................................. IM2/10-170 10.8 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgement mode with softkeys ................. IM2/10-171 10.9 List of files for the dialog screen files ............................................................................. IM2/10-173 11 Installation and Start-up of SINUMERIK HT6................................................................. IM2/11-177 11.1 Hardware/software requirements ................................................................................... IM2/11-178

IM2/iv


11.02


11.2 Documentation............................................................................................................... IM2/11-178 11.3 EMC/ESD measures...................................................................................................... IM2/11-179 11.4 Software replacement .................................................................................................... IM2/11-180 11.4.1 System and application software ................................................................................ IM2/11-180 11.4.2 Installing the HT 6 system software ............................................................................ IM2/11-181 11.4.3 Installing the application software ............................................................................... IM2/11-183 11.4.4 Language add-ons (text diskettes) ............................................................................. IM2/11-188 11.4.5 SW upgrade................................................................................................................ IM2/11-190 11.5 Alarm text files for HT 6 ................................................................................................. IM2/11-192 11.5.1 Syntax for alarm text files ........................................................................................... IM2/11-193 11.5.2 Alarm list properties .................................................................................................... IM2/11-194 11.5.3 Editing text files .......................................................................................................... IM2/11-195 11.6 Configuring text files in foreign languages ..................................................................... IM2/11-196 11.7 Switching over channels/operator units ......................................................................... IM2/11-197 11.7.1 Configuration example: Adapting NETNAMES.INI ..................................................... IM2/11-197 11.7.2 Configuration example: Adapting language texts ....................................................... IM2/11-199 11.8 PLC data ........................................................................................................................ IM2/11-202 11.8.1 PLC installation and start-up....................................................................................... IM2/11-202 11.8.2 Setting the time and date............................................................................................ IM2/11-202 11.8.3 Operation via MPI ....................................................................................................... IM2/11-202 11.9 Diagnostics .................................................................................................................... IM2/11-203 11.9.1 Action log.................................................................................................................... IM2/11-203 11.9.2 Error status screen "Blue screen" ............................................................................... IM2/11-206 11.10 Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................. IM2/11-210 11.10.1 NCK reset ................................................................................................................. IM2/11-210 11.10.2 Change Language option.......................................................................................... IM2/11-210 11.10.3 Enabling screen darkening........................................................................................ IM2/11-210 11.10.4 Setting the screen brightness.................................................................................... IM2/11-211 11.10.5 Disabling/enabling teach mode transfer.................................................................... IM2/11-211 11.10.6 One to four axis systems........................................................................................... IM2/11-211

I Index ....................................................................................................................................... IM2/I-213 I.1 Subject index ....................................................................................................................... IM2/I-213


IM2/v


IM2/vi

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 1 General Preparations

1 General Preparations

1

1.1 HW/SW requirements ................................................................. IM2/1-8 1.2 Documentation............................................................................ IM2/1-9 1.3 EMC/ESD precautions ................................................................ IM2/1-9 1.3.1 RI suppression measures........................................................ IM2/1-9 1.3.2 ESD precautions.................................................................... IM2/1-10


IM2/1-7


11.02

Introduction This Installation and Start-Up Guide describes the procedures for installing the PCU 20 with the software HMI Embedded. For further reading on special NCK, MMC, PLC, or drive functions, please consult the Descriptions of Functions/Manuals (see Section: Documentation). Titles of HMI/MMC: SW version 5 and lower: HW and SW: MMC 100.2 SW version 6 and higher: HW: PCU 20/50/70 SW: HMI Embedded, HMI Embedded Win32, Win2000, WinNT, WinXP

1.1 HW/SW requirements Hardware The hardware base for the HMI software (Human Machine Interface) is • a PCU 20/ 50/ 70 computer combined with an • operating panel (display unit): OP 010 or OP 010C or OP 010S, OP 012 or OP 015 or OP 015A. TP 012: Can be used only in conjunction with customized HMI software.

Software The software HMI Embedded is installed in the PCU 20 as standard when supplied from the factory. If the HMI Embedded software is not installed on the PCU 20, you must load it to the PCU 20 from the shipped CD. (see Section 7: SW installation). The same applies to software updates.

Equipment and accessories required You will need the following equipment and accessories to install the software on the PCU 20: • A PC/PG with an Omnidrive drive. MS-DOS and the SinuCopy software must be installed on the PC/PG. Directories with up to 8 MB memory space are set up on the hard disk of the PC/PG.

IM2/1-8


11.02


1.2 Documentation You require the following documentation for the installation and start-up of SINUMERIK 840D: 1. Operator Components Manual /BH/ 2. Description of Functions Basic Machine /FB1/ 3. Lists /LIS/ 4. Diagnostics Guide /DA/ 5. Operator's Guide HMI Embedded /BEM/ 6. Description of Functions ShopTurn /FBT/ 7. Description of Functions ShopMill /FBSP/ 8. Programming Guide Cycles /PGZ/

1.3 EMC/ESD precautions 1.3.1

RI suppression measures

Shielded signal leads To ensure safe, interference-free operation of the system, the cables specified in the individual drawings must be used. The shield must be connected conductively to the housings. Exception: If external devices are connected (printers, programming devices etc.) standard shielded cables connected at one end can also be used. However, these devices must not be connected to the control during normal operation. If operation with external devices cannot be avoided, the shields must be connected at both ends. The external device must also be connected to the control with an equipotential bonding conductor.

Installation regulations In order to obtain the best possible noise immunity of the overall system (control, power section, machine), the following EMC measures must be followed: Keep the signal and load cable as far apart as possible. Only cables supplied by SIEMENS may be used as signal cables to and from the NC and PLC. Signal cables must not be laid in the close vicinity of strong magnetic fields (e.g. motors and transformers).


IM2/1-9


11.02

Pulse-loaded high-current/high-voltage cables must always be laid separately from other cables. The distance (interference injection area) between the following cables must be as close as possible: Signal line and signal line Signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor Equipotential bonding conductor and parallel protective conductor.

!

1.3.2

!

Important For further information about suppression measures and the connection of shielded cables see References: /EMV/, EMC Directive

ESD precautions Important Handling ESD modules: • When handling electrostatic components make sure that the person handling the equipment, the work station, and packaging are well grounded! •

As a general principle, avoid touching electronic components unless the work to be performed makes this unavoidable. Hold the PCBs without touching the pins or printed conductors.

•

Components must only be touched if - You are permanently grounded with an ESD arm band, - You are wearing ESD shoes or ESD shoe grounding strips that are in contact with an ESD floor. Modules must be placed on a conductive surface (table with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam plastic, ESD packing bag, ESD transport container).

•

Never place modules in the vicinity of display units, monitors, or television sets (minimum distance < 10 cm).

•

Modules must never be brought into contact with statically chargeable and highly insulating materials, such as plastic sheeting, insulating table tops, clothing made of synthetic fibers.

•

Measurements of the module must only be performed if - the measuring instrument is grounded (e.g. via protective conductor) or - before measuring with a potential-free measuring device the measuring head is discharged briefly (e.g. touch unpainted metal on the control housing).

■

IM2/1-10


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 2 Overview of PCU 20 HMI Devices

2

2 Overview of PCU 20 HMI Devices

2.1 Mechanical and electrical design.............................................. IM2/2-12 2.1.1 Component ............................................................................ IM2/2-12 2.1.2 Accessories ........................................................................... IM2/2-12 2.1.3 Interfaces on right-hand side of housing ............................... IM2/2-13 2.1.4 Interfaces on left-hand side of housing ................................. IM2/2-13 2.1.5 Operator panel fronts............................................................. IM2/2-14 2.2 Installation and mounting.......................................................... IM2/2-15


IM2/2-11


11.02

2.1 Mechanical and electrical design The HMI Embedded software is shipped as standard with the PC PCU 20 and the SINUMERIK operator panel fronts OP 010, OP 010S and OP 010C (with SW 6.1 and higher: OP 012, OP 015 and OP 015A). If an operator panel is used, the PCU 20 is first screwed to it and then fixed to the mounting wall with tensioners. This procedure is described in: References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual, Operator Panel Front

2.1.1

Component The PCU 20 (Order No. 6FC 5210-0DF00-0AA0, with HMI Embedded) can be used in combination with operator panel fronts OP010, OP010C and OP010S (OP 012, OP 015 and OP 015A, with HMI Embedded software version 6.1 and higher).

Features • • • • •

•

2.1.2

Main memory (SDRAM) 16 MB Onboard flash memory 8 MB Flash card interface (68-pin PC board connector) Power supply: 24V DC Interfaces: - COM1 serial RS232C/V.24 interface (25-pin sub D connector) - COM2 serial RS232C/V.24 interface (9-pin sub D connector) - PS/2-keyboard (6-pin Mini-DIN) - USB interface (4-pin USB connector), for USB keyboard only. - MPI/DP interface RS485 (9-pin sub D connector), max. 1.5 Mbaud - Ethernet connection 10/100 Mbaud (8-pin RJ45 connector) SW 6.2 and higher - Flash card 100/200 Type I/II, max. 8 MB (68-pin) Interfaces to operator panel front: - VDS interface for TFT operator panel front (20-pin connector, 2.54 mm), - CMOS interface for STN operator panel front (34-pin connector, 2.54 mm), - Operator panel front I/O interface for USB data signal/display selection/ LEDs/power supply (26-pin connector, 2.54 mm), - USB interface for operator panel front (internal), (not "hot plug capable") - Floppy drive interface (34-pin ribbon cable connector socket)

Accessories

Diskette drive (SW 6.2 and higher) The external diskette drive can be connected to the PCU 20. The connection for the external diskette drive is located on the left side of the housing. For more detailed information about the diskette drive see: References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual, 3.5 Diskette Drive.

IM2/2-12


11.02

53

Interfaces on right-hand side of housing

PS/2-keyboard COM1/V.24

USB

Ethernet

MPI/L2-DP

Flash card/memory card

Fig. 2-1

Side view of right side of PCU 20 with interfaces

Table 2-1

Interfaces on right-hand side of housing

Connection COM1/RS 232C (V.24) COM2/RS 232C (V.24) PS/2 keyboard USB MPI/L2-DP (RS 485)

Ethernet (SW 6.2 and higher) Memory card

2.1.4

COM2/V.24

Depth = 56

2.1.3


Function Serial interface 1 (RS 232C/V.24), 25-way sub D connector Serial interface 2 (RS 232C/V.24), 9-way sub D connector PS/2 keyboard connector External connection for universal serial bus Multi-point interface/Profibus DP connection Connection of an S7 programmable controller, 9-way sub D connector Connection for local area network (LAN), SW option Slot for memory card or flash card 100/200 type I/II

Interfaces on left-hand side of housing Interfaces for the operator panel front: CMOS for STN display LVDS for TFT display I/O for USB data

Data interface for external diskette drive

Reset 24V power supply

Fig. 2-2

PCU 20 interfaces on left-hand side of housing


IM2/2-13


2.1.5

11.02

Operator panel fronts The main features of the OP 010/OP 010S/OP 010C operator panel fronts are as follows: • 10.4" TFT slimline screen (color) with a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels • Mechanical short-stroke keys with alphanumeric, cursor, control and hotkey keypads: Not on OP 012 and OP 015 • Status LEDs for power supply and overtemperature • Shift key for accessing the second key level • Front USB interface • Degree of protection IP54 • Can be combined with the PCU 20/50 component • Connection for external diskette drive (SW 6.2 and higher) The main features of the OP 012 operator panel front are as follows: • 12.1" TFT slimline screen (color) with a resolution of 800 x 600 pixels • Membrane keyboard with alphanumeric, cursor and control keypads • Integrated mouse • Direct keys for connection via direct key module (optional), PP031-MC or directly to I/O devices • Degree of protection IP65 Otherwise as for OP 010 The main features of the OP 015 and OP 015A operator panel fronts are as follows: • 15" TFT slimline screen (color) with a resolution of 1024 x 768 pixels • Can be combined with the PCU 20/50/70 component Otherwise as for OP 012

Interfaces on the front On the front you will find • A USB front interface for connecting an external keyboard Note You will notice that the electromagnetic compatibility of commercially available peripheral devices is usually rated for office use only. Components with higher certification are required for industrial use.

Interfaces at the rear Two cables for connecting the PCU are located at the rear: - I/O front interface cable K1: (ribbon cable) all signals which along with the display interface are used to connect operator panel fronts - Display cable K2 On the OP 010C: Interface X11, usually hidden under the blanking plate: Signals from the 16 direct keys "vertical softkeys"

IM2/2-14


11.02


2.2 Installation and mounting In combination with an operator panel If an operator panel front (e.g. OP 010) is used, the PCU 20 is first screwed to it and then fixed to the mounting wall with tensioners. Please observe the following when mounting the PCU 20: Ensure that the PCU 20 is protected against dust, humidity and heat. Do not expose the PCU 20 to direct sunlight. Install the device in such a way that it is not a source of danger (e.g. by toppling). The clearance at the rear of the PCU 20 must be at least 10 mm to ensure sufficient ventilation. The ventilation slots must not be covered.

■


IM2/2-15


IM2/2-16

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 3 Communication/Initial Requirements

3

3 Communication/Initial Requirements

3.1 Internal communication ............................................................ IM2/3-18 3.2 Shipped state ........................................................................... IM2/3-18 3.3 MPI/OPI network rules ............................................................. IM2/3-18 3.3.1 Standard configuration........................................................ IM2/3-20 3.4 Network operation with HMI Embedded (SW 6.2 and higher) ...................................................................................... IM2/3-23 3.4.1 Network configuration data ................................................. IM2/3-23 3.4.2 HMI system settings............................................................ IM2/3-24 3.4.3 Examples: Network configuration ....................................... IM2/3-25 3.4.4 Procedure for HMI system .................................................. IM2/3-27 3.4.5 Accepting network data....................................................... IM2/3-30 3.4.6 Settings in Windows NT/2000/XP ....................................... IM2/3-31 3.4.7 Settings in Windows 95/98/ME ........................................... IM2/3-33 3.5 Network Manager on the server............................................... IM2/3-34 3.5.1 Installing/removing the Network Manager .......................... IM2/3-34 3.5.2 Operating the Network Manager......................................... IM2/3-35 3.5.3 Configuration....................................................................... IM2/3-36 3.5.4 User management .............................................................. IM2/3-37 3.5.5 Folder sharing for a PCU .................................................... IM2/3-39 3.5.6 Online help .......................................................................... IM2/3-41 3.5.7 Troubleshooting .................................................................. IM2/3-41 3.6 EXTCALL ................................................................................. IM2/3-42 3.7 Error status screen "Blue screen" ............................................ IM2/3-43 3.7.1 Restart................................................................................. IM2/3-46 3.7.2 System data transfer times ................................................. IM2/3-46


IM2/3-17


11.02

3.1 Internal communication Internal communication between the operator panel and the NCU/CCU takes place via the operator panel interface, the OPI (1.5 Mbaud) or the MPI interface (187.5 kbaud). Communication within the system between the operator panel and the PLC (e.g. SIMATIC AS 3XX) is performed via the MPI interface (187.5 kbaud).

3.2 Shipped state Systems as supplied from the factory can consist of: HW: PCU 20/ 50/ 70 incl. SW: HMI Embedded System

3.3 MPI/OPI network rules The following basic rules must be observed when installing networks: 1. The bus line must be terminated at both ends. To do that, switch the terminating resistor in the MPI connector of the first and second node on, and the other terminating resistors off.

!

Important Only two terminations are permitted. On the HHU/HPU, the bus terminating resistors are permanently installed in the device. 2. At least 1 terminal must be supplied with 5 V. This is done by connecting an MPI connector with the terminating resistor inserted to an energized device.

!

Important The NC control must be located at the end of the connection*). 3. Spur lines (cables leading from bus segment to node) must be as short as possible.

!

Important Any unassigned spur lines should be removed if possible.

*) Address depends on SW version: Address NCK on MPI = Address PLC+1=3 PLC 314

IM2/3-18


11.02


4. Every MPI node must first be connected and then activated. When disconnecting an MPI node, first deactivate the connection and then remove the connector. 5. Either one HHU and one HPU, or two HHUs or two HPUs can be connected to each bus segment. No bus terminators must be inserted in the distributor boxes of an HHU or an HPU. If necessary, more than one HHU/HPU can be connected to a bus segment by inserting a repeater. 6. In a standard configuration without repeater, the cable lengths of the MPI or OPI must not be longer than: MPI (187.5 kbaud): Max. cable length 1000 m in total OPI (1.5 Mbaud): Max. cable length 200 m in total

Example A on HHU Terminating resistor inserted in connector on

PCU

Distributor box

on Terminating resistor permanently installed

MCP

OPI

on Control 840D MPI

on

Distributor box PG on HPU

Fig. 3-1

Network installation with two terminating resistors MPI: HPU, 840D control OPI: HHU, 840D control


IM2/3-19


11.02

Example B on Terminating resistor inserted in connector OP030

PCU on Terminating resistor permanently installed

MCP on on OPI

Control 840D

Fig. 3-2

3.3.1

Network installation with two terminating resistors in OPI: MCP, control

Standard configuration Connection of either one or two machine control panels (interface customer operator panels, hand-held programmers, PP031) and/or a HHU can be performed simply by setting parameters in the basic PLC program (FB1). In this case, parameterization with the STEP 7 tool "Communication Configuration" is not necessary. References: /FB1/P3: Basic PLC Program

Standard application SINUMERIK 840D with PCU and one machine control panel (MCP) or interface customer operator panel on the OPI.

Hardware requirements At least firmware version V 03_01_01 for • MCP • Customer operator panel / PP031

IM2/3-20


11.02


Bus addresses Each node on the MPI/OPI bus must have a bus address (0...31).

Standard bus addresses

PCU

1

OPI 1.5Mbaud

6 SINUMERIK 840D X101

13

NCK

MCP/Interface Customer operator panel

3 PG/ Start-up tool

0 X122

2

PLC

MPI 187.5kbaud

Fig. 3-3

Standard application with SINUMERIK 840D

Bus address and GD circle

!

Important The logical addresses of the components are set in the parameterization of the bus address (on the machine control panel) or the GD circle parameters (on the handheld unit) in the PLC basic program. The physical addresses on the OPI/MPI are always set in the GD circles. Every machine control panel, interface customer operator panel etc. must be addressed with a GD circle. In the control, the bus address is converted in the associated GD circle by means of the PLC program. The bus address and therefore the associated GD circles are set with the DIP-FIX switch on the machine control panel. On the MPI, however, the same GD circles are set for different bus addresses for the components machine control panel, interface customer operator panel, PP031 and HPU. This must be taken into account if more than one machine control panel etc. is used.


IM2/3-21


11.02

This relationship is shown in the table below. Table 3-1

Relationship between bus address and GD circle

Bus addresses on the MPI 15, 14, 13 12, 11 10, 9 8, 7 6 5, 4

GD circle 1 2 3 4 8 5

Example: 2 machine control panels (MCPs) on the MPI are to be connected to one control. The first MCP can be connected to bus address 15 (GD circle 1), the second to bus address 12 (GD circle 2).

MPI interface and GD circle Note If PLC lateral communication is to be configured on the MPI with the STEP 7 tool "Communication Configuration", for example, and one or several MCPs is/are to be connected to the MPI, it is important to ensure that the GD circles are uniquely assigned. The STEP 7-Tool "Communication Configuration" allocates the GD circles, starting at GD circle 1, in ascending order. If the MCPs on the OPI are connected, the PLC-PLC communication on the MPI is not affected. Example: With PLC-PLC lateral communication, GD circles 1 and 2 are assigned with the "Communication Configuration". The first MCP on the MPI can be assigned to GD circle 3 (bus address 9 or 10), and a second MCP can be assigned to GD circle 4 (bus address 7 or 8).

USB keyboard If a USB keyboard is connected, a reset must be performed on the PCU: key combination Ctrl + Q + Input or, if this key combination is not available, "Power OFF".

IM2/3-22


11.02


3.4 Network operation with HMI Embedded (SW 6.2 and higher) This function is an option. The PCU hardware has its own network card and can be integrated in an existing network. If the appropriate option is set, additional horizontal keys are integrated in the Program Manager of the machine and program standard applications; these softkeys symbolize a linked drive or a local drive. References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual Precondition: The Network Manager must be installed on the PC to be connected, see Section "Network Manager on the server".

Possible connections The number of possible connections between the HMI embedded system and different servers or local drives is limited to four.

3.4.1

Network configuration data

Drive machine data You need to set the following display machine data for authorizing input of configuration data: MD 9509: MM_USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY_CHG (value 0 ... 7) The following machine data are available for authorizing the use of the drives that are set up: MD 9510 MM_USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P MD 9511 MM_USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P MD 9512 MM_USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P MD 9513 MM_USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P (value 0...7)

TCP/IP protocol The only protocol supported for configuration within the network startup masks is TCP/IP. Section "Examples: Network Configuration" describes two possible configuration options: 1. A small self-contained network whose sole purpose is to network the PCU with one or more servers. 2. A large company network. In the first example, both the HMI Embedded configuration and the Windows configuration are explained in detail. The second example provides an explanation of the HMI Embedded system configuration only, as the company network is already in existence and the company has network administrators to perform the Windows tasks.


IM2/3-23


3.4.2

11.02

HMI system settings The following settings must be made to set up a small self-contained network: 1. IP addresses: For each computer you must select an IP address that is unique within the network. For purely private networks, RFC 1597 makes provisions for three address ranges so that there are no conflicts while using the Internet at the same time: 10.0.0.0 > 10.255.255.255 (Class A network) 172.16.0.0 > 172.31.255.255 (Class B network) 192.168.0.0 > 192.168.255.255 (Class C network) The IP addresses for small networks should be selected from these ranges. 2. Subnet mask: You need to select a subnet mask that is unique within the entire network. 3. Computer name: The computer name is optional, as it is only a symbolic identifier and can be replaced by the IP address at any time. 4. User name/password: The user name and password are used to protect communication between the HMI Embedded system and the associated Network Manager on the server. If you assign a user name and a password, you need to specify them in the Network Manager as well. This means that the HMI embedded system will be recognized as an authorized user. If you don't assign a user name and password, the system enters a standard user (PCU20_USER) and standard password so that the Network Manager can decide whether the request comes from an authorized user or not and refuse it if appropriate. See Section: User Management 5. Monitoring time (timeout) Set a timeout in seconds so that the connection setup attempts between the HMI Embedded system and the server can be canceled. This timeout is set to a default value (30); please only change this setting if problems occur (valid setting range 10 – 300 seconds).

IM2/3-24


11.02


3.4.3

Examples: Network configuration

HMI Embedded system and one server The simplest type of small network is to connect an HMI embedded system to an external computer.

!

Important As no "hub" is used, you will need a special twisted-pair cable for the point-topoint connection.

Crossed twisted pair cable IP address: Subnet mask: Computer name: User name: Password:

Fig. 3-4

192.168.0.1 255.255.0.0 PCU20 PCU20_USER1 ********

IP address: 192.168.0.2 Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 Computer name: SERVER

Example: One HMI system / one server

Three HMI Embedded systems and two servers Also, several external computers can be linked with several HMI embedded systems to form a network, e.g. 3 HMI embedded systems and 2 external computers: In this configuration the HMI embedded systems cannot access each other's drives. As a hub is available in this configuration, standard twisted-pair cables are used.


IM2/3-25


IP address: Subnet mask: Computer name: User name: Password:

11.02

192.168.0.1 255.255.0.0 PCU20_1 PCU20_USER1 ******** IP address: 192.168.0.4 Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 Computer name: SERVER_1


192.168.0.2 255.255.0.0 PCU20_2 PCU20_USER1 ********

IP address: 192.168.0.5 Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 Computer name: SERVER_2


Fig. 3-5

192.168.0.3 255.255.0.0 PCU20_3 PCU20_USER1 ********

Example: Three HMI systems / two servers

As in this case the same user name was chosen for all three HMI Embedded systems, the same password must be entered on each system too. You can also, however, enter a different user on each HMI embedded system. The respective users must then be entered in the Network Manager on the servers whose drives are to be displayed.

Company network A fixed IP address is used to address the company network. You will need to ask your administrator for an IP address for each PCU. The computer name is also provided by the network administrator and corresponds to the IP address that is set. Further, it is necessary to have the correct subnet mask for the network and a default gateway (router). If you intend to use a DNS server, you will also need its IP address and the DNS domain. The data must be entered in the "Startup" operating area under "Logical drives" "Network configuration".

IM2/3-26


11.02


You can select any user name you want, as long as it is known within the Network Manager so that a secure connection can be established.

3.4.4

Procedure for HMI system After you have set the machine data, perform a Power On. A new softkey "Logical drives" is displayed under "Start-up" which gives you access to the following submenus: Connections Netw. Config. Server Name File Types

Network configuration The network is switched off when the HMI Embedded system starts for the first time. There are three options: HMI boot without network • A network is not started when the HMI embedded system is booted, therefore no network drives are available. This setting is the default setting at initial system startup. After the first start, the user can specify network data if required. HMI boot with network: • At each start, the HMI embedded system is connected to the network and all network connections are set up. HMI boot with network if confirmed: • When the HMI Embedded is booted, a prompt is displayed asking whether to start with or without network. If you don't make a selection within 10 seconds, the system is started without a network connection. If you want to set up the network, you first need to set "HMI boot:" to either "With network" or "With network after confirmation"; this way the remaining fields can be edited and you can enter the following settings:


IM2/3-27


Fig. 3-6

11.02

Configuring the network

The remaining fields must not be filled in as this small network does not have a DNS server or a default gateway.

Connections Network connections can be defined or configured in the screen displayed below. The logical drives can either refer to a network connection or to an internal drive, i.e. a disk drive, an ATA card etc. With internal drives you need to enter the drive letter and the required path if necessary: - Diskette drive: A: - ATA card: C:\TEMP With external drives (network connections) you need to specify the full network path (\\Computer name\Sharename\Path name); the path name is optional: \\R4711\Workpieces\Templates \\R4812\Workpieces The softkey designation consists of two columns so that you can enter a text for each line of the softkey.

IM2/3-28


11.02


Fig. 3-7

Network connections: Logical drives

The names you specify must be available on the network computer.\\R1234 refers to the network computer in our example. The share name WORKPIECES must be specified on any hard disk drive on this computer.

Server names In order to assign symbolic names to the computers, the relevant stations to be addressed within the network must be entered so that their names can be resolved: Example Server name: 192.168.0.20 R2345 192.168.0.21 R2346 With these settings computers R2345 and R2346 can be addressed by means of their symbolic names.

Fig. 3-8

Server names


IM2/3-29


11.02

Operation: The first entry in the line is the IP address. The second entry is the computer name. The data already specified appears in the upper section of the screen. By selecting softkeys "New" and "Edit" you can go to the lower half of the screen where you can edit entries. You can change back to the upper section by pressing the "Cancel" softkey (data is not saved) or the "Save" softkey (data is saved).

Data types File types must be set up as required. These types are evaluated and displayed by the PCU. The Program Manager will use the file extensions to filter which files to display and which to hide. This filter function can be set as follows: If softkeys "New" or "Edit" are selected, then like with the dialog box "Enter server name", you change to the lower section of the screen and make additional entries or edit existing ones. To exit, press "Cancel" (without changes) or "Save" (with changes).

3.4.5

Accepting network data After changing the configuration data, you must restart the system for the changes to take effect in the HMI embedded system and the new login process to be performed. You can edit all screens, connections, Netw. Config., server names and file types in succession. After completing your inputs and activating the "Save" softkey, a prompt is displayed asking whether you want to accept the data and restart the system. You can only exit this dialog box by clicking "OK" or "Cancel".

IM2/3-30


11.02

3.4.6


Settings in Windows NT/2000/XP A network card must already be installed and operational within Windows NT/2000/XP. Then you can install the TCP/IP protocol if it is not yet installed.

Install the TCP/IP protocol For installation, go to "Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network/Protocols":

Fig. 3-9

Installing the TCP/IP protocol

To install the TCP/IP protocol click "Add...".


IM2/3-31


11.02

Configure the TCP/IP protocol After it is installed, you can select the TCP/IP protocol. You can configure the TCP/IP connection by clicking "Properties":

Fig. 3-10

Configuring the TCP/IP protocol

If several computers are to be integrated into the network, each computer must have a unique IP address. The subnet mask must be the same throughout the entire network. Other entries are not necessary.

Assigning computer name The computer name is insignificant for the communication between the server and the HMI embedded system, as the assignment of the symbolic name to the IP address takes place within the HMI embedded system. several servers are integrated in the network, the symbolic computer name facilitates communication between these computers. If you want, you can assign a computer name. To do this, go to "Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network/identification": Example: Computer name: Workgroup:

IM2/3-32

SERVER_1 GROUP1


11.02


Network Manager If user names and passwords were allocated for the HMI Embedded systems, you need to enter them in the Network Manager for the addressed server in each case: See Section "Network Manager on the server"

3.4.7

Settings in Windows 95/98/ME A network card must already be installed and operational under Windows 95/98/ME. Then you can install the TCP/IP protocol. To install the protocol, go to "Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network". The installed network components are displayed when you click "Configuration".

Configure TCP/IP protocol Select the TCP/IP connection, click "Properties" to carry out the configuration: Select "IP address" under "Properties for TCP/IP". The screen "Define IP address" appears. Enter the values for the IP Address and Subnet mask. With small networks you do not need to make any more entries in the screens.

Assigning computer name The computer name is insignificant for the communication between the server and the HMI embedded system, as the assignment of the symbolic name to the IP address takes place within the HMI embedded system. several servers are integrated in the network, the symbolic computer name facilitates communication between these computers. To assign the name, go to "Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network/identification": Example: Computer name: SERVER_1 Workgroup: GROUP1

Network Manager If user names and passwords were allocated for the HMI Embedded systems, you need to enter them in the Network Manager for the addressed server in each case: See Section "Network Manager on the server".


IM2/3-33


11.02

3.5 Network Manager on the server The Network Manager program must be installed, configured and started on every computer which must share directories for the PCU. The Network Manager is the PCU's communication partner in network operation. The Network Manager is shipped with the software CD "HMI Embedded for PCU". The program is stored in directory \sw_6_3\tools\net_serv and is installed by running the Setup program. The Network Manager is available for the operating systems Windows 95/98/ME and Windows NT/2000/XP. The PCU and HMI Embedded Network Manager communicate with one another via TCP/IP sockets.

Client (HMI Embedded system)

Client process Fig. 3-11

Server

Sockets

Network Manager

Client/server connection

For the connection to be secure, a password and user name must be set on the client and on the server. These are defined on the client as part of the network startup process. Any users who need access to the server must be registered in the Network Manager with their name and password. If no user names have been defined, the system uses a standard user name (PCU20_USER).

3.5.1

Installing/removing the Network Manager

Installation The HMI Embedded Network Manager is installed by running the "setup.exe" program. You can specify the following within this installation routine: • • • •

IM2/3-34

Installation path on the hard disk. Folder within the program folder of the Start menu. Automatic start of Network Manager every time the operating system starts. Network Manager is started immediately after installation.


11.02


Removal To remove the HMI Embedded Network Manager, select: "/Start/Settings/Control Panel/Add/Remove Programs", select the HMI Embedded Network Manager and click the "Add/Remove" button.

3.5.2

Operating the Network Manager

Start the Manager Start the Network Manager by selecting "Start/Programs//HMI Embedded Network Manager". When you start the Network Manager, an icon is displayed in the status line of the taskbar (Windows) to signal that the manager is active on this particular computer.

Fig. 3-12

Icon, Network Manager active on computer

Right-click the icon to open the shortcut menu which contains the following entries:

Fig. 3-13

Menu selection

Help options...:

Language setting in HTML Help: English or German

Help...:

Displays the main Help menu for the Network Manager

About...

Displays the software version of the Network Manager.

Debug

Menu option "Debug" opens another submenu and gives access to debugging functions if, for example, a link cannot be setup between the Network Manager and the PCU. The debugging functions are safeguarded by the system or manufacturer password and may be accessed by authorized persons only.


IM2/3-35


11.02

You must not activate this option when the computer is connected to the network as it greatly impairs the speed of the network connection. Message Window...

In this dialog box you can check the status of the current connection. Activate detailed trace file... Activates a trace file. The icon in the status line changes.

Fig. 3-14

Icon, trace file active

Config Network Manager...: Available only in Windows NT/2000/XP: Switches between a connection with Login and a permanent connection, see Section Configuration. Config HMI specific folders...: Creates HMI-specific shared folders which can be used only in communication between a PCU and the Network Manager, see Section Configuration. User Management... Creates a list of user names and associated passwords, see Section User Management Exit

3.5.3

Closes the Network Manager.

Configuration Depending on the operating system used, the Network Manager can be operated in two different connection modes. 1. Applies to Windows 95/98/ME and Windows NT/2000/XP. The connection to one or more PCUs exists only as long as the Network Manager is running. This variant requires a login process. 2. Applies only to Windows NT/2000/XP. The connection exists the whole time the operating system is running. This permanent connection is operative independently of the current user.

Pemanent connection (Windows NT/2000/XP) Click the Network Manager icon with the right mouse button, select the "Config Network Manager..." menu option. Select connection variant "Permanent Connection (Service)" and confirm with "OK". The following window appears:

IM2/3-36


11.02


Fig. 3-15

Permanent connection

The status data of the Network Manager are displayed in the upper part of the window. The following data must be entered in the lower part of the screen: • Computer or domain name followed by the user name, • User's password, • Password confirmation. The user name need not correspond to the current user, but the "permanent connection" must be authorized to access the directories of the entered user, see Section "User management". Note Setting up or clearing a permanent connection can take several seconds.

3.5.4

User management To ensure secure and reliable communication a user with associated password must be entered on every PCU. To grant this PCU access to shared directories on the server, this user must also be entered with his password in the user list of the Network Manager.

Simple network Each PCU is shipped with a standard user name "PCU20_USER"; this name is also entered in each Network Manager as soon as it is installed. However, this user name should be used only in a simple point-to-point connection because the data on the server can be accessed within a larger network and secure communication between the PCU and the server cannot be guaranteed if the standard user name is used.


IM2/3-37


11.02

Large network If you wish to share selected directories with a particular PCU, you must assign appropriate rights to the relevant PCU user in the Network Manager.

Display and edit the user list Click the HMI Embedded Network Manager icon with the right mouse button. When you select menu option "User management", a list of entered users is displayed. If you double-click the icon with the left mouse button, the "User Management" dialog box is also displayed. You have the following options within the "User management..." dialog: - New: Sets up a new user.

Fig. 3-16

In the top section of the screen, enter the user name (max. 40 characters) and its password (max. 40 characters). Repeat the password in the "Confirm Password" field. In the central area you assign access (operating system shares and HMI-specific shares) to the shared drives on the server computer of the relevant user. The left-hand field (List of visible shared folders) contains all folders to which the user can be granted access. The right-hand field (List of shared folders) contains all shared folders to which the Windows user who started the Network Manager has access and all HMI-specific shared folders that have been set up within the Network Manager. By clicking "ß Add" you can add a folder selected in the right-hand field to the left-hand list and thus make it accessible. By selecting "à Remove" you can delete a visible folder (on the lefthand side) again. You can enter hidden shared folders manually in the "Add hidden shared folder" field and click "ß Add hidden" to add them to the lefthand list.

IM2/3-38


11.02


The currently selected folder (and its path) is displayed at the bottom of the screen. If no directory path is displayed with Windows NT/2000/XP, this indicates that the current user does not possess the appropriate access rights. This information is always displayed with Windows 95/98/ME as these systems do not feature an access rights administration function. Abbreviation at beginning of status line: - OS: Operating system share - HMI: HMI-specific share "OK": Saves your settings and closes the dialog box. "Cancel": Discards your settings and closes the dialog box. "Help": Calls the help function.

3.5.5

-

Edit:

In this box you can edit an existing user which you have selected. The "Edit..." dialog operates on the same principle as the "New..." dialog.

-

Delete: This dialog deletes an existing user which you have selected. A safety prompt is displayed which you must acknowledge with "YES" if you really want to delete the user. To cancel the delete operation, select "NO".

Folder sharing for a PCU 1. Creating an operating system share: If a folder on the server is to be visible from a PCU, it must be enabled as a "shared" folder under Windows. These shared folders can also be used by other computers in the network. To enable a folder for sharing, click it in the Windows Explorer with the right mouse button: • In the shortcut menu, select option "Sharing...". • Select "Share As" and • enter a share name. 2. Configuring HMI-specific shared folders: HMI-specific shared folders are for accessing operations from the PCU to servers connected to the computer on which the Network Manager is installed. When you select menu option "Config HMI specific shared folders..." the following dialog appears:


IM2/3-39


11.02

Fig. 3-17

Edit field "HMI specific shared folder": Enter the local folder path which must be visible from the connected PCU. A selection of folder paths will be displayed under "Browse...": Select the appropriate path and click "OK" to enter it in the edit field.

Fig. 3-18

Edit field "Shared folder name": Assign a share name. This can be 40 characters long in total and must begin with a letter. Do not use any name that has already been assigned as an operating system share name. You can use the following characters: Upper-case/lower-case letters, numbers, underscore ("_") hyphen ("-"). "Add":

Add HMI-specific shared folders to the list field, system checks the name. It will be rejected if it has already been assigned as an operating system share name. "Edit": Dialog for editing entries already contained in the list. "Remove": Entries are deleted.

IM2/3-40


11.02

3.5.6


Online help Various windows contain the "Help..." button via which you can call the online help. The help file is available in both English and German. Click the "Help options..." button to switch between the two languages.

Precondition The following programs must be installed on the system: • Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or higher, • Microsoft Help HTML Viewer If the Help HTML Viewer is not available on your computer, the "hhupd.exe" installation routine is started to install the viewer. The Help HTML Viewer is integrated as standard in Windows NT/2000/XP and must not be installed again.

3.5.7

Troubleshooting There is an error in communication between the PCU and the HMI Embedded Network Manager. Check the ports.

Remedy 1. -

The following ports must be available: pcu20_ftp1 6743/tcp pcu20_ftp2 6744/tcp pcu20_ftp3 6745/tcp pcu20_ftp4 6746/tcp pcu20_ftp5 6747/tcp pcu20_ftp6 6748/tcp pcu20_ftp7 6749/tcp pcu20_ftp8 6750/tcp pcu20_ftp9 6751/tcp pcu20_ftp10 6752/tcp pcu20_ftp11 6753/tcp pcu20_ftp12 6754/tcp pcu20_ftp13 6755/tcp pcu20_ftp14 6756/tcp pcu20_ftp15 6757/tcp

If necessary, these ports are entered in the "services" file every time the HMI Embedded Network Manager is started. If a port is already being used by another program, the program must be uninstalled so that the port can be made available to the Network Manager. 2. Check the software versions You must use the correct Network Manager software version in each case for the HMI Embedded software version installed.


IM2/3-41


11.02

3.6 EXTCALL Extcall is supported. For security reasons a search is not performed automatically on the logical drives. During execution the first file is transferred via a quick download operation. For this reason, time-critical reload sections should always be included in the first execution file. The program to be called must be specified in a unique manner and with the full path and file name. A prefix part of the path name can be predefined via the channel-specific setting data 42700 SC_EXT_PROG_PATH. Example: Full path name in NC program: N10 EXTCALL ("C:\Workpieces\Sample.mpf") - with prefix part in setting data: SC_EXT_PROG_PATH = C:\Workpieces\ N10 EXTCALL("Sample.mpf") Note It is not advisable to execute a program directly from a network drive as there is no guarantee that the network performance will be stable or sufficiently dynamic. We recommend that you transfer programs via the network to an optional plug-in ATA / compact Flash card. The drive letter of this external storage medium always begins with a C:\. The storage media must always be plugged in before the computer boots. They cannot be hot-swapped. References: /PG/ Programming Guide Fundamentals

IM2/3-42


11.02


3.7 Error status screen "Blue screen" If the system crashes, an error status screen ("Blue Screen") showing current system information is displayed. The error status screen displays a brief description of the error which has occurred plus all relevant processor registers.

Backup option A complete system data image is downloaded to an external device. In a selection menu you can choose the following back-up options: • Transmission via RS-232-C to an external device, • to diskette.

System data display In the event of a system crash, the crash address, the register allocation and any additional information needed for crash analysis are displayed on the screen. Sorry, but HMI Embedded has caused an exception in task XXXXX Function at XXXXXXXX with code XXXXX The type of exception is : XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX The exception has occurred at cs : XX eip : XXXXXXXX! EAX= XXXXXXXX EBX= XXXXXXXX ECX= XXXXXXXX EDX= XXXXXXXX EDI= XXXXXXXX ESI= XXXXXXXX FLAGS= XXXXXXXX DS= XXXX ES= XXXX SS= XXXX ESP= XXXXXXXX EBP= XXXXXXXX FS= XXXX GS= XXXX Additional information : XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX ... XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX loaded at : XXXXXXXX CODE = XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX EIP: XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX STACK= XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX

Please send the above or saved information to the SINUMERIK Hotline! email : [email protected] Fill in subject : "HMI Embedded exception (SW XX.XX.XX; date)" Press 'S' to save data or press 'R' to reboot immediately

When you select key "S" (Save) you open the menu for saving data, "R" to restart the PCU.


IM2/3-43


11.02

Menu for saving data The selected system file is backed up on an external device via a serial interface or to diskette. In this menu you choose the baud rate and the interface for the serial transmission.

If you have installed a floppy drive on your PCU 20 press 'F' to save exception data to floppy disk To use serial communication interface set remote device to receive binary data and start in receive mode. Use key 'B' and key 'C' to change the settings for serial communication: 'C' - com port (HMI) : COMX 'B' - baud rate : XXXXXX Make sure you use the correct com port and the same baud rate as the receiving station. Then press 'T' to transfer data via serial line. You can also press 'R' to reboot immediately but we recommend you save the data first.

Transfer to disk When you select key "F" you start transmission of the exception trace to disk. The following status message appears: Please wait - data transmission in progress.

Output via serial interface Press key "C" to set the interface to which the serial cable on the PCU is connected. Press key "B" to set the baud rate selected on the external receiving device (PG/PC). Then set the external device to receive data and start it. Only when you have done this can you press key "T" to start the transmission. The following status message then appears:

Please wait - data transmission in progress. If you have problems with the remote device you can press key 'S' to stop transmission.

IM2/3-44


11.02


Cancel transmission If errors occur in the transmission, or you have set the baud rate incorrectly, you can stop the transmission again by pressing key "S". The following message appears about 2 to 5 seconds after you press key "S": Transmission stopped by pressing key 'S' press 'S' to return to save menu or 'R' to reboot

Press key "S" to return to the menu for saving data. Press key "R" to initiate a reset.

Transmission finished Once all the data have been transferred successfully, the following message appears: Transmission finished, XXXXXX bytes saved. When using serial transmission please check the number of saved bytes with the number of bytes received by the remote device. If there is any difference please return to the save menu by pressing the 'S' key and retry the transmission with a lower baud rate. Please send the saved information to the SINUMERIK Hotline! email : [email protected] Fill in subject : "HMI Embedded exception (SW XX.XX.XX; date)" press 'S' to return to save menu or 'R' to reboot

Note When you use the serial link, the number of transmitted bytes is also displayed and must match the number of bytes received. If the two numbers are not the same, abort the transmission by pressing key "S", select a lower baud rate and start the transmission again.


IM2/3-45


3.7.1

11.02

Restart The exception handler attempts an automatic restart in Restart mode. Try rebooting - in the event of no reaction after 1 minute, Try rebooting - in the event of no reaction after 1 minute, please switch off/on please switch Off/On

If the PCU has not reacted after 60 seconds, you must restart it manually by switching the power supply to the system or the operator panel front off and then on again.

3.7.2

System data transfer times The times taken to transfer system data to an external device are as follows: Baud 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Floppy

Complete image Approx. 64 min Approx. 32 min Approx. 16 min Approx. 8 min Approx. 4 min Approx. 2 min Approx. 1 min, 2 sec Approx. 40 sec. Approx. 1 min

Note These times apply on condition that the external device can receive the set baud rate without blocking.

■

IM2/3-46


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 4 Switching On/Power Up

4

4 Switching On/Power Up

4.1 Preparation for operation ........................................................... IM2/4-48 4.2 Booting...................................................................................... IM2/4-48


IM2/4-47

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 4 Switching On/Power Up

11.02

4.1 Preparation for operation Connect I/O devices Before you connect the PCU to the power supply you must connect an operator panel front. 1. Plug the connecting cable of the operator panel front into the relevant sockets on the interface side of the PCU. 2. When you have connected the operator panel front, the device is ready for operation. You will find information about how to adapt and set your interface and which connection cables you require in the peripheral equipment description. Note Remember to observe the industry standards of the components when you connect the peripheral devices!

!

Caution The I/O devices and the PCU must not be connected to the power supply when you make/break I/O connections (keyboard, mouse, printer etc.). Damage might otherwise result. This does not apply to USB connections.

Connecting the power supply The PCU is supplied with 24 V direct voltage.

Power supply On/Off Switch off the 24 V supply.

4.2 Booting As soon as the power supply is switched on the PCU boots automatically and displays a start screen if NC-PLC data communication has been established. If an NC-PLC data link has not been established, the message: "Waiting for Communication" (dark screen) appears.

Powerline In software version 6.2 and higher, the Siemens boot screens for the NCU/CCU types with "powerline" are specially marked. The control detects the "powerline" module automatically and the name is displayed in the boot screen. ■

IM2/4-48


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 5 Functions/Parameterization

5

5 Functions/Parameterization

5.1

NCK Reset.............................................................................. IM2/5-51

5.2

Configuring Caps Lock ........................................................... IM2/5-51

5.3

Mouse support in HMI Embedded Win32............................... IM2/5-51

5.4

Activating screen darkening ................................................... IM2/5-51

5.5

Change Language option ....................................................... IM2/5-52

5.6

Activating/deactivating the pocket calculator help.................. IM2/5-52

5.7

Setting the time and date........................................................ IM2/5-52

5.8

Editor settings ......................................................................... IM2/5-53

5.9

Displaying acknowledgement icon for PLC alarm .................. IM2/5-53

5.10 Substituting the boot screen ................................................... IM2/5-53 5.11 Expanding user-configurable displays with the operator interface .................................................................................. IM2/5-54 5.12 Switching over channels/operator units .................................. IM2/5-55 5.12.1 Several channels on 1 NCU................................................ IM2/5-55 5.12.2 Configuring example ........................................................... IM2/5-56 5.12.3 Several channels on several NCUs .................................... IM2/5-60 5.13 Inch/metric switchover ............................................................ IM2/5-60 5.14 Analog spindles....................................................................... IM2/5-61 5.15 Selecting tool management .................................................... IM2/5-61 5.16 Fine tool offset ........................................................................ IM2/5-61 5.17 Activating a tool offset immediately ........................................ IM2/5-61 5.18 Selecting tools via a D number (flat D no.) ............................. IM2/5-62 5.19 Workpiece template ................................................................ IM2/5-62


IM2/5-49


11.02

5.20 Zero offset............................................................................... IM2/5-63 5.20.1 Switching between the new/old zero offset display ............ IM2/5-63 5.20.2 Fine zero offset and basic offset ......................................... IM2/5-63 5.20.3 Actual value setting Preset, scratching ............................... IM2/5-64 5.21 Hiding axes ............................................................................. IM2/5-65 5.22 Displaying geometry axes ...................................................... IM2/5-66 5.23 Program simulation ................................................................. IM2/5-66 5.23.1 Turning simulation and program testing.............................. IM2/5-66 5.23.2 Turning simulation............................................................... IM2/5-66 5.23.3 Milling simulation 3D graphic .............................................. IM2/5-66 5.24 Free contour programming ..................................................... IM2/5-67 5.25 Coordinate systems ................................................................ IM2/5-68 5.25.1 Actual-value display ............................................................ IM2/5-68 5.25.2 Position of coordinate system ............................................. IM2/5-68 5.26 Remote diagnostics for PCU 20 ............................................. IM2/5-70 5.27 Displaying and editing system resources ............................... IM2/5-70 5.27.1 Static user memory (SRAM) ............................................... IM2/5-71 5.27.2 Dynamic user memory (DRAM) .......................................... IM2/5-74 5.28 Generally available MD for the operator panel front............... IM2/5-77

IM2/5-50


11.02


5.1 NCK Reset It is possible to initiate NCK Power-On Reset from HMI Embedded.

Operating sequence Select the operating area "Start-up" and press the softkey "NC" You can choose between "Normal mode" "Start-up mode" "Software update"

5.2 Configuring Caps Lock The key response of Caps Lock is set in MD9009 KEYBOARD_STATE: 0: SingleShift is active after power up 1: Setting not relevant! 2: CapsLock is active after power up (default setting) References:

/FB1/A2: Various Interface Signals

5.3 Mouse support in HMI Embedded Win32 The HMI Embedded Win32 software also supports use of a mouse.

5.4 Activating screen darkening Screen darkening via PLC You can enable the screen saver with the PLC in DB19.DBB0. The PLC takes precedence over the entry in MD 9006.

Screen darkening via PCU You can enable screen darkening with an entry in MD 9006 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME (max. 60 minutes). In MD 9006, the function "Screen dark from HMI Embedded" can be started using the following entry: MD 9006 = 1 < Time in minutes, e.g. 1 > MD 9006 = 60 < Time in minutes, e.g. 60 > MD 9006 = 0 Disabling the function (default setting) References:



IM2/5-51


11.02

5.5 Change Language option Two languages are implemented in the control system by default: 1st language German and second language English. These can be changed over using the softkey "Change Language". In addition to languages German and English, you can implement other languages with the application diskette (ger/e/fr/it/span) and special languages with text diskettes or language CDs: See Subsection: 7: Text diskette, update language of the system software In MD 9003 FIRST_LANGUAGE you can define which language is to be displayed when the control starts up. References:


5.6 Activating/deactivating the pocket calculator help In MD 9991 HMI_HELP_SYSTEMS you can activate or deactivate pocket calculator help. Bit 0 = 0 help display not active Bit 0 = 1 help display active (default setting)

5.7 Setting the time and date You can set the time and date in the PLC and synchronize the PLC and HMI Embedded time and date. This function is accessed via the Start-up operating area in the PLC menu by activating the softkey "Set time/date". If any changes are made to the time and date, the time and date from HMI Embedded are transferred to the PLC. You can check the synchronization in the "Current:" output field. The cyclical synchronization of the time can be activated/deactivated via • softkeys "Synchronous AUTO/ON" or "Synchronous AUTO/OFF"; • The time duration of the synchronization can be set via softkey "Manual synchronization", the default value is 10 minutes. Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 99. The values set are retained when the software is rebooted. Note Changes can only be made to the PLC operands with the appropriate password.

IM2/5-52


11.02


5.8 Editor settings In MD 9460 PROGRAM_SETTINGS you can define the following settings for the editor in the Program operating area: Bit 0/1 internal Bit 2 =0 no automatic enable for programs =1 automatic enable for programs Bit 3 =0 SK labeling contour calculator as text =1 SK labeling contour calculator as icons Bit 4 =0 Line feed is not hidden in all editors =1 Line feed is hidden in all editors Bit 5 =0 HD (hidden) lines are shown =1 HD (hidden) lines remain hidden The settings in the PROGRAM operating area are retained after a reset.

5.9 Displaying acknowledgement icon for PLC alarm By setting display machine data 9055 $MM_PLC_ALARM_PICTURE you can activate or deactivate the following icons: Value: -1 No icon display Value: 0 Icon labeled "PLC" is displayed. Value: 1 "Cancel" icon is displayed. This functionality refers only to PLC alarms, not to PLC messages.

5.10 Substituting the boot screen You can set up a directory for customized boot screens in which the selected screens can be stored according to the following scheme:

Screen name .bmp You can select any name, but you can store only one file per directory.

Resolution You must copy the screens to the directory with the appropriate resolution (BIN\640, BIN\800 and BIN\1024).

Colors The screen must be stored as a 256-color bitmap.

Procedure Run the installation process for application disk APP_INST.EXE.


IM2/5-53


11.02

Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

RETURN

Select the drive which you want to extract the application software files to.

Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.02 Install application disk to harddisk Select path for installation

Path: C:\HMI_0_2.APP ESC

RETURN

Select the path which you want to extract the application software files to. The files are copied and unpacked! Once the files have been installed, open the Explorer and copy the screen files (LOGO_OEM.BMP or OEM_*.BMP) to the directory with the appropriate resolution. Copy batchfile OEM_BMP.BAT from directory tools\oem_bmp on the shipped CD to the directories and start the file in each of the 3 directories (BIN\640, BIN\800 and BIN\1024). Then continue in the installation menu below: Install application to hardware PCU20 First language: English Second language: German = Install all modules to hardware = Modify configuration = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

- Help

5.11 Expanding user-configurable displays with the operator interface You can create user-configurable displays with the function "Expanding the Operator Interface" (Wizard). References:

IM2/5-54

/IAM/ HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide, BE1, Expanding the Operator Interface


11.02


5.12 Switching over channels/operator units 5.12.1

Several channels on 1 NCU

Function Using the user interface, you can establish a connection between the HMI Embedded unit and the connected NCU/PLC units in each operating area. Channel number of HMI Embedded, is written in DB19 DBB22 (DB19.DBB72) Channel Channel

Machine Channel Program

Number returned by the PLC, e.g. of MCP from DB19 DBB8

JO

400260 NC1: Machine control panel 1

\MPF.DIR T1N1.MP Channel11

Channel12

Channell13

Channel14

Channel15

Mill 1

Mill 2

Fig. 5-1

Channel menu

Only the channels of the corresponding group are displayed. Actuate the channel changeover key. The currently selected connection is displayed by the highlighted softkey (horizontal, vertical) if the channel menu is active.

Change over channel Use the vertical softkeys to change over to other channels.

Change over group Use the horizontal softkeys to change over to a different group; the channels of the current group are now displayed on the vertical softkeys. The changeover to a different channel (and thus also to a different NC if necessary) will only be performed if a vertical softkey is actuated. Note Only those connections are offered via softkey which are indeed assigned and the channels of which are active in the respective NC.


IM2/5-55


5.12.2

11.02

Configuring example Access to the channel menu configuration is granted by extending the file "NETNAMES.INI". To do this, proceed as follows: Define groups (a max. of 8) in "logChanSetList" Define the NCs and the channels with unambiguous names for the groups in "logChanList". With the channels (max. 8/group) - define the NC name in "logNCName", - the channel no. on the NC in "ChanNum" and - reserve softkey yes/no (using the command IsAGap" = True/False). Note The NC writes the channel number of HMI Embedded in DB19, DBB22 or DB19, DBB72 (2nd interface). The names in the file NETNAMES.INI are limited to five characters.

1st example: Operator panel front as main operator panel NETNAMES.INI [own] owner= HMI_1 ; Description of possible connections [conn HMI_1] conn_1= NCU_1 ; Description of significant net parameters [param network] bus= opi ; the mpi interface must be used on the SINUMERIK 810D [param HMI_1] mmc_typ = 0x20 mmc_bustyp = OPI mmc_address= 1

mstt_address = 6 name = HMI1 start_mode = ONLINE [param NCU_1] nck_address= 12 plc_address= 12 name = NCU1 ; Description of a standard channel configuration [chan HMI_1] ShowChanMenu = TRUE ; FALSE -> deactivate the channel menu DEFAULT_logChanSet = Mill_1 DEFAULT_logChan = Channel11 logChanSetList = Mill_1, Mill_2 [Mill_1] logChanList = Channel11, Channel12, Channel13, Channel14, Channel15, [Channel11] logNCName = NCU_1

IM2/5-56


11.02


ChanNum [Channel12] logNCName ChanNum [Channel13] logNCName ChanNum [Channel14] logNCName ChanNum [Channel15] logNCName ChanNum [Mill_2] logChanList [Channel21] logNCName ChanNum [Channel22] logNCName ChanNum [Channel23] logNCName ChanNum [Channel24] logNCName ChanNum

=1 = NCU_1 =2 = NCU_1 =3 = NCU_1 =4 = NCU_1 =5 = Channel21, Channel22, Channel23, Channel24, = NCU_1 =6 = NCU_1 =7 = NCU_1 =8 = NCU_1 =9

2nd example: Operator panel front as auxiliary operator panel NETNAMES.INI [own] owner= HMI_2 ; Description of possible connections [conn HMI_2] conn_1= NCU_1 ; Description of significant net parameters [param network] bus= btss [param HMI_2] mmc_typ = 0x10 mmc_bustyp = BTSS mmc_address= 2 mstt_address = 7 name = HMI2 start_mode = OFFLINE [param NCU_1] nck_address= 12 plc_address= 12 name = NCU1 ; Description of a standard channel configuration [chan HMI_1] ShowChanMenu = TRUE ; FALSE -> deactivate the channel menu DEFAULT_logChanSet = Mill_1


IM2/5-57


11.02

DEFAULT_logChan = Channel11 logChanSetList = Mill_1, Mill_2 [Mill_1] logChanList = Channel11, Channel12, Channel13, Channel14, Channel15, [Channel11] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =1 [Channel12] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =2 [Channel13] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =3 [Channel14] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =4 [Channel15] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =5 [Mill_2] logChanList = Channel21, Channel22, Channel23, Channel24, [Channel21] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =6 [Channel22] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =7 [Channel23] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =8 [Channel24] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum =9

Foreign language texts Especially for the channel menu, the file "chan.txt" exists in several language variants to be found in the text directories "\proj\text\d", (-> German texts), "\proj\ text\g" (-> English texts) etc., depending on the respective language. "chan.txt" files that not yet contain any texts have the following appearance: Example: File with OEM name specifications for channel-areas and channels //* text definitions for softkeys in channel switch menu *///* name of channel area 1 and names of channels of channel area 1 */ //* name of channel area 1 and names of channels of channel area 1 */ T_CHAN_AREA_1 "Mill_1" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_1 " Channel11" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_2 " Channel12" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_3 " Channel13" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_4 " Channel14" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_5 " Channel15"

IM2/5-58


11.02


T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_6 "" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_7 "" T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_8 "" //* name of channel area 2 and names of channels of channel area 2 */ T_CHAN_AREA_2 "Mill_2" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_1 " Channel21" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_2 " Channel22" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_3 " Channel23" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_4 " Channel24" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_5 "" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_6 "" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_7 "" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_8 "" The OEM user can enter texts by inserting them in the blank character strings (see above ")! 8 characters are possible per softkey bar; the carriage return is created using the characters "%n": e.g. "NC3Turn%nChannel1". Precondition: The application disk has been installed. Run the program APP_INST_EXE, the following screen appears: Install application on hardware PCU 20 First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Install all modules to hardware < 2 > = Modify configuration < ESC > = Esc to quit!

Please make your

-

Select menu item ; the following screen appears: Install application on hardware HMI Embedded First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Change first language < 2 > = Change second language < 3 > = Edit ASCII files < 4 > = Edit text file for first language < 5 > = Edit text file for second language < 6 > = Add user specific files to the application < ESC > = Back to previous menu! Please make your

-

Use menu item to go to the menu branch for modifying the file NETNAMES.INI, use menu items and to go to the menu item for modifying the file CHAN.TXT. Select menu item ; the following screen appears:


IM2/5-59


11.02

Install application on hardware HMI Embedded First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Edit MPI configuration data < 2 > = Edit display machine data < 3 > = Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT < 4 > = Edit CONFIG.SYS < ESC > = Back to previous menu!

-

Please make your

Select menu item ; an editor is started with which you can modify the "NETNAMES.INI" file. Select menu item or ; the following screen appears: Please select the text you are going to edit! < PGUP > = previous page < 1 > = Text for channel switch < 2 > = Text for Machine < 3 > = Text for Parameter < 4 > = Text for Program < 5 > = Text for Services < PGDN > = next page < ESC > = Back to previous menu! -

Please make your

Select menu item ; an editor is started with which you can modify the texts for the channel menu in the file CHAN.TXT. Press to quit the menu. IsAGap The command "IsAGap" can be used as an alternative to create wild cards for softkey positions.

5.12.3

Several channels on several NCUs The functionality for HMI Embedded corresponds to the functionality of MMC100.2 and is described in: References:

/FB2/ B3: Several Operator Panel Fronts and NCUs

5.13 Inch/metric switchover In the Machine operating area you can switch between the inch and the metric measuring system if MD10260 CONVERT_SCALING_SYSTEM ≠ 0, i.e. the softkey "inch/mm" is displayed. References:

IM2/5-60

/FB1/A3: Axis Monitoring Functions, Protection Zones /FB1/G2: Velocities, Setpoint/Actual Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control


11.02


5.14 Analog spindles The spindle load from 0 to 100% can be displayed in the spindle window for up to two analog spindles. For that, the following bytes must be set in DB 19: Analog spindle: DB19.DBB 6 Analog spindle: DB19.DBB 7 References:

/BEM/ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded

5.15 Selecting tool management The ShopTurn, ShopMill tool management function is activated via a display machine data. MD 9414 TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGEMENT for displaying ShopMill/ShopTurn and MD 9414 = 1 ShopMill/ ShopTurn tool management MD 9414 = 0 Standard tool management (default setting) MD 9020 TECHNOLOGY for milling/turning MD 9020 = 1 Turning machine configuration MD 9020 = 1 Milling machine configuration Note This functionality requires NCK software version 4 and later. References:

/FBW/ Description of Functions Tool Management /BEM/ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded /FBSP/ Description of Functions ShopMill /FBT/ Description of Functions ShopTurn

5.16 Fine tool offset The limit values of the fine tool offset are specified in MD 9450 WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT. The MD 9450 can only be changed if a permissible protection level is entered in MD 9202 USER_CLASS_TOA_WEAR. References:


5.17 Activating a tool offset immediately MD 9440 ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA can be used to specify that the active tool offset can be activated immediately when the part program is in the "Reset" or "Stop" state.


IM2/5-61


11.02

If you use the function in the reset state, machine data MD 20110 RESET_MODE_MASK bit 0 = reset mode must be set accordingly. Then the tool offset is not reset on a reset. References:

/FB1/K2: Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames,...

5.18 Selecting tools via a D number (flat D no.) In MD 18102 MM_TYPE_OF_CUTTING_EDGE you can define that the tool is only selected with the D No. A D number can be assigned just once per tool, i.e. each D number stands for one and no more than one offset data set. References:

/FB1/W1: Tool Offset

5.19 Workpiece template Workpiece templates for a program can be used for similar programs. For that purpose, you must create a workpiece with the name _TEMPL_. If you press the softkey "New", this workpiece is copied and renamed to a new name. All files in this directory are also copied into the new directory. Example: Suppose you want to create a workpiece template with the content "Daten.ini" and "TEST.MPF": Workpiece: _TEMPL_ _TEMPL_.MPF DATEN.INI TEST.MPF Operating sequence 1. Press softkey "New" 2. Define name: "ACHSE" 3. The new workpiece "ACHSE" is created with the following files: ACHSE.MPF DATEN.INI TEST.MPF

IM2/5-62


11.02


5.20 Zero offset Note The functions of HMI Embedded can be altered in the INI files, display MD or the user interface.

5.20.1

Switching between the new/old zero offset display You can switch between the old and new display in MD 9459: PA_ZOA_MODE. MD 9459 = 0 old display Global frames and basic frames are displayed in the zero offset screen. MD 9459 = 1 new display Global frames, basic frames and also system frames are displayed in the zero offset screen.

5.20.2

Fine zero offset and basic offset This function refers to the offset in the screen form "Settable zero offset" and "Base zero offset". Another column for the fine offset is inserted alongside the column for entering the offsets. The base zero offset (base ZO) is displayed like a settable zero offset and can be selected and modified using the softkey "Base ZO" in the screen form "Overview of zero offsets". Basic zero offset is activated in MD 18600: MM_FRAME_FINE_TRANS = 1. References:

/FB1/K2: Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, External Zero Offset

Access level The inputs will be checked against the display machine data MD 9203: USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE MD 9451: MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT The first data describes the protection level, and the second data the amount of a possible value that can be entered.

Access protection You can assign access protection for softkey "Basic ZO" (Parameters operating area) in the "Overview of settable zero offsets" menu via MD 9247 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA.


IM2/5-63


5.20.3

11.02

Actual value setting Preset, scratching

Introduction You can influence the behavior of the functions scratching and actual value setting, PRESET by the settings you made in specific machine data. The selected settings do not affect operation of the functions. (Display softkeys and values, saving input values). References:

/BEM/ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded

With the introduction of system frames in software Version 6, two types are available for the functions. The types are differentiated by a channel-specific MD: MD 28082: MM_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Bit: 0 Actual value setting, scratching 1 Zero offset external 2 TCARR, PAROT 3 TOROT, TOFRAME 4 Workpiece reference points (SW 6.3 and higher) 5 Cycles (SW 6.3 and higher) Type 1 without system frame: The MD does not exist (older NCK software versions) or bit 0 for system frame for scratching and actual value setting is not set. Type 2 with system frame: Bit 0 for system frame for scratching and actual value setting is not set in the MD. The display machine data MD 9422: MA_PRESET_MODE specifies the function PRESET/basic offset in JOG mode. 0: no softkey 1: The old PRESET in Machine operating area (default setting) 2: Actual value setting Note You can also set MD 9220: MM_USER-CLASS-PRESET in order to hide softkeys PRESET - Actual value setting and scratching.

Set actual value Set actual value with system frame G500 active - The values are written to the system frame G500 not active - An error message is output Set actual value without system frame G500 active (adjustable frames reset) - The values are written to the first basic frame (up to software version 4), or (from software version 5) depending on the entry in display machine data 9245: MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX = index of basic frame to the set basic frame

IM2/5-64


11.02


Scratching Scratching with system frame G500 active - The values are written to the system frame G500 not active - The values are written in the currently active frame Scratching without system frame G500 active (adjustable frames reset) - The values are written to the first basic frame (up to software version 4), or (from software version 5) depending on the entry in display machine data 9245: MM_MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX = index of basic frame to the set basic frame. G500 not active The values are written in the currently active frame G500 not active An error message is output References:

/FB1/ Description of Functions, K2: Frames...

5.21 Hiding axes Channel-specific MD 20098 DISPLAY_AXIS can be used to hide axes in the Machine operating area. It is possible to set for the workpiece or machine coordinate view separately whether or not the axis is displayed: Bits 0 to 15 Show (=1) / hide (=0) geometry axes (WCS) Bits 16 to 31 Show (=1) / hide (=0) machine axes (MCS) 20098 DISPLAY_AXIS MD number Display or hide axis on HMI Default setting: 0xFFFFFFFF Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 0xFFFFFFFF Change valid after POWER ON Protection stage: 2/7 Unit: Data type: DWORD Valid from SW release: 4.4 Bits 0 to 15: WCS Significance: Bit 0≠ 0 Hide geometry axis in the actual-value windows Bits 16 to 31 MCS Bit 16 = 0 Hide machine axis in the actual-value windows Note With the functions - reference point approach - acknowledgment of safe position (Safety Integrated) MD 20098 DISPLAY_AXIS is not evaluated.


IM2/5-65


11.02

5.22 Displaying geometry axes In MD 9421 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST you specify whether the geometry axes are to be displayed at the first position or not (e.g. before the auxiliary axes). MD 9421 = 1 Display geometry axes at the first position MD 9421 = 0 Do not display geometry axes at the first position (default setting)

5.23 Program simulation 5.23.1

Turning simulation and program testing PLC signal DB19.DBB20.6 is set to 1 when simulation is activated. This signal can be evaluated for the purpose of switching to program test mode or canceling axis or controller enabling signals (to prevent axes from moving during simulation runs). The signal is reset to 0 when simulation is terminated. To be able to simulate certain operations during a dry run even though the axis/controller pulses have been disabled, the transfer of status "ext. pulse disable active, terminal 663 open" to the NC must be inhibited. The machine manufacturer can achieve this by evaluating the above-mentioned PLC signal and activating the dry run simultaneously with NC Start. If drive MD 1012 FUNC_SWITCH, bit 2 = 0 is also set, status "ext. pulse disable active, Terminal 663 open" is not sent to the NC. References: /FBA/DB1: Operational Messages/Alarm Responses

5.23.2

Turning simulation With MD 9020 TECHNOLOGY =1, the turning machine configuration is activated and with it turning simulation. References: /FB1/A2: Various Interface Signals

5.23.3

Milling simulation 3D graphic This function is an option. With MD 9020 TECHNOLOGY = 1, the milling machine configuration is activated and with it milling simulation. References: /FB1/A2: Various Interface Signals Operation of milling machine simulation is described in: References: /BEM/ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded

IM2/5-66


11.02


5.24 Free contour programming The free contour programming is a support tool for the editor. You can generate both simple and complex contours using the contour programming function, see References: /BEM/ Operator's Guide HMI Embedded, Chapter 6. The contour elements of the contour chain are displayed by symbols or text.

Replacing text with symbols In MD 9460 PROGRAM_SETTINGS, bit 3, you can set whether you want to display the softkeys for selecting the contour elements as text, bit 3 = 0, or with symbols, bit 3 = 1, Technology turning or milling is switched on and activated for contour programming with MD 9020 TECHNOLOGY. MD 9020 =1 Turning MD 9020 = 1 Milling References:



IM2/5-67


11.02

5.25 Coordinate systems 5.25.1

Actual-value display In MD 9424 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM you can set whether • the positions of the workpiece coordinate system (programmed position, corresponds to default setting) or • the holding position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero must be shown in the actual-value display. MD 9424 = 0 Display in workpiece coordinate system, WCS (default) MD 9424 = 1 Display in the settable zero offset system, SZS (holder position of active tool) References: /FB1/K2: Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames, External Zero Offset

5.25.2

Position of coordinate system You can set the position of the coordinate system for milling in MD 9650 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM. Table 5-1

Machine data 9650

9650 MD number Default setting 0 Data type BYTE Significance

IM2/5-68

CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of the coordinate system Min. input limit: 0 Unit: Valid from SW release: SW 05.01.13 With this machine data you adapt the coordinate system of the user interface to the coordinate system of the machine. The coordinate system can assume the following positions:


11.02


Hw

Hv

Hw Hv M

Hu

Hu Hw

O

Hw

R

Hw

Hu

S

Hu

V

Hw NM

Hu

NN

Hw Hu

Hw

Hv

Hw

Hv

Hu

Hv Hv

Hv

NP

NQ

Hu

Hu NS

NT

Hu

Hv

NU

Hw

Hw

Hu

Hv

NV Hw

Hv

Hu

Hw

Hu

Hu

Hw

Hw Hv

Hw

NR

Hw Hv

Hu

Hv

Hw

Hw Hv

ON

OO

Hw

Hv Hw

Hv

Hu Hw

Hu OS

Hv

OT

Hw Hv

Hw

Hu

Hu

Hu

Hu OV

Hv

Hu

PM

Hw

PO Hu

Hw Hv

Hw

Hw PQ

PP Hu

Hu

PR

Hv Hu

Hv

Hw

Hv

Hw

Hw

Hw Hu

PT

PS Hw

PU

QM

Hv Hw

Hu

Hw

QO

Hv

Hv

Hu

Hv

Hv

Hv QR

Hw

QS

Hu

Hw

QP

Hw

Hu

Hv

Hu

Hu

Hv QN

Hv

PV

Hv Hw

Hu Hu

Hv

Hw

PN

Hw Hu

Hv Hv

Hv

Hv

OR Hv

Hw

Hu

OP

Hu

Hu

Hu

OQ

QQ

Hv

Hv

Hv

U

Hw

Hv

T

Hv Hu

Hw Hw

OU

Hu

Hu

Hu

OM

Hw

P

Hv

Hv

Hu

Hv

Hu

N Hw

Hv

Q

NO

Hu

QT

Hu

Hw

Fig. 5-2 Coordinate system


IM2/5-69


11.02

Note You can set the position of the coordinate system for turning in MD 9610 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM. References:

/FB1/K1: Mode Group, Channel, Program Operation Mode

5.26 Remote diagnostics for PCU 20 The remote diagnosis function is an option. The PC cards are identical for MMC 100.2 and PCU 20. The operation and functional scope correspond to that of MMC 100.2. The PC card containing the remote diagnosis software must be plugged in before the PCU 20 is switched on and the card must be started up on initial booting. (key 6 during boot, modem on COM1 or COM2...). The remote diagnostics software only supports graphics mode 12 (640 x 480, 16 colors). With higher resolution displays, a small centered screen is displayed. Note There must be no network configured! The remote diagnosis function is described in detail in References: /FBFE/Description of Functions: Remote Diagnosis and in the ReadMe file for remote diagnosis 6.1

5.27 Displaying and editing system resources Up-to-date information about the system resources (utilization display) specified below can be displayed and edited for the NC and HMI Embedded areas.

Precondition As different protection levels are assigned to machine data per default, the set access authorization for the editing of machine data must be sufficiently high. Depending on the authorization level, it will be possible to edit data such as cycles and machine data.

Procedure A softkey menu is displayed when you select the ETC key ">" in the Start-up operating area. When you select the "NC memory" softkey, the memory overview screen appears, showing the amount of NC user memory currently available for programs and data. The "SRAM" and "DRAM" areas have been provided to enable you to examine or edit those machine data which configure the memory. These areas in turn are divided into further groups.

IM2/5-70


11.02

5.27.1


Static user memory (SRAM) When you select the "SRAM" softkey, the total memory allocation is displayed and can be modified at the top of the screen. The memory-configuring machine data are divided into the following groups: Tool management Global user data Curve tables Compensations File system/program memory Protection ranges

Fig. 5-3

Static user memory SRAM

Detail view Click the area of interest with the cursor and select the "Details" softkey. The current data for the relevant machine data are then displayed. The block header contains the number and name of the machine data. The currently set values are output on the lines below. You can change the memory setting in the gray field after "New value" or "New number" to the right of the field containing the actual value. This new setting is entered temporarily. Your entry is automatically checked for limits and an appropriate message output in the dialog line if you make a mistake. The total available memory, taking into account any modified values, is displayed in the lower half of the screen. Softkeys "Axis+" and "Axis-" are displayed for axis-specific machine data. Softkeys "Channel+" and "Channel-" are displayed for channel-specific machine data. When you select softkey "Accept", the temporary values of the displayed machine data are transferred to the NC. You can exit the detail view by selecting the "Cancel" softkey or the Recall key "^".


IM2/5-71


11.02

Note Once you have pressed softkey "Accept", the "Cancel" softkey is no longer operative, i.e. any changes you have made cannot be undone.

Data backup When you change the allocation of a memory, alarm 4400 "Machine data alteration will cause reorganization of buffered memory (data loss)" appears. Since data are not backed up automatically, to avoid data loss you must back up the data yourself by way of an NCK Reset before you transfer the MD change.

Memory allocation: Tool management In the main SRAM screen, click the "Tool management" area with the cursor and then click the vertical softkey "Details". The following screen appears:

Fig. 5-4

SRAM - Tools

By selecting the horizontal softkeys, you can view or edit the machine data memory values of other subgroups.

IM2/5-72

"Tools":

MD 18082 MM_NUM_TOOL MD 18088 MM_NUM_TOOL_CARRIER

"Tool edges":

MD 18100 MM_NUM_CUTTING_EDGES_IN_TOA MD 18110 MM_MAX_SUMCORR_PER_CUTTEDGE MD 18104 MM_NUM_TOOL_ADAPTER

"Magazines":

MD 18084 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE MD 18086 MM_NUM_MAGAZINE_LOCATION


11.02


"Magazines OEM":

MD 18090 MM_NUM_CC_MAGAZINE_PARAM MD 18092 MM_NUM_CC_MAGLOC_PARAM

"Tool parameters":

MD 18094 MM_NUM_CC_TOA_PARAM MD 18096 MM_ NUM_CC_TDA_PARAM MD 18098 MM_ NUM_CC_MON_PARAM

"Tool management":

18080 MM_ TOOL_MANAGEMENT_MASK

Memory allocation: Global user data When you select the "Global user data" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the machine data of the following areas: "GUD files": MD 18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES MD 18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM "Number of variables": MD 18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK MD 18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN

Memory allocation: Curve tables When you select the "Curve tables" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 18400 MM_NUM_CURVE_TABS MD 18402 MM_NUM_CURVE_SEGMENTS MD 18404 MM_NUM_CURVE_POLYNOMS

Memory allocation: Compensations When you select the "Compensations" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the machine data of the following areas: "Sag compens.": MD 18342 MM_NUM_CEC_MAX_POINTS[ ] These configuring machine data are indexed machine data. The index is set in the top half of the screen. "E. error compens.":

MD 38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_ POINTS[0] MD 38000 MM_ENC_COMP_MAX_ POINTS[1] There are only 2 tables for the encoder/spindle compensation interpolation points. There is no need to select an index. "Q. error compens.": MD 38010 MM_QEC_MAX_POINTS[0] There is only 1 table for quadrant error compensation. There is no need to select an index.

Memory allocation: File system/program memory When you select the "File system / program memory" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the machine data of the following areas: "Directories": MD 18310 MM_NUM_DIR_IN_FILESYSTEM MD 18270 MM_NUM_SUBDIR_PER_DIR


IM2/5-73


"Files":

11.02

MD 18320 MM_NUM_FILES_IN_FILESYSTEM MD 18280 MM_NUM_FILES_PER_DIR

Memory allocation: Protection ranges When you select the "Protection zones" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the machine data of the following areas: "Global prot. zone": MD 18190 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_NCK "Chann-spec. prot. zone": MD 28200 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_CHAN MD 28210 MM_NUM_PROTECT_AREA_ACTIVE

5.27.2

Dynamic user memory (DRAM) When you select the "DRAM" softkey, the total memory allocation is displayed and can be modified at the top of the screen. To help you optimize memory utilization effectively, the memory-configuring machine data are divided into the following groups: Local user data REORG Cycles Interpolation buffer Execution from external source Synchronized actions Macros Tool management Protection ranges

Fig. 5-5

IM2/5-74

Dynamic user memory DRAM


11.02


Detail view For operating instructions, see Section "Static user memory (SRAM), detail view" Additional elements in DRAM memory allocation screen: Since the memory of some data areas is allocated to dynamic processes, their memory requirements vary. By selecting softkey "Peak values=0", you can reset the peak values of the currently displayed machine data to zero.

Memory allocation: Local user data In the DRAM main screen, click on the "Local user data" area with the cursor and then click vertical softkey "Details" to view and edit the memory settings of the following machine data: MD 28020 MM_NUM_LUD_NAMES_TOTAL MD 28040 MM_LUD_VALUES_MEM

Memory allocation: Reorganization When you select the "REORG" area and click on the vertical softkey "Details", you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 28000 MM_REORG_LOG_FILE_MEM MD 28010 MM_NUM_REORG_LUD_MODULES

Memory allocation: Cycles When you select the "Cycles" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES MD 18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM

Memory allocation: Interpolation buffer When you select the "Interpolation buffer" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 28060 MM_IPO_BUFFER_SIZE MD 28070 MM_NUM_BLOCKS_IN_PREP

Memory allocation: Execution from external source When you select the "Execution from external source" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 18360 MM_EXT_PROG_BUFFER_SIZE MD 18362 MM_EXT_PROG_NUM


IM2/5-75


11.02

Memory allocation: Synchronization actions When you select the "Synchronized actions" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the machine data of the following areas: "Synchronized action 1":

MD 28250 MM_NUM_SYNC_ELEMENTS MD 28252 MM_NUM_FCTDEF_ELEMENTS MD 28258 MM_NUM_AC_TIMER

"Synchronized action 2":

MD 28254 MM_NUM_AC_PARAM MD 28256 MM_NUM_AC_MARKER

Memory allocation: Macros When you select the "Macros" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 18160 MM_NUM_USER_MACROS

Memory allocation: Tool management When you select the "Tool management" area and click on the "Details" softkey, you can display and edit the memory settings in the following machine data: MD 18105 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_NO MD 18106 MM_MAX_CUTTING_EDGE_PERTOOL

Memory allocation: Protection ranges See Section: Static user memory (SRAM), memory allocation: Protection ranges

IM2/5-76


11.02


5.28 Generally available MD for the operator panel front Number Name, other Unit

MD designation

9000 Contrast -

LCD_CONTRAST

Default value

Minimum value

0 OP 030: 7, otherwise Adv: 8, Emb: 7, MT: 7, SM: 7, ST: 77 9001 DISPLAY_TYPE Monitor type, type of operator panel front 0 OP 030: 1, otherwise Adv: 1, Emb: 1, MT: 2, SM: 2, ST: 2 9002 DISPLAY_MODE External monitor (1: monochrome, 2: color) OP 030: 0, 0 otherwise Emb: 0, MT: 2, SM: 2, ST: 2 9003 FIRST_LANGUAGE Foreground language 1 1 9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION Display resolution 3 0 9005 PRG_DEFAULT_DIR Initial setting for program directory 1 1 9006 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME Time for screen darkening min 0 0 9007 TABULATOR_SIZE Tabulator length 4 0 9008 KEYBOARD_TYPE Type of keyboard: (0: BT, 1: MFII/QWERTY) min 0 0 9009 KEYBOARD_STATE Shift setting of the keyboard on power on (0: Single, 1: Perm., 2: CAPSLOCK) 2 0

Data type Activation

Cross-reference Protection level SW release

15

BYTE Power On

A2 3/4 -

2

BYTE Power On

A2 0/0 -

2

BYTE Power On

A2 3/4 -

Maximum value

2

5

5

60

30

1

2

A2 3/4 1.1 A2 BYTE 3/4 IMMEDIATE A2 BYTE 3/4 IMMEDIATE A2 BYTE 3/4 Power On SW2 A2 BYTE 3/4 IMMEDIATE A2 BYTE 3/4 Power On SW3.6 A2 BYTE 3/4 BYTE Power On

Power On


SW3.6

IM2/5-77


11.02

9011 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH Display resolution for the INCH dimension system 4 0 6 9012 ACTION-LOG-MODE Set action mode for action log 254 0 0xffff 9013 SYS_CLOCK_SYNC_TIME Time in which the HMI time is synchronized with the PLC 0 0 199 9014 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA Use channel-specific display MD * *** *** 9016 SWITCH_TO_AREA Default boot menu can be selected -1 -1 10000 9020 TECHNOLOGY Basic configuration for the simulation and free contour programming 0: No specific assignment 1: Turning machine configuration 1: Milling machine configuration 1 0 2 9021 LAYOUT_MODE Select OLD or NEW FASHION 0 0 1 9025 DISPLAY_BACKLIGHT Brightness level of the background lighting (HT6 only) 15 0 9026 TEACH_MODE (HT6) Teach mode to be activated 1 0 9027 NUM_AX_SEL (HT6) Number of axis groups for traversing keys 0 0

INTEGER Power On REAL IMMEDIATE INTEGER IMMEDIATE

A2 3/4 SW5.1 IM2, 4 2/2 SW5.2 IM2 0/0 SW5.3

INTEGER Power On

3/4 SW6.3 IAM, BE1 3/4 SW6.3

BYTE

A2 3/4

IMMEDIATE

SW5.1

STRING Power On

3/4 SW6.3

BYTE

IM2 3/4

15

Power On

65535

REAL Power On

4

REAL Power On

9030 EXPONENT_LIMIT Number of digits, for display without exponent 6 0 20 9031 EXPONENT_SCIENCE Engineering exponent representation in three steps 1 0 1

IM2/5-78

BYTE IMMEDIATE

BYTE Power On BYTE Power On

SW5.3 IM2 4/7 SW5.3 IM2 3/4 SW5.3 A2 3/4 SW5.1 A2 3/4 SW5.1


11.02


9032 HMI_MONITOR Determine PLC data for monitor information 0 0

0

STRING Power On

1/4 SW6.2

9050 STARTUP_LOGO Activate OEM boot screen 0 0

1

BYTE Power On

SW6.2

1

BYTE Power On

2/4 SW6.3

4

INTEGER IMMEDIATE

3/4 SW6.3

0xffff

REAL IMMEDIATE

3/4 SW6.3

1

REAL Power On

3/4 SW6.3

9052

SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE

Change cross-channel status display 0 0 9053 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT Sorting algorithm for PLC icons 0 9054 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER Filter settings for PLC icons 1 0 9055 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE Filter settings for PLC icons 1 1

9180 USER_CLASS_READ_TCARR Protection level for reading tool holder offsets generally 7 0 7 9181 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TCARR Access protection level for writing tool holder corrections generally 7 0 7 9182 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC Access level for inch/metric change over 7 0 7 9200 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA Protection level read tool offsets generally 7 0 7 9201 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO Protection level write tool geometry 7 0 7 9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR Protection level write tool wear data 7 0 7 9203 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE Protection level write fine 7 0 7

BYTE

A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 2/4

IMMEDIATE

SW6.1

BYTE IMMEDIATE

3/4 SW6.2

BYTE IMMEDIATE

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE


A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 -

IM2/5-79


9209 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT Protection level write adapter data 7 0 7 9210 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA Protection level write settable zero offset 7 0 7 9211 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD Protection level read user variables 7 0 7 9212 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD Protection level write user variables 7 0 7 9213 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH Protection level extended overstore 7 0 7 9214 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT Protection level program control 7 0 7 9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA Protection level write setting data 7 0 7 9216 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM Protection level read part program 7 0 7 9217 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM Protection level enter part program 7 0 7 9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM Protection level part program selection 7 0 7 9219 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN Protection level TEACH IN 7 0 7 9220 USER_CLASS_PRESET Protection level PRESET 7 0 7 9221 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA Protection level delete R parameters 7 0 7 9222 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA Protection level write R parameters 7 0 7 9223 USER_CLASS_SET_V24 Protection level for RS 232C (V.24) interface parameterization 7 0 7 9224 USER_CLASS_READ_IN Protection level for read in data 7 0 7

IM2/5-80

11.02

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE

A2 3/4 SW5 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 -


11.02


9225 USER_CLASS_READ_CST Protection level standard cycles 0 0 9226 USER_CLASS_READ_CUS Protection level user cycles 7 0 9227 USER_CLASS_SHOW_SBL2 Hide single block2 (SBL2) 7 0 9228 USER_CLASS_READ_SYF Access level for selecting the directory SYF 7 0 9229 USER_CLASS_READ_DEF Access level for selecting the directory DEF 7 0 9230 USER_CLASS_READ_BD Access level for selecting the directory BD 3 0

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

A2 3/4 A2 3/4 A2 3/4 SW3.5 A2 3/4 SW4.2 A2 3/4 SW4.2 A2 3/4 SW4.2

Note Protection level areas are being introduced for the display of the R parameters. They permit differentiated protection levels for defined areas of R parameters. The areas and protection levels can be defined in the following machine data. If area data overlap, the higher of the two protection levels applies to the overlap. 9246 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA Access level for writing system frames 7 0 7 9247 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA Access level for basic offset PA 7 0 7 9248 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA Access level for basic offset MA 7 0 7 9249 USERE_CLASS_VERT_MODE_SK Protection level for vertical SKs of area SK Protection for vertical SKs HEX 2004318071 0 0x77777777 9251 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLIST Display tool list 7 0 7 9252 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD Protection level for loading tools 7 0 7 9253 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD Protection level for unloading tools 7 0 7

BYTE IMMEDIATE

DOUBLE

2/2 SW6.2 K2 2/2 SW5.3 IAM 2/2 SW5.3 K2 3/4

IMMEDIATE

SW6.1

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE

BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On


FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1

IM2/5-81


9254 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLMOVE Protection level for relocating tools 7 0 7 9256 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR2 Protection level for displaying 2nd magazine list 7 0 7 9257 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR3 Protection level for displaying 2nd magazine list 7 0 7 9258 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOLE Protection level for creating new tool edges 7 0 7 9259 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL Protection level for deleting tools 7 0 7 9260 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGBUFFER Protection level for buffer On/Off 7 0 7 9261 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGFIND Protection level for search 7 0 7 9262 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLISTPOS Protection level for positioning 7 0 7 9263 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGNEXT Protection level for paging to next magazine 7 0 7 9264 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLNEWTOOL Protection level for creating tools 7 0 7 9265 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR1 Protection level for displaying 1st tool list 7 0 7 9266 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR2 Protection level for displaying 2nd tool list 7 0 7 9267 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR3 Protection level for displaying 3rd tool list 7 0 7 9269 USER_CLASS_TM_SKFINDPLACE Softkey empty location, displ. tool list 7 0 7 9270 USER_CLASS_TM_SKACTPLACE Protection level for loading to curr. location 7 0 7 9271 USER_CLASS_TM_SKLDTOOLDAT Viewing and editing tool data 7 0 7

IM2/5-82

11.02

BYTE Power On

BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On BYTE Power On

FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/4 SW4.1


11.02

9300 V24_USER_XON User: Xon character HEX 17 0 0xFF 9301 V24_USER_XOFF User: Xoff character HEX 19 0 0xFF 9302 V24_USER_EOF User: End-of-transmission character HEX 26 00 0xFF 9303 V24_USER_CONTROLS User: Special bits Bit array 76 0 0x3FF 9304 V24_USER_RTS User: Line-controlled 0 (RTS/CTS) 0 1 9305 V24_USER_BAUD User: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200) 5 (9600 baud) 0 5 9306 V24_USER_DATABITS User: Data bits 1 (8 data bits) 0 1 9307 V24_USER_PARITY User: Parity bits 0 (none) 0 2 9308 V24_USER_STOPBIT User: Stop bits 0 (1 stop bit) 0 1 9309 V24_USER_LINE User: RS-232-C interface (COM1/COM2) (COM1/COM2) 1 1 2 9310 V24_PRINTER_XON Printer: X on character HEX 17 0 0xFF 9311 V24_PRINTER_XOFF Printer: X off character HEX 19 0 0xFF 9312 V24_PRINTER_EOF Printer: End-of-transmission character HEX 12 0 0xFF 9313 V24_PRINTER_CONTROLS Printer: Special bits Bit array 76 0 0xFF 9314 V24_PRINTER_RTS Printer: Line-controlled 0 (RTS/CTS) 0 1


REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE


K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 SW5 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 -

IM2/5-83


9315 V24_PRINTER_BAUD Printer: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200) 0 1 ... 5 (9600 baud) 0 5 9316 V24_PRINTER_DATABITS Printer: Data bits 1 (8 data bits) 0 1 9317 V24_PRINTER_PARITY Printer: Parity bits 0 (none) 0 2 9318 V24_PRINTER_STOPBIT Printer: Stop bits 0 (1 stop bit) 0 1 9319 V24_PRINTER_LINE Printer: RS-232-C interface (COM1/COM2) (COM1/COM2) 1 1 2 9320 V24_PG_PC_XON PG: Xon character HEX 17 0 0xFF 9321 V24_PG_PC_XOFF PG: Xoff character HEX 19 0 0xFF 9322 V24_PG_PC_EOF PG: End-of-transmission character HEX 26 0 0xFF 9323 V24_PG_PC_CONTROLS PG: Special bits Bit array 144 0 0x3FF 9324 V24_PG_PC_RTS PG: Line-controlled 0 (RTS/CTS) 0 1 9325 V24_PG_PC_BAUD PG: Baud rate (300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600) 5 (9600 baud) 0 5 9326 V24_PG_PC_DATABITS PG: Data bits 1 (8 data bits) 0 1 9327 V24_PG_PC_PARITY PG: Parity bits 0 (none) 0 2 9328 V24_PG_PC_STOPBIT PG: Stop bits 0 (1 stop bit) 0 1 9329 V24_PG_PC_LINE PG: RS-232-C interface (COM1/COM2) (COM1/COM2) 1 1 2

IM2/5-84

11.02

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE

K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4

BYTE

K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4 K4 3/4

IMMEDIATE

-

BYTE IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE


11.02

9400 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 Absolute dimension tool length compensation GEOaxis 1 0.0 0 0 9401 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS2 Absolute dimension tool length compensation GEOaxis 2 0.0 0 0 9402 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS3 Absolute dimension tool length compensation GEOaxis 3 0.0 0 0 9410 TM_LOAD_PLACE Number of loading station 0 0 0 9411 TM_NUM_MAG Number of work magazine 0 0 0 9412 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSIZE Default for tool size 1111 1111 7777 9414 TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGAMENT Type of representation of the tool management 0: OLD 1: New (SW 5.2 and higher) 1 0 1 9415 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLPLACESPEC Default value for location type 1 1 99 9416 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLTYPE Default for location type 120 100 900 9417 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSTATE Default for tool status load 2 0 255 9419 TM_DEFAULT_DELETE_TOOL Default for tool data auto. delete 0 0 1 9420 MA_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO Distance-to-go display in the WCS window 0: WCS value 1: MCS value 0 0 1 9421 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST Actual-value display with leading geo axes 1 0 1 9422 MA_PRESET_MODE PRESET: 0 no PRESET 1 PRESET 2 Set actual value 1 0 2


DOUBLE IMMEDIATE DOUBLE IMMEDIATE DOUBLE IMMEDIATE

INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On REAL IMMEDIATE BYTE Power On BYTE IMMEDIATE REAL IMMEDIATE INTEGER IMMEDIATE

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE

K2 3/4 K2 3/4 K2 3/4 BA 3/4 BA 3/4 FBW 3/4 FBW 3/4 SW5 FBW 3/4 SW4.2 FBW 3/4 SW4.1 FBW 3/7 SW4.1 FBW 3/7 SW4.1 FBW 3/4

BYTE

SW4.1 K1 4/4 SW2 K1 3/4

IMMEDIATE

SW5

BYTE IMMEDIATE


IM2/5-85


11.02

9423 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL Max. skip levels in NC program 1 1 8 9424 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Coordinate system for actual value display 0: WCS 1: SZS (settable zero system) 0 0 1 9425 MA_SCRATCH_DEFAULT_MODE Tool offset calculation on scratching HEX 0 0 2236962

9440 ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA Active data (frames) are activated immediately after a change 0 0 1 9450 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for wear fine Length 0 *** *** 9451 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT Limit value for offset fine Length 0 *** *** 9459 PA_ZOA_MODE Display mode for zero offset Length 1 0

1

9460 PROGRAM_SETTINGS Data storage for settings in the PROGRAM area. The settings are retained after a RESET. Bit 0, Bit 1 used internally Bit 2: 1 Autom. enable for program Bit 3: 0 SK labeling contour calculator as text 1 SK labeling contour calculator as icons Bit 4: 1 Mask line feed (LF) Bit 5: 1 Show hidden lines (HD) 5 0 0 9461 MM_CONTOUR_END_TEXT String to be appended after completion of input at the end of a contour None 0 characters 80 characters 9477 TO_TRACE For internal testing purposes 0 0 9478 TO_OPTION_MASK For internal purposes 0 0

IM2/5-86

BYTE Power On BYTE IMMEDIATE

K1 3/4 SW5 K2 3/4

DOUBLE IMMEDIATE

SW5 K2 3/4 SW5.3

BYTE IMMEDIATE

K2 3/4 SW5

DOUBLE IMMEDIATE

K2 3/4 SW4.2 K2 3/4 SW4.2

BYTE IMMEDIATE

K2/IM2 3/4 SW6.1

INTEGER

A2 3/4

DOUBLE IMMEDIATE

IMMEDIATE STRING

SW6 A2 3/4

IMMEDIATE

SW5.1

REAL Power On

3/4

0xffff

INTEGER Power On

2/2

0xffff


11.02


9479 TO_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE Distance between individual magazine locations 0 *** *** 9500 NC_PROPERTIES NC properties: Bit 0: Digital drives Bit 1: Software start-up switch Bit 2 to 4: Reserved Bit array 255 0 9509

0xFF

DOUBLE Power On

3/4 SW6.3

BYTE

A2 3/4

IMMEDIATE

-

USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY_CHG

Protection level for network configuration 1 0 7 9510 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P Protection level for network drive 1 for Program operating area 1 0 7 9511 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P Protection level for network drive 2 for Program operating area 1 0 7 9512 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P Protection level for network drive 3 for Program operating area 1 0 7 9513 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P Protection level for network drive 4 for Program operating area 7 0 7 9516 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M Protection level for network drive 1 for Machine operating area 7 0 7 9517 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M Protection level for network drive 2 for Machine operating area 7 0 7 9518 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M Protection level for network drive 3 for Machine operating area 7 0 7 9519 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M Protection level for network drive 4 for Machine operating area 7 0 7 9600 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X Simulation default value X mm 0 -10000 10000 9601 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y Simulation default value Z mm 0 -10000 10000 9602 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA Simulation default value display range mm 100 -10000 10000

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE IMMEDIATE BYTE BYTE IMMEDIATE

INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On


FBT, FBSP, EMB 3/4 SW6.2 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 A2 3/4 SW6.1 FBMA, FBSP 3/4 FBMA, FBSP 3/4 FBMA, FBSP 3/4 -

IM2/5-87


11.02

9603 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X Simulation maximum display X 0 -10000 10000 9604 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y Simulation maximum display Z mm 0 -10000 10000 9605 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA Simulation maximum display range mm 1000 -10000 10000 9606 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS Simulation update rate actual value ms 100 0 4000 9610 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of coordinate system for turning 2 0 7 9611 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON Diameter display for transverse axes active 1 0 1 9619 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON Incremental infeed 1 0

1

9632 CTM_ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS Angle reference axis 1: 1st axis 2: 2nd axis 1 1 2 9650 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Position of coord. system for non turning 0 0 47 9651 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT Tool management strategy 4 1 4 9652 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL Tool monitoring 1 0 1

INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE IMMEDIATE

BYTE IMMEDIATE

REAL

FBMA; 3/4

FBMA; FBT 3/4

FBMA 3/4

BYTE Power On

SW5 FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW4.3 FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1 FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1

9661 CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES Input of customized M commands 0 0 4

BYTE Power On

FBSP 3/4 SW4.3

9663 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM Display radius/diameter for tool 1 0 1

BYTE Power On

FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1

9672 CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE Fixed tool location coding 0 0

BYTE Power On

FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1

IM2/5-88

1

IMMEDIATE

FBMA 3/4 FBMA 3/4 FBMA 3/4 FBMA 3/4 FBMA; 3/4

BYTE IMMEDIATE BYTE Power On


11.02


9673 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION Number of loading point 1 1 2 9674 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE Display magazine list 1 0 1 9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 Path to drive name in directory management C:\NC_Files 9677 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 Path to drive name in directory management 9678 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 Path to drive name in directory management 9679 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 Path to drive name in directory management 9900 MD_TEXT_SWITCH Plaintext instead of MD name Bit array 0 0 1 9990 SW_OPTIONS (SM/ST) You can activate HMI software options here 0 0 0xffff 9991 HMI_HELP_SYSTEMS (SM/ST) MD is for activating HMI auxiliary systems Bit 0 = 1 activates help for calculator (default) 1 0 0 9992 HMI_TESTAUTOMAT_OPTION Options for HMI_Testautomat 0 9993 HMI_WIZARD_OPTION Options for wizard 0 9999 TRACE Test flags for internal diagnostics HEX 0 0

BYTE Power On BYTE Power On

STRING (80) Power On STRING (80) Power On STRING (80) Power On STRING (80) Power On

BOOL IMMEDIATE INTEGER Power On INTEGER Power On

-

INTEGER Power On

-

INTEGER Power On

FFFF

INTEGER Power On

FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1 FBSP, FBT 3/4 SW6.1 FBSP , FBT 3/4 FBSP , FBT 3/4 FBSP , FBT 3/4 FBSP , FBT 3/4 3/4 FBSP, FBT 2/2 SW5.3 FBSP, FBT 2/2 SW6.1 FBT, FBSP, EMB 2/2 SW6.3 FBT, FBSP, EMB 2/2 SW6.3 2/2 ■


IM2/5-89


IM2/5-90

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 6 Alarm Texts and Help Files

6

6 Alarm Texts and Help Files

6.1 Alarm texts ................................................................................ IM2/6-92 6.1.1 Alarm text files ....................................................................... IM2/6-92 6.1.2 Syntax for alarm text files ...................................................... IM2/6-93 6.2 Configuring text files in the foreign languages.......................... IM2/6-96 6.2.1 General notes ........................................................................ IM2/6-96 6.2.2 Supported languages ............................................................ IM2/6-97


IM2/6-91


11.02

6.1 Alarm texts 6.1.1

Alarm text files

Description The installation procedure of the HMI Embedded Application software (see Chapter 7) transfers, Configuration settings, Texts, The configured user interface, The user software from the update directory on your PC/PG to the PCU 20. Here is a description of the adaptations you can make in the alarm text files.

Requirements RS 232C (V.24) cable between the COM1– interface of the PCU 20 and the COM1– or COM2 interface of your PC. Storage capacity on the hard disk about 3 Mbytes The following description assumes that you have already transferred the software from the HMI Embedded Application software to the hard disk of the PC/PG as described in Chapter 7.

Alarm texts/message texts The texts are on your PC with the standard Siemens entries on the hard disk drive you have selected. To simplify the description, we shall refer to it as C: from now on, even though you might have chosen another drive. The directory is: C:\mmc 100 pj\proj\text\.

Files stands for one of the following languages: D for German G for English F for French E for Spanish I for Italian. The text file names start with a and end with .txt: ALZ.TXT Cycle alarm texts ALC.TXT Compile cycle alarm texts ALP.TXT PLC–Alarm–/–message texts

Editor For editing you can use the DOS editor "edit" (OEM code page) or under Windows "Notepad" or "Wordpad" (ANSI code page, see Table 6.4). The standard texts contained in the text files can be overwritten by user-specific texts. This is done using an ASCII editor, e.g. the DOS editor. Alarm text files can be extended with new entries. You will find the valid syntax rules in Chapter 7.

IM2/6-92


11.02


More than one language The PCU 20 can be configured with two languages on-line. These languages are termed the foreground and the background language. The foreground and background language of the HMI Embedded System can be replaced using the application software and/or a language CD, as described in Chapter 7. Installation allows you to choose any combination of two of these languages of the application software as the foreground and background language.

Master language The master language is always German. It defines the number and sequence of alarm/message texts for the languages chosen by the user. The number and sequence of the alarm/message texts of the chosen languages and the master language must match. Note For the user up to 256 Kbytes are available (e.g. for additional text files, images, PLC user alarms).

6.1.2

Syntax for alarm text files

Alarm numbers The following alarm numbers are available for the cycle, compile cycle, and PLC alarms: Table 6-1

Alarm numbers for cycle, compile cycle, and PLC alarms

No. range

Designation

Effect

Cleared by

Name

60000 – 60999

Cycle alarms (Siemens)

Display, interlocking NC start

Reset

ALZ.txt ALZU.txt (user)

Display, interlocking NC start, motion standstill Display

Reset

61000 – 61999

62000 – 62999 63000 – 64999 65000 – 65999

Not used Cycle alarms (user)

66000 – 66999

67000 – 67999 68000 – 69000

Cancel

Display, Reset interlocking NC start Reset Display, interlocking NC Start, motion stop after execution of predecoded blocks Display Cancel

Not used


IM2/6-93


11.02

No. range

Designation

70000 – 79999

Compile cycle alarms PLC alarms in general PLC alarms for channel PLC alarms for axis and spindle PLC alarms for user PLC alarms for sequencers/ graphs

400000 – 499999 500000 – 599999 600000 – 699999 700000 – 799999 800000 – 899999

Effect

Cleared by

Name ALC.txt ALP.txt ALPU.txt (user)

Format of the text file for cycle alarm texts The number range specified in the list is not available for every number. References: /FB1/P3: Lists The text file for cycle and compile cycle alarms is structured as follows: Table 6-2

Structure of the text file for cycle alarm texts

Alarm number 60100 60101 ... 65202

Display 1 1 ... 0

Help ID 0 0 ... 1

Text or alarm number "No D number %1 programmed" 60100 ... "Axis %2 in Channel %1 not avail."

// Alarm text file for cycles in German

Alarm number List of alarm numbers

Display Here the alarm display type is defined: 0: Display in the alarm line 1: Display in a dialog box

IM2/6-94


11.02


Help ID (available soon)

Text or alarm number The text is displayed together with the position parameters in quotation marks. Characters " and # must not be used in alarm texts. The character % is reserved for displaying parameters. If an existing text is to be used this can be done with a reference to the alarm in question. 6-digit alarm number instead of "text". The alarm file can contain comment lines, these must start with "//". The maximum length of the alarm text for a two-line display is 110 characters. If the text is too long it is truncated and indicated by the symbol " * ". Parameter "%1": Channel number Parameter "%2": Block number

Format of text file for PLC alarm texts The ASCII file for PLC alarm texts is structured as follows: Table 6-3

Alarm No. 510000 600124 600224 600324 703210 ... 703211

Structure of text file for PLC alarm texts

Display

Help ID

Text

Text on MMC

1

0

Channel 1 feed dis. set

1 1 1 1

0 0 0 1

"Channel %K feed dis. set" "Feed disable axis %A" 600124 600224 "User text"

1

1

"User text%A ..."

Feed disable axis 1 Feed disable axis 2 Feed disable axis 3 User text User text Axis 1 ...

// Alarm text file for PLC alarms

Display References: /FB/P3: "Basic PLC Program" Here the alarm display type is defined: 0: Display in the alarm line 1: Display in a dialog box

Help ID (available soon) The text is displayed together with the position parameters in quotation marks.


IM2/6-95


11.02

Text or alarm number Characters " and # must not be used in alarm texts. The character % is reserved for displaying parameters. If an existing text is to be used this can be done with a reference to the alarm in question. 6-digit alarm number instead of "text". The alarm file can contain comment lines, these must start with "//". The maximum length of the alarm text for a two-line display is 110 characters. If the text is too long it is truncated and indicated by the symbol "*". Parameter "%K": Channel number (second digit position in the alarm number) Parameter "%A": The parameter is replaced by the signal group no. (e.g. axis no., user area no., sequencer no.) Parameter "%N": Signal number Parameter "%Z": Status number

Indexed alarms Indexed alarms can be used to display additional comments in the alarm line, e.g. an explanation for "action =%" Table 6-4 Examples: Alarm Display Help ID Text No. 010203 0 0 "Channel %1 NC Start without home position (Action=%2)" 016903 0 0 "Channel %1 Action=%2not permitted in current status" 016912 0 0 Channel %1 Action=%2only possible in reset state" References: /DA/Diagnostic Guide

6.2 Configuring text files in the foreign languages 6.2.1

General notes Text files in ANSI format are used. If you wish to use cycle, alarm and message texts from earlier SW versions (DOS format), you must convert them to ANSI format beforehand: Convert the old text file (OEM cycles text file) to an ANSI text file with "Save As.." in the Windows Editor (WinWord, Notepad, etc.). Load the new text file supplied with software version 6 and the converted old text file into the Windows editor, combine and save. Replace the TXT file supplied with software version 6 with the created text file in the corresponding language catalog. Mixed code pages within a file are not supported. *.TXT files are text files that are identified by the following identifiers at the beginning of the file (before the first valid text; comments are admitted).

IM2/6-96


11.02


Header in *.TXT files // CP = XXXX Number of code page used to create the file // IDEO = YES Yes: Logographic language No: Single-byte language (Standard: No) // ANSI = YES Yes: ANSI code page No: OEM code page (Standard: No) // UNICODE = No Yes: Unicode (available soon) No: Single byte (Standard: No)

6.2.2

Supported languages To maintain compatibility with text files already existing, the following conversions from OEM to ANSI code pages are supported: Table 6-5

Languages and ANSI tables/code pages used

Language

Language code

Code page (DOS)

German English Finnish French Italian Dutch Polish Portuguese Russian Swedish Spanish Czech Turkish Hungarian

D G P F I N K Y X S E Z R U

850 850 850 850 850 850 852 850 866 850 850 852 857 852

ANSI table (Windows) 1252 1252 1252 1252 1252 1252 1250 1252 1251 1252 1252 1250 1254 1250

With Asian languages, no conversion is required, since in this case ANSI and OEM code pages are identical. For all languages not mentioned here no OEM code pages are supported. ■


IM2/6-97


IM2/6-98

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 7 Software Installation / Upgrade

7

7 Software Installation / Upgrade

7.1 Upgrading the HMI Embedded software on a PCU 20........... IM2/7-100 7.1.1 Overview.............................................................................. IM2/7-100 7.1.2 Installation of the system software ...................................... IM2/7-101 7.1.3 Installing the application software........................................ IM2/7-106 7.1.4 Text disk: Updating the system software language............. IM2/7-112 7.1.5 Creating a PC card .............................................................. IM2/7-114 7.1.6 Updating the software via PC card and Compact Flash card...................................................................................... IM2/7-114 7.1.7 Saving network data to card ................................................ IM2/7-116 7.2 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on a PCU 50/70.............................................................................. IM2/7-116 7.2.1 Installing the system software ............................................. IM2/7-117 7.2.2 Specifying environment variable (RAMDISK) for Win32 systems................................................................................ IM2/7-122 7.2.3 Installation from the application diskette ............................. IM2/7-123 7.2.4 Text disk: Updating the system software language............. IM2/7-129 7.3 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on PC with Windows................................................................................. IM2/7-132 7.3.1 Overview.............................................................................. IM2/7-132 7.3.2 Installation of the system software ...................................... IM2/7-133 7.3.3 Installations of the application software............................... IM2/7-135 7.3.4 Additional requirements for the installation ......................... IM2/7-140 7.3.5 Changing the screen position .............................................. IM2/7-140


IM2/7-99


11.02

7.1 Upgrading the HMI Embedded software on a PCU 20 7.1.1

Overview

Scope of delivery Upgrade installations are supplied with each software version. These are to be found in the first installation directory in the files "siemensd.txt (German)" and "siemense.txt (English)". The HMI Embedded Software is supplied on CD and contains: 1. System software (also called installation software) 2. Application software

Software areas The CD contains the following software: • System software • User software The software of HMI Embedded is copied to the internal EPROM via PC card (SINUCOPY). The system software contains all the files that are required for the operation of HMI Embedded. Language combinations other than English and German can be subsequently installed from the application diskette and/or the language CD. All system texts, texts for PLC messages and cycle alarm texts are located in the user software area.

System software Installation of the system software gives you a fully operational standard HMI Embedded system with English as the first language and German as the second language. The alarm text files and message files only contain Siemens texts.

Application software The application software supports you with: adapting and extending alarm text files (alp, alpu, alz, alzu, ...) selecting one, two, or several (language CD) languages setting special MD settings adapting configuration parameters for 1 or several operator panel fronts/NCUs (NETNAMES.INI), channel switchover transferring customized screenforms for PLC status creating additional user displays with the software: Expanding the Operator Interface (Wizard) The following section describes how to proceed to install the two software packages. For rules on adapting files before downloading them to HMI Embedded, please refer to Chapter 8: Data Backup.

IM2/7-100


11.02

7.1.2


Installation of the system software

Requirements • Before you can update the system software (software version) of the PCU 20, you must put it in service mode (see below). • You also need a PC/PG from which to load the new system software. MS-DOS or higher must be installed on the PC/PG. • Directories with up to 8 MB memory space are set up on the hard disk of the PC/PG. The data that are selected during installation for transfer are stored in these directories.

Setting ready-to-receive The PCU 20 unit must be set to ready-to-receive state each time software is transferred to it from the PC/PG. The PCU 20 is switched off. Switch on the PCU 20, wait until the serial number is displayed and then press key "6" on the operator panel. As an alternative, you can also press key "6" intermittently.

1. Call SYS_INST.EXE Start program SYS_INST.EXE from SW_6_2\PCU20\Disk1 on the shipped CD. The following menu appears:

2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit version 06.02 Install system disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the drive on the PC/PG you want to copy the system disk files to. This can be any hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access.


IM2/7-101


11.02

3. Specify the path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit 06.02 Install system disk to harddisk Select path for installation

Path: C:\HMI_0_2.SYS ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the path you want to copy the system disk files to. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "C:\HMI_0_2.SYS".

!

Important If the directory already exists it is overwritten!

4. Start the installation process When you press "Return", the following installation menu appears: System installation HMI Embedded

= Install systemdisk to harddisk = Install systemdisk to harddisk & to hardware = Select optional files for install = Quit program! Please make your choice

- Help

1. Install the system software on the hard disk (PC/PG)! With this menu item, the system software can then be installed on several PC/PGs. 2. Install the system software on the hard disk (PC/PG) and transfer the current configuration to the PCU 20 hardware! By selecting this menu option, you can transfer the system software to the hard disk (PC/PG) and install it immediately afterwards on the PCU 20 hardware. 3. Update or change the DOS/BIOS software 4. ESC 5. F1

IM2/7-102

Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).


11.02


When you select or the files are copied to the hard disk. If you selected menu item in the first menu, the system software installation is terminated automatically after file transfer and the start menu is displayed again. If you selected the program continues with the transfer menu. The following menu appears:

Operator panel selection Selection of operator panel Selected Hardware: PCU 20 10 (640 x 400) = InstallOP software via serial line OP 12 Memory (800 xCard 600)image = Create Flash 15 port (1024 x 768) = SelectOP COM = Quit program! = Cancel

- Help

= Accept

= Toggle

Select the appropriate operator panel, confirm your selection with "F4" and wait for about 20 seconds.

Change the DOS/BIOS software (not necessary with the current version) Is only necessary if it is specifically mentioned in the software upgrade instructions. This point is omitted in standard installations. Example: You are installing e.g. SW 6.1 You will find the following table in the upgrade instructions: Table7-1

Selection of basic system files

System file ROMDOS20.BIN

6.1 -

Previous software release 5.3 -

+ You need to select the relevant file by entering its number in the submenu for transfer to the PCU 20. If the number is input more than once, the selection switches between YES and NO. -

You do not need to select the file for transfer to the PCU 20.

Whether it is necessary or not to transfer one or several of the files specified in the table to the PCU 20 depends on the software version that is currently in use on the PCU 20.


IM2/7-103


11.02

Only the specified files should be used. Select Files to install

= ROMDOS_2.BIN

NO

= Back to main menu

Please make your choice

1. ESC

- Help

Choose whether you want to transfer ROM-DOS and BIOS (Video BIOS, System BIOS, ROMDOS, PCIN). Return to the installation menu with validation of selected files

6. Transfer the software to the hardware The transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1 = Install software via serial line = Create Flash Memory Card image = Select COM port = Quit program Please make your choice

- Help

1. Software cannot be transferred via RS-232-C! 2. This option enables you to accelerate the update process. A flash memory card image is created which you can store in any directory. If the specified directory does not exist, it is created. If the directory already contains a flash memory card image, it is overwritten. The remaining procedure is described in section "Creating a PC card". 3. If the port shown at "Selected COM port:" does not match the port to which the cable to the PCU 20 is connected, press . In the submenu that follows, press the number that corresponds to the COM interface used. You then return to the transfer menu - the selected port is displayed there.

IM2/7-104


11.02


When you start transfer, the following warning appears to ensure that you install the software on the correct hardware: Transfer software to hardware PCU20 Selected COM port : COM1 = Install system via serial line = = =

Important advice! Please note!!! Do you have the correct HMI hardware? (old MMC100.2 MLFB 6FC5210-0DA00-1AA0 or old MMC100.2 MLFB 6FC5210-0DA00-1AA1 or new HT6 MLFB 6FC5503-0AA10-0AA0 or newest PCU20 MLFB 6FC5210-0DF00-0AA0) RETURN ESC


- Help

Make the PCU 20 ready to receive 1. Switch on the power supply to the PCU 20 or initiate a reset by pressing button "S1" on the rear panel of your hardware. 2. Switch on the PCU 20, press key "6" and the serial number appears. Activate transfer Activate in the transfer menu. The transfer operation begins and its current status is displayed on both the PC/PG and the PCU20. Series upgrade Several PCU units can be updated in succession using the transfer menu by repeating the above mentioned procedure for each PCU to be updated. When you have finished, exit the transfer menu by pressing . How to terminate After completing the transfers to the hard disk and the PCU 20 close the installation menu by pressing . You are now in the "INSTUTIL" subdirectory of the hard disk directory to which you copied the data from the system disk. You can now run the installation menu again from this location. Start installation on hard disk When you run "SYS_INST.EXE", the installation menu is displayed again. However, the menu option "Install system disk to harddisk" is missing as this operation has already been performed. The other menu options are operated as described above.


IM2/7-105


7.1.3

11.02

Installing the application software

Requirements • •

The boot and system software must already have been loaded. Compression software "ARJ.EXE" is installed.

1. Run APP_INST.EXE Start program APP_INST.EXE from SW_6_2\PCU20\Disk9 on the shipped CD. Important The disks are numbered consecutively. The location of program APP_INST.EXE may vary according to software version depending on the quantity of data in the system disk images. You must search for the program in the disk images.

2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

RETURN

Select the drive which you want to extract the application software files to. This can be any hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access.

3. Specify the path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2002, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.02 Install application disk to harddisk Select path for installation

Path: C:\HMI_0_2.APP ESC

RETURN

Select the path which you want to extract the application software files to. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "C:\HMI_0_2.APP". The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed!

IM2/7-106


11.02


4. Join SW modules for transfer and install on hard disk When the files have been installed on the hard disk, the following selection menu is displayed: Install application to hardware PCU20 First language: English Second language: German = Install all modules to hardware = Modify configuration = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

1. 2. ESC F1

- Help

Install the current configuration to the hardware! Modify the language settings and edit selected ASCII files. Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

4.a. Language setting Press to select the languages for transfer. Press the Return key to access any other languages that are available. Press to confirm the selection. Select additional language for application disk Selected hardware: X>

English

X>

French German Italian Spanish

= Cancel

= Help

= Accept

= Toggle

4.b Define configuration Install application on hardware PCU20 First language: English Second language: German

= Change first language = Change second language = Edit ASCII files = Edit text file for first language = Edit text file for second language = Add user specific files to the application

= Back to previous menu! Please make your choice

1. 2. 3.

- Help

Change the language setting for the first language. Change the language setting for the second language. Edit ASCII files if the system and applications contain any.


IM2/7-107


4. 5. 6.

11.02

Edit the language files for the set first language. Edit the language files for the set second language. Copy PLC status files to the application image. Integrate other files, e.g. "Supplement user interface". Return to the installation menu. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

ESC F1

Language selection The language selection menu is overlaid: Change first language (actually : English )

= German = Spanish = French = English = Italian

= Return to previous menu! Please make your choice

- Help

Options to assign a new language setting to the first/second language. PgDn Page down to the next page (if there are more than 7 languages). PgUp Page up to the previous page (if there are more than 7 languages). ESC Exit the menu (regardless of which page you are on) without changing the active language setting.

Edit ASCII files Install application on hardware PCU_20 First language: English Second language: German

= Edit MPI configuration data = Edit display machine data = Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT = Edit CONFIG.SYS


- Help

Options 1...4 start "EDIT.COM" for editing the relevant file. The individual options are only displayed if the files exist. ESC Exit the menu. F1 Shows the online help (available). Edit the language files for the set 1st and 2nd languages: "EDIT.COM" is started automatically when you select option 1...4. How to use EDIT: ESC = Acknowledge 1st window Alt + D = File menu

IM2/7-108


11.02


Here you can integrate or edit e.g. proprietary PLC alarms or PLC messages in the ALP.TXT file. MCU alarm texts myst be added in the AMCU.TXT file.

!

Important

!

Warning

You can only add texts to the standard texts. Siemens standard texts must not be modified. These modifications must also be made for the language set as the 2nd language, otherwise it is not possible to compile these files.

We cannot guarantee correct functioning of the software if unauthorized changes are made to the "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" files.

PLC status Integration of *.PLC files for PLC status operand screens: Here you can specify the directory in which you want PLC status screens to be stored. Selection of operator panel: Select displays to to support while installation for applikation disk Transfer software hardware Selected COM port: COM1 = = =

Selected Hardware: PCU20 Install software via serial line OPFlash 10 Memory (640 x 400) Create Card image SelectOP COM 12 port (800 x 600) = Quit OPprogram! 15 (1024 x 768)

Please your choice - Help =make Cancel

= Accept

- Help = Toggle

Select the appropriate operator panel: You must wait for about 20 seconds after pressing < F4 >.

5. Transfer the software to the hardware The transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1

= Install software via serial line = Create Flash Memory Card image = Select COM port = Quit program!


- Help

Transmission via RS-232 C is not supported! Create a Flash memory card which you can transfer to an 8MB Flash card using SINUCOPY. You can use this card directly for software updates. Not relevant! Exit installation and close the program without prompt.


IM2/7-109


11.02

Series upgrade Several PCU units can be updated in succession using the transfer menu by repeating the above mentioned procedure for each PCU to be updated. When you have finished, exit the transfer menu by pressing . How to terminate After completing the transfers to the PCU 20, terminate the installation menu by pressing . You are now in the "INSTUTIL" subdirectory of the hard disk directory to which you copied the data from the system disk. You can now run the installation menu again from this location. Start installation from the PC/PG When you run "APP_INST.EXE", the configuration menu is displayed. Drive and path selection are omitted as transfer from CD to hard disk has already taken place. The other menu options are operated as described above. Note If you are working in the DOS box of WINDOWS/WINDOWS 95, the following message is displayed: "You are running the Interlink server in task change mode. Task changing key combinations and file write operations are disabled. Exit the server to restore the functions. Press ENTER to continue or F3 to exit." Press "RETURN" to confirm. Prepare the PCU 20 to receive data 1. Switch on the power supply to the PCU 20 or initiate a reset by pressing button "S1" on the rear panel of your hardware. 2. Switch on the PCU20 and press key "6" when the serial number is displayed.

Installation notes Standard case The transfer process is initiated and the progress is displayed on the PCU 20. Errors occurring when setting receive mode If an orderly connection is not established with the above operator actions, the PCU 20 outputs: "Not ready reading drive" (e.g.) "F" "Abort, Retry, Fail" ? Check the connecting cable on the PC/PG, then press "R" for Retry after eliminating the error. If you still cannot establish the connection, switch the control off and then on again. Now try again. End of transmission Press to exit the transfer menu. The subdirectory "INSTUTIL" is now the active directory.

IM2/7-110


11.02


Start installation on hard disk When you run "APP_INST.EXE", the configuration menu is displayed. Drive and path selection are omitted as transfer from CD to hard disk has already taken place. The other menu options are operated as described above. Server PCU 20 activates a server for the PCU 20 hard disk with the permanently assigned name C, e.g. with Windows. You have write access for C:\. Client The PC/PG activates a client (e.g. with the Windows function connect network drive) with a connection to the hard disk C of the server on the PCU 20. Data transfer from the PC/PG to the PCU20 is activated with menu option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk". After the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 20 to integrate the new data into the active system. Note When installing from the PG/PC, please ensure that you do not enter a letter corresponding to a local hard disk on the PG/PC; instead enter only the identifier of the network connection to the PCU 20 hard disk C. Installation via CD on the PCU 20 If the PCU20 is fitted with a CD drive (SW6.2 and higher) you can use it to copy the original data or the data modified on the PC/PG to the PCU 20's hard disk. As soon as the message "Starting MS-DOS ... " appears on screen during start-up of the PCU 20, press "6" briefly. Then, press "3" to start the DOS shell (password prompt) and call "APP_INST.EXE" on the CD drive. How to proceed is described above. Activate option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk" in the transfer menu. In the next drive menu enter C as the identification letter for the hard disk drive of the PCU 20. "SYS_INST.EXE" determines the save path on the PCU 20 hard disk itself. After the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 20 to integrate the new data into the active system. Note Drive letter C:\ may only be specified if "APP_INST.EXE" was executed on the hard disk of the PCU 20.


IM2/7-111


7.1.4

11.02

Text disk: Updating the system software language The text software "textdisk" is an update of the texts of the system software and offers the following options • Add new languages • Add new languages to the application software. • Install new languages on the destination hardware (PCU 20).

Requirements The configuration available in the text software (selected operating areas) must match the configuration of the screen kit, installed application software. Insert the CD and call up file "TXT_INST.EXE".

1. Run TXT_INST.EXE Update texts for your PCU20

= Update texts on your screen or installation kit = Update texts on your application disk installation

= Quit program! - Help


Add a new language to the screen kit. Add a new language to the application software. ESC Terminates the program. F1 Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

2. Add a new language to the screen kit 2.a Enter drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Update texts on your screen or installation kit – Kit installation Select the drive in which your SCK/SDK was installed

Drive: ESC

F1

RETURN

Enter the drive onto which the files of the application software were installed.

IM2/7-112


11.02


2.b Enter path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Screen kit version 6.01 Update texts on your screen kit Select the path in which your application was installed

Path: E:\MMC100PJ ESC

F1

RETURN

Enter the path where the screen kit was installed. "\MMC100PJ" is entered as the default path. The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed! The update is completed once the files have been installed on the hard disk.

3. Add a new language to the application software 3.a Enter drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the drive in which your application was installed

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN


3.b Enter path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Screen kit version 6.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the path in which your application was installed


F1

RETURN

Enter the path where the application software files are installed. The default path is "\MMC100PJ". The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed! The update is completed once the files have been installed on the hard disk.


IM2/7-113


7.1.5

11.02

Creating a PC card

PCMCIA card name conventions A PCMCIA card is used both for the NCU and for the PCU 20. The cards look identical, therefore it is easy to mix them up. For better differentiation, the PCMCIA card • for the NCU will be referred to in the following as "NC card" and • that for the PCU as "PC card".

Requirements You have already installed the application and system environment on the PG/PC. The "SINUCOPY_FFS" software has been installed.

Procedure 1. 2. 3.

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

7.1.6

Change to the "instutil" directory in the system environment, e.g. "\mmc100pj.app\instutil" (the directory that was specified when installing the system environment on the PC/PG). Run "app_inst.exe". Select option "Install all modules on hardware". Select desired languages. If too many languages are selected, an error message will be displayed: "Error while providing data..." Press "Return" to close message, select to start again, now select fewer languages. Select option "Create Flash Memory Card image". Specify the target directory where the sys.file system file is to be stored. Specify the target directory where the ABB system file is to be stored. The file "PCU 20.ABB" is created and stored. Insert the PC card in the PCMCIA slot on the PC/PG. Transfer the generated ABB file to the PC card with "SINUCOPY-FFS".

Updating the software via PC card and Compact Flash card

Linear Flash Memory card Preconditions: • The "SINUCOPY_FFS" software has been installed. • PC card (8 MB image update) with new HMI Embedded software version is available. • Control system is switched off. Follow the instructions below: Slot in PC card with new HMI Embedded software version. Switch on the PCU20, wait until the serial number is displayed and then press key "6" on the operator panel.

IM2/7-114


11.02


A dialog box appears: • "-: Update from PC-Card with default configuration data". The old update function is loaded (current settings are discarded). •

"0: Save configuration data to PC-Card". The settings that were last saved on the PC card are available.

The configuration data, e.g. network settings and color settings, are retained. The current settings are written to the PC card and are available as default settings the next time you update the software. Press key "0" again: CFG data saved on PC-Card "0: Update from PC-Card" When data matching is complete, the message: "Remove PC card" appears. Remove the PC card and the control boots automatically. Note If the NC card or PC card have been exchanged, the control displays a message.

Compact Flash card (HMI SW6.3 or higher): Preconditions: • ATA card (8 MB / 16 MB / 32 MB image update) with new HMI Embedded software version is available. • Control system is switched off. Supplementary conditions: You will need the following ATA cards: • 8 MB image: ATA card, at least 16 MB • 16 MB image: ATA card, at least 32 MB • The image "\PCU_20.ABB" must be in the root directory. The software is installed on the PC by means of the Windows Explorer. The "SINUCOPY_FFS" software will not be needed. Follow the instructions below: You can use one of two methods to transfer the software to the PCU 20/50: 1. Connect using the Network Manager or 2. Remove the ATA card from the PC and insert it in the control system. The update process is the same as described above under Flash Memory card.


IM2/7-115


7.1.7

11.02

Saving network data to card The network settings are saved as part of the configuration data. If an update is carried out from the card using the "-" key, the MAC address is checked at boot. If the network settings were made on another PCU20, network access is disabled. A network address must not be assigned more than once.

7.2 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on a PCU 50/70 Precondition -

The PCU 50/70 is installed with system software 6 (otherwise the incorrect S7 drivers and keyboard driver will be active). Win 95/NT operating system, Win 2000/XP operating system: You must install the software first under Win95/NT and then copy it to the target system via the network drive.

Operating sequence •

Connect connector COM1/COM2 on the PCU 50/70 to a serial port on your PC/PG (RS232C), or via connector LPT1 (parallel) using the parallel transmission cable to the parallel port on your PC/PG. • Start "SYS_INST.EXE" in the system directory "DISK1" • Press item < 2 > "Install system to hardware" • "Install system disk on hard disk & on PCU 50/70-hardware" and answer the following prompts regarding drive and directory. Use to exit the program. The system disks are thus installed on your hard disk. Make sure that the right COM port is selected. "Select COM port" You can correct it if necessary: • Select either menu item < 1 > or < 2 > in the following menu depending on the cable connection PC --> PCU 50/70 (serial, parallel) • "Starting Interlink" • Turn on the Sinumerik. While the PCU 50/70 is booting and the message • "Starting Windows 95 ..." is displayed • hit key "6" once on the operator panel front keyboard. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1. Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2. SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3. DOS Shell 4. Start Windows NT(Service Mode) 5. SINUMERIK System Check

IM2/7-116


11.02


6. Backup/Restore 7. Start PC Link 8. Reboot (Warmboot) 9. End (Load HMI Embedded) Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9]? • Press key "1": The system will ask you to enter the password: passwd: • Type one of the passwords of the stages 1–2 for Manufacturer or Service. • Then select "Install via Serial/Parallel Line". • Sinumerik displays: "copying File E:\..." If the message "Press any key to continue" appears, the installation is complete. As soon as you press a key on the PCU 50/70 HMI Embedded starts up with the WIN32 application. Press "Alt F4" on the PC to cancel Interlink.

7.2.1

Installing the system software

Software areas The system software for HMI Embedded Win 32 is divided into the following areas: • System software • User software The system software contains all the files that are required for the operation of HMI Embedded Win 32. Languages other than English and German can be installed subsequently. All system texts, texts for PLC messages and cycle alarm texts are located in the user software area.

Requirements In order to upgrade the system software (software version) of the PCU 50/70, you must switch the PCU 50/70 to its initialization state. You also need a PC/PG from which to load the new system software. Directories of approx. 8 MB memory space are set up on the hard disk of the PC/PG. The data that are selected during installation for transfer are stored in these directories.

Setting ready-to-receive Please back up the necessary data before starting the software upgrade. See Chapter 8. With HMI Embedded Win32, you must not set ready-to-receive mode on the PCU 50/70 until the installation routine has reached the transmission window of the MS-DOS INTERLINK program after the software has been reloaded, any modifications have been made to the files, and the valid COM port has been set. Please observe these rules.


IM2/7-117


11.02

1. Call SYS_INST.EXE Insert the CD System installation HMI Embedded Win 32

= Install Systemdisk to harddisk = Install Systemdisk to harddisk & to hardware = Install directly to hardware = Quit program! Please make your choice

- Help

1. Install the system software on the hard disk (PC/PG)! With this menu item, the system software can then be installed on several PC/PGs. Install the system software on the hard disk (PC/PG) and transfer the current configuration to hardware PCU 50/70! With this menu item you can transfer the system software onto the hard disk and then immediately install it on the target hardware PCU 50/70. This item is only displayed if the software is installed from the root (...\.) of a drive and only if system software is being installed. When configuring systems with more than one system disk, they cannot be installed directly from the disk to the destination hardware. If this is the case, you need to copy the system disks to the installation PC's hard drive and conduct the installation from there. Continue at 4. "Transfer software to hardware". ESC Aborts the installation and terminates the program. F1 Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Install system disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the drive at the PC/PG to which you want to copy the system software files. This can be any hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access.

IM2/7-118


11.02



Path: C:\MMC100PJ.SYS ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the path to which you want to copy the system software files. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "\MMC101PJ.SYS".

!

Important If the directory already exists it is overwritten! The files are copied to the hard disk. If the menu item "Install system disk to hard disk" was selected in the first menu, then the system software installation is terminated automatically and the start menu is displayed again. You can install the system software on other PCs/PGs (e.g.: network installation) from this menu. Then you can transfer the system software to the hardware by going to the directory you installed the system software in and running the "SYS_INST.EXE" program. The "System installation" menu is displayed. The hardware configuration transfer is continued as follows:

4. Transfer the software to the hardware The transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware HMI Embedded Win 32 Selected COM port: COM1

= Install software via serial line = Install software via parallel line (update only) = Install software via network or direct on harddisk = Select COM port

= Quit program! Please make your choice

- Help

If the port displayed at "Selected COM port:" does not correspond to the port you have used for connecting the cable to the PCU 50/70, press . In the submenu that follows, press the number that corresponds to the COM interface used. You then return to the transfer menu – the selected port is displayed there.


IM2/7-119


11.02

Note If you are upgrading the MMC 100 system software to the PCU 50/70 hardware, menu option "Network installation" is not available. Activate transfer Activate in the transfer menu for serial transfer. Select in the transfer menu for parallel transmission. Note If you are working in the DOS box of WINDOWS/WINDOWS 95, the following message is displayed: "You are running the Interlink server in task change mode. Task changing key combinations and file write operations are disabled. Exit the server to restore the functions. Press ENTER to continue or F3 to exit." Press to confirm. A message appears stating that the subdirectory has started: Microsoft Interlink Server Version 1.10 Other Computer (Client)

This Computer (Server) E : (1082 Mb) LPT1 : Transfer:

Port:

Speed:

Alt + F4 + Exit

Prepare the PCU 50/70 to receive data: 1. The PCU 50/ 70 is switched off. 2. Connect the defined serial interface on the PC/PG to the interface on the PCU 50/70 (MMC-SST, COM1/COM2 for serial transmission, LPT1 for parallel transmission). 3. Switch on the control. 4. As soon as the message "Starting MS-DOS ... " appears on screen, press "6" briefly. The system first starts SCANDISK and displays the start menu. 5. Select menu option "Install/Update" 6. The transfer menu is overlaid; activate "Install via serial line".

IM2/7-120


11.02


Installation notes Standard case The transfer operation starts and its current status is displayed on the PCU 50/70. Errors occurring when setting receive mode If the above actions do not result in a working connection between the hardware devices, the PCU 50/70 displays the following: "Not ready reading drive" (e.g.) "F" "Abort, Retry, Fail"? Check the connecting cable and that the correct port is set on the PC/PG, then press "R" for Retry after eliminating the error. If you still cannot establish the connection, switch the control off and then on again. Now try again. End of transmission Press to exit the transfer menu. The subdirectory "INSTUTIL" is now the active directory. Start installation on hard disk When you run "SYS_INST.EXE" from the hard disk, the installation menu is displayed again. However, the menu option "Install system disk on hard disk" is missing as this operation has already been performed. The other menu options are operated as described above. Installation via network Transfer menu option Requirements: Both the PC/PG and the PCU 50/70 are fitted with a suitable network card and are connected to each other via an intact network. Server PCU 50/70 activates a server for the PCU 50/70 hard disk with the permanently assigned name C, e.g. with Windows. You have write access for C:\. Client The PC/PG activates a client (e.g. with the Windows function "Map network drive") with a connection to the hard disk C of the server on the PCU 50/70. Data transfer from the PC/PG to the PCU 50/70 is activated with menu option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk". After the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 50/70 to integrate the new files into the active system. Note When installing from the PG/PC, please ensure you do not enter a letter corresponding to a local hard disk on the PG/PC as this could delete the data on the PG/PC's hard disk; instead you should enter the identifier for the network connection to hard disk C on the PCU 50/70.


IM2/7-121


11.02

Installation via CD on the PCU 50/70 If the PCU 50/70 has its own CD drive you can use it to copy the original files or the files modified on the PC/PG to the PCU 50/70's hard disk. As soon as the message "Starting MS-DOS ... " appears on screen as the PCU 50/70 is booting, press "6" briefly. Then, press "3" to start the DOS shell (password prompt) and call "sys_inst.ex" on the the CD drive. See above for operator action. Activate option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk" in the transfer menu. In the next drive menu enter C as the identification letter for the hard disk drive on the PCU 50/70 . "SYS_INST.EXE" itself determines the save path on the PCU 50/70. After the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 50/70 to integrate the new files into the active system. Note You may specify drive letter C only if you have run "SYS_INST.EXE" on the hard disk of the PCU 50/70.

7.2.2

Specifying environment variable (RAMDISK) for Win32 systems When you install the HMI Embedded software on a PCU 50/70 or PC, you will need to set up a directory which HMI Embedded can use as storage for temporary files. You can choose this directory freely; it is registered with HMI Embedded via environment variable RAMDISK. Proceed as follows:

Windows NT/XP Start up the operating system click the "Start" button with the left mouse button, select "Settings" --> "Control Panel", click the "System" icon and select the "Environment" tab. Enter RAMDISK in the "Variable" field. Enter the appropriate drive,e.g."C:\MMC0W32\TMP" in the "Value" field. Click the following buttons in this order "Set", "Accept" and "OK". The environment variable is now effective. Cold restarting of the system is not necessary.

Windows 95/98 Start up the operating system click the "Start" button with the left mouse button, start the Explorer, select drive "C" (lowest level), click "AUTOEXEC" with the right mouse button and select menu option "Edit". Add the line "set RAMDISK=C:\MMC0W32\TMP". Please note that the line must not contain any blanks or tabs except for the blank after the word "set".

IM2/7-122


11.02


"C:\MMC0W32\TMP" is the directory of your choice. Close the editor window, saving your settings, and then restart the operating system. After the cold restart, the environment variable is effective.

7.2.3

Installation from the application diskette

Precondition The boot and system software must already have been loaded. Compression software "ARJ.EXE" is installed. Run program "APP_INST.EXE".

1. Run APP_INST.EXE 2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN



Path: C:\MMC100PJ.APP ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the path which you want to extract the application software files to. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "\MMC101PJ.APP". The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed!


IM2/7-123


11.02

4. Join SW modules for transfer and install on hard disk When the files have been installed on the hard disk, the following selection menu is displayed: Install application to hardware HMI Embedded Win32 First language: English Second language: German = Install all modules to hardware = Modify configuration = Select modules to install = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

1.

2. 3. ESC F1

- Help

Install the current configuration to the hardware! If you selected specific modules under option on the PCU 50/70, option will display "Install selected modules to hardware" instead, i.e. only the modules you selected under option will be transferred. Modify the language settings and edit selected ASCII files. Select modules for installation (available soon) Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

4.a. Language setting Press to select the languages for transfer. Press the Return key to display more languages. Press to confirm the selection. Select additional language for application disk Selected hardware: X>

X>

English French German Italian Spanish

= Cancel

IM2/7-124

= Help

= Accept

= Toggle


11.02


4.b Define configuration Install application on hardware HMI Embedded Win 32 First language: English Second language: German

= Change first language = Change second language = Edit ASCII files = Edit text file for first language = Edit text file for second language = Add user-specific files to the application


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ESC F1

- Help

Change the language setting for the first language. Change the language setting for the second language. Edit ASCII files if the system and applications contain any. Edit the language files for the set first language. Edit the language files for the set second language. Copy user-specific data, e.g. operator interface add-ons. Return to the installation menu. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

4.b.1 Edit ASCII files Install application on hardware HMI Embedded Win 32 First language: English Second language: German = Edit MPI configuration data = Edit display machine data = Return to previous menu!


- Help

Options 1 and 2 start "EDIT.COM" to edit the respective file. The individual options are only displayed if the files exist. ESC Exit the menu. F1 Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

!

Warning We cannot guarantee correct functioning of the software if unauthorized changes are made to the "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" files.


IM2/7-125


11.02

4.c Select modules (available soon) Install application on hardware HMI Embedded Win 32 First language: English Second language: German

= Install binaries = Install texts = Install files for operating system = Install HiGraph-Diagnostic files = Install user specific files = Select all modules

= Back to previous menu! Please select the modules you are going to instaoll

1., 3.-5. 2. 6. ESC F1

- Help

Select the respective module (toggle between Yes and No). Individual modules are only displayed if they exist. Go to the menu for selecting text groups. Select all modules including text groups. Return to the installation menu. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

After selection of the menu option "Install to Hardware", the languages are generated, "NETNAMES.BIN" is created and the files are prepared for transfer to the hardware.

5. Transfer the software to the hardware Then the transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1



- Help

If the port displayed at "Selected COM port:" does not correspond to the port you have used for connecting the cable to the PCU 50/70, press . In the submenu that follows, press the number that corresponds to the COM interface used. You then return to the transfer menu – the selected port is displayed there. When you start transfer, the following warning appears to ensure that you install the software on the correct hardware. Activate transfer • Activate in the transfer menu for serial transfer. • Select in the transfer menu for parallel transmission.

IM2/7-126


11.02


Note If you are working in the DOS box of WINDOWS/WINDOWS 95, the following message is displayed: "You are running the Interlink server in task change mode. Task changing key combinations and file write operations are disabled. Exit the server to restore the functions. Press ENTER to continue or F3 to exit." Press "RETURN" to confirm. Prepare the PCU 50/70 to receive data 1. The PCU 50/ 70 is switched off. 2. Connect the defined serial interface on the PC/PG to the interface on the PCU 50/70 (COM1/COM2 for serial transmission, LPT1 for parallel transmission). 3. Switch on the control. 4. As soon as the message "Starting MS-DOS ... " appears on screen, press "6" briefly. The system first starts SCANDISK and displays the start menu. 5. Select menu option "Install/Update". 6. The transfer menu is overlaid; activate "Install via serial line". Standard case The transfer operation starts and its current status is displayed on the PCU 50/70. Errors occurring when setting receive mode If the above actions do not result in a working connection between the hardware devices, the PCU 50/70 displays the following: "Not ready reading drive" (e.g.) "F" "Abort, Retry, Fail" ? Check the connecting cable and that the correct port is set on the PC/PG, then press R for Retry after eliminating the error. If you still cannot establish the connection, switch the control off and then on again. Now try again. End of transmission Press to exit the transfer menu. The subdirectory "INSTUTIL" is now the active directory. Start installation on hard disk When you run "APP_INST.EXE", the configuration menu is displayed. Drive and path selection are omitted as transfer from CD to hard disk has already taken place. The other menu options are operated as described above. Installation via network (available soon) Transfer menu option Requirements: Both the PC/PG and the PCU 50/70 are fitted with a suitable network card and are connected to each other via an intact network. Server PCU 50/70 activates a server for the PCU 50/70 hard disk with the permanently assigned name C, e.g. with Windows. You have write access for C:\.


IM2/7-127


11.02

Client The PC/PG activates a client (e.g. with the Windows function "Map network drive") with a connection to the hard disk C of the server on the PCU 50/70. Data transfer from the PC/PG to the PCU 50/70 is activated with menu option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk". At the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 50/70 to integrate the new files into the active system. Note When installing from the PG/PC, please ensure that you do not enter a letter corresponding to a local hard disk on the PG/PC; instead enter only the identifier of the network connection to the PCU 50/70 hard disk C. Installation via floppy disk on the PCU 50/70: If the PCU 50/70 has its own floppy disk drive you can use it to copy the original files or the files modified on the PC/PG to the PCU 50/70's hard disk. As soon as the message "Starting MS-DOS ... " appears on screen as the PCU 50/70 is booting, press "6" briefly. Then, press "3" to start the DOS shell (password prompt) and call "app_inst.exe" on the CD drive. How to proceed is described above. Activate option "Install software via network or direct on hard disk" in the transfer menu. In the next drive menu enter C as the identification letter for the hard disk drive on the PCU 50/70. "SYS_INST.EXE" itself determines the save path on the PCU 50/70. After the end of transmission, you need to perform a restart on the PCU 50/70 to integrate the new files into the active system.

!

IM2/7-128

Important You may specify drive letter C only if you have run "APP_INST.EXE" on the hard disk of the PCU 50/ 70.


11.02

7.2.4


Text disk: Updating the system software language The text software "textdisk" is an update of the texts of the system software and offers the following options • Add new languages to the screen kit • Add new languages to the application software. • Install new languages on the target hardware (PCU 50/70).

Requirements The configuration available on the text disk (selected operating areas) must match the configuration of the screen kit, the application diskette or the installed software. Insert the CD and call up file "TXT_INST.EXE".

1. Run TXT_INST.EXE Update texts for your PCU 50

= Update texts on your screen or installation kit = Update texts on your application disk installation = Install texts to your HMI Embedded = Install texts to your HMI Embedded Win 32

= Quit program! - Help


1. 2. 3. 4. ESC F1

Add a new language to the screen kit. Add a new language to the application image. Install new languages on the target hardware (PCU 50/70) Install new languages on the target hardware (PCU 50/70). Terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

2. Add a new language to the screen kit 2.a Enter drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Update texts on your screen or installation – Kit installation Select the drive in which your SCK/SDK was installed

Drive: ESC

F1

RETURN



IM2/7-129


11.02

2.b Enter path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Update texts on your screen kit installation Select the path in which your application was installed


F1

RETURN

Enter the path where the screen kit was installed. "\MMC100PJ" is entered as the default path. The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed! The update is completed once the files have been installed on the hard disk.

3. Add a new language to the application image 3.a Enter drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the drive in which your application was installed

Drive: ESC

F1

RETURN


3.b Enter path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the path in which your application was installed


F1

RETURN

Enter the path where the application software files are installed. The default path is "\MMC100PJ".

IM2/7-130


11.02


The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed! The update is completed once the files have been installed on the hard disk.

4. Install a new language on the target hardware (PCU 50/70) 4.a Enter drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Install texts on your PCU 50 Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Enter the drive where the temporary files are to be stored for the text installation.

4.b Enter path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Install texts on your PCU 50 Select path for installation

Path: E:\MMC_TEXT.TMP ESC

F1

RETURN

Enter the path where the temporary files are to be stored for the text installation. The files are copied to the hard disk and prepared for installation! After conducting the installation and deleting the temporary files from the hard disk, the update is completed.


IM2/7-131


11.02

7.3 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on PC with Windows 7.3.1

Overview HMI Embedded Win32 system software runs on all 32-bit platforms under Windows.

Software The HMI Embedded Win32 software package is supplied on CD and comprises the following software versions: • SW 5.3 • SW 6.1 The system and application software is distributed among the following directories: • SW 5.3: MMC 100.2 MMC 100 WIN32 •

SW 6.1 and SW 6.2: PCU 20 1. Disk1: System diskettes 2. Disk2: System diskettes 3. Disk3: System diskettes 4. Disk4: Application diskettes 5. Disk5: Application diskettes HMI Embedded Win32: 1. Disk1: System diskettes 2. Disk2: System diskettes 3. Disk3: System diskettes 4. Disk4: Application diskettes

The current disk structure is explained in the readme file "siemensd.txt" The system disks contain only the system software in the languages English and German with English as the primary language. In order to install the HMI Embedded Win32 package you must • install the system disks • install the application disks

Application software With the application diskettes you can, for example, modify the parameters of the application, i.e. you can • • • • •

IM2/7-132

change languages (default: 5 languages), add or adapt texts, modify operator panel front machine data and MPI parameters (NETNAMES.INI) modify system files "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" and select further languages.


11.02


•

Incorporate user software with BE1 (Wizard)

Generally two directories are installed on the hard disk of a PC/PG: System directory "mmc100pj.syp" Application directory "mms100pj.app." From there, the system software or the selected applications can be copied directly to the PC. Special languages can be added from the language CD.

7.3.2

Installation of the system software

System software on PC with Windows Prerequisite: No S7 drivers are installed; it is therefore essential that the STEP7 package is installed and an MPI module exists.

Installation Install the system software on your PC.

1. Call SYS_INST.EXE Insert the CD System installation HMI Embedded Win 32

= Install System disk to harddisk = Install System disk to harddisk & to hardware = Install directly to hardware = Quit program! Please make your choice

1. 2.

3.

ESC F1

- Help

Install the system software on the hard disk (PC/PG)! With this menu item, the system software can then be installed on several PC/PGs. Install the system software to the hard disk (PC/PG) and transfer the current configuration to a different hardware!This menu option is for transferring the system software to the hard disk of the PC and installing it on the destination PCU 20 hardware immediately afterwards. "Install directly to hardware". This item is only displayed if the software is installed from the root (...\.) of a drive and only if system software is being installed. When configuring systems with more than one system disk, they cannot be installed directly from the CD to the destination hardware. If this is the case, you need to copy the system disks to the installation PC's hard drive and conduct the installation from there. Continue with . "Transfer software to hardware". Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).


IM2/7-133


11.02

2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Install system disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

RETURN

Select the drive at the PC/PG to which you want to copy the system software files. This can be any of the hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access.



F1

RETURN

Select the path to which you want to copy the system software files. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "\MMC101PJ.SYS".

!

Important If the directory already exists it is overwritten! The files are copied to the hard disk. If the menu item "Install system disk to hard disk" was selected in the first menu, the start menu is displayed again. You can install the system software on other PCs/PGs (e.g.: network installation) from this menu. Then you can transfer the system software to the hardware by going to the directory you installed the system software in and running the "SYS_INST.EXE" program. The "System installation" menu is displayed.

IM2/7-134


11.02


The hardware configuration transfer is continued as follows: The transfer menu is displayed as follows:

4. Transfer the software to the hardware Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1



- Help

Only menu option "Network Installation" is possible here. The following menu appears: Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Install system disk on harddisk hard disk Select network drive for or drive C for direct hardware Select drive installation installation: Drive: Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the drive at the PC/PG to which you want to copy the system software files. This can be any of the hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access. The basic display appears and the process is terminated with .

7.3.3

Installations of the application software

Application software on PC running Windows95 or later Start the HMI Embedded Win32 application with "rngkrnl.exe" in directory "C:\mmc0W32\bin" Press CTRL - X - ENTER to cancel the application.

Important note A RAMDISK environment variable to the directory C:\mmc0w32\tmp will be installed in the autoexec.bat: "set ramdisk=c:\hmiem32\tmp" Do not remove this entry from the autoexec.bat; otherwise, the application "rngkrnl.exe" can no longer be started. Set up environment variables for Win95 and WinNT /XP


IM2/7-135


11.02

Precondition • • •

The boot and system software must already have been loaded. Compression software "ARJ.EXE" is installed. Run program "APP_INST.EXE".

1. Run APP_INST.EXE 2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 6.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

RETURN




RETURN

Select the path which you want to extract the application software files to. If the path you enter does not exist, it is created. The default path is "\MMC101PJ.APP". The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed!

IM2/7-136


11.02


4. Join SW modules for transfer and install on hard disk When the files have been installed on the hard disk, the following selection menu is displayed: Install application to hardware First language: English Second language: German = Install all modules to hardware = Modify configuration = Select modules to install = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

1.

2. 3. ESC F1

- Help

Install the current configuration to the hardware! With the PC, if you have selected specific modules under option , option will display "Install selected modules to hardware", instead, i.e. only the modules selected under are transferred. Modify the language settings and edit selected ASCII files. Select modules for installation. Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

Press to select the languages for transfer. Press the Return key to access any other languages that are available. Press to confirm the selection.

4.a. Language setting Select additional language for application disk Selected hardware: X>

X>

English French German Italian Spanish

= Cancel

= Help

= Accept

= Toggle


IM2/7-137


11.02

4.b Define configuration Install application on hardware First language: English Second language: German

= Change first language = Change second language = Edit ASCII files = Edit text file for first language = Edit text file for second language = Add *.PLC files for PLC status operand masks


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ESC F1

- Help

Change the language setting for the first language. Change the language settings for the second language. Edit ASCII files if the system and applications contain any. Edit the language files for the first set language. Edit the language files for the second set language. Copy PLC status files to the application image. Return to the installation menu. Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

4.b.1 Edit ASCII files Install application on hardware First language: English Second language: German

= Edit MPI configuration data = Edit display machine data = Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT = Edit CONFIG.SYS = Edit OEM,BAT = Edit user specific files


- Help

Option 1..6 starts "EDIT.COM" to edit the respective file. The individual options are only displayed if the files exist. ESC Exit the menu. F1 Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon).

!

IM2/7-138

Warning We cannot guarantee correct functioning of the software if unauthorized changes are made to the "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" files.


11.02


4.c Select modules (available soon) Install application on hardware First language: English Second language: German

= Install binaries = Install texts = Install files for operating system = Install HiGraph-Diagnostic files = Install user specific files = Select all modules

= Back to previous menu! - Help

Please select the modules you are going to instaoll

1., 3.–5.

Select the respective module (toggle between Yes and No). Individual modules are only displayed if they exist. 2. Go to the menu for selecting text groups. 6. Select all modules including text groups. ESC Return to the installation menu. F1 Displays the online help for the active screen (available soon). After selection of the menu option "Install to Hardware", the languages are generated, "NETNAMES.BIN" is created and the files are prepared for transfer to the hardware.

5. Transfer the software to the hardware Then the transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1



- Help

When installing on the PC, only option "Install software via network or direct on harddisk" is possible. The following menu appears: Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit 6.01 Install system disk on harddisk hard disk Select network drive for or drive C for direct hardware Select drive installation installation: Drive: Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the drive at the PC/PG to which you want to copy the system software files. This can be any of the hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access. The basic display appears and the process is terminated with .


IM2/7-139


7.3.4

11.02

Additional requirements for the installation DOS BOX of Windows: At least 590 KB DOS user memory must be available on the PG/PC for an executable program. We generally advise users to transmit the software under DOS rather than under Windows. However, if you have to use Windows, you should set the DOS BOX to "exclusive" in Windows 3.x and the idle activity to "low" in Windows 95. Despite this setting, the time required for the transmission in the Windows DOS BOX increases by a factor of three or four; in some cases, the software cannot be transferred under Windows.

7.3.5

Changing the screen position With screen resolutions > 640x480 it is possible to • change the position on the screen and • change the display type (with border/without border). This is conducted in the "MMC0.INI" file. To do this, you need to create the "WIN32" section in the MMC0.INI file. The following entries are possible: [WIN32] Border = 1 // X_Pos = 100 // Y_Pos = 100 //

0 - No border; 1 - Thin border; >1 - Reserved X position of left upper corner (automat. limit) Y position of left upper corner (automat. Limit)

Note Terminate the last line in the "MMC0.INI" file with an end of line character! If there are no entries or only invalid entries, the default is 0 in each case.

■

IM2/7-140


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 8 Data Backup

8

8 Data Backup

8.1 Data backup ........................................................................... IM2/8-142 8.1.1 General ................................................................................ IM2/8-142 8.2 Backing up data with HMI Embedded.................................... IM2/8-144 8.2.1 Data backup......................................................................... IM2/8-144 8.2.2 Backing up modified machine data...................................... IM2/8-148 8.2.3 Activating data transfer via PLC .......................................... IM2/8-149 8.3 Reading ISO programs in/out via RS-232-C (V.24) ............... IM2/8-153 8.4 Backing up data with HMI Embedded WIN32 with the PCU 50/70.............................................................................. IM2/8-153 8.5 Backing up data with ATA card PC for PCU 20 ..................... IM2/8-154


IM2/8-141


11.02

8.1 Data backup 8.1.1

General

Execution: Data backup is necessary • after start-up • after machine-specific settings have been changed • after service (e.g. after replacing hardware, a software upgrade), in order to resume operation quickly • during start-up before the memory configuration is changed so that no data are lost during start-up.

NCK/PLC/HMI The entire data backup procedure for SINUMERIK 840D is divided into 1. Data backup for NCK, drive and operator panel front settings 2. Data backup for PLC

Series start-up/area-wide archiving Depending on the requirement, different types of data backup are available. 1. Series start-up In order to be able to transfer as simply as possible a particular configuration to further controls of the same software version that are e.g. operated on the same machine type, you can create what are called series start-up files. These files cannot be modified externally (with an ASCII editor). They all contain settings (with the exception of the compensation data). Series start-up files must be created for NCK, PLC, PCU 20 for HMI Embedded, and PCU 50/70 for HMI Embedded Win32. 2. Series start-up with compensation data 3. SW update 4. Area-wide archiving Area-wide archiving is the exception in software version 4 and later because MD 11210 can also be set to specify for series start-up whether or not modified MD must be backed up. PLC and HMI Embedded data are not subdivided any further.

Accessories required To perform data backup you require the following accessories: • Data transmission program PCIN for PG/PC • RS232C (V24) cable 6FX2002–1AA01–0BF0 References: /Z/Catalog NC Z (Accessories) • PG 740 (or higher) or PC (DOS)

IM2/8-142


11.02


Structure of file name Table 8-1

File name structure

_N_ • • •

Area

Unit

-

Type

The area specifies which data are to be backed up or read (general, channelspecific, axis-specific). The unit defines the channel, axis or TOA area. No unit has to be specified if the entire area is selected. The type defines the data type. When data are backed up the file names are generated and output automatically.

Areas NC CH AX TO COMPLETE INITIAL

General NC-specific data Channel-specific data (unit corresponds to channel number) Axis-specific data (unit corresponds to number of the machine axis) Tool data All data of an area Data for all areas (_N_INITIAL_INI)

Types TEA SEA OPT TOA UFR EEC CEC QEC PRO RPA GUD INI

Machine data Setting data Option data Tool data User-input frames: Settable ZO, rotations etc. Measuring system error compensation Beam sag /angularity compensation Quadrant error compensation Protection range R parameters Global user data General initialization program (all data of the active file system)

_N_COMPLETE_TEA _N_AX_TEA _N_CH1_TEA _N_CH1_GUD _N_INITIAL_INI

Archive all machine data Archive all axis machine data Archive machine data for channel 1 Archive global user data for channel 1 Archive all data of active file system


IM2/8-143


11.02

8.2 Backing up data with HMI Embedded 8.2.1

Data backup

via RS232C (V.24) Data can be backed up in the following way via the RS232C (V.24) interface: • Series start-up: with option of selecting ranges NCK (complete) PLC (complete) •

Area-wide archiving: Backup and read-in of individual data areas (softkey "Data in", "Data out", and "Data selection").

Error, operational, cycle alarm texts These texts are part of the operator panel front system software. The texts have to be reloaded when software is updated and hardware replaced. This is only possible if the message texts exist in the correct format (see Chapter 7 Software Update). The texts cannot be read back.

Data backup 1. Connect PG/PC to interface COM1/COM2 of the PCU 20 2. On the operator panel front select the "Services" operating area, on the control select the "RS-232C PG/PC" interface (vertical softkey) and go to "Settings" to check the parameter settings for the RS-232C interface; set parameters if necessary (default setting). Device type Baud rate: Parity: Data bits: Stop bits: Characters for XON: Characters for XOFF: Text end character: Format:

RTS/CTS 9600 baud none 8 1 11H(ex) 13H(ex) 1AH(ex) Tape format, deselected for series start-up or for area-wide backup of drive data. Select tape format for area-wide backup of all other data except drive data

a. Series start-up (data backup) 3. PCU 20 interface configuration (see above, tape format deselected) 4. Start PCIN data transmission program ("Data in") on the PC/PG 5. On the PCU 20 select "start-up data" (PCU 20 operating area "Services", data output "Data out"), as soon as you press the Input key the NCK and PLC areas are offered for selection.

IM2/8-144


11.02


6. First select NCK ("NCK" is offered as the name of the archive file) and start the readout procedure with softkey "Start". Follow the same procedure for data record "PLC".

b. Area-wide archiving 3. PCU 20 interface configuration (see above, select tape format except for drive data) 4. Start data transmission program PCIN ("Data in") on the PC/PG, enter file name 5. On the PCU 20 select the data area to be output (operating area "Services", data output "Data out"): 6. Press softkey "Data selection" and select the areas to be read out. The area "NC-active data", contains e.g. the following data: Machine data Setting data Option data Global and local user data Tool and magazine data Protection ranges R parameters Zero offsets Drive data Compensation data Drive machine data Tools, global part programs/subroutines Standard and user cycles Definitions and macros 7. When the areas are being output, the internal identifier used in each case appears in the top line of the display. 8. Start the read-out procedure with the softkey "Start" and answer the prompts on the operator panel front. Note Data backup for the PLC area can be performed with the HiGraph SIMATIC tools. Observe filter setting for SDBs! References: /S7HT/ Manual: Using the Tools This has advantages for the portability of the PLC programs

Loading the archive data If you want to read in an entire configuration, first perform an overall reset of the control. 1. Set the protection level to "User" (password CUSTOMER) 2. Connect PG/PC to interface COM1/COM2 of the PCU 20 3. Select operating area Services on the PCU 20. Continue with "Read in series start-up" or "Read in from area-wide archive data".


IM2/8-145


11.02

a. Series start-up 4. 5.

6. 7.

Select the PCU 20 interface configuration "V24–-PG/PC" as above, (tape format deselected). Start the data transmission program PCIN on the PG/PC, select the NCK series start-up file to be read into the control under "Data out" for transmission. On the HMI, select area "Services", "Data in" and start the readin procedure with softkey "Start". Acknowledge the input prompts on the PCU 20. After an NCK reset and overall reset of the PLC you can proceed as normal with the PLC series start-up file. After repeating the NCK reset, the control runs with the read in data records.

Note The NCK series start-up file must always be read in before the PLC series startup file.

b. Area-wide archiving 4.

Select the PCU 20 interface configuration "V24-PG/PC" as above and set "tape format" (except for drive data). Start the PCIN data transmission program on the PC/PG. Select the archive file to be read into the control under "Data out" for transmission. On the PCU 50, select area "Services", "Data in" and start the read-in procedure with softkey "Start". The file is automatically recognized and loaded. 5. Read in option data, trigger NCK reset. 6. Load the machine data profile and press "NCK Reset". If you then receive messages about reconfiguration of the memory or rescaling of the machine data, you must read in the machine data file again and reset the control. Usually, this procedure will have to be performed two or three times. 7. If you want to activate global user data, read out the "N_INITIAL_INI" file (table 8-1). Read out starts when you select "All data" as for area-wide archiving. 8. Read in the archive file for global user data. 9. Read in the backed up file "N_INITIAL_INI" to activate global user data. 10. Now load the remaining areas. 11. The PLC area must be the last to be read in after overall PLC reset.

IM2/8-146


11.02


Note •

When you load drive data, deselect tape format and all special functions of the right-hand side of the display for interface settings. The softkey "Save boot file" in the menu for drive data must not be confirmed until the control is reset once after loading the drive archive data.

•

Check/correct the settings of the interface after a message concerning the memory reconfiguration.

Transmission errors If transmission breaks off with an error, make sure that • the password has been entered for the correct protection level • the interface parameters (RS-232-C-PG/PC) are correct • if LEC data are being read in, MD32700 ENC_COMP_ENABLE must be initially set to 0. • MD11220 INI_FILE_MODE set to 1 or 2 see: References: /IAD/Installation and Start-up Guide Table 8-2

• • • • • • • •

Data of the _N_INITIAL_INI file

File _N_INITIAL_INI Option data Machine data Setting data Tool offsets Zero offsets Global user data Local user data R parameters

• •

• • • • • • •

Data not contained in file _N_INITIAL_INI Drive machine data Compensation data Leadscrew error compensation Quadrant error compensation Beam sag compensation Drive machine data Workpieces Global part programs Global subroutines User cycles Standard cycles Definitions and macros


IM2/8-147


8.2.2

11.02

Backing up modified machine data

Saving altered values MD 11210 In MD 11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY (MD backup of altered MDs only) when backing up machine or setting data, you can set whether all data or only those that deviate from the default setting are output via the RS232C (V.24) interface. 11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY MD number MD backup of altered MDs only Default setting: 0 Min. input limit: 0 Max. input limit: 255 Change applies: immediately Protection stage: 2/4 Unit: – Data type: BYTE Valid from SW release: 1 or 4 Significance: Up to SW 3.x Bit 0 Effectiveness of differential upload of TEA files (area-wide archiving) 0: All data are output 1: Only machine data set to a value other than their default are output (not applicable to INITIAL_INI) If a value is altered for a data item that is stored as an array, the full MD array is always output (e.g. MD 10000: AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB). SW 4 and higher Bit 1 Effectiveness of the differential upload of INI files 0: All data are output 1: Only data which are set to a value other than their default are output (e.g. INITIAL_INI) Bit 2 Changes to a field element 0: Complete array is output 1: Only the modified elements of an array are output Bit 3 R parameters (for INITIAL_INI only) 0: All R parameters are output 1: Only R parameters set to a value other than zero are output Bit 4 Frames (for INITIAL_INI only) 0: All frames are output 1: Only frames set to a value other than zero are output Bit 5 Tool data, tool nose data (for INITIAL_INI only) 0: All tool data are output 1: Only tool data set to a value other than zero are output Corresponds to...

IM2/8-148


11.02


Note It might be sensible to back up only altered machine data before a software update if changes have been made to the default machine data settings in the new software version. This particularly applies to machine data of SIEMENS protection level 0.

Note MD 11210 UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY should be set to "1" or the relevant bits set to "1". Then the transferred files only contain any deviations from the default setting. This is advantageous for future SW updates. Continue with "Series start-up" or "Area-wide archiving".

8.2.3

Activating data transfer via PLC A data transfer from/to NCK can be started from the PLC via the RS 232C V.24 interfaces (COM1/COM2). The PLC transfers jobs to HMI Embedded via the PLC-HMI Embedded interface in DB19. These jobs initiate data transfer operations between HMI Embedded and NCK or external equipment which is connected to COM1 or COM2. Job byte of PLC: DB19.DBB12 (PLC à HMI Embedded)

Table 8-3

Bit 7 V.24 In

Bit 6 V.24 Out

Table 8-4

Bit 5 V.24 Ext

Bit 4 V.24 stop

Bit 3 COM1 active

Bit 2 COM2 active

Bit 1 reserv.

Bit 0 reserv.

Specify standard control file:

Bit 7 Bit 6 Always 0 (curr. file syst.)

Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PLC index which specifies axis, channel or TO no. Value: 0-127

Specify file: Table 8-5

Bit 7

DB19.DBB15 (PLC à HMI Embedded)

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 PLC line offset in a standard or user control file Value: 0-255


Bit 0

IM2/8-149


11.02

HMI Embedded acknowledgment byte to PLC for current status of V.24 (RS-232-C) interface: DB19.DBB24 (HMI Embedded à PLC)

Table 8-6

Bit 7 V.24 In

Bit 6 V.24 Out

Bit 5 V.24 Ext

Bit 4 V.24 stop

Bit 3 COM1 active

Bit 2 COM2 active

Bit 1 O.K.

Bit 0 Error

Job processing A PLC job is processed according to the following scheme: 1. The PLC may initiate a job only if the acknowledgment byte is 0. 2. HMI Embedded mirrors the job (excluding parameter set) in the acknowledgment byte, signaling to the PLC that a PLC job is being processed. 3. Once the operation is finished (OK or Error), the PLC must respond again and delete the job byte. The PLC receives a "job active" signal for an unfinished job. 4. In response, HMI Embedded sets the acknowledgment byte to 0. This scheme ensures sequential processing of jobs.

Standard control file The names of files to be transferred (output) are stored in the following control file "_xxx_": Line index N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23

IM2/8-150

File name _N_INITIAL_INI _N_COMPLETE_TEA _N_NC_TEA _N_CH%d_TEA _N_AX%d_TEA _N_COMPLETE_SEA _N_NC_SEA _N_CH%d_SEA _N_AX%d_SEA _N_COMPLETE_OPT _N_NC_OPT _N_CH%d_OPT _N_AX%d_OPT _N_CH%d_RPA _N_COMPLETE_PRO _N_NC_PRO _N_CH%d_PRO _N_CH%d_UFR _N_COMPLETE_GUD _N_NC_GUD _N_NC_GD1 _N_NC_GD2 _N_NC_GD3


11.02


N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 N37 N38 N39 N40 N41 N42 N43 N44 N45

_N_NC_GD4 _N_NC_GD5 _N_NC_GD6 _N_NC_GD7 _N_NC_GD8 _N_NC_GD9 _N_CH%d_GUD _N_CH%d_GD1 _N_CH%d_GD2 _N_CH%d_GD3 _N_CH%d_GD4 _N_CH%d_GD5 _N_CH%d_GD6 _N_CH%d_GD7 _N_CH%d_GD8 _N_CH%d_GD9 _N_TO%d_INI _N_TO%d_TOA _N_TO%d_TMA _N_NC_CEC _N_AX%d_QEC _N_AX%d_EEC

In the case of files with identifier "%d", the channel, axis or tool area number is specified via the PLC (DB19, DBB14). The standard list cannot be edited. • Axis and channel numbers can be specified via the PLC (DB19, DBB14). • Another index (0, 1-255) for defining text (file name) can be specified as a line offset within this file. HMI Embedded uses this information to identify the name of the transfer file or job list to be started. Example: Output via RS 232 C (V.24) (R parameter channel 1) Requirements: • Standard list for NC data: See above • Acknowledgment byte DB19.DBB24 is 0. • PLC job "V.24 out" • PLC index for channel 1 • PLC line offset

DB19.DBB 12.6 = 1 DB19.DBB 14 = 1 DB19.DBB 15 = 14

è File _N_CH1_RPA is output. • HMI Embedded signals to the PLC: Reading out control file DB19.DBB24,6 = 1


IM2/8-151


11.02

Error messages to the PLC The HMI Embedded outputs the following error values to the PLC via DB19.DBB25: 0 No error 1 Invalid control file number. (value in DB19.DBB14 < 127 or invalid) 2 DB19.DBB15 cannot be read 3 Control file /BD.DIR/PLC_IN_OUT_xxx.TEA cannot be found. (value in DB19.DBB14 invalid) 4 Invalid index in control file. (value in DB19.DBB15 is incorrect) 5 Job list selected in control file cannot be opened (HMI Advanced only) 6 Error in job list (job list interpreter is signaling error) (HMI Advanced only) 7 Job list interpreter is signaling empty job list (HMI Advanced only) 8 Error during RS 232 C (V.24) transmission. The error text is entered in the SERVICES LOG. 9 Error in execution of job list (HMI Advanced only)

User control file • The PLC inputs an index (1-127) which identifies the control file that contains one or several texts (e.g. program names / job list names) and • a second index (0, 1-255) for defining text as a line offset within this file. HMI Embedded uses this information to identify the name of the transfer file or job list to be started.

Transfer user files Files that have been created specifically by the user can be stored in specially provided control files (user control list). The control file has the same structure as a part program. The name of a file can be stored in each line. Line numbering can be used (i.e. N1 to N255). File names are assigned according to a predefined scheme: The control file is called "_N_PLC_IN_OUT_xxx_TEA", in which xxx (index) stands for a number between 001 and 127. The number is specified in DB19, DBB14, bits 0 to 6, Bit7=1. The control file is stored in the operator data directory (_N_BD_DIR). It is possible to store either complete paths or just the file names themselves. The names must be specified initially in NCK notation for HMI Embedded. But they can also be extended to the job list notation. Example User control list "_N_PLC_IN_OUT_003_TEA", N1 _N_OTTO_MPF N2 /_N_WKS_DIR/_N_OTTO_WPD/_N_OTTO_MPF N3 .....

IM2/8-152


11.02


If index 0 is specified, all files listed in the control file will be output. The line numbers (N1 to N255) must be generated starting at 1 and incremented by 1 for each line.

Several operator panel fronts/NCUs (m:n) Data transmission is performed via the operator panel front currently connected to the NCU. Machine manufacturer Please read the information supplied by the machine manufacturer. For a description of DB 19, please refer to: References: /FB/ A2: Various Interface Signals

8.3 Reading ISO programs in/out via RS-232-C (V.24) Note FANUC 0 control system programs can be read in and out as ISO programs. ISO programs can be read in and out of HMI Embedded in punched tape format. The punched tape format for ISO programs (ISO punched tape format) is not the same as Siemens HMI Embedded punched tape format. The new ISO format settings are activated in display machine data "MM_ISO_ACTIVE" (9390) ("MM_ISO_ACTIVE" = 1).

8.4 Backing up data with HMI Embedded WIN32 with the PCU 50/70 Data backup including hard disk backup is described in: References: /IAM/IM4: Installation and start-up HMI Advanced


IM2/8-153


11.02

8.5 Backing up data with ATA card PC for PCU 20 With the PCU 20, you can install an ATA card PC (SANDISK-PCMC/A, Type II) in the existing PC card slot so it can be used as an additional external program memory. You can copy the programs in both directions, i.e. to and from the ATA card PC and part program memory in the control. The programs can also be written from the diskette drive to the ATA card PC. If you want to execute the program straight from the ATA card, you can use the function "Execution from external source". We recommend the following SANDISK cards: SDP3B- 32-101 SDP3B-128-101 You can obtain SANDISK cards from specialist retailers.

Additional requirement The cards must be plugged in before booting for the system to detect the storage media. The drive letter for these external storage devices starts from C:\ ■

IM2/8-154


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 9 Diagnostics

9

9 Diagnostics

9.1 Action log ................................................................................ IM2/9-156 9.1.1 Log file ................................................................................. IM2/9-157 9.1.2 Displaying the log file / Setting the action log...................... IM2/9-158 9.1.3 Reading out the log file........................................................ IM2/9-158 9.2 Software version display......................................................... IM2/9-159


IM2/9-155


11.02

9.1 Action log Function The Action log function can be used to log operating sequences. The following functions are available: • Logging of alarms • Logging of key actuation • Output of log file via RS-232-C (V.24) • The action log is password-encrypted (protection level less than/equal to 3). • Can be enabled/disabled via MD 9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE Note The precondition for the Action Log function is that the operating area "Start-up" is installed.

9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE MD number Action log settings Default value: 255 Min. input value: 0 Max. input value: 0xffff Change valid after POWER ON Protection level (R/W) 2/2 Unit: Data type: DWORD Significance This MD can be used to enable/disable the action log and to define a choice of the data to be logged. Bit 0

=1 =0

Action log ON (default) Action log OFF

Bit 1

=1

HMI Advanced: Variable services (write access to geometric data, e.g. tool offsets) are logged. For meaning of variables, see Help function in Parameters operating area under Variable Views (default). Variable services are not logged.

=0 Bit 2

=1

=0 Bit 3

IM2/9-156

=1

HMI Advanced: PI services (e.g. program selection) are logged; for meaning of variables, see Help function in Parameters operating area under Variable Views (standard). PI services are not logged

=0

HMI Advanced: Domain services (e.g. load/unload program operations are logged (default). Domain services are not logged.

Bit 4

=1 =0

Changes in the alarm status are logged (default). Changes in the alarm status are not logged.

Bit 5

=1 =0

Key actuations are logged (default). Key actuations are not logged.


11.02


Bit 6

=1 =0

Channel status/override is logged (default). Channel status/override is not logged.

Bit 7

=1

HMI Advanced: Softkey actuations and menu changes are logged. For Siemens internal use only (default) HMI Embedded: Identification number of opened and closed windows is logged. For Siemens internal use only (default). Softkey actuations and menu changes are not logged.

=0

If the action log is enabled, the files that can be logged are logged by default. The following events can be logged:

Alarm status All displayed NC/PLC and HMI Embedded alarms and messages can be logged.

Key actuation All operator panel front and MF2 key actuations can be logged.

Channel status/override NC/PLC statuses can be logged using information about the channel status and the position of the override switch. At least in parts, if they can be recorded by time, these statuses are used to verify the operation of the MCP.

Window ID The identification number of a window is logged when opening and closing a window.

9.1.1

Log file The log file is output in English.

File structure The log file is divided into 4 columns: • Date • Time • NCU name • Event


IM2/9-157


Example of a log file: Date Time 26.02.1999 07:45:20 26.02.1999 29.09.1999 29.09.1999 29.09.1999

9.1.2

07:45:20 18:59:10 18:59:07 18:59:07

11.02

Event specification HMI booting (conn.no: 0, MM_ACTION_LOG_MODE: ff, entries: 4094) Alarm 300701 axis X1, drive 2 start-up required Key: 68 KEY_SELECT_MODE (0) Open window: 20005 Close window: 20020

Displaying the log file / Setting the action log

Display log file The display is password-encrypted. The current log file is displayed on the screen of the operator panel front in the Diagnostics operating area in the menu Service Displays -> Action Log in the screen "Action Log File". If a crash file exists, the softkey "Crash Data" is also displayed, with which the crash file can be displayed. The vertical softkey "Data Out -> RS-232-C (V.24)" can be used to output and archive the log file.

Set action log The action log settings are password-encrypted. The screen form "Action log settings" is displayed in the menu HMI Embedded in the Start-up operating area. Here you can: • enable/disable the logging; • select the data to be logged; • alarm status change; • key actuation; • channel status/override; • window IDs. The selected setting must be confirmed by pressing the softkey "Save Settings".

9.1.3

Reading out the log file The log file output is password-encrypted. There are two possible ways to output the log file: • via the Diagnostics operating area in the menu Service Displays -> Action Log -> Read-out via RS-232C or

IM2/9-158


11.02


• via the boot menu. A boot menu is displayed whenever a crash event exists (PLC bit DB19, byte0, bit6). The bit is set and reset from the PLC at the user interface (such as also key lock, screen darkening ....). HMI Embedded evaluates the rising edge of the signal (i.e. a transition from 0 to 1) and creates the log file when the signal comes. HMI Embedded only reads the data, i.e. the signal must be reset from the PLC/user program. If the bit is already set when HMI Embedded is booted, HMI Embedded does not respond to the value of the bit (only after it has been reset and set again). • The log file _AC_LOGP.TXT is read out either during the boot process or can be read out in the Diagnosis operating area until the system is next switched off. The file is then deleted. • Reboot the control system. • Prompt: "Action log detected! Read out V.24? ([Y]/N)" • If you acknowledge this question with "Yes", the log will be read out via RS 232 C (V.24). Prerequisite: The interface parameters of RS 232 C (V.24) must be set accordingly. Note A latency must be observed between two signals to make sure that the second signal can be processed.

9.2 Software version display Function The version data of the installed system software are shown in the version display.

Procedure 1. Select the DIAGNOSIS area 2. Select softkey "Service displays" 3. Select softkey "Version" The versions of the NCK software are displayed first per default. To view the versions of the HMI software , select softkey "HMI".

■


IM2/9-159


IM2/9-160

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 10 Configure Windows in the NC Program

10 Configure Windows in the NC Program

10

10.1 Structure of the instructions............................................... IM2/10-162 10.2 Application examples......................................................... IM2/10-163 10.3 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgement.............................................................. IM2/10-165 10.4 Example program 2: Dwell time and optional text variables ............................................................................ IM2/10-166 10.5 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode...................................................... IM2/10-167 10.6 Example program 4: Positioning the input and output fields .................................................................................. IM2/10-168 10.7 Example program 5: Graphic inserts ................................. IM2/10-170 10.8 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgement mode with softkeys ............................................................ IM2/10-171 10.9 List of files for the dialog screen files ................................ IM2/10-173


IM2/10-161


11.02

Introduction With software version 4.4 and higher, you can configure your own dialog windows (dialog screens) and display them on HMI Embedded. The appearance of the dialog windows is configured purely by text (COM file in the cycles directory). The dialog window is called and closed by function calls in the part program. User-configured dialog windows do not modify the HMI system software (operator interface). You cannot call user-defined dialog windows simultaneously in different channels, i.e. you can only use the MMC command with a 1:1 link. The "Configure windows in the NC program" function is also referred to as the "command channel".

Application One possible application of user dialog windows is, for example, to selectively assign current values to particular user variables (GUD) prior to a part program run.

10.1 Structure of the instructions Syntax MMC ("operating area, command, Com file, dialog box name, user data definition file, graphics file, display time or acknowledgment variable, text variables...", "Acknowledgment mode")

Operating area Name of softkey with which the configured user dialogs can be called. Default entry: "CYCLES", displayed as "Cycles" on softkey 7 (with Win32: Softkey 14) and accessible via the "ETC" key.

Command Picture_on select screen Picture_off deselect screen

Com file Name of the dialog box file (max. 8 characters, in the user cycles or standard cycles directory CST.DIR). The appearance of the dialog screen is defined here. The dialog screen form is used to display user variables and/or comment texts.

Dialog screen name The individual screens are selected using the dialog screen name.

IM2/10-162


11.02


User data definition file GUD file accessed on reading/writing.

Graphics file File name of a BMP graphic to be inserted. See Manual "Supplement Operator Interface", BE1 Section Screen Elements, Displays

Display time or acknowledgment variable Display time Acknowledgment variable

for acknowledgment mode "N" for acknowledgment mode "A"

Text variables Screen header or comment text from a text variable of the COM file

Acknowledgment mode "S"

synchronous,

acknowledgment using the "OK" softkey

10.2 Application examples MMC command in the part program MMC("CYCLES;PICTURE_ON;T_SK.COM,PIC- MGUD.DEF, TURE1,

PICTURE TEST_1, A1", "S") _3.AWB,

Operating area Command "Picture ON/OFF" Com file name*) in cycle directory Dialog screen name User data definition file Graphics file (not HMI Embedded) Acknowledgement variable (or display time in "N") mode) (not HMI Embedded) Screen header or comment from text variable (from COM file) Acknowledgement mode: Synchronous, Asynchronous, No ack.

*)

On the MMC103/PCU 50, the file is named T_SK_GR.COM for example, but is called here without language identifier "GR".


IM2/10-163


11.02

User variables (in the definition directory) %_N_UGUD_DEF ;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR DEF

CHAN REAL TEST_1

Reference parameter for MMC command Data type Name of the user variable

Dialog screen file (in the cycle directory) (*.COM) //C3(Picture3) R/

15

75

5/ COMMENT;%1,%2,%3/ W,RJ

Variable type Real Integer String

TEST_1/ ...)

User variable

Innput limits: min. 15, max. 75 (not HMI Embedded) Default value for user VAR Comment text with optional text variables

Type of access: W = Write/read Read only R= W, rj = Write/read with comment No j: Left-justified toward input or output field j: Right-justified toward input or output field (not HMI Embedded)

Note For variable names, text variables and cycle names, capital letters must be used.

Text variables [TEXTVARIABLES ] A1

=Example2: MMC command without ack.

Reference parameter for MMC command Screen header or comment text

IM2/10-164


11.02


10.3 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgement Part program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,A1","N") N20 TEST_1 = 1 N25 G4 F10 N30 MMC ("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF", "N") N40 M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C1(SCREEN1) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable TEXTVARIABLEN] A1 =............Example1: MMC command without acknowledgment............

Sequence The user variable TEST_1 from GUD4.DEF with header A1 is displayed for a short moment. The dwell time results from part program block N25.

Example 1: MMC command without acknowledgement ANW.VAR TEST_1

1.000000


IM2/10-165


11.02

10.4 Example program 2: Dwell time and optional text variables Part program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN6,GUD4.DEF,,10, T1,G1","N") N15 G4 F15 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C6(screen6) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1,%1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable [TEXT VARIABLES] T1 = Example2: Dwell time and optional text variables.... G1 = optional text variable The 7th parameter is interpreted as a display unit for the mode without acknowledgment (10 seconds). The contents of the table is then deleted. The screen form remains on the screen until Picture_off is selected. The 8th parameter (T1) is the text variable for the screen header. If there is no entry, the operating area name (cycles) is displayed. The parameters 9 to 23 are optional text variables (in this case "G1=optional text variable"). In this COM file, the optional text variables must be loaded with default values in the section "[text variables]".

Example 2: Dwell time and optional text variables ANW.VAR TEST_1, optional text variable

IM2/10-166

1.000000


11.02


Sequence The comment text from the COM file (ANW.VAR TEST_1) will be expanded in this example in the position of the first wild card (%1) by the contents of the text variable "G1 optional text variable". By calling the text variables contained in the MMC command (9th to 23rd parameters), messages or names can thus be "composed".

10.5 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode Part program N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,F1","S") N18 STOPRE N20 TEST_1 = 5 N25 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") N30 M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C1(SCREEN1) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable F1 = ...Example3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgement mode...

Example 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgement mode

ANW.VAR TEST_1

1.000000

OK

Sequence The user variable Test_1 is displayed as long as the softkey "OK" is pressed. The user variable has also been overwritten with value 5. Without STOPRE, this assignment would be carried out prior to the keyboard input (with STOPRE after it!).


IM2/10-167


11.02

10.6 Example program 4: Positioning the input and output fields By specifying position parameters in the COM file, you can insert the comment field, or input and output field, at any position within the display area. N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON, T_SK.COM; Screen2, GUD4.DEF,,,C1","S") N20 TEST_3 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C2(Screen12) (R///Var.Name/R/TEST_3/6000,2800,8000/ 200,3000,7500)

Position of the input/output field Position of the comment field: First value = 0 --> Automatic positioning on default value No specification --> Default positioning as with PCU 20

The two parameters comprise three numerical values in each case; these specify the position and length of the field. The values are specified in Twips, with 15 Twips corresponding approximately to one pixel. The field height is defined as being 250 Twips. Meaning of values: (./6000,2800,8000/....) Distance from left screen edge Distance from upper screen edge Field length

It is possible to graphically configure 16 comment and 16 input or output fields. Where there are more than 16 fields, they can be controlled via a scroll bar.

IM2/10-168


11.02


Example 4: Position parameters

ANW.VAR TEST_2 1.000000 OK

To ensure that the cursor control works seamlessly, the configured fields must overlap one another (see below):

Example 4: Position parameters 1.000000 1.000000 1.000000

1.000000 OK


IM2/10-169


11.02

10.7 Example program 5: Graphic inserts You also have the option of inserting graphics, e.g. images created with Paintbrush, in the dialog screen by specifying a graphic file. A comment text for the image can also be preassigned via the Com file. You can position this comment text by specifying position parameters. Note

You can only move the image itself by repositioning it in the graphics program.

Part program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN8,GUD4.DEF,GRA.BMP,, M1","S") N20 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N30 M30

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C8(SCREEN8) (I/// Insert image no. 2///4000,3000,7500) (I/// Created with Paintbrush ///4000,3250,7500)

Text variable M1 = ......Example5: Image insert....... Images are created, e.g. with the drawing tool "Paintbrush". Image size: 300X500 pixels, you can only change the image size in Paintbrush.

Example 5: Image inserts

OK

IM2/10-170


11.02


10.8 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgement mode with softkeys Softkeys can be preprogrammed in the COM file for display in asynchronous mode, linked with the acknowledgement variable and evaluated in the part program.

Part program N10 N20

QUIT_1 = "START" MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN3,GUD4.DEF,, QUIT_1,K1","A") LABEL0: STOPRE IF MATCH (QUIT_1,"SK1") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL1 IF MATCH (QUIT_1,"SK2") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL2 GOTOB LABEL0 LABEL2: MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,, N1","N") G4F10 LABEL1: MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") M30

N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C3(Screen3) (S/// ANW.VAR QUIT_1/W/QUIT_1//) [TEXT VARIABLES] K1 = ..Example8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgement mode N1 = ..Example8: Screen2

Text variable [SCREEN3] SK1 = END SK2 = Screen2

Softkey 8 Softkey 9

Example 8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgement mode

Softkey 10

ANW.VAR TEST_1

START Softkey 11 Softkey 12 Softkey 13 Softkey 14

OK END Softkey 0

Softkey 1

Softkey 15

Screen2 Softkey 2

Softkey 3

Softkey 4

Softkey 5

Softkey 6

Softkey 7


IM2/10-171


11.02

Sequence The screen called via the asynchronous MMC command continues to be displayed until one of the two configured softkeys is actuated: The user dialog is ended immediately when you click softkey "END". When you click softkey "Screen2" another screen is subsequently displayed for a period of 10 s.

Program • The acknowledgement variable is defined as a string. String length: >= 20 (Settings < 20 are evaluated internally only, SK0 ... SK15 are entered at position 17...20 on softkey actuation). • The string is assigned a value in the part program and thus old softkey information deleted if applicable. • Before the part program can branch as a function of the acknowledgement variable, the block search must be halted by the STOPRE command. • IF Match (Quit_1," SK1") >= 0 GotoF Label1 searches for a string within the string If no softkey has been actuated, the loop runs again.

Example 8: Screen 2 ANW.VAR TEST_1

5.00000

OK

IM2/10-172


11.02


10.9 List of files for the dialog screen files Part programs %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE1_MPF N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,A1","N") N20 TEST_1 = 1 N25 G4 F10 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE2_MPF N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN6,GUD4.DEF,,10, T1,G1","N") N15 G4 F15 N20 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N25 M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE3_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,F1","S") N20 TEST_1 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE4_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN2,GUD4.DEF,,,C1","S") N20 TEST_3 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE5_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN8,GUD4.DEF,GRA.BMP,, M1","S") N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30


IM2/10-173


11.02

%_N_MMC_EXAMPLE8_MPF N10 QUIT_1 = "START" N20 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN3,GUD4.DEF,, QUIT_1,K1","A") N30 LABEL0: N40 STOPRE N50 IF MATCH (QUIT_1,"SK1") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL1 N60 IF MATCH (QUIT_1,"SK2") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL2 N70 GOTOB LABEL0 N80 LABEL2: N90 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,, N1","N") N100 G4 F10 N110 LABEL1: N120 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") N130 M30

Dialog screen files (*.COM) %_N_T_SK_GR.COM ;$PATH=/_N_CST.DIR //C1(SCREEN1) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) //C2(SCREEN2) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_2/W/TEST_2/6000,2800,8000/200,3000,7500) //C3(SCREEN3) (S///ANW.VAR QUIT_1/W/QUIT_1///) //C4(SCREEN4) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1/4000,250,2000/6000,250,1500/) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_2/W/TEST_2/4000,1000,2000/6000,1000,1500/) (R///ANW.VAR SINUM_1/W/SINUM_1/0,250,2500/1900,250,2000/) (R///ANW.VAR SINUM_3/W/SINUM_3/0,1000,2500/1900,1000,2000/) //C5(SCREEN5) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_2/r,rj/TEST_2///) //C6(SCREEN6) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1,%1/W/TEST_1///) //C7(SCREEN7) (R///ANW.VAR TEST_1/W,RJ/TEST_1///) (I///) (R///actual value from axis1/R/$actual value) (R//1/R parameter12/W/$R[12]) //C8(SCREEN8) (I/// Insert image no.///4000,3000,7500) (I///Created with Paintbrush ///4000,3250,7500)

IM2/10-174


11.02


Text variable definition [TEXT VARIABLES] A1 = Example1: MMC command without acknowledgment T1 = Example2: Dwell time and optional text variables C1 = Example4: Position parameter G1 = Optional text variable F1 = Example3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode I1 = Type of access to user variable K1 = Example8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgment mode M1 = Example5: Screen display N1 = Example8: Screen2 [SCREEN3] SK1 = END SK2 = Screen2 SK3 SK4 [BTSSVar] $actual value=/Channel/machineaxis/actToolbasePos[u1,1] $R[12]=/Channel/Parameter n


IM2/10-175


IM2/10-176

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) 11 Installation and Start-up of SINUMERIK HT6

11 Installation and Start-up of SINUMERIK HT6

11

11.1 Hardware/software requirements........................................ IM2/11-178 11.2 Documentation.................................................................... IM2/11-178 11.3 EMC/ESD measures........................................................... IM2/11-179 11.4 Software replacement......................................................... IM2/11-180 11.4.1 System and application software.................................. IM2/11-180 11.4.2 Installing the HT 6 system software ............................. IM2/11-181 11.4.3 Installing the application software ................................ IM2/11-183 11.4.4 Language add-ons (text diskettes) ............................... IM2/11-188 11.4.5 SW upgrade.................................................................. IM2/11-190 11.5 Alarm text files for HT 6 ...................................................... IM2/11-192 11.5.1 Syntax for alarm text files ............................................. IM2/11-193 11.5.2 Alarm list properties...................................................... IM2/11-194 11.5.3 Editing text files ............................................................ IM2/11-195 11.6 Configuring text files in foreign languages.......................... IM2/11-196 11.7 Switching over channels/operator units .............................. IM2/11-197 11.7.1 Configuration example: Adapting NETNAMES.INI ...... IM2/11-197 11.7.2 Configuration example: Adapting language texts......... IM2/11-199 11.8 PLC data ............................................................................. IM2/11-202 11.8.1 PLC installation and start-up ........................................ IM2/11-202 11.8.2 Setting the time and date ............................................. IM2/11-202 11.8.3 Operation via MPI......................................................... IM2/11-202 11.9 Diagnostics ......................................................................... IM2/11-203 11.9.1 Action log...................................................................... IM2/11-203 11.9.2 Error status screen "Blue screen" ................................ IM2/11-206 11.10 Miscellaneous ................................................................... IM2/11-210 11.10.1 NCK reset ..................................................................... IM2/11-210 11.10.2 Change Language option ............................................. IM2/11-210 11.10.3 Enabling screen darkening........................................... IM2/11-210 11.10.4 Setting the screen brightness....................................... IM2/11-211 11.10.5 Disabling/enabling teach mode transfer ....................... IM2/11-211 11.10.6 One to four axis systems.............................................. IM2/11-211


IM2/11-177


11.02

Introduction This chapter describes how to install and start up the HT 6. For further reading on special NCK, MMC, PLC, or drive functions, please consult the Descriptions of Functions/Manuals (see "Documentation").

11.1 Hardware/software requirements Hardware The handheld terminal HT 6 comprises a flat screen, softkeys, keypad, override rotary switch, emergency switch and enable key, as well as interfaces and power supply. The HT 6 combines the functions of the HMI and MCP.

Software The system software is installed in the HT 6 as standard when supplied from the factory. When updating the software, load the system software from the supplied CD onto the HT 6 via the service menu (see Section Software Installation).

Required devices and accessories In order to install the software on the HT 6 you require 1. PC/PG with CD drive 2. PC/PG with Omnidrive for writing to the PC card 3. PC card (8 MB)

11.2 Documentation You require the following documentation for the installation and start-up of SINUMERIK 840D: − Operator Components Manual /BH/ − Description of Functions Basic Machine /FB1/ − Lists /LIS/ − Diagnostics Guide /DA/ − Operator's Guide HT 6 /BAH/

IM2/11-178


11.02


11.3 EMC/ESD measures Shielded signal leads To ensure safe, interference-free operation of the system, the cables specified in the individual drawings must be used. The shield must be connected conductively to the housings.

Installation regulations In order to obtain the best possible noise immunity of the overall system (control, power section, machine), the following EMC measures must be followed: • Keep the signal and load cable as far apart as possible. • Use only the cables supplied by SIEMENS for signal cables to and from the HT 6. • Signal cables must not be laid in the close vicinity of strong magnetic fields (e.g. motors and transformers). • Pulse-loaded high-current/high-voltage cables must always be laid separately from other cables. • The distance (interference injection area) between the following cables must be as close as possible: − Signal line and signal line − Signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor − Equipotential bonding conductor and parallel protective conductor.

!

Important For further information about suppression measures and the connection of shielded cables see References: /EMC/, EMC Directives


IM2/11-179


11.02

11.4 Software replacement The HT 6 software is supplied on CD. It includes the system environment (system diskette) and the application environment (application diskette). A description of the contents of the CD is given in files "siemensd.txt" (German) and "siemense.txt" (English). Older HT6 software versions are also supplied on the CD.

11.4.1

System and application software

Scope of delivery The HT 6 software is supplied on CD (10 directories = Disk01 to Disk09 + flashabb). The disk contents are as follows: 1. Boot software 2. System software 3. User software 4. Application software − Alarm text files − Configuration files for HT 6 − Configuration file for several operator panel fronts − User software In directory "\flashabb" you will also find a PC card image of the standard system software in the two languages English and German. This can be transferred directly to the Flash memory card and loaded onto the HT 6.

System software Installation of disk set 1 (disk 01 to disk 06) gives you a fully operational standard HT 6 system with English as the first language and German as the second language. The alarm text files and message files only contain Siemens texts.

Application software With the application software (disk 07 to disk 09) you can perform the following actions: − Adapt and expand alarm text files − Select one or two languages other than the ones already loaded with disk set 1 − Select further languages if there is enough memory space − Make special display MD settings − Adapt the configuration parameters for several operator panel fronts/NCUs − Modify system files "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" − Change MPI parameters such as the bus address

IM2/11-180


11.02

11.4.2


Installing the HT 6 system software

System software areas The system software on the HT 6 is divided into the following areas: • Boot software • System software • User software The HT 6 software is stored on EEPROMs. The system software contains all the files that are required for the operation of HT 6. The following languages are available: English, German, French, Spanish and Italian. You can select the desired language with the softkey "Change language". All system texts, texts for PLC messages and cycle alarm texts are located in the user software area.

Preconditions •

In order to upgrade the system software (SW 6.1) on HMI Embedded, it is necessary to switch the HT 6 to its initialization state. • You also need a PC/PG to load the new system software onto the PC card. MS-DOS 6.0 or higher must be installed on the PC/PG. Directories with up to 8 MB memory space are set up on the hard disk of the PC/PG. The data that are selected for transfer during installation are stored in these directories.

Data backup Please back up the necessary data before starting the software upgrade.

1. Call SYS_INST.EXE The following installation menu is displayed: System installation HT6

= Install system to harddisk = Install systemdisk to harddisk & to hardware = Select optional files for install = Quit program! Please make your choice

1.

- Help

With this menu item, the system software can be transferred onto several PC/PGs (for later installation of the system software on the target hardware).


IM2/11-181


11.02

2.

With this menu item, the system software can be transferred to the hard disk (PC/PG) and installed on the target HT 6 hardware immediately afterwards. In the case of the HT 6, relevant only for the generation of a PC card image. The software cannot be transferred via RS-232-C. 3. Necessary only if it is specifically mentioned in the software upgrade instructions. This point is omitted in standard installations. ESC Aborts the installation and terminates the program. F1 Displays help text for the active screen. Necessary only if explicitly prescribed in the software upgrade instructions. This point is omitted in standard installations.

2. Select menu option or The system software is transferred to PG/PC or the target hardware. Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001, all rights reserved Installation kit version 06.01 Install system disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

Select the drive on the PC/PG you want to copy the system disk files to. This can be any hard disk drives and network drives for which you have write access.



F1

RETURN

Select the directory to which you want to copy the system disk files. If the path you enter does not exist, it will be created. The default path is "\MMC100PJ.SYS". The files are copied to the hard disk. If option 1 was selected previously, the installation menu is displayed again. If option 2 was selected, the program is continued with the transfer menu:

IM2/11-182


11.02


4. Transfer the software to the hardware The transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1 = Install software via serial line = Create Flash Memory Card image = Select COM port = Quit program Please make your choice

- Help

Menu option 1: Transfer to the hardware via RS-232-C is not supported by the HT 6! Menu option 2: This option is for accelerating the update procedure. Flash memory card image is created, which can be used directly for the update (without RS-232C). It can be stored in any directory of your choice. If the specified directory does not exist, it is created. If the directory already contains a flash memory card image, it is overwritten. Menu option 3: This option is irrelevant for the HT 6. Esc aborts the installation and terminates the program.

11.4.3

Installing the application software

Requirements • • •

You have already loaded the boot and system software from the CD for the HT 6. The compression software "ARJ.EXE" should be available (supplied). Call up "APP_INST.EXE" from directory DISK07.

1. Run APP_INST.EXE 2. Specify the drive Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit version 06.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select drive for installation

Drive:

ESC

RETURN


IM2/11-183


11.02


3. Specify the path Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit 06.01 Install application disk to harddisk Select path for installation


RETURN

Select the directory to which you want to extract the application software files. If the path you enter does not exist, it will be created. The default path is "\MMC100PJ.APP". The files are copied to the hard disk and decompressed!

4. Define the configuration When the files have been installed on the hard disk, the following selection menu is displayed: Install application on hardware HT6 First language: English Second language: German = Install all modules to hardware = Modify configuration = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

1. 2. ESC F1

IM2/11-184

- Help

Install the configuration set in option 2 to the hardware! Change the language settings and edit selected ASCII system files. Aborts the installation and terminates the program. Display online help for the active screen.


11.02


4.a. Define configuration Install application on hardware HT6 First language: English Second language: German

= Change first language = Change second language = Edit ASCII files = Edit text file for first language = Edit text file for second language = Add user-specific files to the application


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ESC F1

- Help

Change the language settings for the first language. Change the language settings for the second language. Edit ASCII system files. Edit the language files for the first set language. Edit the language files for the second set language. Integrate other files. Return to the installation menu. Displays the online help.

Options or assign a new language setting to the first/second language.

Language selection The language selection menu is overlaid: Change first language (actually : English )

= German = Spanish = French = English = Italian


- Help

Options to assign a new language setting to the first/second language. PgDn Page down to the next page (if there are more than 7 languages). PgUp Page up to the previous page (if there are more than 7 languages). ESC Exit the menu (regardless of which page you are on) without changing the active language setting.


IM2/11-185


11.02

Edit ASCII files Install application on hardware HT6 First language: English Second language: German

= Edit MPI configuration data = Edit display machine data = Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT = Edit CONFIG.SYS


- Help

Option 1 to 4 starts "EDIT.COM" to edit the respective file. Some options are only displayed if the files exist. Upon selection, "EDIT.COM" is started automatically. 1. 2. 3. 4. ESC F1

Edit the MPI configuration parameters (netnames.ini). Edit the default display machine data. Edit the autoexec.bat file of HT 6. Edit the config.sys file of HT 6. Exit the menu. Displays the online help.

Here you can integrate or edit e.g. proprietary PLC alarms or PLC messages in the ALP.TXT file. MCU alarm texts must be added in the AMCU.TXT file.

!

Important

!

Warning

You can only add texts to the standard texts. Siemens standard texts must not be modified. These modifications must also be made for the language set as the second language, otherwise you will not be able to compile the files.

We cannot guarantee correct functioning of the software if unauthorized changes are made to the "AUTOEXEC.BAT" and "CONFIG.SYS" files.

Transferring additional languages Upon selection of the menu option "Install to Hardware", the following screen appears. You can now transfer additional languages to the HT 6. To do this, position the cursor (">") on the desired language and press ENTER. The selected language will be marked by an asterisk.

IM2/11-186


11.02


The "X" indicates the first and second language which must always be selected: Select additional language for application disk Selected Hardware: HT6 X German * > Spanish French X English Italian = Cancel

= Help

= Accept

= Toggl

Upon selection of , the required languages are generated, "NETNAMES.BIN" is created and the files are prepared for transfer to the hardware. Then the transfer menu is displayed as follows: Transfer software to hardware Selected COM port: COM1 = Install software via serial line = Create Flash Memory Card image = Select COM port = Quit program! Please make your choice

- Help

Transmission via RS-232-C is not supported for HT 6! Create a flash memory card image which can be used for the update directly. Irrelevant for HT 6! ESC aborts the installation and terminates the program immediately without displaying a prompt. How to terminate After completing the transfers to the hard disk, terminate the installation menu by pressing . You can restart the installation menu at any time from subdirectory INSTUTIL of the installation directory. Start installation on hard disk When you run "app_inst.exe", the configuration menu is displayed. Selection of the drive and path is no longer necessary because transfer from the diskette to the hard disk has already taken place. The other menu options are operated as described above.


IM2/11-187


11.4.4

11.02

Language add-ons (text diskettes) The language add-on CD contains all texts for the versions of the SINUMERIK MMCs so far supplied in all supported languages.

!

Important • •

Only install ordered languages. The version of the language add-on CD must be the same as the HT6 software version.

The text software "textdisk" is an update of the texts of the system software and offers the following options • Add new languages to the screen/installation kit. • Add new languages to the application disk image.

1. Run TXT_INST.EXE Insert the disk and run "TXT_INST.EXE". Update texts for your hardware

= Update texts on your screen or installation kit = Update texts on your application disk installation = Quit program!

- Help


1. 2. ESC F1

Add a new language to the screen or installation kit. Add a new language to the application disk image. Terminates the program. Displays help text for the active screen.

2. Add a new language to the screen or installation kit 2.a Enter drive Enter the drive the application disk files were installed to. Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit version 06.01 Update texts on your screen or installation kit installation Select the drive in which your application was installed

Drive:

ESC

IM2/11-188

F1

RETURN


11.02


2.b Enter path Enter the path where the screen/installation kit was installed. "\MMC100PJ" is entered as the default path. Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit 06.01 Update texts on your screen or installation kit installation Select the path in which your application was installed


F1

RETURN


3. Add a new language to the application disk image 3.a Enter drive Enter the drive the application disk files were installed to. Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit version 06.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the drive in which your application was installed

Drive:

ESC

F1

RETURN

3.b Enter path Enter the path where the application disk files are installed. The default path is "\MMC100PJ". Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2001 all rights reserved Installation kit 06.01 Update texts on your application installation Select the path in which your application was installed


F1

RETURN



IM2/11-189


11.4.5

11.02

SW upgrade

General Upgrade installations are supplied with each software version. These are to be found in the first installation directory (disk01) "siemensd.txt (German)" and "siemense.txt (English)". The HT 6 software can upgraded only by means of the PCMCIA card (PC card). Note It cannot be upgraded via the RS-232-C interface!

PCMCIA card name conventions A PCMCIA card is used both for the NCU and for the HT 6. The cards look identical, therefore it is easy to mix them up. For easier differentiation, the PCMCIA card • for the NCU will be referred to below as "NC card" and • for the HT 6 as "PC card".


You have already installed the system environment (system diskette) on the PG/PC. The "SINUCOPY_FFS" software has been installed.

Creating the PC card 1.

2. 3. 4. 5.

6. 7.

IM2/11-190

Change to directory "instutil" of the system environment, e.g. "\ht6pj.sys\instutil" (the directory specified when installing the system environment on the PC/PG). Run "sys_inst.exe" Select option "Install system on hardware". Select option "Create Flash Memory Card image". Select the target drive and directory to which the ABB file (PC card image) of the system is to be saved. File "HT 6.ABB" is then created. Insert the PC card in the PCMCIA slot on the PC/PG. Transfer the generated ABB file to the PC card with SINUCOPY-FFS.


11.02


SW update with PC card HT 6 requirement: PC card with the new HT 6 software version 1. Insert PC card into PC card slot on the HT 6. 2. Press the reset button on the HT 6 and wait until the serial number appears: HPU 100.2 boot software V01.01.02 Copyright (C) 1997 SIEMENS AG ERLANGEN, 570870710413 Vxx.xx.xx 3. Press key "6" on the HT 6. This starts updating mode. 4. A dialog box is displayed: "0: Transfer from PC memory card to HT 6" 1: HT 6 does not support transfer via RS-232C! "3: Select setup for teleservice" Select "0: Update from PC Card" 5. When data matching is complete, the message: "Remove PC card" appears. 6. As soon as you remove the PC card the HT 6 boots automatically and starts up with the new software.

HT 6 booted with wrong PC card If the HT 6 has been accidentally booted with the wrong card (e.g. NC card or empty card), return the HT 6 to your Siemens regional office.


IM2/11-191


11.02

11.5 Alarm text files for HT 6 Description The installation program "HPUSETUP" on the HT 6 system disk transfers: • Configuration settings • Texts • The configured user interface • The user software from the update directory on your PC/PG to the HT 6 hardware. The following section describes the possible modifications you can make to the alarm text files beforehand.

Precondition • •

PC with DOS 6.x RS-232-C cable between the COM1 interface of the HT 6 and the COM1 or COM2 interface of your PC • Storage capacity on the hard disk about 3 Mbytes The following description assumes that you have already transferred the software from the system disk shipped with the device to the hard disk of your PC/PG as described in the ReadMe file.

Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Call HPUSETUP. After copying the software to the harddisk cancel the installation ("NO"). Modify the alarm text files in the \proj_hpu\text\al\.... After making the changes, convert the text files ("Mkalarm") and download them to the HT 6. Call INSTALL in the .

Alarm texts/message texts The texts are on your PC with the standard Siemens entries on the hard disk drive you have selected. To simplify the description, we shall refer to it as C: from now on, even though you might have chosen another drive. The directory is: C:\hpu_dvk\proj_hpu\text\al\. stands for one of the following languages: D for German G for English F for French E for Spanish I for Italian

IM2/11-192


11.02


Files The text file names start with a and end with .txt:– ALZ.TXT Cycle alarm texts ALC.TXT Compile cycle alarm texts ALP.TXT PLC–Alarm–/–message texts

Editor For editing, use the DOS–editor edit. The standard texts contained in the text files can be overwritten by user-specific texts. This is done using an ASCII editor, e.g. the DOS editor. Alarm text files can be extended with new entries.

More than one language The HT 6 can be set with two online languages. These languages are termed the foreground and the background language. You can change the foreground and background language for the HMI/MMC system with the system disk. Installation allows you to choose any two of the languages on the system disk as the foreground and background language.

Master language The master language is always German. It defines the number and sequence of alarm/message texts for the languages chosen by the user. The number and sequence of the alarm/message texts of the chosen languages and the master language must match.

Conversion and download After making the changes, convert the text files and download them to the HT 6.

11.5.1

Syntax for alarm text files See Chapter 6


IM2/11-193


11.5.2

11.02

Alarm list properties You can modify the properties of the alarm list in the MBDDE.INI file. Table 11-1 shows the sections of file MBDDE.INI Table 11-1

Section

Significance

Alarms

General information about the alarm list (e.g. time/date format of alarms)

TextFiles

Path/file specification of text lists for the alarms (e.g. MMC=..\dh\mb.dir\alm_ )

HelpContext Name and paths of the help files (e.g. File 0=hlp\alarm_) DEFAULTP RIO

Priorities of the different alarm types (e.g. POWERON=100)

PROTOCOL Protocol properties (e.g. File=.\proto.txt < name and path of protocol file >) KEYS

Information about keys that can be used for clearing alarms (e.g. Cancel=+F10 )

For more details about the file entries, please refer to: References: /BN/, User's Guide: OEM Package MMC

"Alarms" The settings in this section determine the following properties for the alarm list: -

-

IM2/11-194

TimeFormat Here you enter the template to be used for time and date output. It corresponds to the CTime::Format of the Microsoft Foundation Classes. MaxNr Specifies the maximum size for the alarm list. ORDER Specifies the sequence in which the alarms are sorted into the alarm list: FIRST is used to sort alarms with most recent date to the top of the list, LAST is used to sort most recent alarms to the end of the list.


11.02


Example: [Alarms] TimeFormat=%d.%m.%y %H:%M:%S MaxNr=50 ORDER=LAST

11.5.3

Editing text files You can modify text files (e.g. alarm text files) stored in the system. To do this, follow the instructions below: 1. Upload the file to a PC (or programming device) via the RS-232-C interface, 2. edit and save the file, 3. download the file to the HT 6 again. Example: You want to assign the text "SampleText" to alarm number 700007 (DB2.DBX180.7). Follow the instructions below: 1. a. Set up an RS-232-C link between the HT 6 and your PC b. Boot the HT 6 and PC, c. In the "Services" area on the HT 6, select option "Texts" [in our example "Language 2" (English)] in the "Data Out" menu, d. Select a menu line in the working window which then appears [in our example "PLC alarm texts (user)"], e. Start a data transmission program (e.g. PCIN) on the PC; when you do this, select the path and name for the file to be edited (e.g. "Alarm1.txt") f: Activate the "Start" softkey in the HT 6 working window. The alarm text file is then transferred to the PC where it is saved under the name you selected. 2. a. Edit the file on the PC. Each line contains an alarm text number with associated explanatory text. b. Generate a new line at the end of the file by pressing the key, c. type in the new line: 700007 0 0 "SampleText", d. Save and close the file. 3. a. Initiate data transfer from the PC (see 1.e) by selecting "Send Data", b. As for 1.c., but select menu "Data In", c. In the working window which then appears, keeping the default settings, start the data transfer to the HT 6 by selecting softkeys "Start" and "OK". Once the file has been transferred, the HT 6 boots automatically. The modified alarm text file is then operative.


IM2/11-195


11.02

11.6 Configuring text files in foreign languages Text files in ANSI format are used.

Header in *.TXT files *.TXT files are text files that are identified by the following identifiers at the beginning of the file (before the first valid text; comments are admitted). // CP = XXXX Number of code page used to create the file // IDEO = YES Yes: Logographic language No: Single-byte language (Standard: No) // ANSI = YES Yes: ANSI code page No: OEM code page (Standard: No) // UNICODE = No Yes: Unicode (available soon) No: Single byte (Standard: No)

Supported languages The CD supplied with the HT 6 software package contains five standard European languages. Any other languages must be installed from the add-on language CD. To maintain compatibility with existing text files, the following conversions from OEM to ANSI code pages are supported: Table 11-2

Language German English French Italian Dutch Spanish

Languages and ANSI tables/code pages used

Language code D G F I N E

Code page (DOS) 850 850 850 850 850 850

ANSI Table (Windows) 1252 1252 1252 1252 1252 1252

OEM code pages are not supported for languages not listed.

IM2/11-196


11.02


11.7 Switching over channels/operator units Establishing a connection on multiple-channel systems Note • •

On the HT 6 the channel menu for m:n systems consists of two stages. In the first stage you select the channel group and in the second stage, the channel. For more details consult the Operator's Guide of the HT 6 and FB2 B3: Several Operator Panel Fronts and NCUs

On 1:1 systems, switchover is not performed via the channel menu but with the softkey "channel". Note It is not correct that the "netnames.ini file" can be loaded via the RS-232-C interface for the HT 6! References: /FB2, Description of Functions, B3, Section 2.1.5 netnames.ini is located in the flash image and is flashed with the PC card. Using the user interface, you can establish a connection between the MMC unit and the connected NCU/PLC units in each operating area. References: /BAH/Operator's Guide HT 6 Note Only those connections are offered via softkey which are indeed assigned and the channels of which are active in the respective NC. In the case of "m:n systems" all PLC communications tasks are mapped onto single variable accesses to keep the PLC resources required to a minimum.

11.7.1

Configuration example: Adapting NETNAMES.INI Access to the channel menu configuration is granted by extending the file "NETNAMES.INI". Use the following procedure: 1. Define groups (a max. of 8) in "logChanSetList". 2. Define the NCs and the channels with unambiguous names for the groups in "logChanList". 3. For the channels define - NC names in "logNCName", - channel no. on the NC in "ChanNum" and - reserve softkey yes/no (using command IsAGap" = True/False). Note The NC writes the channel number of the MMC in DB19, DBB22 or DB19, DBB72 (2nd interface). The names in the file NETNAMES.INI are limited to five characters.


IM2/11-197


11.02

Example: NETNAMES.INI [own] owner = HT6_1 ; Description of possible connections [conn HT6_1] conn_1 = NCU_1 conn_2 = NCU_2 ; Description of significant net parameters [param network] bus = btss ; on the SINUMERIK 810D the MPI interface must be used [param HT6_1] mmc_typ = 0x10 ; secondary operator panel mmc_bustyp = BTSS mmc_address = 14 mstt_address = 14 name = HT6 start_mode = OFFLINE [param NCU_1] type = NCU_573 nck_address = 12 plc_address = 12 name = NCU1 [param NCU_2] type = NCU_573 nck_address = 14 plc_address = 14 name = NCU2 [chan HT6_1] DEFAULT_logChanSet = Milling1 DEFAULT_logChan = Channel13 ShowChanMenu = TRUE logChanSetList = Milling1, Milling2 [Milling1] logChanList = Channel11, Channel12, Channel13, Channel14, Channel15 [Channel11] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 1 [Channel12] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 2

IM2/11-198


11.02


[Channel13] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 3 [Channel14] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 4 [Channel15] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 5 [Milling2] logChanList = Channel21, Channel22, Channel23 [Channel21] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 1 [Channel22] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 2 [Channel23] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 3

11.7.2

Configuration example: Adapting language texts

Foreign language texts Especially for the channel menu, the file "chan.txt" exists in several language variants to be found in the text directories "\proj\text\d", (-> German texts), "\proj\ text\g" (-> English texts) etc., depending on the respective language. "chan.txt" files that not yet contain any texts have the following appearance: Example: File with OEM name specifications for channel-areas and channels. //* text definitions for softkeys in channel switch menu *///* name of channel area 1 and names of channels of channel area 1 */ T_CHAN_AREA_1 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_1 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_2 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_3 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_4 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_5 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_6 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_7 T_CHAN_AREA_1_CHANNEL_8

"Milling1" "Channel11" "Channel12" "Channel13" "Channel14" "Channel15" "" "" ""

//* name of channel area 2 and names of channels of channel area 2 */T_CHAN_AREA_2 "Milling1" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_1 "Channel21" T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_2 "Channel22"


IM2/11-199


T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_3 T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_4 T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_5 T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_6 T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_7 T_CHAN_AREA_2_CHANNEL_8

11.02

"Channel23" "" "" "" "" ""

//* name of channel area 3 and names of channels of channel area 3 */T_CHAN_AREA_3 T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_1 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_2 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_3 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_4 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_5 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_6 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_7 "" T_CHAN_AREA_3_CHANNEL_8 "" : : etc. The OEM user can enter texts by inserting them in the blank character strings (see above)! 6 characters are possible per softkey bar; the carriage return is created using the characters "%n": e.g. "NC3Turn%nChannel1".

Creating the 'chantx.sp1' or 'chantx.sp2' file Precondition: The application disk has been installed. •

Call the file "APP_INST_EXE"; the following screen form appears: Install application on hardware HT6 First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Install all modules to hardware < 2 > = Modify < ESC > = Esc to quit! Please make your choice

- Help

Select menu item ; the following screen appears: Install application on hardware HT6 First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Change first language < 2 > = Change second language < 3 > = Edit ASCII files < 4 > = Edit text file for first language < 5 > = Edit text file for second language < 6 > = Add user specific files to the application < ESC > = Back to previous menu! Please make your choice

IM2/11-200

- Help


11.02


• •

Select menu item to enter the menu branch to change the "NETNAMES.INI" file, Select menu item ; the following screen appears: Install application on hardware MMC100.2 First language: English Second language: German < 1 > = Edit MPI configuration data < 2 > = Edit display machine data < 3 > = Edit AUTOEXEC.BAT < 4 > = Edit CONFIG.SYS < ESC > = Back to previous menu!


• • •

- Help

Select menu item ; an editor is started with which you can modify the "NETNAMES.INI" file. Select menu item and to enter the menu branch to change file "CHAN.TXT". Select menu item or ; the following screen appears: Please select the text you are going to edit! < PGUP > = previous page < 1 > = Text for channel switch < 2 > = Text for Machine < 3 > = Text for Parameter < 4 > = Text for Program < 5 > = Text for Services < PGDN > = next page < ESC > = Back to previous menu! Please make your

-

Use to scroll to "texts for channel switch" with which you can change the texts for the channel menu. Press to quit the menu.


IM2/11-201


11.02

11.8 PLC data 11.8.1

PLC installation and start-up Active blocks in the RAM are archived in the following order: - OBs - FBs - FCs - DBs (except those with the identification 0x08) - SDBs (except those with the identification 0x11), in the following order: first SDB 1000 then SDB 1 to SDB max. (naturally except 1000) last SDB 0

11.8.2

Setting the time and date You have the option of setting the time and date on the PLC and of synchronizing the time and date on the PLC and HT 6. This function is accessed via the "Start-up" operating area in the PLC menu by activating the softkey "Date%nTime". If any changes are made to the time and date, the time and date of the HT 6 are transferred to the PLC. You can check the synchronization in the "Current time:" output field. Cyclical synchronization of the time: The time duration with active "autom. ON" is specified in the field "Synchronization time". "Sync. manual" synchronizes the PLC and HT 6 immediately. The values set are retained when the software is rebooted. Note Changes can only be made to the PLC operands with the appropriate password.

11.8.3

Operation via MPI Please note: If you operate the HT 6 via the MPI card of the PC, the system time of the PC is altered when the two devices are synchronized.

IM2/11-202


11.02


11.9 Diagnostics 11.9.1

Action log

Function The Action log function can be used to log operating sequences. The following functions are provided: Logging of alarms Logging of key actuation Output of log file via RS 232 C (V.24) The action log is protected by a password (protection level ≤ 3). Enabled/disabled via MD 9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE Note The precondition for the Action Log function is that the "Start-up" operating area is installed.

9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE MD number Action log settings Default value 255 Min. input value: 0 Max. input value: 0xffff Change valid after POWER ON Protection level (R/W) 2/2 Unit: Data type: DWORD Valid from SW release: 5.2 Significance This MD can be used to enable/disable the action log and to define a choice of the data to be logged. Bit 0 =1 Action log ON (default) =0 Action log OFF Bit 1

=1

=0 Bit 2

=1

=0 Bit 3

=1 =0

Bit 4

=1 =0

HMI Advanced: Variable services (write access to geometric data, e.g. tooloffsets) are logged. For meaning of variables, see Help function in Parameters operating area under Variable Views (default) Variable services are not logged. HMI Advanced: PI services (e.g. program selection) are logged; for the meaning of the variables, see Help function in Parameters operating area under Variable Views (default) PI services are not logged HMI Advanced: Domain services (e.g. Load/unload program) are logged (default) Domain services are not logged Any changes in the alarm status are logged (default) Changes in the alarm status are not logged


IM2/11-203


11.02

Bit 5

=1 =0

Key actuations are logged. (default) Key actuations are not logged.

Bit 6

=1 =0

Channel status/override is logged (default). Channel status/override is not logged.

Bit 7

=1

HMI Advanced: Softkey actuations and menu changes are logged. For Siemens internal use only (default) HMI Embedded: Identification number of opened and closed windows is logged. For Siemens internal use only (default) Softkey actuations and menu changes are not logged

=0

If the action log is enabled, the files that can be logged are logged by default. The following events can be logged:

Alarm status All displayed NC/PLC and MMC alarms and messages can be logged.

Key actuation All operator panel front and MF2 key actuations can be logged.

Channel status/override NC/PLC statuses can be logged using the information regarding the channel status and the position of the override switch. At least in parts, if they can be recorded by time, these statuses are used to verify the operation of the MCP.

Window ID The identification number of a window is logged when opening and closing a window.

Log file The log file is output in English. The log file is divided into four columns:

File structure • • • •

Date Time NCU name Event

On the HT 6 the log file is not flashed, i.e. after every power off/on or reset the old contents are erased.

IM2/11-204


11.02


Example of a log file: Date 26.02.1999

Time 07:45:20

26.02.1999

07:45:20

29.09.1999 29.09.1999 29.09.1999

18:59:10 18:59:07 18:59:07

Event specification HMI booting (conn.no: 0, $MM_ACTION_LOG_MODE: ff, entries: 4094) Alarm 300701 axis X1, drive 2 start-up required Key: 68 KEY_SELECT_MODE (0) Open window: 20005 Close window: 20020

Display log file The log file output is password-protected. The current log file is displayed on the screen of the operator panel front in the Diagnosis operating area in the menu Service Displays -> Action Log in the screen "Action Log File". If a crash file exists, the softkey "Crash Data" is also displayed, with which the crash file can be displayed. The vertical softkey "Data Out -> RS-232-C (V.24)" can be used to output and archive the log file.

Set the action log The action log settings are password-encrypted. The screen form "Action log settings" is displayed in the menu HMI -> Action Log. In this screen you can • enable/disable the logging; • select the data to be logged; alarm status change; key actuation; channel status/override; window IDs. The selected setting must be confirmed by pressing the softkey "Save Settings".

Output log file The log file output is password-encrypted. There are two possible ways to output the log file: 1. via the Diagnostics operating area in the menu Service Displays -> Action Log -> Read-out via V.24 or


IM2/11-205


2.

11.02

via the boot menu. A boot menu is displayed whenever a crash event exists (PLC bit DB19, byte0, bit6). The bit is set and reset from the PLC at the user interface (such as also key lock, screen darkening ....). The MMC evaluates the rising edge of the signal (i.e. a transition from 0 to 1) and creates the log file when the signal comes. The HT 6 only reads the data, i.e. the signal must be reset from the PLC/user program. If the bit is already present when the MMC boots, the MMC will not react on the value of the bit (only after resetting and setting). • The log file _AC_LOGP.TXT is read out either during the boot process or can be read out in the Diagnostics operating area within the time when the MMC is switched off. The file is then deleted. • Reboot the control system. • Response: "Crash Log found! Read out V24? ([Y]/N)" • If you acknowledge this question with "Yes", the log will be read out via RS 232 C (V.24).

Prerequisite: The interface parameters of RS 232 C (V.24) must be set accordingly. Note A latency must be observed between two signals to make sure that the second signal can be processed.

11.9.2

Error status screen "Blue screen" If the system crashes, an error status screen ("Blue Screen") showing current system information is displayed. The error status screen displays a brief description of the error which has occurred plus all relevant processor registers.

Backup option A complete system data image is downloaded to an external device. The data are backed up via the RS-232-C interface to an external medium.

IM2/11-206


11.02


System data display In the event of a system crash, the crash address, the register allocation and any additional information needed for crash analysis are displayed on the screen. Sorry, but HMI Embedded has caused an exception in task XX with code XXXXX The exception has occurred in Fct.: XXXXXXXX at cs : XX eip : XXXXXXXX DS= XXXX EAX= XXXXXXXX EBX= XXXXXXXX ES= XXXX ECX= XXXXXXXX EDX= XXXXXXXX FS= XXXX EDI= XXXXXXXX ESI= XXXXXXXX GS= XXXX FLAGS= XXXXXXXX SS= XXXX ESP= XXXXXXXX EBP= XXXXXXXX Please send the screen information or saved data to the SINUMERIK Hotline! email : [email protected] Fill in subject : "HMI Emb exception (SW XX.XX.XX;date)" Press '1' to save data Press other key for next page

When you select key "1", you go to the menu for saving the data; with any other key, you go to the next screen. Additional information : XXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXX ... XXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXX CODE = XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX EIP: XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX STACK= XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX Press '1' to save data or press '9' to reboot immediately

When you select key "1", you go to the menu for saving the data; key "9" reboots the HT 6.


IM2/11-207


11.02

Menu for saving data The selected system data file is uploaded via the serial interface. In this menu you choose the baud rate and the interface for the serial transmission. To use serial communication interface use key '3' to change the settings for serial communication: '3' - baud rate : XXXXXX Make sure you use the same baud rate As the receiving station. Then press '2' to transfer data via serial line. You can also press '9' to reboot immediately, but we recommend you save the data first.

Press key "3" to set the baud rate selected on the external receiving device (PG/PC). Set the external receiving device to "Receive" and start. Start the transmission by pressing key "2". Please wait - data transmission in progress. If you have problems with the remote device you can press key '1' to stop transmission.

You can stop the transmission by pressing "1" (in the event of transmission error or incorrect baud rate) The following message appears about 2 to 5 seconds after you press key "1" : Transmission stopped by pressing key '1' press '1' to return to save menu or '9' to reboot

Press key "1" to return to the menu for saving data. Initiate a reset by pressing key "9".

IM2/11-208


11.02


If the data have been uploaded successfully, the following message appears:

Transmission finished XXXXXX bytes saved. Please check the number of saved bytes with the number of bytes received by the remote device. If there is any difference please return to the save menu by pressing the '1' key and retry with a lower baud rate. Please send the saved information to the SINUMERIK Hotline! email : [email protected] Fill in subject : "HMI Emb exception (SW XX.XX.XX;date)" press '1' to return to save menu or "'9' to reboot

Note When you use the serial link, the number of transmitted bytes is also displayed and must match the number of bytes received. If the two numbers are not the same, abort the transmission by pressing key "1", select a lower baud rate and start the upload again.

Restart The exception handler attempts an automatic restart in Restart mode.

Try rebooting - in the event of no reaction after 1 minute, please switch Off/On

If the HT 6 has not reacted after 60 seconds, you must restart it manually by switching the power supply to the system or the operator panel front off and then on again.

System data transfer times For table of transfer times, see Section 3


IM2/11-209


11.02

11.10 Miscellaneous 11.10.1

NCK reset It is possible to initiate an NCK Power-On Reset from the HT 6.

Operating sequence Select the operating area "Start-up" and press the softkey • "NC" • "Start-up NC" You can choose between: "Normal mode" "Start-up mode" "Software update"

11.10.2

Change Language option Two languages are implemented in the control system as standard: German and English. You can toggle between the languages with softkey "Change Language" in operating area "Start-up". In addition to the languages German and English, further languages can be installed using the screen or installation kit, or application disk: See Section "Language add-ons"

11.10.3

Enabling screen darkening The screen saver can also be enabled by an entry in MD 9006 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME (max. 60 minutes). In MD 9006, the function "Screen dark from MMC" can be started using the following entry: MD 9006 = 1 < Time in minutes, e.g. 1 > MD 9006 = 60 < Time in minutes, e.g. 60 >

Disabling the function MD 9006 = 0

IM2/11-210

Disabling the function


11.02

11.10.4


Setting the screen brightness You can adjust the screen brightness using two different methods. 1. By programming machine data 9025 DISPLAY_BACKLIGHT, you can vary the brightness from 0 = dark to 31 = very bright. The default setting is 20. 2. You can adjust the brightness via softkeys in the "Start-up" operating area. Select softkey "System" in the "Start-up" operating area. Then select softkey "Brightness". The softkey menu changes and you can adjust the backlighting by selecting softkeys "brighter" or "darker".

11.10.5

Disabling/enabling teach mode transfer By setting MD 9026 TEACH_MODE, you can enable or disable the transfer of teach blocks.

11.10.6

NB_MM_TEACH_MODE =1

Teach block is transferred.

NB_MM_TEACH_MODE =2

Transfer of teach block is disabled with message "Teach not permitted".

One to four axis systems With software version 6.1 and later, you can select and display up to four axis systems. This function supports a total of 4 axis systems. You can make the following settings in MD 9027 NUM_AX_ SEL: MM_NUM_AX_SEL = 1 MM_NUM_AX_SEL = 0

Default setting, i.e. only one axis system with max. 6 axes is active. The software automatically sets a value of 1–4 according to the number of axis systems with 6 axes each. With more than one axis system (value >1), the "Trav.Key" is refreshed.

With the appropriate MD setting, the "Trav.Key" softkey is displayed under the CPF (Control Panel Function) softkey on the 2nd level. ▀


IM2/11-211


IM2/11-212

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Embedded (IM2) I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index A

B

Access level Softkey Basic ZO ........................IM2/5-63 Access protection Softkey Basic ZO ........................IM2/5-63 Accessories ......................................IM2/1-8 Action log Output log file, SINUMERIK HT6 ..................................... IM2/11-205 Reading out the log file .............IM2/9-158 Set, SINUMERIK HT6 ............ IM2/11-205 Setting .......................................IM2/9-158 SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-203 Action log......................................IM2/9-156 ACTION_LOG_MODE 9012 ....................................... IM2/11-203 MD9012.....................................IM2/9-156 ACTION-LOG-MODE MD 9012......................................IM2/5-78 ACTIVATE _SEL_USER_DATA MD 9440......................................IM2/5-86 Activating a tool offset immediately ....................................IM2/5-61 Activating data transfer via PLC ...IM2/8-149 Actual value setting ........................IM2/5-64 Alarm list Properties, SINUMERIK HT6 ... IM2/11-194, 11-195 Alarm text files for HT6.............. IM2/11-192 Alarm texts......................................IM2/6-92 Analog spindles ..............................IM2/5-61 Application software SINUMERIK HT6 .................. IM2/11-180 ATA card ......................................IM2/7-115 ATA card.........................................IM2/3-28

Backing up data PCU20 with ATA/Compact Flash ..................................... IM2/8-154 with HMI Embedded WIN32 with the PCU50......................... IM2/8-153 Basic offset..................................... IM2/5-63 Bus address ................................... IM2/3-21

C Change Language SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-210 Change Language ......................... IM2/5-52 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 MD 9676 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 MD 9677 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 MD 9678 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 MD 9679 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES MD 9661 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE MD 9674 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE MD 9672 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9650 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM MD 9663 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL MD 9652 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION MD 9673 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT MD 9651 ..................................... IM2/5-88


IM2/I-213


Communication ..............................IM2/3-18 Compact Flash card ....................IM2/7-115 Configuration Network Manager .......................IM2/3-36 Configuring Caps Lock ...................IM2/5-51 Configuring text files in foreign languages SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-196 Configuring text files in foreign languages .......................................IM2/6-96 TCP/IP protocol ..............................IM2/3-32 Coordinate system for milling .....................................IM2/5-68 Coordinate systems........................IM2/5-68 CTM_ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS MD 9632......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON MD 9611......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON MD 9619......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9610......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA MD 9602......................................IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X MD 9600......................................IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y MD 9601......................................IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA MD 9605......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X MD 9603......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y MD 9604......................................IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS MD 9606......................................IM2/5-88

D D number........................................IM2/5-62 Data backup General......................................IM2/8-142 HMI Embedded .........................IM2/8-144 Transmission errors ..................IM2/8-147 Display log file SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-205 Display the user list Network Manager ........................IM2/3-38 DISPLAY_BACKLIGHT MD 9025......................................IM2/5-78 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME MD 9006......................................IM2/5-77 DISPLAY_MODE MD 9002 ............................................IM2/5-77

IM2/I-214

11.02

DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9004 ..................................... IM2/5-77 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD 9011 ..................................... IM2/5-78 DISPLAY_TYPE MD 9001 ..................................... IM2/5-77 Displaying axes .............................. IM2/5-66 Displaying axis systems, SINUMERIK HT6 ....................... IM2/11-211 Documentation ................................. IM2/1-9

E Edit the user list Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-38 Editing the resource display........... IM2/5-70 Editor settings ................................ IM2/5-53 EMC/ESD measures SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-179 Environment variable for Win32 .................................. IM2/7-122 for Windows 95/98 .................... IM2/7-122 for Windows NT/XP .................. IM2/7-122 Error messages to the PLC HMI Embedded......................... IM2/8-152 ESD precautions ............................ IM2/1-10 EXPONENT_LIMIT MD 9030 ..................................... IM2/5-78 EXPONENT_SCIENCE MD 9031 ..................................... IM2/5-78 EXTCALL ....................................... IM2/3-42

F Fine offset of tools in case of wear IM2/5-61 FIRST_LANGUAGE MD 9003 ..................................... IM2/5-77 Folder sharing for PCU .................. IM2/3-39 Free contour programming ........... IM2/5-67

H Hardware Requirements ............................. IM2/3-20 Hardware/software requirements..... IM2/1-8 Hiding axes ................................... IM2/5-65 HMI boot with network ................... IM2/3-27 HMI boot without network ............. IM2/3-27 HMI software version ................... IM2/9-159 HMI_HELP_SYSTEMS (SM/ST) MD 9991 ..................................... IM2/5-89 HMI_MONITOR MD 9032 ..................................... IM2/5-79


11.02

HMI_TESTAUTOMAT_OPTION MD 9992......................................IM2/5-89 HMI_WIZARD_OPTION MD 9993......................................IM2/5-89 HMI-specific shared folders............IM2/3-39 HT6 Action log................................ IM2/11-203 Alarm text files........................ IM2/11-192 Installing the application software............................... IM2/11-183 Installing the system software IM2/11-181 Language add-ons ................. IM2/11-188 PLC installation and start-up .. IM2/11-202 Requirements ......................... IM2/11-178 Setting the time and date ....... IM2/11-202 Software replacement ............ IM2/11-180 Software upgrade................... IM2/11-190 HTML Viewer..................................IM2/3-41

I Inch/metric switchover ....................IM2/5-60 Installation HMI Embedded Win32 on PC ...IM2/7-133 Installation and mounting of PCU...IM2/2-15 Installing the system software, SINUMERIK HT6....................... IM2/11-181 Installing Win32 on PCU50/70 .....IM2/7-117 Interfaces on PCU20 ......................IM2/2-13

K KEYBOARD_STATE MD 9009......................................IM2/5-77 KEYBOARD_TYPE MD 9008......................................IM2/5-77

L Language add-ons SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-188 Language option SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-210 Language option ............................IM2/5-52 LAYOUT_MODE MD 9021......................................IM2/5-78 LCD_CONTRAST MD 9000......................................IM2/5-77 Linear Flash Memory card............IM2/7-114 Log file Displaying..................................IM2/9-158 Reading out ...............................IM2/9-158 Structure....................................IM2/9-157


M MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST MD 9421 ..................................... IM2/5-85 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9424 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL MD 9423 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MA_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO MD 9420 ..................................... IM2/5-85 MA_PRESET_MODE MD 9422 ..................................... IM2/5-85 MA_SCRATCH_DEFAULT_MODE MD 9425 ..................................... IM2/5-86 Machine data for the operator panel .............................................. IM2/5-77 MD_TEXT_SWITCH MD 9900 ..................................... IM2/5-89 Mechanical and electrical design PCU20 ........................................ IM2/2-12 Milling simulation 3D graphic ......... IM2/5-66 MM_CONTOUR_END_TEXT MD 9461 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9450 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MMC........................................... IM2/10-162 Modified MD, backing up ............. IM2/8-148 Mouse support ............................... IM2/5-51 MPI card Operation,SINUMERIK HT6 ... IM2/11-202 MPI/OPI network rules .................. IM2/3-18

N NC_PROPERTIES MD 9500 ..................................... IM2/5-87 NCK Reset ..................................... IM2/5-51 NCK software version .................. IM2/9-159 NETNAMES.INI File extension.............................. IM2/5-56 Network Configuration data ..................... IM2/3-23 Network configuration examples Company network....................... IM2/3-26 One Embedded/one server......... IM2/3-25 Three Embedded/two servers .... IM2/3-25 Network Manager Removal...................................... IM2/3-35 Network Manager Installation................................... IM2/3-34


IM2/I-215


Network Manager ..........................IM2/3-34 Network operation HMI Embedded, TCP/IP protocol ...................................IM2/3-23 with HMI Embedded ...................IM2/3-23 NUM_AX_SEL (HT6) MD 9027......................................IM2/5-78

Preset............................................. IM2/5-64 PRG_DEFAULT_DIR MD 9005 ..................................... IM2/5-77 Program simulation ........................ IM2/5-66 PROGRAM_SETTINGS MD 9460 ..................................... IM2/5-86

R

O Online help Network Manager ........................IM2/3-41 OP 010 operator panel fronts .........IM2/2-14 OP 012 operator panel front ..........IM2/2-14 OP010 .................................... IM2/1-8, 2-14 OP012 .................................... IM2/1-8, 2-14 OP015 operator panel fronts ..........IM2/2-14 OP015 .................................... IM2/1-8, 2-14 Operating system share .................IM2/3-39 Operating the Network Manager ...IM2/3-35

P PCU Installation/mounting ...................IM2/2-15 PCU booting ...................................IM2/4-48 PCU20 Accessories .................................IM2/2-12 Component..................................IM2/2-12 Creating a PC card....................IM2/7-114 Interfaces.....................................IM2/2-13 Mechanical/electrical design .......IM2/2-12 Ready to receive .......................IM2/7-105 PCU20 .............................................IM2/1-8 PCU20 accessories ........................IM2/2-12 PCU20 component .........................IM2/2-12 PCU50 .............................................IM2/1-8 PCU70 ..............................................IM2/1-8 Permanent connection Network Manager .......................IM2/3-36 PLC alarm acknowledgment icon...IM2/5-53 PLC installation and start-up SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-202 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE MD 9055......................................IM2/5-79 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER MD 9054......................................IM2/5-79 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT MD 9053......................................IM2/5-79 Pocket calculator help Activating.....................................IM2/5-52 Deactivating.................................IM2/5-52 Powerline boot screen....................IM2/4-48 Preparation for operation................IM2/4-48

IM2/I-216

11.02

RAMDISK..................................... IM2/7-122 Reading ISO programs in/out ...... IM2/8-153 Remote diagnostics for PCU 20 .... IM2/5-70 RI suppression measures ................ IM2/1-9

S Saving network data to card ....... IM2/7-116 Scratching ...................................... IM2/5-64 Screen darkening Enabling, SINUMERIK HT6 .... IM2/11-210 Via PCU ..................................... IM2/5-51 Via PLC....................................... IM2/5-51 Screen kit Add new languages .................. IM2/7-112 Selecting tools via a D number (flat D no.) ..................................... IM2/5-62 SER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH MD 9213 ..................................... IM2/5-80 Series start-up.............................. IM2/8-142 Setting the date .............................. IM2/5-52 Setting the PLC time and date SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-202 Setting the screen brightness, SINUMERIK HT6 ....................... IM2/11-211 Setting the time .............................. IM2/5-52 Shipped state ................................. IM2/3-18 SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE MD 9052 ..................................... IM2/5-79 Simulation Milling.......................................... IM2/5-66 Turning........................................ IM2/5-66 SINUMERIK HT6 ....................... IM2/11-178 Software replacement SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-180 Software upgrade SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-190 Software version display .............. IM2/9-159 Standard configuration................... IM2/3-20 Standard control file HMI Embedded......................... IM2/8-150 STARTUP_LOGO MD 9050 ..................................... IM2/5-79 SW_OPTIONS (SM/ST) MD 9990 ..................................... IM2/5-89


11.02

SWITCH_TO_AREA MD 9016......................................IM2/5-78 Switching channels over on 1 NCU................................................IM2/5-55 Switching over channel Example ......................................IM2/5-56 Foreign language texts................IM2/5-58 Switching over channels/operator units SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-197 Switching over channels.................IM2/5-55 Switching over operator units .........IM2/5-55 Switchover zero offset display........IM2/5-63 SYS_CLOCK_SYNC_TIME MD 9013......................................IM2/5-78 System software SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-180

T TABULATOR_SIZE MD 9007......................................IM2/5-77 TCP/IP protocol Installing/configuring under HMI Embedded................................IM2/3-23 Installing ......................................IM2/3-31 Teach mode Disabling/enabling transfer, SINUMERIK HT6 ..................................... IM2/11-211 TEACH_MODE (HT6) MD 9026......................................IM2/5-78 TECHNOLOGY MD 9020......................................IM2/5-78 TM_DEFAULT_DELETE_TOOL MD 9419......................................IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLPLACESPEC MD 9415......................................IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSIZE MD 9412......................................IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSTATE MD 9417......................................IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLTYPE MD 9416......................................IM2/5-85 TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGAMENT MD 9414......................................IM2/5-85 TM_LOAD_PLACE MD 9410......................................IM2/5-85 TM_NUM_MAG MD 9411......................................IM2/5-85 TO_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE MD 9479......................................IM2/5-87 TO_OPTION_MASK MD 9478......................................IM2/5-86 TO_TRACE MD 9477......................................IM2/5-86


Tool management ShopMill ...................................... IM2/5-61 ShopTurn .................................... IM2/5-61 Standard ..................................... IM2/5-61 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 MD 9400 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS2 MD 9401 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS3 MD 9402 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TRACE MD 9999 ..................................... IM2/5-89 Transfer user files HMI Embedded ....................... IM2/8-152 Troubleshooting Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-41 Turning simulation.......................... IM2/5-66

U Upgrading the HMI Embedded software on a PCU20................... IM2/7-100 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win 32 software on a PCU50/70.. IM2/7-116 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on PC............................. IM2/7-132 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA MD 9014 ..................................... IM2/5-78 User management Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-37 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA MD 9248 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA MD 9246 ..................................... IM2/5-81 MD 9247 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA MD 9221 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY_CHG MD 9509 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M MD 9516 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P MD 9510 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M MD 9517 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P MD 9511 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M MD 9518 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P MD 9512 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M MD 9519 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P


IM2/I-217


MD 9513......................................IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC MD 9182......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_PRESET MD9220.......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_BD MD 9230......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_CST MD 9225......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_CUS MD 9226......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_DEF MD 9229......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD MD 9211......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_IN MD 9224......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM MD 9216......................................IM2/5-80 MD 9217......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_SYF MD 9228......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_TCARR MD 9180 .....................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA MD 9200......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM MD 9218......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_SET_V24 MD 9223......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_SHOW_SBL2 MD 9227......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN MD 9219......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_TM_SKACTPLACE MD 9270......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKFINDPLACE MD 9269......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKLDTOOLDAT MD 9271......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGBUFFER MD 9260......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGFIND MD 9261......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLISTPOS MD 9262......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR2 MD 9256......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR3 MD 9257......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGNEXT MD 9263......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL MD 9259......................................IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOLE

IM2/I-218

11.02

MD 9258 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLIST MD 9251 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR1 MD 9265 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR2 MD 9266 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR3 MD 9267 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLNEWTOOL MD 9264 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD MD 9252 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLMOVE MD 9254 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD MD 9253 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE MD 9203 ..................................... IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD MD 9212 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT MD 9214 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA MD 9222 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA MD 9215 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TCARR MD 9181 ..................................... IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT MD 9209 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO MD 9201 ..................................... IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR MD 9202 ..................................... IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA MD 9210 ..................................... IM2/5-80 User-configurable displays Expanding .................................. IM2/5-54 USERE_CLASS_VERT_MODE_SK MD 9249 ..................................... IM2/5-81 Utilization display ........................... IM2/5-70

V V24_PG_PC_BAUD MD 9325 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_CONTROLS MD 9323 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_DATABITS MD 9326 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_EOF MD 9322 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_LINE


11.02

MD 9329......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_PARITY MD 9327......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_RTS MD 9324......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_STOPBIT MD 9328......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_XOFF MD 9321......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_XON MD 9320......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_BAUD MD 9315......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_CONTROLS MD 9313......................................IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_DATABITS MD 9316......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_EOF MD 9312......................................IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_LINE MD 9319......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_PARITY MD 9317......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_RTS MD 9314......................................IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_STOPBIT MD 9318......................................IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_XOFF MD 9311......................................IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_XON MD 9310......................................IM2/5-83 V24_USER_BAUD MD 9305......................................IM2/5-83


V24_USER_CONTROLS MD 9303 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_DATABITS MD 9396 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_EOF MD 9302 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_LINE MD 9309 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_PARITY MD 9307 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_RTS MD 9304 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_STOPBIT MD 9308 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_XOFF MD 9301 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_XON MD 9300 ..................................... IM2/5-83

W Workpiece Template .................................... IM2/5-62

Z Zero offset Fine ............................................ IM2/5-63 Zero offset ...................................... IM2/5-63


IM2/I-219


IM2/I-220

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) Contents


Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4)

1 General Preparations............................................................................................................... IM4/1-7 1.1 HW/SW requirements ............................................................................................................ IM4/1-8 1.2 Documentation....................................................................................................................... IM4/1-9 1.3 EMC/ESD measures.............................................................................................................. IM4/1-9 1.3.1 RI suppression measures .................................................................................................. IM4/1-9 1.3.2 ESD measures ................................................................................................................ IM4/1-10 2 Overview of HMI Devices ...................................................................................................... IM4/2-11 2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation................................................................................... IM4/2-12 2.1.1 Operator panels ............................................................................................................... IM4/2-12 2.1.2 The PCU 50..................................................................................................................... IM4/2-13 2.1.3 The PCU 70..................................................................................................................... IM4/2-13 3 Communication / Basic Conditions...................................................................................... IM4/3-15 3.1 Internal system communication............................................................................................ IM4/3-16 3.2 Networking with Windows NT 4.0/XP................................................................................... IM4/3-16 3.3 Condition on delivery (HMI).................................................................................................. IM4/3-16 3.3.1 Hardware ......................................................................................................................... IM4/3-17 3.3.2 PCU basic software ......................................................................................................... IM4/3-17 3.3.3 Boot Manager .................................................................................................................. IM4/3-18 3.3.4 Software assignment on the hard disk............................................................................. IM4/3-19 3.3.5 SW installation and ways of activating the software ........................................................ IM4/3-21 3.3.6 Service menu................................................................................................................... IM4/3-22 3.4 Basic functions of the Service menu .................................................................................... IM4/3-25 3.4.1 Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware ................................................... IM4/3-25 3.4.2 Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment...................................................... IM4/3-26 3.4.3 Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment ...................................................... IM4/3-28 3.4.4 Starting the DOS shell ..................................................................................................... IM4/3-29 3.4.5 Starting the SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP)....................................................... IM4/3-30 3.4.6 Checking the hard disk .................................................................................................... IM4/3-31 3.4.7 Checking the version of the basic software ..................................................................... IM4/3-32


IM4/i


11.02

3.5 Basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop ........................................................................ IM4/3-33 3.5.1 Installing/Updating the HMI system software................................................................... IM4/3-33 3.5.2 Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment...................................................... IM4/3-33 3.5.3 Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment ...................................................... IM4/3-34 3.5.4 Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware ................................................... IM4/3-34 3.5.5 Connecting a serial mouse .............................................................................................. IM4/3-34 3.5.6 Checking for errors .......................................................................................................... IM4/3-35 3.5.7 Configuration ................................................................................................................... IM4/3-36 4 Power ON / Booting ............................................................................................................... IM4/4-39 4.1 Power ON ............................................................................................................................ IM4/4-40 4.2 Booting................................................................................................................................. IM4/4-41 4.3 Controlling HMI booting ....................................................................................................... IM4/4-42 4.3.1 Replacing the startup screen ........................................................................................... IM4/4-44 4.3.2 Access rights when creating programs ............................................................................ IM4/4-45 4.3.3 Keyboard functions (PCU50/70) for HMI Advanced ........................................................ IM4/4-46 4.3.4 Keyboard functions (MMC103) ........................................................................................ IM4/4-47 4.4 HMI Advanced with SITOP UPS (EP1931-2EC11).............................................................. IM4/4-50 4.5 Boot errors ........................................................................................................................... IM4/4-51 4.6 BIOS setup .......................................................................................................................... IM4/4-52 4.6.1 Modifying the BIOS settings ............................................................................................ IM4/4-54 5 Functions / Parameterization ................................................................................................ IM4/5-55 5.1 Functions ............................................................................................................................. IM4/5-57 5.1.1 Alarm log ......................................................................................................................... IM4/5-57 5.1.2 Activating data transfer via the PLC ................................................................................ IM4/5-59 5.1.3 Communicating the current task number to the PLC (HMI SW 6.2 and higher)............... IM4/5-62 5.1.4 Fine zero offset and basic offset...................................................................................... IM4/5-64 5.1.5 Specifying the position of the machine and the rotary axis (SW 6.1 and higher) ............. IM4/5-64 5.1.6 Block search in program testing mode, multiple channels (not SW 6.1) .......................... IM4/5-65 5.1.7 Configuring the language setting ..................................................................................... IM4/5-67 5.1.8 Access protection ............................................................................................................ IM4/5-70 5.1.9 Modifying access rights to the basic offset soft key ......................................................... IM4/5-72 5.1.10 Masking out axes............................................................................................................. IM4/5-72 5.1.11 Modifying the coordinate system for actual value display ................................................ IM4/5-74 5.1.12 Activating active tool offset immediately .......................................................................... IM4/5-74 5.1.13 Checking for boot viruses ................................................................................................ IM4/5-75 5.1.14 Cross-channel status display with symbols (SW 6.2 and higher) .................................... IM4/5-76 5.1.15 Inverting the spindle symbol display (SW 6.2 and higher) ............................................... IM4/5-82 5.1.16 Configurable display in the header (SW 6.2 and higher) ................................................. IM4/5-83 5.1.17 Selecting channels/spindles via the PLC (SW 6.2 and higher) ........................................ IM4/5-87 5.1.18 User-specific menu trees ................................................................................................. IM4/5-88 5.1.19 Parts programs and workpieces in the DRAM ................................................................. IM4/5-95 5.1.20 Provision of displays for Classic/NEW layout variants ..................................................... IM4/5-97 5.1.21 User modifications in the Service overview ..................................................................... IM4/5-98 5.2 Matching simulation data ................................................................................................... IM4/5-101 5.2.1 Simulation data.............................................................................................................. IM4/5-101 5.2.2 Displaying simulation data ............................................................................................. IM4/5-106 5.2.3 Matching simulation data ............................................................................................... IM4/5-107 5.2.4 Memory configuration for simulation .............................................................................. IM4/5-111 5.2.5 Accelerating simulation startup...................................................................................... IM4/5-112

IM4/ii


11.02


5.3 Setting parameters using ini files ....................................................................................... IM4/5-114 5.3.1 Editing ini files................................................................................................................ IM4/5-114 5.3.2 Tool management.......................................................................................................... IM4/5-117 5.3.3 MD for Actual Value Setting, Scratch, PRESET ............................................................ IM4/5-117 5.3.4 Execution from hard disk for M : N................................................................................. IM4/5-119 5.3.5 Editor ............................................................................................................................. IM4/5-120 5.4 Access to external drives/Set up computer........................................................................ IM4/5-121 5.5 Setting the parameters for display MD ............................................................................... IM4/5-123 5.5.1 Backing up display machine data .................................................................................. IM4/5-136 5.6 Ini files................................................................................................................................ IM4/5-136 5.6.1 MMC.INI ........................................................................................................................ IM4/5-136 5.6.2 NETNAMES.INI ............................................................................................................. IM4/5-137 5.6.3 MBDDE.INI .................................................................................................................... IM4/5-139 5.6.4 AEDITOR.INI ................................................................................................................. IM4/5-142 5.6.5 COMIC.NSK .................................................................................................................. IM4/5-143 5.6.6 DINO.INI ........................................................................................................................ IM4/5-143 5.6.7 DPDH.INI....................................................................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.8 DH.INI .......................................................................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.9 DPSIM.INI...................................................................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.10 MASCHINE.INI .............................................................................................................. IM4/5-146 5.6.11 PARAM.INI .................................................................................................................... IM4/5-150 5.6.12 PARAMTM.INI ............................................................................................................... IM4/5-150 5.6.13 PATM_xx.INI.................................................................................................................. IM4/5-153 5.6.14 REGIE.INI...................................................................................................................... IM4/5-155 5.6.15 TASKCONF.INI.............................................................................................................. IM4/5-156 5.6.16 DG.INI............................................................................................................................ IM4/5-158 5.6.17 IB.INI.............................................................................................................................. IM4/5-158 5.6.18 IF.INI.............................................................................................................................. IM4/5-160 5.6.19 OEMFRAME.INI ............................................................................................................ IM4/5-163 5.6.20 LAYOUTSW.INI............................................................................................................. IM4/5-163 5.6.21 DGOVW.INI ................................................................................................................... IM4/5-165 5.6.22 DGOVWTXT_xx.INI....................................................................................................... IM4/5-165 5.7 System settings.................................................................................................................. IM4/5-166 5.7.1 MMC.INI ........................................................................................................................ IM4/5-166 5.7.2 NETNAMES.INI ............................................................................................................. IM4/5-167 5.7.3 REGIE.INI...................................................................................................................... IM4/5-167 5.7.4 HEADER.INI .................................................................................................................. IM4/5-168 5.7.5 KEYS.INI ....................................................................................................................... IM4/5-171 6 Alarm Texts and Help Files ................................................................................................. IM4/6-173 6.1 Alarm texts ......................................................................................................................... IM4/6-174 6.1.1 Alarm text files ............................................................................................................... IM4/6-174 6.1.2 User alarm structure ...................................................................................................... IM4/6-177 6.1.3 Alarm help ..................................................................................................................... IM4/6-177 6.2 Languages ......................................................................................................................... IM4/6-178 6.2.1 Configuring foreign languages....................................................................................... IM4/6-178 6.2.2 Languages supported .................................................................................................... IM4/6-178 6.2.3 Assignment between ANSI tables and fonts.................................................................. IM4/6-179 6.2.4 Startup .......................................................................................................................... IM4/6-179 6.2.5 Changing the language.................................................................................................. IM4/6-180 6.2.6 NCU-specific alarm texts for several operator panels/NCUs ......................................... IM4/6-180 6.3 Operational messages ....................................................................................................... IM4/6-181


IM4/iii


11.02

6.4 System limits...................................................................................................................... IM4/6-181 7 Installation Variants / Data Backup .................................................................................... IM4/7-183 7.1 General .............................................................................................................................. IM4/7-184 7.2 Settings for network drives................................................................................................. IM4/7-184 7.2.1 PG/PC requirements...................................................................................................... IM4/7-184 7.2.2 Settings via the PCU Service menu............................................................................... IM4/7-185 7.3 SW installation/update ....................................................................................................... IM4/7-190 7.3.1 First-time boot for initial startup ..................................................................................... IM4/7-190 7.3.2 Installation via parallel connection in FAT16 file structure ............................................. IM4/7-192 7.3.3 Installation via parallel connection in FAT32 file structure ............................................. IM4/7-194 7.3.4 Installation via network connection ................................................................................ IM4/7-195 7.4 Data backup/restore with parallel connection .................................................................... IM4/7-200 7.4.1 The Norton Ghost software tool..................................................................................... IM4/7-200 7.4.2 Hard disk PCU to PG/PC, CD........................................................................................ IM4/7-200 7.4.3 Restoring the PCU hard disk from PG/PC, CD.............................................................. IM4/7-205 7.4.4 Hard disk/PCU replacement spare ................................................................................ IM4/7-209 7.5 Data backup/restore with Ethernet connection .................................................................. IM4/7-212 7.5.1 Back up PCU hard disk to PG/PC hard disk .................................................................. IM4/7-212 7.5.2 Restore PCU hard disk from PG/PC hard disk .............................................................. IM4/7-217 7.6 Hard disk spare.................................................................................................................. IM4/7-224 7.7 Saving and restoring PCU partitions locally ....................................................................... IM4/7-224 7.7.1 Backing up/restoring partitions, General........................................................................ IM4/7-224 7.7.2 Back up partitions .......................................................................................................... IM4/7-226 7.7.3 Restore partitions .......................................................................................................... IM4/7-229 7.7.4 Partition E: (Windows) - Restore to PCU ....................................................................... IM4/7-231 7.7.5 Delete backup image ..................................................................................................... IM4/7-233 7.7.6 Define emergency backup image .................................................................................. IM4/7-235 7.7.7 Restore emergency backup on partition E:.................................................................... IM4/7-238 7.8 SINUMERIK desktop (Windows)........................................................................................ IM4/7-239 7.8.1 Networking..................................................................................................................... IM4/7-239 7.8.2 Subsequent installation of Windows components.......................................................... IM4/7-240 7.8.3 Installing SIMATIC STEP7 for SINUMERIK HW............................................................ IM4/7-241 7.9 PCMCIA interface software................................................................................................ IM4/7-244 7.9.1 PCMCIA interface software for Windows NT ................................................................. IM4/7-244 7.9.2 PCMCIA interface software for Windows XP ................................................................. IM4/7-245 7.10 Directory structure of HMI Advanced ............................................................................... IM4/7-246 8 Diagnostics .......................................................................................................................... IM4/8-247 8.1 Action log ........................................................................................................................... IM4/8-248 8.1.1 Log file .......................................................................................................................... IM4/8-251 8.1.2 Display log file/Set action log......................................................................................... IM4/8-251 8.1.3 Outputting the log file..................................................................................................... IM4/8-252 8.2 SW version information...................................................................................................... IM4/8-253

IM4/iv


11.02


9 Installing HMI Software on PC ............................................................................................ IM4/9-255 9.1 Installing the HMI software on PC...................................................................................... IM4/9-256 10 Configure Window Using NC Program .......................................................................... IM4/10-257 10.1 Installation and startup................................................................................................... IM4/10-258 10.2 Structure of statements .................................................................................................. IM4/10-259 10.3 Example statements ...................................................................................................... IM4/10-260 10.4 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgment .................................... IM4/10-262 10.5 Example program 2: Hold time and optional text variables ............................................ IM4/10-263 10.6 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode .......... IM4/10-265 10.7 Example program 4: Positioning of the input and output field ........................................ IM4/10-266 10.8 Example program 5: Fading in images .......................................................................... IM4/10-268 10.9 Example program 7: OPI variables ................................................................................ IM4/10-269 10.10 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgment mode with soft keys................. IM4/10-270 10.11 List of files for the dialog screen files ........................................................................... IM4/10-272 I Index ....................................................................................................................................... IM4/I-275 I.1 Subject index ....................................................................................................................... IM4/I-275


IM4/v


IM4/vi

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 1 General Preparations

1 General Preparations

1

1.1 HW/SW requirements ................................................................. IM4/1-8 1.2 Documentation............................................................................ IM4/1-9 1.3 EMC/ESD measures................................................................... IM4/1-9 1.3.1 RI suppression measures........................................................ IM4/1-9 1.3.2 ESD measures ...................................................................... IM4/1-10


IM4/1-7


11.02

Introduction This Installation & Startup Guide describes the installation and startup procedure for the PCU 50/70 with the HMI Advanced software. You will find other documentation about special NCK, MMC, PLC and drive functions in the Descriptions of Functions/Manuals (see "Required documentation").

Note The HMI Advanced software will also run on the MMC103 with Windows NT4.0 (order number 6FC5 2110-0DB21-3AA1) (Intel Pentium 200 MHz, 64 MB RAM). The HMI Advanced software, which must be purchased separately, must then be loaded using the system-inherent basic software as described for the PCU50.

1.1 HW/SW requirements Software The PCU 50/70 can be delivered with the HMI Advanced software loaded according to order. If the HMI Advanced software has not been loaded onto the PCU 50/7 (e.g. PCU50 without system software), the HMI software can be loaded onto the PCU 50/70 from the CD supplied (via the Service menu, see Chapter 7 Software installation). The same applies to software updates.

Equipment and accessories required In order to install the software on the PCU 50/70 with HMI Advanced you will need 1. PC/PG with 2. CD drive 3. Network link or parallel cable

Operating systems The HMI software can be operated with the Win NT 4.0 or Win XP operating systems. The possible assignments of the PCU 50/70 variants to compatible operating systems are listed in the Operator Components Manual /BH/.

IM4/1-8


11.02


1.2 Documentation You will require the following documentation for installing and starting up SINUMERIK 840D: 1. Operator Components Manual /BH/ Order no.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP0 2. Description of Functions, Base Machine /FB/ (Part 1) Order no.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP0 3. Lists /LIS/ Order no.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP0 4. Diagnostics Guide /DA/ Order no.: 6FC5 297–6AA20-0BP0 5. HMI Advanced Operator's Guide /BAD/ Order no.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP0 HMI Advanced Operator's Guide

1.3 EMC/ESD measures 1.3.1

RI suppression measures

Shielded signal lines In order to ensure the safe and failure-free operation of the system, you should use the cables specified in the individual plans. In general, the shield must be conductively connected to both sides of the housings. Exception: • If you want to connect external devices (printers, programmers etc.), you may also use standard shielded cables that are connected on one side only. However, these devices must not be connected to the control during normal operation. If it is absolutely necessary to connect external devices, the shields must be connected on both sides. Furthermore, the external device must be connected to the control via an equipotential bonding conductor.

Installation guidelines The following EMC measures should be taken into account in order to maximize the noise immunity of the overall system (control, power section, machine): • • •

Maximum spatial separation of signal and load cable is essential Only use SIEMENS cables for the signal cable from and to the NC or PLC Signal lines must not be located in the immediate vicinity of strong external magnetic fields (such as motors and transformers).


IM4/1-9


• •

!

1.3.2

!

11.02

Pulse-loaded high-current/high-voltage lines must always be isolated from all other lines The distance (interference injection area) between the following lines must be short: - Signal line and signal line - Signal line and associated equipotential bonding conductor - Equipotential bonding conductor and attached protective conductor

Important For further information on RI suppression measures and the connection of shielded cables please see References: /EMC/, EMC Installation Guidelines

ESD measures Important Handling of ESD modules: • When working with electrostatic components, you must ensure that personnel, workstations and packaging are connected to ground! • You should only ever touch electronic modules if absolutely essential in order to complete certain operations. Never pick printed circuit boards up by their module pins or printed conductors. • You should only ever touch components if: - You are wearing an ESD bracelet to ensure a permanent connection to ground - You are wearing ESD shoes or shoes with ESD grounding stripes and standing on an ESD base • Only ever place modules on conductive surfaces (table with ESD top, conductive ESD cellular plastic, ESD packing bags, ESD transport containers). • Modules must not be located in the immediate vicinity of display units, monitors or TV sets (minimum distance from the screen < 10 cm). • Modules must not come into contact with loadable and highly-insulating materials such as plastic foils, insulating table tops, clothes made from synthetic fibers. • Measurements may only be taken on modules if: - The measuring instrument is grounded (e.g. via a protective conductor) or - The measuring head of the floating measuring device is unloaded for a short period of time before the measurement is taken (e.g. by touching the metal control housing).

■

IM4/1-10


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 2 Overview of HMI Devices

2

2 Overview of HMI Devices

2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation ....................................... IM4/2-12 2.1.1 Operator panels ..................................................................... IM4/2-12 2.1.2 The PCU 50 ........................................................................... IM4/2-13 2.1.3 The PCU 70 ........................................................................... IM4/2-13


IM4/2-11


11.02

2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation 2.1.1

Operator panels The HMI Advanced software runs in conjunction with the OP 010, OP 010S, OP 010C, OP 012, TP012, OP 015 and OP015A SINUMERIK operator panels designed for use with the PCU 50/70. When the PCU 50/70 is used with an operator panel, it is first connected to it with screws and then fixed to the mounting wall by means of clamps. The procedure is described in the /BH/ Operator Components Manual (see the corresponding chapter about operator panels). Example for an operator panel Status LEDs: POWER TEMP *)

Numerical block

Softkeys

Alpha block

Control key block

Softkeys

Hotkey block Cursor block USB front interface Recall

Machine Area

Etc key

Area switchover

*) When TEMP LED responds, expect higher wear

Fig. 2-1 View of the OP 010 operator panel

IM4/2-12


11.02

2.1.2


The PCU 50 Example for a PCU: PCU 50 ≤ 500 MHz, perspective view with built-in hard disk

Fig. 2-2 The description is valid for the following devices: Processor

Operating system

Additional features

Pentium II, 333 MHz

NT 4.0

Incl. HMI Advanced Incl. MCI Board Incl. MCI Board Incl. MCI Board Incl. MCI Board -

Pentium III, 500 MHz NT 4.0 Celeron, 566 MHz

NT 4.0

Celeron, 1.2 GHz

XP *) NT 4.0 XP *)

Order number 6FC5 2... ...10-0DF01-0AA0 ...10-0DF02-0AA0 ...20-0AA00-1AA0 ...10-0DF05-0AA0 ...20-0AA01-1AA0 ...10-0DF20-0AA0 ...20-0AA20-0AA0 ...10-0DF21-2AA0 ...10-0DF22-0AA0 ...20-0AA22-0AA0 ...10-0DF22-2AA0

*) Cannot be used in Touch Panel operation

2.1.3

The PCU 70 Processor

Operating system

Pentium III, 500 MHz NT 4.0

Additional features -

Order number 6FC5 2... ...10-0DF04-0AA0

■


IM4/2-13


IM4/2-14

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 3 Communication / Basic Conditions

3

3 Communication / Basic Conditions

3.1 Internal system communication ................................................ IM4/3-16 3.2 Networking with Windows NT 4.0/XP ....................................... IM4/3-16 3.3 Condition on delivery (HMI) ...................................................... IM4/3-16 3.3.1 Hardware ............................................................................... IM4/3-17 3.3.2 PCU basic software ............................................................... IM4/3-17 3.3.3 Boot Manager ........................................................................ IM4/3-18 3.3.4 Software assignment on the hard disk .................................. IM4/3-19 3.3.5 SW installation and ways of activating the software.............. IM4/3-21 3.3.6 Service menu......................................................................... IM4/3-22 3.4 Basic functions of the Service menu......................................... IM4/3-25 3.4.1 Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware ........ IM4/3-25 3.4.2 Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment ........... IM4/3-26 3.4.3 Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment ........... IM4/3-28 3.4.4 Starting the DOS shell ........................................................... IM4/3-29 3.4.5 Starting the SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP)............ IM4/3-30 3.4.6 Checking the hard disk .......................................................... IM4/3-31 3.4.7 Checking the version of the basic software........................... IM4/3-32 3.5 Basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop............................. IM4/3-33 3.5.1 Installing/Updating the HMI system software ........................ IM4/3-33 3.5.2 Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment ........... IM4/3-33 3.5.3 Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment ........... IM4/3-34 3.5.4 Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware ........ IM4/3-34 3.5.5 Connecting a serial mouse .................................................... IM4/3-34 3.5.6 Checking for errors ................................................................ IM4/3-35 3.5.7 Configuration ......................................................................... IM4/3-36


IM4/3-15


11.02

3.1 Internal system communication Internal system communication between the operator panel and the NCU/CCU takes place via an operator panel interface, OPI (1.5 MBaud) or an MPI interface (187.5 KBaud). Internal system communication between the operator panel and the PLC (e.g. SIMATIC AS 300) takes place via the MPI interface (187.5 KBaud).

3.2 Networking with Windows NT 4.0/XP The PCU50 has one network connection as standard. Most of the network connection is already installed on delivery. Once you have connected the Ethernet cable, you simply need to enter the IP address of the PCU or select use of a DHCP server in order to set up a TCP/IP communication link.

Entering the IP address The IP address is entered under: Start-> Settings-> Control Panel-> Network, Protocols tab, where the TCP/IP protocol properties can be selected.

PCU50/70 ID By this stage you must have already specified a unique computer name for the PCU across the entire network. In Start→Settings→Control Panel→Network, enter the required ID in the "Identification" tab. In addition to the TCP/IP protocol, the NETBEUI protocol is also preinstalled for network operation.

3.3 Condition on delivery (HMI) Delivered systems can consist of: • HW • PCU basic software • HMI system software for SINUMERIK

IM4/3-16


11.02

3.3.1


Hardware

HW The basic requirements for HMI software are • One computer unit in combination with one • Operator panel (OP...) "PCU" is the abbreviation for the computer unit on which the HMI (Human Machine Interface) software (HMI SW 6.0 and higher) is installed.

OP characteristics The OPs are described in detail in References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual. The previous section also provides an overview of the OPs. Note Details of how to replace PCU and OP/TP components can also be found in the Operator Components Manual. The current catalog /BU/ NC 60 Ordering Information lists the combinations available for delivery.

PCU characteristics The PCUs are described in detail in References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual. Depending on the type of PCU, the PCU hard disk can either be loaded with Windows NT 4.0 or with Windows XP. For PCU types that support both options, the required operating system must be specified by using the corresponding order number.

3.3.2

PCU basic software The basic software supplied with the PCU comprises the following components NT 4.0 XP version ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------• MS Windows NT 4.0 SP6a, English version MS Windows XP Pro SP1 English version • Internet Explorer 5.0, English version 6.0 • MS-DOS SW 6.21 and higher 6.21 • MPI driver SW 5 and higher 5 • Norton Ghost SW 6 and higher 7.5 • Norton Ghost Walker SW 6 and higher 7.5


IM4/3-17


11.02

Note The file C:\Siemensd.rtf contains information about how to use the basic software. The file C:\BaseVers.txt contains information about the versions of the Service menu (and WinNT) system components contained in the basic software. The following components • The HMI system software for Siemens SINUMERIK operation or • Any OEM software can be added to the basic PCU software in order to create a customized system software program. The software is extended by means of a Service menu that is part of the basic software.

Service menu The Service menu is implemented in DOS. The software is installed/updated via the Service menu and (following a reboot) executed under Windows NT/XP. Data is also backed up (Backup/Restore) via the Service menu. When the PCU is booting, you can choose between the SINUMERIK system and Service menu in the Boot Manager menu.

3.3.3

Boot Manager When the PCU is booting, you can choose between the SINUMERIK system and Service menu in the Boot Manager menu. • SINUMERIK: SINUMERIK system This takes you to the start of the HMI system software or (for the purposes of maintenance) to the SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP). • [concealed menu item]: Service menu The Service menu under DOS is used - To transfer software to be installed (e.g. if a network is not available) and - To back up data • [concealed menu item]: Recovery console (only on XP) Details about the console can be found in the original MS documentation under "Starting Windows Recovery Console".

IM4/3-18


11.02

3.3.4


Software assignment on the hard disk The PCU hard disk is divided up into 4 partitions with different file systems to separate the software packages. The hard disk is partitioned as required for installing the HMI system software on the PCU under WinNT4.0 or Windows XP. Windows XP can be used with the PCU 50 V2 (566 MHz or 1.2 GHz, HD 10 GB). • 3 primary and 1 extended partitions are formed. (Hard disks smaller than 4.8 GB will not be supported.) • In addition to WinNT4.0 and Windows XP (with HMI system software) DOS can also be booted (with Service menu) (dual booting). • According to order, the HMI system software can be supplied already loaded. It is installed later by the customer the first time the system is started up. • The HMI system software, the WinNT system software and DOS with the Service menu all run on different partitions to ensure data integrity. The following diagram shows how the partitions are utilized when the HMI system software is installed (the partition names are typed in italics).

PC U Hard disk

C:

FAT16 Rec. Cons. XP

DOS Tools Prim ary partition active

D:

F AT16

TMP, Im ages, Install, Updates Expanded partition w ith logical drive

E

NTFS

W inNT/XP

NTFS

F

840D System HM I, further applications

Prim ary partition

Primary partition

Figure 3-1 Using partitioning when installing the HMI system software

Content of the partitions The individual partitions are used for the following data:

Partition C Partition C contains DOS 6.2 together with the tools and scripts for the Service menu (e.g. Ghost tools).

Partition D Partition D is used to store Ghost images, i.e. both example images (e.g. condition on delivery) and local backup images. The WinNT system software is also stored for example if required for driver installation or update purposes. Partition D also contains the installation directory into which software to be installed is first copied from a remote PG/PC before the actual installation operation is started.


IM4/3-19


11.02

Partition E Partition E is reserved for the WinNT/XP system software.

Partition F Partition F is the application partition. Applications such as the HMI system software (including data management and temporary data), HMI OEM applications, STEP7 or customer-specific applications (e.g. Protool) run on it. Note The size of the partitions illustrated in Figure 3-1 is determined by the size of the hard disk and the Windows type. Note We strongly recommend that applications are only installed on partition F.

Free areas The following memory areas are available on the PCU 50 and PCU 70 hard disks: Drive D: 1.8 GB reserved for local backups Drive F: 3 GB reserved in addition to the installed 5-language HMI Advanced for user data (programs, applications, languages, data, etc.) High memory allocation on drive F: may lead to a local partition backup reaching a size that can no longer be saved locally on drive D:. In this case, the GHOST image (hard disk backup) must be saved to an external device.

IM4/3-20


11.02

3.3.5


SW installation and ways of activating the software Windows NT 4.0 or XP is installed on the PCU on delivery. Together with the Service menu described below, the Windows system forms the "Windows basic software": • SINUMERIK desktop (under Windows NT/XP): The Windows area is intended for service, which can use the Windows functions to start up the controller. In this area you can - Install HMI system software over a network - Install software add-ons (e.g. additional languages) - Modify INI files/hardware configuration (e.g. install drivers) - Configure the HMI software runtime environment - Configure the SIMATIC Step7 authorization settings - Run system checks (e.g. version check, disk check, etc.) - Install and parameterize UPS software You will find further options for the SINUMERIK desktop below. • Service menu (under DOS) The Service menu is used to install software and back up data. In this area you can - Transfer/extend HMI system software - Install HMI system software over a network - Save data on the hard disk (backup/restore) The Service menu is described in 3.4, Basic functions of the Service menu. It can be activated when booting. See 3.3.6.

Calling the SINUMERIK desktop 1. During startup, having selected the "SINUMERIK" menu in the Boot Manager, when the version information appears on the bottom right of the background image, press "3". 2. Enter the password. 3. Select the first menu, "SINUMERIK Desktop" and confirm your selection by pressing ENTER. The SINUMERIK desktop will then appear on your screen. The basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop are described under 3.5, Basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop.


IM4/3-21


3.3.6

11.02

Service menu The Service menu provides • Functions for installing/updating HMI system software • Functions for data backup/restoration For further details see Chapter 7. • Basic functions (see 3.4 Basic functions of the Service menu)

Calling the Service menu 1. During startup, select the second, concealed menu item under the "SINUMERIK" menu item in the Boot Manager. The main menu for the Service menu appears. 2. If necessary, enter the password. A menu overview appears on the next page: The following functions are available in the Service menu: Main menu 1

IM4/3-22

Function

Install/Update SINUMERIK System: Installation and extension or updating of the SINUMERIK system 1 Install From Floppy Disk 2 Install Via Serial/Parallel Line: Serial RS-232/parallel link 3 Install From Network Drive: Network link 1 Manage Network Drives 1 Connect to Network Drives 2 Show Connected Network Drives 3 Disconnect From All Network Drives Change Network Settings 4 1 Change Machine Name (for DOS-Net only) 2 Change User Name 3 Toggle Protocol 4 Toggle Logon to Domain (Yes or No) [5] Change Domain Name [6] Change TCP/IP Settings 1 Toggle "Get IP Addresses" (automatically or manually) 2 Change IP Address 3 Change Subnetmask 4 Change Gateway 5 Domain Name Server 6 Change DNS Extension 9 Back to Previous Menu 9 Back to Previous Menu 9 Back to Previous Menu 4 Change Install Directory [5] Install From (Network Drive) 9 Back to Previous Menu 5 Reboot: Restart system 9 Return to Main Menu: Go back to main menu


11.02


Main menu 2 3 4

5 7

Function

SINUMERIK Tools and Options: Load additional tools and enable options 1 Activate STEP7 for PCU, see notes below 9 Return to Main Menu: Go back to main menu DOS Shell: Call the DOS command interpreter, drive C:\ appears; use "Exit" to quit the DOS shell Start Windows: Windows functions can be used here 1 Standard Windows (without starting SINUMERIK HMI) 4 Original SINUMERIK HMI Environment, launched the next time the system is started 5 Current SINUMERIK HMI Environment, launched the next time the system is started 9 Return to Main Menu: Go back to main menu SINUMERIK System Check: Test the file system for consistency, restore consistency with SCANDISK if necessary Backup/Restore: 1 Hard disk backup/restore with GHOST 1 Configure GHOST parameters: Set the parameter (interface, path, network connection) for the Norton Ghost program 1 Set Connection Mode PARALLEL (LPT:) 2 Set Connection Mode LOCAL/NETWORK 3 Change Backup Image File Name 4 Change Restore Image File Name 5 Change Machine Name (for Windows and DOS Net) 1 Input Machine Name MANUALLY 2 Generate Machine Name RANDOMLY 9 Back to Previous Menu 6 Manage Network Drives (see above) 7 Change Split Mode 1 NO Splitting 2 Splitting 9 Back to Previous Menu 2 Hard disk backup: Back up hard disk contents 3 Hard disk restore: Restore backup to hard disk 1 Windows XP 1 Standard Partitioning (default) 2 User-Defined Partitioning 3 Image-Defined Partitioning 2 Windows NT/2000 (submenu like Windows XP) 3 Win95 (submenu like Windows XP) 4 WfW3.11 (submenu like Windows XP) 5 DOS (spare part) (submenu like Windows XP) 9 Back to Previous Menu 4 Switch to Other Version of GHOST 9 Back to Previous Menu: Return to previous menu


IM4/3-23


Main menu 7

8 9

11.02

Function

4

Partition Backup/Restore With Ghost: Partition content of C:, E:, F: to D: or restore data from D: back to C:, E:, F: . 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 1 Change Maximum Backup Images 2 Define Emergency Backup Image 9 Back to Previous Menu 2 Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode 3 Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode 4 Partition E (Windows) Restore, LOCAL Mode 8 Delete Image 9 Back to Previous Menu 9 Return to Main Menu: Go back to main menu Start PC Link: Install SW using a CD-ROM (Interlink/Interserve) Reboot: Restart system

Configuring the Service menu The items in the Service menu can be configured as follows: Show/Hide [a] Use special product designation (instead of SINUMERIK) [b] Modify text [c] For the purposes of configuration, the file envparam.bat must be saved to partition C: Tools directory and assigned the following commands: Entry no.

DOS command

Text/Function, if =True

1

[a]

set _INSTALL

2

[a]

set _TOOLS

4

[a]

set _SERVICE

6

[a]

set _REBOOT

[a]

set _HMI

1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 6 Reboot System (Warm Boot) Show submenu with HMI functions

Text/Function, Default if =False No display True No display

True

No display

True

No display

False

No display

True

String entries: 9

=String

[c]

set _ENDTXT

[b]

=String set _PRODUCTLINE

IM4/3-24

Reboot (Warm Boot) SINUMERIK


11.02


Calling the recovery console 1. During startup, select the third, concealed menu item under the "SINUMERIK" menu item in the Boot Manager. The following text appears: Starting Windows Recovery Console. A detailed description of the recovery console can be found in the original MS documentation.

3.4 Basic functions of the Service menu 3.4.1

Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware

Requirements The SIMATIC Step7 software is already installed.

Operation While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the Service menu [concealed menu option] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9]? 2. Press 2. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd:


IM4/3-25


11.02

3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Activate Step7 for PCU 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 9] ?

Authorization 4. Press 1.

Booting The system then reboots automatically. Authorization actually takes place the next time Windows NT/XP is started up prior to the HMI system software being launched. Note Authorization can also be effected on the SINUMERIK desktop by starting the "STEP7 Authorizing" function.

3.4.2

Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment The original HMI environment factory settings are restored. The contents of the - ADD_ON - USER - OEM directories will be saved. The directories are then emptied.

Operation While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the Service menu [concealed menu option] in the Boot Manager.

IM4/3-26


11.02


The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9]? 2. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Standard Windows (without starting SINUMERIK HMI) 4 Original SINUMERIK HMI Environment 5 Current SINUMERIK HMI Environment 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]?

Selecting the environment 3. Press 4. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd: 4. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0 – 2. - System - Manufacturer - Service

Booting The system then reboots automatically. The function is actually executed the next time Windows is started up prior to the HMI system software being launched. Note The original HMI environment factory settings can also be restored on the SINUMERIK desktop by starting the "Original SINUMERIK HMI Environ" function.


IM4/3-27


3.4.3

11.02

Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment This function undoes the restoration of the original HMI environment factory settings, i.e. the saved directory contents are copied back to the directories.

Operation While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the Service menu [concealed menu option] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9]? 2. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Standard Windows (without starting SINUMERIK HMI) 4 Original SINUMERIK HMI Environment 5 Current SINUMERIK HMI Environment 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]?

Selecting the environment 3. Press 5. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd: 4. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service

IM4/3-28


11.02


Booting The system then reboots automatically. The function is actually executed the next time Windows is started up prior to the HMI software being launched. Note You can also undo restoration of the original HMI environment factory settings on the SINUMERIK desktop by starting the "Current SINUMERIK HMI Environ" function.

3.4.4

Starting the DOS shell

Operation While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the Service menu [concealed menu option] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9]?

Starting the DOS shell 2. Press 3. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd:


IM4/3-29


11.02

3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0 – 2. - System - Manufacturer - Service You are now in the DOS shell.

Exiting the DOS shell Enter exit to quit the DOS shell.

3.4.5

Starting the SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP) The next time the system is restarted, the SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP) will be launched instead of the HMI system software.


Starting the DOS shell 2. Press 4.

IM4/3-30


11.02


The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT 1 Standard Windows (without starting SINUMERIK HMI) 4 Original SINUMERIK HMI Environment 5 Current SINUMERIK HMI Environment 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1,4, 5, 9]?

Starting the SINUMERIK desktop 3. Press 1.

Booting The system then reboots automatically. The SINUMERIK desktop (Windows NT/XP) is launched instead of the HMI system software. Note The SINUMERIK desktop can also be started by pressing 3 during startup when the version information for the basic software appears in the background (within a 3-second time window).

3.4.6

Checking the hard disk All partitions (C:,D:,E:,F) of the hard disk are checked.



IM4/3-31


11.02

Checking the hard disk 2. Press 5.

Booting The system then reboots automatically. The function is actually executed the next time Windows NT/XP is started up prior to the HMI system software being launched. Note You can also check the hard disk by starting the "Check SINUMERIK System" function on the SINUMERIK desktop.

3.4.7

Checking the version of the basic software The file C:\BaseVers.txt contains information about the versions of the Service menu and Windows NT system components contained in the basic software. Alternatively, the HMI Explorer can be activated on the SINUMERIK desktop.

Operation 1. Proceed as described in 3.4.4 Starting the DOS shell in order to start a DOS shell.

Checking the version 2. Enter: type BaseVers.txt The version information is listed.

Exiting the DOS shell Enter exit to quit the DOS shell.

IM4/3-32


11.02


3.5 Basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop 3.5.1

Installing/Updating the HMI system software You can install and update the HMI system software both from the Service menu (DOS) and from the SINUMERIK desktop. This mainly affects installation/update packages transferred to the PCU via the Windows network. You can install/update in one of two ways: • The installation/update process is started directly from the SINUMERIK desktop by executing the installation/update package (as under standard Windows procedure). • The installation/update package is placed in directory D:\INSTALL. The installation/update process is then started automatically the next time the PCU is booted. Only when this is complete is the HMI system software started. Note Section 7.2 describes how to install and update the HMI system software via the Service menu (DOS).

3.5.2

Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment The "Original SINUMERIK HMI Environ" function is offered as a script file on the SINUMERIK desktop. When you execute this function, the original factory settings are restored, i.e. the contents of the directories - F:\ADD_ON - F:\USER - F:\OEM - C:\RUNOEM will be saved. The directories are then emptied. Note The function can also be launched in the Service menu (DOS), see 3.4.2 Restoring the original SINUMERIK HMI environment. It is then executed while Windows NT boots (before the HMI system software starts) without the SINUMERIK desktop having to be displayed.


IM4/3-33


3.5.3

11.02

Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment The "Current SINUMERIK HMI Environ" function is offered as a script file on the SINUMERIK desktop. Executing this function "undoes" the restoration of the original factory settings, i.e. the saved directory contents are copied back to the directories. Note The function can also be launched in the Service menu (DOS), see 3.4.3 Activating the current SINUMERIK HMI environment. It is then executed while Windows boots (before the HMI system software starts) without the SINUMERIK desktop having to be displayed.

3.5.4

Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware The "STEP7 Authorizing" function is offered as a script file on the SINUMERIK desktop. When this function is executed, the SIMATIC Step7 software is authorized if it has already been installed. Note The function can also be launched in the Service menu (DOS), see 3.4.1 Authorizing SIMATIC Step7 for SINUMERIK hardware. It is then executed while Windows boots (before the HMI system software starts) without the SINUMERIK desktop having to be displayed.

3.5.5

Connecting a serial mouse The default setting for both COM interfaces is such that serial devices can be operated, with the exception of a serial mouse. Should a serial mouse be required, remove the /NoSerialMice option in the entry for starting Windows in the [operating systems] section of the C:\Boot.ini Bootloader file. In addition, in the Control Panel under Mouse (Start → Settings → Control → Panel → Mouse) in the General tab, set the type of serial mouse. Note If a PS/2 mouse was operated previously, it will no longer be functional.

IM4/3-34


11.02

3.5.6


Checking for errors

Checking the hard disk The "Check SINUMERIK System" function is offered as a script file on the SINUMERIK desktop. When this function is executed, all the partitions (C:,D:,E:,F) of the hard disk are checked. Note The function can also be launched in the Service menu (DOS), see 3.4.6 Checking the harddisk. It is then executed while Windows boots (before the HMI system software starts) without the SINUMERIK desktop having to be displayed.

Generating dump information Windows NT/XP is configured to perform a dump of current system information in the event of a system crash ("blue screen"). The dump is placed in file D:\Memory.dmp.

Checking the version of the basic software The file C:\BaseVers.txt contains information about the versions of the Service menu and Windows NT/XP system components contained in the basic software.

Checking the versions of the HMI system software The Windows program "HMI Explorer" appears on the SINUMERIK desktop. When the program is called, detailed version information about the packages installed in the HMI system software and about Windows NT/XP appears.

HMI Explorer It is possible (to some extent) to start and uninstall individual HMI applications from the HMI Explorer.

Log file Each time the system starts up, information is written to file D:\$$Base.log, which contains details of the date and time of administrative interventions along with a description of the task carried out.


IM4/3-35


3.5.7

11.02

Configuration

Starting OEM programs You can start OEM programs directly before you start the HMI system software. If you want to do this, place these programs (or links to them) in the subdirectories of the C:\RunOEM directory. In the C:\RunOEM\SeqOnce subdirectory, the programs are started once and in sequence, in other words, a program is only started once the program started previously has finished. In the C:\RunOEM\Seq subdirectory, the programs are started every time the PCU boots and in sequence, in other words, a program is only started once the program started previously has ended. In the C:\RunOEM\ParOnce subdirectory, the programs are started once and concurrently. They run parallel to the HMI system software. In the C:\RunOEM\Par subdirectory, the programs are started every time the PCU boots and concurrently. They run parallel to the HMI system software. Subdirectories are executed in the order in which they are listed above. Programs inside a subdirectory are started in the order in which they were saved to the subdirectory. Both programs and data files can be placed in the subdirectory. They are then opened as determined by their file type. For example, files of type ".txt" are opened with the Notepad, files of type ".htm" with the Internet Explorer.

Useful documents The documents SIEMENSD and SIEMENSE on the SINUMERIK desktop provide explanations, information and boundary conditions about the basic software currently loaded.

Configuring HMI users It is possible to specify special Windows users for whom the HMI system software should always be launched (= HMI users). By default, the local Windows user "auduser" is set as an HMI user. However, HMI users do not have to be "auduser" and can be any Windows user set up as a local user or domain user under Windows with administrator rights. Users are registered as HMI users by means of the following registry entries: Type Key USER Domain

IM4/3-36

Default HKLM\SOFTWARE\Siemens\SINUMERIK\Basesoftware\ \HMIManager Entry HMIUserName (STRING) auduser Entry HMIUserDomainName (STRING) local


11.02


The following information should be entered in HMIUserDomainName: For a domain user: For a local user:

"" "(local)"

If the user logs on as the (currently registered) HMI user, the HMI system software will start automatically when the system starts up. If the user logs on as a different Windows user, the system will start up with the SINUMERIK desktop. Users do not usually have to log on explicitly because the system is configured to log them on automatically as HMI users. Should the user wish to log on as a different Windows user, (s)he must press the Shift key at about the time the startup screen appears and hold it down. The Windows Logon screen will then appear, in which the user must enter the name and password of the required Windows user.

■


IM4/3-37


IM4/3-38

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 4 Power ON / Booting

4 4 Power ON / Booting

4.1 Power ON ................................................................................. IM4/4-40 4.2 Booting...................................................................................... IM4/4-41 4.3 Controlling HMI booting ............................................................ IM4/4-42 4.3.1 Replacing the startup screen................................................. IM4/4-44 4.3.2 Access rights when creating programs ................................. IM4/4-45 4.3.3 Keyboard functions (PCU50/70) for HMI Advanced.............. IM4/4-46 4.3.4 Keyboard functions (MMC103).............................................. IM4/4-47 4.4 HMI Advanced with SITOP UPS (EP1931-2EC11) .................. IM4/4-50 4.5 Boot errors ................................................................................ IM4/4-51 4.6 BIOS setup................................................................................ IM4/4-52 4.6.1 Modifying the BIOS settings .................................................. IM4/4-54


IM4/4-39


11.02

4.1 Power ON Requirements Before you connect the PCU to the power supply, you must unlock the hard disk and connect an operator panel and the keyboard and display or monitor I/O devices. 1. Before connecting the power supply to the PCU 50/70, plug the connecting cable for the I/O devices into the appropriate sockets on the interface side of the PCU. 2. As soon as the I/O devices are connected, the device is ready. For information on how to adjust and set your interface and the cable required, please see the instruction manual for your I/O device.

Connecting the power supply The PCU 50/70 is supplied with 24 V DC. References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual

Power ON and power OFF As a line switch is not provided, the power supply is connected and disconnected by inserting/removing the power supply plug (see above). Note When connecting I/O devices, make sure that the components are designed for industrial use.

!

IM4/4-40

Caution When inserting/withdrawing I/O connectors (keyboard, mouse, printer, etc.), make sure that the I/O devices and the PCU are disconnected from the power supply, otherwise they might be damaged. This is not applicable for USB connections.


11.02


4.2 Booting Function The first time the system is started up, the software loaded on the hard disk on the basis of the order (SINUMERIK products, may include HMI Advanced software) is installed in accordance with the following procedure: Welcome to SINUMERIK These SINUMERIK products will be installed now: ... Install NOW Install at NEXT REBOOT CANCEL Installing The pushbuttons can be selected with the TAB key and activated by pressing ENTER. How the pushbuttons work: Install NOW: All products displayed will be installed one after the other in the order in which they appear on the screen. If a reboot is required to activate the installation, it will be carried out immediately after the corresponding program has been installed. This may mean that the system has to be rebooted several times before all products are installed. Install at NEXT REBOOT: The above screen appears again the next time the system is rebooted. No products are installed immediately. CANCEL Installing No products are installed and the screen does not reappear the next time the system is rebooted. Further installations can then only be executed explicitly in Windows mode by activating the setup.exe programs directly in the setup directories.


IM4/4-41


11.02

Initial state The PCU is shipped with its hard disk appropriately partitioned for operation of a SINUMERIK 840D and other SINUMERIK applications if required. The basic startup software is also installed: •

The boot software and other necessary startup programs are stored on C:

Drives E: and F: are empty.

PC U Hard disk

C:

FAT16

DOS Tools Prim ary partition active

D:

F AT16

TMP, Im ages, Install, Updates Expanded partition w ith logical drive

E

NTFS

W inNT/XP

F

NTFS

840D System HM I, further applications

Prim ary partition

Primary partition

Figure 4-1 Partitioning on installation

4.3 Controlling HMI booting Via files The actions carried out during booting are controlled on the basis of the content of the initialization files.

REGIE.INI The applications to be started can be found in file REGIE.INI and can be changed there, see Chapter 5. ; Information about other entries can be found in the OEM documentation. References:

OEM Package MMC/HMI, Chapter 6

Accelerated WIN XP booting Provided that certain requirements have been met, Windows XP can reduce booting time (Hibernate). Characteristics: • The working image of Windows XP is saved to a file when the system shuts down and reactivated during accelerated booting.

IM4/4-42


11.02


• •

If this file is written to the hard disk, the PCU power supply can be disconnected without any relevant information being lost. The operating system display file can be reactivated significantly more quickly than restarting Windows XP by means of a complete reboot.

Requirements: • All Windows XP drivers and all applications must support accelerated mode (Hibernate) in order to be able to execute applications with hibernates. • The Windows system must be activated in Standard mode (not Service mode). Use: As one or more applications/drivers cannot be terminated in Hibernate mode, only a limited hibernate may be executed. All HMI Advanced applications must be terminated. Only the Windows XP image can save and reactivate Hibernate on the next reboot. A small amount of time can be saved by reactivating the Windows XP image instead of restarting Windows. All applications must be restarted once Windows XP has been restarted.

Configuration The variants suitable for an XP system and its applications are selected in file regie.ini. See Chapter 5.

NETNAMES.INI In an M : N configuration, the way in which the operator panel(s) is (are) booted can be modified in file NETNAMES.INI; see Chapter 5 and References: /FB2/, B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs

About the user interface The following functions can be modified for booting the operator panel in the "Installation and Startup" operating area of the user interface: • • •

Language selection Setting the MPI/OPI address Setting the colors of the user interface

About the Service menu In the Service menu you can, for example, load certain software versions applicable when booting next, see Chapter 7 "SW installation/Data backup"


IM4/4-43


4.3.1

11.02

Replacing the startup screen

Up to SW version 6.1 If the default startup screen is not suitable, you may replace it. Replace the screen in E:\Winnt.40\System32\MMC840D.BMP with one that is more suitable of the same name. Display properties: The display should have a 640 x 480 to 1024 x 768 resolution (depending on the OP) and 256 colors.

SW version 6.2 and higher From this SW release, Siemens startup screens for NCU types 572.3, 573.3 and CCU3 are separately identified by the "powerline" name. You can create a directory tree for manufacturer-specific startup screens, in which the required manufacturer screens can be saved as shown in the diagram below:

Directory tree of the manufacturer-specific boot screens: F:\OEM\IB\DATA\\\ Nck type stands for:

default 3000 2000 0 5000

Resolution: (802D) (810D) (840D) (840Di)

640 800 1024

(dpi)

Whenever a fixed screen (non-NCU-specific screen) is to be displayed, this can be saved in the requisite resolutions in the "default" directory. If different screens are to be displayed for the various NCUs, these are saved in the \ subdirectories in the relevant resolution.

Screen names .bmp Any name can be chosen here. There must only be one file per directory.

IM4/4-44


11.02


Resolution The screens must be generated with a graphics tool in the resolution specified by the subdirectory name and saved in the relevant directory. The HMI software selects the screen in accordance with the NCK type and the resolution of the available control panel.

Colors The screen must be designed in 256 colors. Note The very first time you boot a standard screen is displayed, as the working link to the NC does not yet exist. The screen corresponding to the installed hardware is displayed from the second time the system is booted onwards.

Screens from previous versions You may continue to use screens from previous versions provided you comply with the points described above regarding the directory tree, the resolution and the names of display files.

4.3.2

Access rights when creating programs

Function On booting the data management server, the server reads in: • •

The SCHEMA.BIN data scheme and then The plaintext identifier from the relevant language dll

In the boot phase, the data management server checks whether the dh.ini file contains entries for modified standard access rights. The data management server uses these entries to update its internal map of the data management scheme around the modified access rights. The access rights described in these entries are now used as standard access rights for the selected data. Entries that do not fit the existing scheme are ignored.

Formats and data type The entries are formed as follows: \wcs.dir\*.wpd\*.mpf = \mpf.dir\*.mpf =

75775 75775

All the entries are in the [Accessmasks] section A standard access mask can be set up for each data type and archive location.


IM4/4-45


11.02

An entry comprises the path for generating data of the particular data type and the new standard access mask. Paths are made up of data type identifiers. In the above example "\wks.dir\*.wpd\*.mpf" from the data type for workpiece directories workpieces parts programs

"wks.dir" "*.wpd" "*.mpf".

In all workpieces new standard access mask 75775 is defined and is used to set up the new parts programs. Access mask 75775 stands for:

Access mask 7 5 7 7 5

Read access for all Write access from protection level 5 Executive access set. Display access for all Delete access from protection level 5

0 to 7 0 to 7 0 or 7 0 to 7 0 to 7

are valid are valid are valid are valid are valid

Boundary conditions When the HMI database is installed, data is always set up with standard data scheme access rights. Access rights for nodes such as wcs.dir cannot be modified.

Example [Accessmasks] \wcs.dir\*.wpd\*.mpf = \mpf.dir\*.mpf = \cus.dir\*.spf =

4.3.3

75775 75775 33773

Keyboard functions (PCU50/70) for HMI Advanced

CAPSLOCK The CAPSLOCK function permanently converts lower case letters to upper case letters. It is used on external SINUMERIK keyboards. Should lower case letters occur, they are inserted by pressing SHIFT whilst typing. The function is only active if HMI Advanced is running and not in standard Windows NT/XP operation. Upper case letters can be converted to lower case letters by pressing the key sequence CTRL + SHIFT. If you press the key sequence CTRL followed by SHIFT again, you can toggle back to converting lower case letters to upper case letters. The switchover function still works however long the length of time between CTRL and SHIFT. You must not enter any other character between CTRL and SHIFT.

IM4/4-46


11.02


Activation The function is activated with display machine data 9009 $MM_KEYBOARD_STATE. 0: CAPSLOCK OFF 2: CAPSLOCK ON MDs are only evaluated on booting. If you change the MDs your changes will not take effect until the next time the system is booted.

On-screen representation If lower case mode is active, an icon of the SHIFT key is displayed in the dialog line.

Boundary conditions • • •

4.3.4

If the CAPSLOCK function is active, the SHIFT key can no longer have an effect on the letter keys. CTRL/ALT key sequences only function in lower case mode in standard Windows applications. The keyboards integrated into the OP 010/ OP12 do not support lower case mode.

Keyboard functions (MMC103)

Terms used • • • •

OP keyboard: MFII keyboard: QWERTY keyboard: OP SHIFT:

Small, 40-key keyboard for the OP 031 operator panel MFII-compatible PC keyboard External Siemens full keyboard SHIFT key on OP keyboard

CAPSLOCK (MFII/QWERTY keyboard) The status of the CAPSLOCK function (lower case/upper case) is recognized when the MMC103 powers up: Active: Upper case is the default setting, lower case activated only by pressing the SHIFT key. Passive: Upper case activated only by pressing the SHIFT key, lower case is the default setting.

Permanent SHIFT (OP keyboard) Permanent SHIFT key on the OP keyboard (a SHIFT code is inserted before each key on the OP keyboard). From now on, this mode will be referred to as permanent SHIFT. It can only be used with an OP keyboard.


IM4/4-47


11.02

Single SHIFT (OP keyboard) Single SHIFT key on the OP keyboard. From now on, this mode will be referred to as single SHIFT. The various modes can be configured in file E:\WINNT.40\SYSTEM.INI. You must make the following entries •

In section

[MMC103keyb]:

You can set your selected keyboard in item [keybType]. [keybType] =0: The OP keyboard is used =1: An MFII/QWERTY keyboard is used = Other/No entry: The OP keyboard is used [KeybStartState] =0: =1: =2:

Single SHIFT active after booting Permanent SHIFT active after booting CAPSLOCK active after booting (only relevant for keybType MFII, see keybType) = Other/No entry: Single SHIFT active after booting The various modes are signaled by the driver (see below). The following scenarios are possible: 1. User with an OP keyboard [MMC103keyb] keybStartState = 0 or 1 keybType = 0 // or leave out this line completely The user can toggle between single SHIFT and permanent SHIFT with the SHIFT key on the OP keyboard. The status CAPSLOCK does not exist. 2. User with an MFII/QWERTY keyboard [MMC103keyb] keybStartState = 0 or 2 // 0 = CAPSLOCK OFF // 2 = CAPSLOCK ON keybType = 1

IM4/4-48


11.02


Special features Use of an MFII/QWERTY keyboard •

•

MFII keyboard You can switch between Standard and CAPSLOCK states (with the CAPSLOCK key). If the MFII keyboard is used, although the operator panel keyboard has been selected in [keybType], it will operate in single SHIFT mode like a standard MFII keyboard. All keys are output as SHIFT in permanent SHIFT mode. However, the CAPSLOCK key has no effect. QWERTY keyboard As no CAPSLOCK key exists on the QWERTY keyboard, the initial CAPSLOCK status cannot be altered during operation.

Note If [keybType] 1 (MFII/QWERTY) is selected and the CAPSLOCK key is active, characters on the OP keyboard might not be output in accordance with key labels (e.g. lower case letters are output).

Use of an OP keyboard •

Press the SHIFT key twice to toggle between - single SHIFT and - permanent SHIFT modes.

•

[keybType] = 1 (MFII): If the OP keyboard is being used, although MFII has been selected in [keybType], characters will be output in accordance with key labels (i.e. no SHIFT key). However, single SHIFT and permanent SHIFT modes are not supported.

•

[keybStartState] = 2 (CAPSLOCK): Operation of the OP keyboard only causes problems when CAPSLOCK mode is active. Characters are not output in accordance with key labels on the OP keyboard (e.g. lower case letters are output).

Note You can only toggle between single SHIFT and permanent SHIFT modes with the OP keyboard SHIFT key. If [keybType] = 0 (OP keyboard) is selected, the CAPSLOCK key has no effect. The OP keyboard does not recognize CAPSLOCK mode.


IM4/4-49


11.02

4.4 HMI Advanced with SITOP UPS (EP1931-2EC11) Application In the event of the loss of the power supply on the PCU 50/70, SITOP UPS (EP1931-2EC11) can, in conjunction with HMI Advanced, temporarily maintain operation using the backup battery and power down the HMI under controlled conditions before the battery discharges.


•

HMI basic software SW version 7.3 and higher SITOP SW - Configuration Manager - Monitoring program installed. SITOP UPS hardware connected.

Procedure The Configuration Manager starts up in Windows mode. In the parameter area for the buffer memory, enter the path of the program that will power down HMI-Adv and shut down the PCU under controlled conditions in the event of a power failure. The path to be entered is: E:\WINDOWS\System32\hmiexit.exe

Parameterization Parameters are set in file: E:\WINDOWS\System32\hmiexit.ini in the Actions section. [Actions] #Waiting time in seconds until the HMI-Adv applications are terminated Wait = 120 # Action once the waiting time has elapsed ForceShutdown = True The requirements are listed above. If ForceShutdown = True, once the waiting time has elapsed, Windows will be shut down regardless of the status of the HMI applications (recommended). If ForceShutdown = False, Windows is not shut down. References: More information can be found in the description of the product with the order number 6EP1 931-2EC11 (with RS-232 interface).

IM4/4-50


11.02


4.5 Boot errors The following errors may occur when the operator panel is booting up: • •

• •

Hard disk is still latched in Remedy: Unlatch the hard disk NCU/CCU will not boot, SW and HW incompatible (e.g. PC-card-NC with SW for NCU 572.2 connected to an NCU 573.2) NC-card or HW faulty Remedy: See /IAD/ Installation Guide for the 840D or /IAC/ Installation Guide for the 810D PCU 50 will not boot, Remedy: see /BH/ Operator Components Manual, Chapter PCU 50 No connection to the NCU/CCU: Alarm 120202 is output The operator panel is connected to the NC and the PLC via a serial bus. The alarm is displayed when the HMI is started for the first time while the NC/PLC is still booting, or communication with these components is interrupted. When this alarm is displayed, all displayed values referring to the NC/PLC become invalid. These types of error are common during system booting (e.g. after a reset). The alarm will disappear automatically as soon as the fault has been rectified. Its failure to disappear may be due to a variety of very different causes (e.g. open circuit; NC/PLC not booting; address/baud rate of one of the bus nodes configured incorrectly, etc.).


IM4/4-51


11.02

4.6 BIOS setup Factory settings The settings vary on: PCU 50 with 333 MHz or 500 MHz, PCU 50 with 566 MHz or 1.2 GHz,

known as V1 and known as V2

The following BIOS standard parameters are stored when the PCU50 is delivered: Designation

PCU 50 V1 setting

Main 1) System time System date Floppy disk A: Primary master C: Primary slave Secondary master Secondary slave Memory cache Boot options Quick boot mode SETUP prompt POST errors Floppy check Summary screen Keyboard features Num lock Key click Keyboard auto-repeat rate Keyboard auto-repeat delay Hardware options PCI-MPI/DP: On-board Ethernet Ethernet address LAN remote boot Cardbus/PCMCIA slot Fan control SafeCard functions Legacy USB support CRT/LCD selection CRT 640x480 CRT 800x600 CRT 1024x768 LCD screen size DSTN contrast Trackball/PS2 mouse

IM4/4-52

hh:mm:ss MM/DD/YYYY 1.44 MB, 3 1/2" (external connect. => also switch off FD check) 10056 MB (currently) or greater None None None Write back Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Off Disabled 30/s 1/2s

V2 (if different)

10056 MB (currently) or greater

Disabled Off

Enabled Enabled 08000624xxxx Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled SIMULTAN 75Hz 75Hz 75Hz Graph&Text expanded 154 Auto

Enabled


11.02

Advanced COM/LPT Internal COM1 Base I/O address Interrupt Internal COM2 Base I/O address Interrupt Internal LPT1 Mode Base I/O address Interrupt DMA channel PCI configuration: PCI device slot 1 Option ROM scan Enable Master Latency timer PCI device slot 2 Option ROM scan Enable Master Latency timer Ethernet Option ROM scan Enable Master Latency timer PCI/PnP ISA IRQ Exclusion IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 PCI IRQ line 1 PCI IRQ line 2 PCI IRQ line 3 PCI IRQ line 4 Installed O/S Reset configuration data Floppy disk controller Local bus IDE adapter Large disk access mode Hard disk pre-delay Memory gap at 15 MB Security Supervisor password Is User password Is Set supervisor password Set user password Password on boot Fixed disk boot sector Floppy disk access


Configuration Enabled 3F8 IRQ4 Enabled 2F8 IRQ3 Enabled EPP 378 IRQ7 DMA 10

EPP Not relevant for EPP Not relevant for EPP

Enabled Enabled 0040 h Enabled Enabled 0040 h On-board PCI Disabled Disabled 0040 h Available Available Available Available Available Available Reserved Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Auto-select Other No Enabled Primary & secondary, both DOS Disabled Disabled

5

Disabled Disabled [Enter] [Enter] Disabled Normal Supervisor


IM4/4-53


Power APM Power savings Standby time-out Suspend time-out Hard disk time-out Fan control Boot sequence

11.02

Enabled Disabled Off Off Disabled Enabled Hard drive Removable devices Floppy disk drive ATAPI CD-ROM drive

Version Component SINUMERIK PCU 50 BIOS version V07.01.07 BIOS number -A5E00054959A-DS02 MPI/DP firmware V01 CPU type PENTIUM II CPU speed 333 MHz or greater CPU ID Code revision 1) Italics: automatic setting, cannot be changed

4.6.1

Hard drive Removable devices CD-ROM drive IntelBootAgent (IBA) V02.03.04 -A5E00124434-ES01 PENTIUM III 866 MHz

Modifying the BIOS settings After additional components have been installed or added, it may be necessary to register them with the system in the BIOS setup. You can activate the BIOS setup on the operator panel as described below: 1. Boot up the device. 2. When prompted to activate the BIOS setup, press (the same as horizontal soft key 2 on the OP). The BIOS setup menu will appear. 3. Use the cursor keys to navigate to the required selection field in the menu. 4. Use the + (press and simultaneously) or keys (on the numerical keypad) to modify the setting. 5. If required, you can access other setup menus by pressing the right/left cursor keys. 6. Press ( key) to jump to the "Exit" menu (can also be accessed by continued pressing of the right cursor key). 7. Press the key to exit the setup menu. The system will boot as described in Subsection 7.6.1 of the Operator Components Manual. Note If you want to change the BIOS settings, except for the boot sequence and the LPT mode (EPP, EPC), you will require an OEM contract. n

IM4/4-54


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 5 Functions / Parameterization

5

5 Functions / Parameterization

5.1 Functions .................................................................................. IM4/5-57 5.1.1 Alarm log ............................................................................. IM4/5-57 5.1.2 Activating data transfer via the PLC.................................... IM4/5-59 5.1.3 Communicating the current task number to the PLC (HMI SW 6.2 and higher) .................................................... IM4/5-62 5.1.4 Fine zero offset and basic offset ......................................... IM4/5-64 5.1.5 Specifying the position of the machine and the rotary axis (SW 6.1 and higher) ............................................................ IM4/5-64 5.1.6 Block search in program testing mode, multiple channels (not SW 6.1) ........................................................................ IM4/5-65 5.1.7 Configuring the language setting ........................................ IM4/5-67 5.1.8 Access protection................................................................ IM4/5-70 5.1.9 Modifying access rights to the basic offset soft key............ IM4/5-72 5.1.10 Masking out axes ................................................................ IM4/5-72 5.1.11 Modifying the coordinate system for actual value display... IM4/5-74 5.1.12 Activating active tool offset immediately ............................. IM4/5-74 5.1.13 Checking for boot viruses ................................................... IM4/5-75 5.1.14 Cross-channel status display with symbols (SW 6.2 and higher) .......................................................................... IM4/5-76 5.1.15 Inverting the spindle symbol display (SW 6.2 and higher).. IM4/5-82 5.1.16 Configurable display in the header (SW 6.2 and higher) .... IM4/5-83 5.1.17 Selecting channels/spindles via the PLC (SW 6.2 and higher) .......................................................................... IM4/5-87 5.1.18 User-specific menu trees .................................................... IM4/5-88 5.1.19 Parts programs and workpieces in the DRAM.................... IM4/5-95 5.1.20 Provision of displays for Classic/NEW layout variants........ IM4/5-97 5.1.21 User modifications in the Service overview ........................ IM4/5-98 5.2 Matching simulation data ........................................................ IM4/5-101 5.2.1 Simulation data ................................................................. IM4/5-101 5.2.2 Displaying simulation data ................................................ IM4/5-106 5.2.3 Matching simulation data .................................................. IM4/5-107 5.2.4 Memory configuration for simulation ................................. IM4/5-111 5.2.5 Accelerating simulation startup ......................................... IM4/5-112 5.3 Setting parameters using ini files............................................ IM4/5-114 5.3.1 Editing ini files ................................................................... IM4/5-114 5.3.2 Tool management ............................................................. IM4/5-117 5.3.3 MD for Actual Value Setting, Scratch, PRESET ............... IM4/5-117 5.3.4 Execution from hard disk for M : N.................................... IM4/5-119 5.3.5 Editor ................................................................................. IM4/5-120 5.4 Access to external drives/Set up computer ............................ IM4/5-121


IM4/5-55


11.02

5.5 Setting the parameters for display MD ................................... IM4/5-123 5.5.1 Backing up display machine data ..................................... IM4/5-136 5.6 Ini files..................................................................................... IM4/5-136 5.6.1 MMC.INI ............................................................................ IM4/5-136 5.6.2 NETNAMES.INI................................................................. IM4/5-137 5.6.3 MBDDE.INI........................................................................ IM4/5-139 5.6.4 AEDITOR.INI..................................................................... IM4/5-142 5.6.5 COMIC.NSK...................................................................... IM4/5-143 5.6.6 DINO.INI............................................................................ IM4/5-143 5.6.7 DPDH.INI .......................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.8 DH.INI ............................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.9 DPSIM.INI ......................................................................... IM4/5-145 5.6.10 MASCHINE.INI.................................................................. IM4/5-146 5.6.11 PARAM.INI........................................................................ IM4/5-150 5.6.12 PARAMTM.INI................................................................... IM4/5-150 5.6.13 PATM_xx.INI ..................................................................... IM4/5-153 5.6.14 REGIE.INI ......................................................................... IM4/5-155 5.6.15 TASKCONF.INI ................................................................. IM4/5-156 5.6.16 DG.INI ............................................................................... IM4/5-158 5.6.17 IB.INI ................................................................................. IM4/5-158 5.6.18 IF.INI ................................................................................. IM4/5-160 5.6.19 OEMFRAME.INI................................................................ IM4/5-163 5.6.20 LAYOUTSW.INI ................................................................ IM4/5-163 5.6.21 DGOVW.INI....................................................................... IM4/5-165 5.6.22 DGOVWTXT_xx.INI .......................................................... IM4/5-165 5.7 System settings....................................................................... IM4/5-166 5.7.1 MMC.INI ............................................................................ IM4/5-166 5.7.2 NETNAMES.INI................................................................. IM4/5-167 5.7.3 REGIE.INI ......................................................................... IM4/5-167 5.7.4 HEADER.INI...................................................................... IM4/5-168 5.7.5 KEYS.INI ........................................................................... IM4/5-171

IM4/5-56


11.02


5.1 Functions You can change the functions of HMI Advanced via INI files, display MDs or the user interface.

5.1.1

Alarm log You can select various methods for outputting alarms on the basis of the • Application and the • Hard disk load. Make the required entries in file MBDDE.INI.

Hard disk load Writing to alarm files will load the same hard disk regions again and again. You can use the following control options to can select various procedures. There are several strategies for protecting the hard disk. You can keep multiple log files in parallel on the hard disk. When using the multi-file strategy, the HMI changes to the next file each time the system boots up. This reduces the load on the hard disk hardware, both in the data area and the directory information area. Furthermore, this strategy is able to detect physical hard disk faults in the data area when the system boots up and evade them by assigning new memory locations. The multi-file strategy can be selected using the DiskCare Ini file entry File: "mbdde.ini", Section: [PROTOCOL], Entry: "DiskCare". The following values are possible: DiskCare=-1

The MBDDE server keeps the alarm log in the memory. The alarm log is saved to hard disk if it is displayed in the Diagnostics operating area and/or if the Alarm Cancel key is pressed.

DiskCare=0

The log file is written to immediately.

DiskCare=n

Changes in the alarm status are written to the log file if there have been no changes in the last n seconds. The following also applies: The alarm log is saved to hard disk if it is displayed in the Diagnostics operating area and/or if the Alarm Cancel key is pressed.

DiskCare=-n

n>1 specifies the number of alarm files to be managed.


IM4/5-57


11.02

The file "mbdde.ini" is analyzed when the system is booting. The alarm files that are not used are kept in the mmc2 directory together with the current log file. The names of these hidden files (attribute:"hidden") consist of an 8-digit hexadecimal number with the extension ".alr". Files in the section of which typing errors are found at boot also consist of an 8-digit hexadecimal number but have the extension ".al_".

Log file size The size of the log file (circular buffer) can be defined in file MBDDE.INI. [Alarms] Records = value ; Size of the log file Default value 150 Minimum value: 18 Maximum value: 32000 75 alarms can be displayed if the default value is set to 150. Two records are required for each alarm.

Selecting alarms on the basis of features Filter entries in MBDDE.INI can be used to control the number of messages appearing in the log file. [PROTOCOL] Filter=Expression The expression is used to express selection features and is created as follows:

Syntax [IDENTIFIER][RELATION][FEATURE][OPERATORS]

IM4/5-58

IDENTIFIER: • No. • Prio • Mode • Type • From • Ackvar

Alarm number Priority Message line/alarm line or dialog box Alarm type (power ON, cancel, etc.) Sender of the alarm Acknowledgment variable

RELATION: • ':' • '' • '!'

Equal to Less than More than Not


11.02


PROPERTY: • Numbers • Strings OPERATORS • ',' A comma indicates a logic or within a filter • '' A space indicates a logic and between individual filters • '|' A pipe indicates a logic or between individual filters Examples: Filter=Type 0. Changes in MD 9052 become effective after POWER ON.

SINUMERIK symbols The following SINUMERIK symbols are available (name in brackets):

Channel status Channel RESET (NC_RESET.BMP) Channel active (NC_START.BMP) Channel interrupted (NC_STOP.BMP)

Feed stop Feed not enabled (FEEDSTOP.BMP)

Spindle status or

Spindle turns counterclockwise or clockwise (SPNDLEFT.BMP or SPNDRGHT.BMP) Spindle not enabled (SPNDSTOP.BMP) Spindle STOP (SPNDM05.BMP)

IM4/5-76


11.02


Storing SINUMERIK symbols SINUMERIK symbols are stored in F:\HMI_ADV\ICONS\640 (for 640x480 screen resolution) F:\HMI_ADV\ICONS\800 (for 800x600 screen resolution) F:\HMI_ADV\ICONS\1024 (for 1024x768 screen resolution) Dimensions SINUMERIK symbols have the following dimensions 640x480 resolution: 16x16 pixels 800x600 resolution: 20x20 pixels 1024x768 resolution: 27x26 pixels Colors TrueColor Note If the "Switchable Spindles" or "Axis Container" functions are used, the spindle status is output before the spindle is converted/assigned to an axis/spindle container; i.e. the spindle number displayed under spindle status is the "logic" spindle.

A. SINUMERIK status display The following 4 default displays are available: • Channel status (active, stopped, RESET) with overlaid spindle stop and feed stop • Channel status (active, stopped, RESET) with overlaid feed stop • Channel status (active, stopped, RESET) • Spindle status (counterclockwise, clockwise, spindle stop, spindle stop M05) 1. Channel status, feed stop and spindle status are output at the display position as symbols. The channel status symbols can be overlaid by the "Spindle not enabled" or "Feed not enabled" symbols. The following hierarchy applies (sorted in order of priority): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Channel STOP Spindle not enabled Feed not enabled Channel active Channel RESET

(highest priority)


IM4/5-77


11.02

Syntax: ChanStatFeedStopSpindleStop = Spindles = ,..., Channel number: Number of the channel Spindle number: Numbers of the "logic" spindles to be taken into account (programmed in DIN code with S1 to Sn, if several instances are affected, the higher number is displayed) 2. Channel status and spindle status are output at the display position as symbols. (The spindle status can for example be output specifically, see "4"). The channel status symbols can be overlaid by the "Feed not enabled" symbol. The following hierarchy applies (sorted in order of priority): 1. 2. 3. 4.

Channel STOP Feed not enabled Channel active Channel RESET

(highest priority)

Syntax: ChanStatFeedStop = Channel number: Number of the channel 3. Channel status is output at the display position as a symbol. (For example, feed stop is also output in the Feed window in the Machine operating area.) Syntax: ChanStat = Channel number:

Number of the channel

4. Spindle status is output at the display position as a symbol. Syntax: SpindStat = Spindle number: Number of the (logic) spindle

Configuration via HEADER.INI The assignment of the cross-channel status display is defined in the HEADER.INI file and can be configured with SINUMERIK and/or user symbols as desired.

IM4/5-78


11.02


Note • Empty positions do not have to be specified • Predefined status displays can be disabled in the HEADER.INI file in the OEM or USER directories with the value , for example ChanStatFeedStopSpindleStop = . • The entire HEADER.INI file is described in Section 5.7.

16 display positions In the program status line (header), 16 display positions are defined, with each of the SINUMERIK symbols occupying 2 positions: number + symbol.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1415 16 1

Figure 5-1

SINUMERIK symbols are permanently assigned to an output position. A section is created in the HEADER.INI configuration file for each of the positions used. Typical view of the program status line with SINUMERIK symbols for 4 channels and 2 spindles:

S1

S2

Figure 5-2

The channel or spindle number always appears first in these displays. Example: The status displays of 2 channels and 1 spindle should be output in the first, third and fifth display positions. HEADER.INI file: [Pos1] ; First display position ChanStatFeedStopSpindleStop = 3 Spindles=1,2 ; The channel status of channel 3 is displayed, ; overlaid by feed disable channel 3 and ; spindle disable for spindles 1 and 2 [Pos3] ; Third display position ChanStatFeedStop = 2 ; The channel status of channel 2 is displayed ; overlaid by feed disable channel 2 [Pos5] ; Fifth display position SpindStat= 3 ; The spindle status of spindle 3 is displayed


IM4/5-79


11.02

This, for example, generates the following display in the program status line:

S3

Figure 5-3

Deactivation The symbol displays configured in this way can be deactivated when user status displays are used in accordance with B. In a user-specific HEADER.INI file (not in directory HMI_ADV, as this would be overwritten in the event of a software upgrade) set blank entries. Example: [Pos5] SpindStat=

B. User status display User symbols linked with specific machine states can be output in addition (or instead), controlled by the PLC (DB x, DBB y). Procedure: • Declaration of icons and positions (1.) • Control of icon call by the PLC (2.) 1. In the UserIcons section of the HEADER.INI file, enter the names of the user symbols and the associated positions for identifiers UI_0 to UI_31. [UserIcons] UI_0= , ; UI_0: Identifier ; Ikone_00.bmp: Name of the user symbol (8 characters.bmp) ; Position: Position for display (1–16) ... UI_31= , USER_ICON_BASE = DBx.DBBy Next in UserIcons section: DBx.DBBy: User-defined double word for controlling icon selection. If a bit is set for a user icon, the associated UI_x entry must exist, otherwise nothing will appear. If an icon relevant to the declaration specified above is to be displayed, the PLC sets the relevant bit in the double word. For example:

IM4/5-80


11.02


UI_0 display assigned icon → Bit 0 ... UI_31 display assigned icon → Set bit 31 If the PLC resets the bit, the assigned icon in the display will be deleted. Example: UI_3=Ikone_01.bmp,12. If bit 3 is set, icon "Ikone_01.bmp" is displayed in position 12 if no other icons with higher identifiers (>UI_3) and the same position (,12) are active.

Application options • 32 alternative displays for one position, each selected with a different bit (only one active selection bit at the moment) • 2 alternative displays for each of the valid 16 positions, each position needs 2 of the 32 selection bits (max. 16 active selection bits at a time) • A combination, totaling max. 32 displays for max. 16 positions (max. 16 active selection bits at a time) • More than 16 selection bits, see override In the case of a unique selection, max. 16 bits are set in the 4 selection bytes concurrently, each for different positions.

Override In the case of a non-unique selection (bits for several identifiers, with displays to be shown in the same position): The display with the lower identifier number is overlaid by the display with the higher identifier number for the same position. A non-unique selection can also be used for fewer than 16 active selection bits. The PLC can use this override deliberately to override less important displays with lower identifier numbers with important displays (higher identifier numbers). Note If two 2 HMI units are assigned to one NC/PLC unit (M:N), the PLC must first use the control interface to determine which of the HMI interfaces is the active one. The PLC can only request icons for the active HMI unit. The function described is available when it is enabled via the following machine data.


IM4/5-81


11.02

9052 SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STAT MD number Change cross-channel status display Default value 0 Min. input value: 0 Max. input value: 1 Change valid after POWER ON Protection level (R/W): 4/1 Units: Data type: STRING Valid from SW release: 6.2 Significance Cross-channel status display: 0 = Display of previous program status in header 1 = Display in program status line in header as per configuration in file Header.ini.

5.1.15

Inverting the spindle symbol display (SW 6.2 and higher) The display of the spindle symbol can be inverted via channel-specific MD 9033 MA_DISPL_INVERT_DIR_SPIND_M3: A normal display or a display in reverse video are possible. If, for example, at M4 for the counterspindle, the same symbol is to be displayed as at M3 for the main spindle, set bit[n]=1 (see inverting M3/M4 at the control interface).

9033 MA_DISPL_INVERT_DIR_SPIND_M3 MD number Direction of spindle rotation display Default value 0x0000 Min. input value: 0x0000

Max. input value: 0x7FFFFFFF Change valid: IMMEDIATELY Protection level (R/W): 3/4 Units: Data type: LONG Valid from SW release: 6.2 Significance Direction of spindle rotation display: Bit[n]=0 M3 is displayed as clockwise rotation in the symbol Bit[n]=1 M3 is displayed as counterclockwise rotation in the symbol n = spindle number –1 (i.e. bit 0 is spindle S1) Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set accordingly MD 9033 can be managed channel-specifically in the NC.

IM4/5-82


11.02

5.1.16


Configurable display in the header (SW 6.2 and higher) In the JOG and MDA mode headers, the PLC can display two lines of text in the "Program name" field (for example, the selected slide, the activated handwheel). This can be configured via the PLC (see alarm display).

Text length The max. displayable text length is 30 characters per line.

Syntax Texts may comprise: • A language-specific component (from alarm/message text file *.COM) and • 3 parameters (%1, %2, %3).

User PLC DB The display is configured via a user PLC DB. • The user must enter the number of DBx with DBBy in the HEADER.INI file as follows: [UserTextInfo] USER_TEXT_BASE=DBx.DBBy Where x data block number, y starting byte in block. See Chapter If this interface is available, text length limitation must also be activated: Text length = 33 • The user must enter the name of the PLC alarm text file (e.g. "alpu_") in the MBDDE.INI file in the [TextFiles], "UserPLC" section: [TextFiles] UserPLC=alpu_

User PLC DB interface Two lines in the header can be used for the display: • Program path line • Program name line The interface of the user DB makes available • a start data byte (request detection by the HMI) and • subsequent bytes, which can be used to output - A number - An axis index and - A text (length 12 characters/special characters) If the text entry "00" is written to a byte, the HMI judges this to be the end of the text. Entries after this "00" will not appear.


IM4/5-83


Table 5-5

Program path target Data type Significance

Program name target Data type Significance

11.02

Interface of the user PLC DB for displays in the program path/program name line

Start DBBx

Start DBWx +1

Byte Bit0=1: There is something to be done All bytes=1: Request acknowledged by HMI All bytes=0: PLC write to interface again

Word Offset for the text from alpu_xx.com to be displayed, 700000 is the base address and is always added to internally =0: Delete line

Start DBBx +20

Start DBWx +21

Byte as above

Word as above

Start DBBx +3

Start DBBx +4

Start DBBx + 5-17 Byte Byte String String Index from Number of max. 12 –127 ...128 from A negative number characters 0 ...255 (correspon (-1=0xFF, (corresds to the ponds to the 2=0xFE) is the 3rd param. machine axis 1st para%3) index, meter %1) a positive number is the channel axis index The index is then converted to an axis name before display (corresponds to the 2nd parameter %2) Start DBBx Start DBBx Start +23 +24 DBBx +25-37 Byte Byte String as above as above as above

Start DBBx The HMI detects a request and acknowledges it (all bytes=0).

Start DBWx+1 Start DBWx+1 contains the offset for a text number with the base 700,000 (user PLC texts). If this parameter = 0, the corresponding line is deleted.

Start DBBx+3 Start DBBx+3 contains a number that is displayed without conversion.

Start DBBx+4 Start DBBx+4 contains an axis index. • Negative value = machine axis index (AXCONF_MACHAX_NAME_TAB[ Index1], MD 10000), • Positive value = channel axis index (AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[ Index-1], MD 20080). These indices always refer to the channel displayed in the HMI. The index is converted to an axis name before display.

IM4/5-84


11.02


Start DBB+5 Start DBBx+5 to + 17 contains a string of max. 12 characters. Note The start DBBx can only be assigned the value bit 0= 1 for a new request if • Al the bytes after the preceding request were reset to zero and • The parameters for the new Start DBBx+1 to StartDBBx+5 request are have been set correctly • Special characters with a special meaning within the syntax for this function (", %, $, #) must not appear in the user character string (Start DBB+5....).

Layout of the PLC program The layout of the PLC program must ensure that • All parameters are assigned values before • The first byte is set The data for the program name line (second line) is located 20 bytes after the start byte.

Acknowledgment mechanism between HMI PLC There is an acknowledgment mechanism for the start DBBx to ensure that the HMI and the PLC are coordinated: • The PLC sets bit 0 to 1 "Show user text in header". The function request can only be set by the PLC if the value of bit0 is zero. • After the display in the header, the HMI again writes zero in bit0 and the interface is available for the next action for the PLC.

Behavior for M to N With the function M to N, both text lines must be deleted for passive switching. With active switching, like area switchover, the content of the variables is evaluated and displayed. Example

Task In the JOG and MDA mode headers in the "Program name" field: • The first line contains the text "Handwheel acting on axis ..." along with the corresponding axis name. • The second line contains the text "Slide... active" along with the corresponding slide number.


IM4/5-85


11.02

Procedure 1. Define the PLC – HMI interface in the HEADER.INI file, e.g. DB60.DBB10 2. Enter the name of the PLC user text file in MBDDE.INI, e.g. [TextFiles] UserPLC=alpu_ 3. Enter texts in the PLC user text file, e.g. 700100 0 0 "Handwheel effective on axis %2" 700101 0 0 "Slide %1 active" 4. Initiate text display from the PLC and write to the interface, e.g. for the first line of the display: DB60.DBW11 = 100 DB60.DBB14 = 2 DB60.DBB10 = 1 e.g. for the second line of the display: DB60.DBW31 = 101 DB60.DBB33 = 1 DB60.DBB30 = 1

Result If the following axis configuration has been applied: MD 20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[0] = "X" MD 20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[1] = "Y" MD 20080 AXCONF_CHANAX_NAME_TAB[2] = "Z" the following text will appear: "Handwheel active on axis Y" (first line of the display) "Slide 1 active" (second line of the display)

IM4/5-86


11.02

5.1.17


Selecting channels/spindles via the PLC (SW 6.2 and higher)

Channel selection The channel selection display is initiated as follows (display in "Channel name" field): DB 19, DBB 32 = 01000001 [binary] DB 19, DBB 33 =

Channel selection Channel number FF for next channel

Spindle selection Spindle selection is initiated as follows (display in Spindle window): DB 19, DBB 32 = 01000010 [binary] DB 19, DBB 33 =

Spindle selection Spindle no. to be displayed

Error codes The following error codes, which provide information about errors during the PLC function request to the HMI, are stored in DB 19 and DBB 36: Value 0 1 2 3 10

Meaning No error No function number (DBB32 bit 0–5) Parameter invalid The HMI internal variable write operation has failed Channel not available (DBB33)

Acknowledge mechanism between PLC HMI An acknowledgment mechanism can be accessed via DB19.DBB32 bit 6, 7 to ensure that the HMI and PLC are coordinated during channel selection: • The PLC sets bit 6 to 1 "Function request". The function request can only be set by the PLC if the value of bits 6 and 7 is zero. • After the display in the header, the HMI resets the value of bit 6 to zero and the interface is available for the next action for the PLC. Note If two 2 HMI units are assigned to one NC/PLC unit (M:N), the PLC must first use the control interface to determine which of the HMI interfaces is the active one. The PLC can only request channel/spindle displays for the active HMI unit. The interface for selecting the channel/spindle displays on the second HMI unit is located in DB19, DBB82-86. It is used in exactly the same way as described for DBB32-36.


IM4/5-87


5.1.18

11.02

User-specific menu trees Up to SW 6.2, the allocation of soft keys for standard applications can be changed and the labels for the soft keys defined in RE_xx.INI (with xx language identifier) by means of entries made in REGIE.INI, [TaskConfiguration] section. Additions for user applications were restricted to the soft keys not used for standard applications. Modifications made to versions 6.2 and higher of the software can be applied to create frame applications with the following additional options: •

User-defined menu tree structure: New operator interfaces can be created, new soft keys can be assigned for existing operator interfaces and new operator interfaces

•

Integration of user-defined applications into operator interfaces (OEM applications)

•

Calling of standard applications from each operator interface including defined submenus

•

The "Frame Application" function can be used to group operator areas for HMI advanced operation under a new soft key, by means of which they can then be selected (only via the Configuration). This frees up main menu operator areas/soft keys for user-defined operator areas (OEM applications).

•

The "Frame Application" function can be used more than once in order to define an additional lower-level operator interface on the basis of a higher-level interface. This enables the menu tree to be defined according to user-specific requirements.

•

A frame application can define up to 16 horizontal and 8 vertical soft keys.

If you exit an operator area selected from within a frame application, you will return to the higher-level menu for the frame application. The following standard applications can be selected from within a frame application: • MACHINE • Parameters • Services • PROGRAM - Simulation - HMI settings • Diagnostics • Startup and • OEM application(s) A specific function in a lower-level operating area can be selected from within the frame application (e.g. Program → Simulation, all standard options are listed in the table below). A frame application can provide a dedicated main screen as a bitmap file or display a standard screen.

IM4/5-88


11.02


Configuration principle New operator interfaces can be created by frame applications attached to existing operator interfaces. The assignment of the horizontal and vertical soft key bars for the frame applications can be configured.

Configuration files Configuration settings are made in the following files: REGIE.INI TASKCONF.INI RE_xx.INI •

REGIE.INI

Calls the frame application(s), standard applications

An interpreter task mntmmc whose parameter CmdLine:= "SectionName1" indicates the section containing the TASKCONF.INI file, in which additional information about the inserted frame application is located, is specified as a task in REGIE.INI. For more detailed information see 6.6.14 and 5.6.15 for the individual initialization files. •

TASKCONF.INI Description of the soft keys and the operating areas they are used to access, background screen and if applicable text for the soft key label. Information is located in the section indicated in the CmdLine attribute (as described above).

•

RE_xx.INI

Frame application soft key label for language with identifier xx.

Examples The following example entries illustrate the procedure: REGIE.INI Frame application for user-specific menu trees. See also 6.6.14 ; Example entry Task7 = name := mntmmc, cmdline := "SectionName1", Timeout := 60000 The task number (in this case, 7) is assigned to the soft key used to call the frame application. Task0: Horizontal soft key 1 ... Task7: Horizontal soft key 8 mntmmc is the name of a task that is available by default for interpreting the frame application soft keys in TASKCONF.INI and for activating them.


IM4/5-89


11.02

The value of cmdline indicates the section in file TASKCONF.INI in which the soft key assignments for the frame application are described in detail. More than one Task= name := mntmmc, ... entries are possible if more than one section has been defined with frame application parameters in TASKCONF.INI. This also enables menu trees to be set up with more than one level.

TASKCONF.INI [SectionName1] ; A reference to the freely selectable section name must be defined in REGIE.INI. ; Example entries: ; The Services application should be activated the first time the frame ; application is started ; The StartIndex entry is used to specify the soft key index ; that activates the required task when the program starts up ; By way of example, services with StartIndex 5 StartIndex = 5 ; Frame application main screen, see below for a more detailed description Picture= Rahmen1.bmp ; The first soft key is defined as the child (Hsk1IsTask=0) with the Program task (task ; index 2) and assigned the parameter and the soft key texts are specified for ; German (via default) and English (UK)

Hsk1Task=2 Hsk1IsTask=0 ; Application-specific parameter: Jumps to the main level of the ; application program, parameter: Hsk1Command= Hsk1SkText=program ; No language setting by default ; for all non-configured languages Hsk1SkText _UK=program ; SK label in English (_UK) ; The fifth soft key is defined as the child (Hsk1IsTask=0) with the Services task (task ; index 3) and assigned an empty command parameter, the soft key texts are specified for ; default German (_GR) and English (_UK)

Hsk5Task=3 Hsk5IsTask =0 Hsk5Command= Hsk5SkText=SERVICES Hsk5SkText _GR=Services Hsk5SkText _UK=service ; Access rights for the "Services" soft key Hsk5AccessLevel= 3 ; The second soft key on the ETC bar is defined as the child (Hsk10IsTask=0) with the ; Startup task (task index 5) and assigned an empty command parameter, the soft key ; texts are specified for German (_GR) and English (_UK)

IM4/5-90


11.02


Hsk10Task=5 Hsk10IsTask=0 Hsk10Command= Hsk10SkText _GR=setup Hsk10SkText _UK=setup ; TerminateTask=

See below

; Hsk16=ExitButton

See below

Assigning soft key numbers The following assignments are valid for Hsk/StartIndex: 1–8: Horizontal soft keys 1–8 9–16 Horizontal soft keys on the ETC soft key bar 17–24 Vertical soft keys 1–8 25–32 Soft key bar for OEM applications, see 5.1.3

Soft key language settings The soft keys are labeled according to the current language setting. The soft keys are updated each time the language setting is changed. If the soft key text for the current language (HskSkText_=...) cannot be located, the default text (entry (HskSkText=...) or, if no default text is available, the task index, will appear on the soft key.

Frame application as child task The frame application can also be started from a dedicated process as a child application. The frame application then reverts to the starting application with a recall and terminates if necessary: ; The application is terminated on a return jump

HskTerminateTask=1 or

; 0 terminate

; The application is not terminated on a return jump. This is the default setting!

HskTerminateTask=0

; 0 do not terminate

Frame application main screen In the absence of a Picture= ... indication, an empty background appears. A user-defined screen stored in the oem directory as a bitmap may be specified, e.g. Picture=BackgroundFrame1.bmp The image is displayed when the frame application is selected or following a return jump from an application called via the frame application. Entering a 1 instead of a display file will lead to the display of the main "Startup" screen (default).


IM4/5-91


11.02

Note If StartIndex and an image are configured, the image is overlaid immediately when the frame application is selected and the system branches into the application configured with StartIndex. If the image is too large for the window available on the current operator panel, only the section in the center of the image that can fit in the window will appear.

Access rights The frame application soft keys can be protected with the following access rights. 0: System ... ... 7: Keyswitch setting 0 ; Example: ; Access rights for "Services" soft key Hsk5AccessLevel= 3

NCK-specific soft keys If HskNckLink=1 for the corresponding soft key entries in TASKCONF.INI, a soft key can be linked to the existence of an intact connection to NCK. The soft key can then only be activated if the connection exists. The default value is 0: No check.

EXIT button An exit button can be configured for exiting the entire HMI operator area. It is defined in TASKCONF.INI under the section for the corresponding frame application. In the following example, the exit button has been assigned to the eighth soft key on the ETC bar. Hsk16Task=ExitButton

Reduced configuration in TaskConf.INI The above configuration of TASKCONF.INI for a frame application soft key can be simplified for the following entries, if standard operator routines are running: HskTask= x/y x y

IM4/5-92

Operator area Command or state= i


11.02


Example: Hsk1Task=Program/ has the same values as for the complete configuration: Hsk1Task=2 Hsk1IsTask=0 Hsk1Command= Hsk1SkText=Program

x

y

Explanation

Machine

Parameters

Program

Service

Diagnostics

Diagnostics

State=10

Jumps to the main Machine screen (Task 0) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Machine. Jumps to the main Parameters screen (Task 1) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Parameters. Jumps to the main Program screen (Task 2) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Program. Jumps to the main Services screen (Task 3) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Services. Jumps to the main Diagnostics screen (Task 4) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Diagnostics. Jumps to the main Diagnostics screen with recall at the highest level for the return jump and for selecting the alarm screen. The soft key text is Alarms.

Diagnostics

State=20

Diagnostics

State=30

Diagnostics

State=40

Diagnostics

State=50

Startup

Startup

State=10

Note: The entire Diagnostics horizontal soft key bar is enabled. Jumps to the main Diagnostics screen with recall at the highest level for the return jump and for selecting the message screen. The soft key text is Messages. Jumps to the main Diagnostics screen with recall at the highest level for the return jump and for selecting the alarm log screen. The soft key text is Alarm log. Jumps to the Diagnostics service screen with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Service displays. Jumps to the Diagnostics PLC status screen with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is PLC status. Jumps to the main Startup screen (Task 5) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is Startup. Jumps to the machine data screen with recall on exiting the level. The soft key text is Machine data.


IM4/5-93


Startup

State=40

Startup

State=50

IBSetup

Simulation

11.02

Jumps to the Startup PLC overview screen with recall on exiting the level. The soft key text is PLC. Jumps to the Startup drive overview screen with recall on exiting the level. The soft key text is Drive/Servo. Jumps to the main Settings screen (Task 34) with recall at the highest level for the return jump. The soft key text is System settings. Jumps to Simulation (Task 27). A modal dialog appears, which must be used to select the program to be simulated. Simulation is exited on abort. The soft key text is Simulation.

Other standard application interfaces These can be used to access the following applications: • Parameters • Diagnostics • Startup The following commands should be noted to the right of the equality sign in the soft key command definition: HskCommand=Command1; Command2; ... or VskCommand=Command1; Command2; ... Semicolons are used to separate commands. Example: ; Mask out some of the soft keys on the horizontal soft key bar for a ; standard operator routine Hsk1Command=DisableHsk(1, 3–4) Commands: DisableHsk() The SoftKeyList horizontal soft keys are removed. Individual soft keys can be separated by commas or soft key ranges – can be defined, e.g. DisableHsk(1,3,5–7). Note The soft keys on the ETC bar cannot be removed. DisableVsk() The SoftKeyList vertical soft keys are removed. Individual soft keys can be separated by commas or soft key ranges – can be defined, e.g. DisableVsk(1,3,5–7). DoVsk= Activates the vertical soft keys (1–8)

IM4/5-94


11.02


Recall() When a state in the list is reached, the application reverts back to the calling application. States can be separated by commas or defined as ranges – , e.g. recall(1,5–7,48). Highlight= When the application is called, the horizontal (1 – 8) or vertical (9 – 16) soft key appears with a blue background. ZuMat= The state matrix transferred (e.g. dg\dg.zus) is read in and replaces the original state matrix.

RE_GR.INI [HSoftKeyTexts] HSK7 = "Special menu"

// 20

A description of how to create OEM applications for HMI Advanced can be found in: References:

/ HMI Programming Package / Please contact your local sales representative to obtain up-to-date electronic documentation.

5.1.19

Parts programs and workpieces in the DRAM In SW 6.2, cycles can be saved to the NC DRAM. This helped users by increasing the availability of SRAM memory for parts programs and workpieces. In SW 6.3, it is now possible: • To calculate or modify DRAM usage • To store parts programs and workpieces in the DRAM

DRAM usage The HMI-Adv user interface Installation and Startup operating area grants users the rights required to determine the usage of the DRAM and if necessary to change its size (MD 18351: MM_DRAM_FILE_MEM_SIZE). One of the effects of changing the DRAM is that it changes the SRAM and completely reorganizes the memory.

!

Important All relevant data must be saved before any changes are made to memory sizes or memories are reconfigured.


IM4/5-95


11.02

Parts programs and workpieces in the DRAM MD 11290: DRAM_FILESYSTEM_MASK can be used to specify which objects should be loaded in the DRAM: Bit0–n = 0: The files in the directory should be stored in the SRAM 1: The files in the directory should be stored in the DRAM Depending on MD 11291: DRAM_FILESYST_SAVE_MASK, a copy is stored in the FFS on the NC card. Bit0 CST directory (Siemens cycles) Bit1 CMA directory (machine manufacturer cycles) Bit2 CUS directory (user cycles) Bit3 MPF directory (main programs) Bit4 SPF directory (subroutines) Bit5 WPD directory (workpieces)

Saving in the Flash File System (FFS) MD 11291: DRAM_FILESYST_SAVE_MASK can be used to specify which objects should be saved to the FFS in the DRAM: Bit0–n = 0: No data is saved. The files on the NCK are lost when the controller shuts down 1: If the files are located in the DRAM, they are saved to the FFS on the NC card Bit0 CST directory (Siemens cycles) Bit1 CMA directory (machine manufacturer cycles) Bit2 CUS directory (user cycles) Bit3 MPF directory (main programs), not enabled for HMI SW 6.3 Bit4 SPF directory (subroutines), not enabled for HMI SW 6.3 Bit5 WPD directory (workpieces), not enabled for HMI SW 6.3 If objects are saved to the FFS, they do not need to be reloaded on startup.

!

IM4/5-96

Important It is not possible to modify objects directly with storage in DRAM and saving to the FFS. Only cycles may be saved in the FFS. Any changes required must be made prior to loading to HMI. Direct changes made to objects in the DRAM that are not saved in the FFS will be lost on power OFF.


11.02

5.1.20


Provision of displays for Classic/NEW layout variants Depending on the display of MD 9021: LAYOUT_MODE, various types of display are available on the HMI user interface for displaying menus. If you only wish to display images supplied by Siemens, no further action is necessary.

Changeover sequence Once MD 9021: LAYOUT_MODE has been modified, the following sequences take place the next time the system starts up. • The display files for the required layout are unzipped into the resolutionspecific subdirectories. • The HMI is set to the DDL files associated with the required layout. By default, the unzipping process unzips zip files in the data management (dh directory) and HMI installation directory subdirectories (hmi_adv, mmc2). If, in addition, user-specific displays are to be taken into account for layout-specific displays, these must be provided in one ZIP archive for each layout variant. Data for user-specific displays is configured in the LAYOUTSW.INI file. See 5.6.20. The LAYOUTSW.INI file with user modifications can be saved to the oem or user directories. A distinction is drawn between: - Display archives in the data management (e.g. cycle images) and - Display archives for the user or oem directories The following data must entered in the [all] section of LAYOUTSW.INI for each layout variant: • The number of DLLs (valid for both layout variants) • The number of directories containing archives to be unzipped in the data management dh (valid for both layout variants) • The number of HMI directories containing archives to be unzipped in the user/oem directories (valid for both layout variants) as well as the directories in the [Directories] section containing the archives for the dh area images and the HMI area images in user/oem. The following data is entered in the [Design_x] section (where x = 0 for New Design and x = 1 for Classic Design): • DLLs to be used • Files to be unzipped • Screen color depths to be set The number of DLLs specified must correspond to the number in [all]. Files to be unzipped: Data is entered under the entries: HMI_ZipName_i = *.zip DH_ZipName_i = *.zip

with i consecutive numbers 0, 1, 2, ... with i consecutive numbers 0, 1, 2, ...

and

The design to be activated is the design detected during startup in MD 9021: LAYOUT_MODE.


IM4/5-97


5.1.21

11.02

User modifications in the Service overview The DgOvw.ini file can be used to define any number of additional signals in the drive diagnostics. The file must be stored explicitly in the mmc2 or addon, oem, user directory. If the file is available, the signals configured in it are evaluated and displayed in Diagnostics → Service displays "Service overview". The file supports both language-specific and non-language-specific texts. Language-specific texts are stored in language-specific INI files in the mmc2\language (or addon,oem,user, etc.) directory under the name DgOvwTxt_.ini. The user directory contains a log file called dgovw.log in which messages relating to errors that occur during the translation of the dgovw.ini file are output.

Structure of the DgOvw.ini file [GLOBAL] NumOfSignals= [BMP] 100="" 101="..." . . [SIG1] text= Item= expr= . . [SIG2]. . . [SIG] . .

IM4/5-98


11.02


Meaning of the entries: NumOfSignals: Number of additional signals. The signals are located in the [SIG] section, where ranges from 1 to NumOfSignals (consecutively and without gaps). Text: Either Language-specific text in the format $T is a number in the language-specific ini file DgOvw_xx.ini (with xx language identifier) or Non-language-specific text "" "" is output in the exact format in which it appears in this ini file Item: (see the description of the OPI) The following configuration options are available for the area/line index: for the number of the channel in which the axis is active for the axis number for the drive number of the associated axis for a PLC channel DB; replaced by 20+channel number of the channel in which the axis is active for a PLC axis DB; replaced by 30+axis number e.g.: Item = /Channel/MachineAxis/impulseEnable[u, ] In this case, the current channel is used for and the current axis number for . The value obtained can be evaluated bit by bit or as a whole number.

expr: May contain an IF statement or a bitmap assignment Syntax: expr= or expr= ::= IF THEN ELSE ::= BMP = ::= or ::= ::= or ::= ::= # or ::= #. ::=Bit number to be evaluated (0..31) ::= < , > ,= ,>=, Alarm pending Not relevant No drive assigned Communication error

Do not display a bitmap Display bitmap bitmap Display Display bitmap bitmap Display Display bitmap bitmap Display

[BMP] Any number of user-specific bitmaps may be specified in this section. The first bitmap in the [BMP] section must have the number 100, the second 101, etc. The name must be enclosed by double quotation marks. If a path is not specified, the system will look for the bitmap in mmc2 or addon, oem, user, etc. If it is, it will perform the search based on the path specified.

Example: Signal Measuring system 1 active: [GLOBAL] NumOfSignals=1 [BMP] 100="test.bmp" 101="c:\tmp\test2.bmp" [SIG1] text= "Measuring system 1 active" Item= /Nck/MachineAxis/encChoice[u1, ] expr= if #=1 then BMP=100 else expr2 expr2= if #=0 then BMP=101 else BMP=2

Structure of the DgOvwTxt_xx.ini file xx in the file name is the language identifier for the language-specific file. There is only a [TEXT] section. This contains individual text items in the following format: $T= "". Values between 1000 and 32767 are permitted for . Each value may only be used once. Values below 1000 are reserved for Siemens. This file must be provided for each language required (language identifier as in mmc.ini). It is located in directory mmc2 (user, addon, oem, etc.)\language

IM4/5-100


11.02


5.2 Matching simulation data The Simulation function can be used to simulate an edit process on the screen. A copy of the data to be evaluated by the Simulation function must be available in the data management under Programming\Simulation data (\DP.DIR\SIM.DIR). Once the Simulation function has started up, the following functions are available under the Data matching soft key: • • • •

5.2.1

Match setup data Match tools Match machine data Match cycles

Simulation data

Files used When the Simulation function is initialized/starts up, HMI Advanced reads the following files (if they are available) from the data management directory \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR: UMAC.DEF User macros SMAC.DEF System macros SMAC_SC.DEF " MMAC.DEF Machine OEM macros UGUD.DEF Global user data SGUD.DEF Global system data MGUD.DEF Global machine OEM data GUD4.DEF NC user data 4 GUD5.DEF NC user data 5 GUD6.DEF NC user data 6 GUD7.DEF NC user data 7 GUD7_SC.DEF " GUD8.DEF NC user data 8 GUD9.DEF NC user data 9 CH(c)_RPA.INI R parameters (channel-specific) CH(c)_GUD.INI, NC_GUD.INI User data (channel-specific, global) CH(c)_SEA.INI, NC_SEA.INI

Setting data (channel-specific, global)

AX_SEA.INI CH(c)_UFR.INI, NC_UFR.INI CH(c)_PRO.INI NC_CEC.INI TO_INI.INI INITIAL.INI DPCUSCYC.COM

Axis setting data, Zero offsets (channel-specific, global) Protection zones (channel-specific) Sag angularity Tool data (complete) NCK initialization data Description of the user cycle interfaces


IM4/5-101


11.02

Booting If they are available, the above files are read in when the Simulation function starts up. The simulation will only interpret the machine data from the INITIAL.INI initialization data while booting. The files (CH(c)_xxx.INI, NC_xxx.INI and AX_SEA.INI) are read in time stamp sequence, starting with the oldest file. DPCUSCYC.COM: The DPCUSCYC.COM file (image of the user cycle interfaces) is only read in if, in the [PRELOAD] section of DPSIM.INI, CYCLES=0 or CYCLEINTERFACE=1 is set. The following situations can be distinguished: 1. CYCLES=0 The corresponding cycles are loaded to the simulation only when called first by the simulation interpreter. 2. CYCLES=1 All NCK and HMI Advanced cycles are loaded when the simulation starts up (cycle reloading times are omitted during simulation). 3. Cycle is available with the same name on both HMI Advanced and the NCK, the NCK cycle is loaded. If \CUS.DIR, \CMA.DIR and \CST.DIR contain a cycle with the same name, it is located and loaded first in \CUS.DIR; then in \CMA.DIR and finally in \CST.DIR. 4. CYCLES=1 and CYCLEINTERFACE=0 The cycle interface is generated directly during simulation. This means that all cycles (under \CUS.DIR, \CMA.DIR and \CST.DIR in HMI Advanced and on the NCK) must be preloaded (at the expense of the program memory of the simulation NC). Note The CMA.DIR (OEM cycles) directory is available only for SW 5.3 or 6.1 and higher.

NC cycles The NC cycles (CUS.DIR, CMA.DIR or CST.DIR) are copied as a map to the corresponding directories in the data management. The filing location is defined in file DPSIM.INI by entering CYCLE (\DP.DIR\SIM.DIR) in the [MAIN] section. An adjustment is made when the HMI is started or with every cycle adjustment. This optimizes access to the cycles and automatically creates the images for the cycle interfaces.

IM4/5-102


11.02


Display of axis names/axis values The display of axis names and axis values in the simulation can be parameterized via file DPSIM.INI and will apply for all channels. The first 3 geometry axes are displayed by default. Other available channel axes can be displayed in addition. They can be assigned in the [LINKS] section. [LINKS] ACT_POS_DISPL_1=1 ACT_POS_DISPL_2=2 ACT_POS_DISPL_3=3 ACT_POS_DISPL_4=0 ACT_POS_DISPL_5=0 Value = 0 The associated space in the display is enabled Value = 1 The associated default geometry axis is displayed Value = 1 to n The geometry axis is displayed (n= 1 up to the number of axes generated) The indices of the geometry/channel axes (1 to number of axes) are regarded as valid values while non-available axes are ignored. A maximum of 5 axis names and their values can be displayed simultaneously. Formatting The number of figures (3–15) can be entered for the formatting of the axis values. [LINKS] ACT_POS_DIGITS=10 The number of decimal places (maximum number of figures) is read from the initialization data of the simulation using MD 9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION or MD 9011 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH. Masking out axes In NC SW 5.3 and higher, you can mask out geometry/channel axes using MD 20098 DISPLAY_AXIS. Bit 0 (display in the actual value windows) is analyzed for the simulation. As a maximum, as many axes can be displayed with their values as are not masked out by assigning the value 0 to ACT_POS_DISPL_, i.e. a maximum of the first 5 geometry/channel axes not masked out in sequence. Note The more space is required for axis display, the less space is available to display the current block. If you wish, you can switch off the axis display in the Settings/Options ON/OFF menu, "Actual position" field (in the "Display options" field).


IM4/5-103


11.02

Search strategy If the simulation requires a program (without a path), it will search the following directories: 1. File in the current workpiece directory of the NCK 2. File in the current workpiece directory of HMI Advanced 3. File in the subroutine/main program directory of the NCK 4. File in the subroutine/main program directory of the HMI 5. File in the user cycle directory of the NCK 6. File in the user cycle directory of the HMI 7. File in the OEM directory of the NCK 8. File in the OEM directory of the HMI 9. File in the default cycle directory of the NCK 10. File in the default cycle directory of the HMI If a program is not available in the simulation, it will be reloaded based on the NC or the HMI. All programs (except for cycles) that are be reloaded in the simulation will be deleted from the simulation when a workpiece is changed. If the simulation requires this type of program again, it will reload it.

Program selection If a parts program of a workpiece is selected for simulation, the following actions are executed: 1. All tools are deleted using the file TO_CLEAR.INI (under HMI_ADV\DP\SIM) (if available). 2. If WPD_INI_MODE equals 1 (see item 5) and if a TOA file with the selected program name is in the workpiece, this file will be loaded to the active file system of the simulation (otherwise file TO_INI.INI, if it exists in the data management in \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR). 3. If tool management is active, file TO_ADDON.INI (in HMI_ADV\DP\SIM) will be also loaded to the simulation and executed. 4. Workpieces: An initialization file with the workpiece name is loaded to the simulation 5. Workpieces: • MD 11280 WPD_INI_MODE = 1 All files (RPA, GUD, SEA, UFR, PRO, CEC, TMA) will be loaded to the passive file system of the simulation together with the parts program names. Programspecific TOA files will be loaded directly to the active file system of the simulation. Before that, all tools are deleted and file TO_ADDON.INI (in HMI_ADV\DP\SIM) is then loaded to the simulation and executed (if tool management is active). • MD 11280 WPD_INI_MODE = 0 (as previously) A TOA file is loaded to the simulation with the workpiece name (search sequence: NC, then HMI); otherwise the TOA file of the workpiece found first (search sequence: NC, then HMI) is loaded to the simulation. Finally, the parts program is loaded to the simulation and selected.

IM4/5-104


11.02


If any further parts program from the same workpiece is selected for simulation, it will be loaded to the simulation together with the associated data (if MD 11280 WPD_INI_MODE = 1) and then selected. If a parts program is selected from any other workpiece, the previous workpiece is removed from the simulation. When a workpiece is selected for simulation, the parts program with the workpiece names will be loaded to the simulation together with its data, and the workpiece will be selected. If there is no parts program with the workpiece name, an error message will appear.

Channel change A simulation can only deal with one channel/program, meaning that a direct synchronization over several channels is not possible. You can use the "Channel/spindle" soft key to assign programs to certain channels for successive execution. The preset channel is channel 1 or the first available channel of the simulation. Before the programs are selected, the simulation will be switched over to the channel of the current program. MD 11280 WPD_INI_MODE = 1: A check is run to see if a TOA file exists with the current program name. If it does: • The tools are deleted • The TOA file is loaded to the active file system of the simulation and • (If tool management is active) file TO_ADDON.INI (in HMI_ADV\DP\SIM) is loaded to the simulation and executed. Afterwards, all files (RPA, GUD, SEA, UFR, PRO, CEC, TMA) are loaded to the passive file system of the simulation together with the parts program names. The programs in the channel/spindle list are executed one after the other in the specified sequence on each simulation "NC start". The graphic status is maintained as a default blank for the next program when the programs are changed. Masked out programs are skipped. After the last program, the graphics are deleted (following a prompt) and the first program starts again.


IM4/5-105


5.2.2

11.02

Displaying simulation data The files loaded in the simulation are displayed under the Match data/Loaded data soft key.

User programs All programs currently copied to the simulation are displayed and will be deleted from the simulation when another workpiece is selected. You can modify these programs directly in the HMI or NCK using the correction editor; the modified programs will be copied automatically to the simulation. If you modify these programs externally (e.g. via Services), the modification will be detected when the next simulation is selected and the corresponding programs will be copied to the simulation. If files (with the extension RPA, GUD, SEA, UFR, PRO, CEC, TOA, TMA) are available in the current workpiece, they will be loaded to the simulation when the workpiece is selected. These files will be maintained when the workpieces are changed and will be subject to time stamp monitoring. If you modify these programs externally (e.g. via Services/Program), the modification will be detected when the next simulation is selected and the corresponding programs will be copied to the passive file system of the simulation automatically.

User cycles All user cycles loaded to the simulation will appear. If the cycles have not been loaded previously, the cycle interfaces must be defined in file DPCUSCYC.COM. The cycles will then be copied to the simulation if required. Cycle modifications will not be detected automatically (you must press the "Adjust cycles" soft key). All user cycles loaded to the simulation will appear.

OEM cycles All OEM cycles loaded to the simulation will appear. If the cycles have not been loaded previously, the cycle interfaces must be defined in file DPCUSCYC.COM. The cycles will then be copied to the simulation if required. Cycle modifications will not be detected automatically (you must press the "Adjust cycles" soft key). All OEM cycles loaded to the simulation will appear.

Default cycles All default cycles loaded to the simulation will appear. The cycles will then be copied to the simulation if required. Cycle modifications will not be detected automatically (you must press the "Adjust cycles" soft key). All user cycles loaded to the simulation will appear.

Basic data The initialization cycles (INITIAL.INI), tool data (TO_INI.INI) and definition files (*.DEF) loaded to the simulation will appear. The (CH(c)_xxx.INI, NC_xxx.INI or AX_SEA.INI) files are displayed under "Loaded data".

IM4/5-106


11.02


Time stamp evaluation is applied to these files. If you modify these programs externally (e.g. via Services), the modification detected when the next simulation is selected and the corresponding files will be loaded to the simulation automatically.

5.2.3

Matching simulation data All data analyzed by the simulation must be available in the data management of \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR. It will be read in whenever the simulation boots. Note Manual data adjustment via the editor in the SERVICES operating area is possible, but if changes are made incorrectly, you run the risk that it will no longer be possible to start simulation. As a precaution, you should make sure that a consistent backup of your data is available at all times if data should not/cannot be obtained from the NC. The Match Data menu provides the following functions:

Match tools NC tool data for all channels is copied to file TO_INI.INI and then activated in the simulation. Existing tools are deleted first. The function is offered automatically whenever you select simulation if tool data has changed in the NC.

Match machine data • All definition files (UMAC.DEF, SMAC.DEF, MMAC.DEF, UGUD.DEF, SGUD.DEF, MGUD.DEF, GUD4.DEF – GUD9.DEF) that are active in the NC are copied to the corresponding files of the HMI. Files that are not active in the NCK are deleted from the HMI. All files (CH(c)_xxx.INI,AX_SEA.INI,NC_xxx.INI) are deleted, except for the tool data. • Machine data from the INITIAL.INI file is interpreted by the simulation. We recommend that you set MD 11210: UPLOAD_MD_CHANGES_ONLY to 0. Data is only active once the simulation has been restarted! Data is stored in the data management under \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR.


IM4/5-107


11.02

Note If you do not want to match the definition files in the data management directory with the NC, you can set this in DPSIM.INI. [MAIN] MATCH_NCU_ENVIRONMENT=0 ; The NC will copy file INITIAL.INI only MATCH_NCU_ENVIRONMENT=1 (default) ; Definition files in the data management directory are also ; matched with the NC

Match cycles Cycles are not subject to a revision of changes by the simulation. They are copied • To the simulation automatically according to requirements (PRELOAD/CYCLES=0) • Or copied to it completely when the simulation is booting (PRELOAD/CYCLES=1). If you change a cycle, you must copy it to the simulation using the "Match cycles" soft key. Only cycles that have changed since the previous access (and new cycles) are copied to the simulation. Cycles that are available in the simulation but have since been deleted are also deleted from the simulation. If an automatic cycle interface is not used, the simulation must be restarted.

Match setup data You can select from the following data to load the data from the active file system of the NC to the simulation. • • • • • • • • • •

R parameters (RPA) User data (GUD) Global user data Zero offsets (UFR) Global zero offsets Setting data (SEA) Global setting data Axis-specific setting data Protection zones (PRO) Sag/angularity (CEC)

Any combination of data may be selected. You can select the channels via soft keys (if several channels are available for simulation). The current simulation channel is available by default. Channel-specific data is available only if the selected channel is available on the NCK. Selected data is copied to the corresponding files in the data management under \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR and loaded to the simulation by pressing "OK". Available files are overwritten without a confirmation prompt.

IM4/5-108


11.02


If you select data for all channels, all associated channel-specific files will be deleted if available. Channel-specific files are always created or overwritten. Before data is loaded to the simulation, a "Channel reset" is executed for the simulation. If an error occurs when copying from the NCK, you can repeat the transfer or abort it (dialog: Abort/Repeat). If an error occurs when loading to the simulation, or in the event of a simulation alarm, the transfer is aborted. You can save the current data selection and display it again when the dialog is displayed next by pressing the "OK" soft key.

Mirror tools One and the same machine tool can use toolholders in different locations (e.g. in different NC channels), where the TOA tool length offset parameters are subject to machine-specific frame transformations (e.g. MIRROR) and are therefore present contrary to the default setting. To support this constellation when positioning the graphics tools, the turning version, among others, of the SIM graphics module DPSMASCH.DLL has an additional function by means of which an extensive universal analysis of the TOA parameter is carried out. For example, $TC_DP3[n,m]=... can also be evaluated with negative values with the convention that, by default, positive length dimensions usually initiate processing "after the turning center" and negative length dimensions initiate processing "before the turning center". Additional special NC statements may also be required in the corresponding user cycles for toolholder selection in order to ensure that the graphic tools are oriented correctly in the simulation sequence, e.g.: ... IF $P_SIM $SC_MIRROR_TOOL_LENGTH=1 ; Tool length offset Mirror mirrored axes during SIM ENDIF

... Operation (milling and turning version): as the TOA parameters are analyzed on the interface to the graphics module respecting the signs, no operation action will be required.

Rotate coordinate system You can influence the coordinate system orientation of the simulation views (until now very much incomplete in the turning version) and adjust it to vertical boring and turning mills for example. The INI entry [VIS] PLANE_VIEW=.. (in ..\user\dpmwp.ini for the milling version/dptwp.ini for the turning version) can be modified for this purpose.


IM4/5-109


11.02

In order to utilize these options for machines deviating from the default orientations, the •

Range of values of the entry is published (B/F: back/front, U/D: up/down, L/R: left/right) and The functionality for turning (incl. the derived views: external, half and full cut, peripheral surface) is extended as appropriate (the wire model remains unchanged!) Some entries (turning) can be accessed directly on the user interface:

• • [VIS] ..

;Plane viewpoint default for standard milling: BDL (BackDownLeft) ;possible BDL, BUL, BUR, BDR, FDL, FUL, FUR or FDR PLANE_VIEW=BDL or [VIS]

..

;Plane viewpoint default for standard horizontal lathes: BDR (BackDownRight) ;for vertical lathes with +Z upward: BDL or with +Z downward: FUL (*** from SW 5.3 ***) ;possible BDL, BUL, BUR, BDR, FDL, FUL, FUR or FDR PLANE_VIEW=BDR Note Entries other than BDR, BDL or FUL currently have no meaning in turning applications. Operation (turning version only): In order to support vertical turning machine orientations, an additional frame group, "Machine orientation", which currently has 3 McOption controls, has been added to the existing "Spindle setting" form. • • •

"horizontal standard"(Default: PLANE_VIEW=BDR), "vertical, infeed downwards"(PLANE_VIEW=BDL) and "vertical, infeed upwards" (PLANE_VIEW=FUL).

You can accept the adjustments as permanent reference for all new workpieces here also by pressing the "Change default" soft key.

Optimizations 1. Input monitoring "Development diameter peripheral surface" In the turning version, the consistency of the "outer diameter" and "development diameter peripheral surface" parameters is checked in relation to the blank input, matched automatically if possible (e.g. when reducing the outer diameter), and incorrect entries are highlighted (e.g. empty input field for the development diameter). 2. Temporary save ("without tool data") of tool center point path when selecting a tool data source (e.g. "with tools", etc.) subsequently

IM4/5-110


11.02


In order to graphically revise the correct selection and deselection of the tool offsets (LK, FRK, SRK), it will help to visually compare the tool center point path for deselected tool offsets and the tool path for selected tool offsets. For SW 5.3.8 and higher, the tool center point path generated in a simulation run "without tool data" will generally be kept for this purpose in the next simulation "with tool data" (tool path with and without tool offset are graphically overlaid for a SIM run). Subsequently, the active tool paths will be reset each time the simulation is restarted.

5.2.4

Memory configuration for simulation

Function In order to avoid memory settings in NC machine data for simulation requiring additional memory capacity, these settings can be made in the DPSIMNCK.INI file, [DP_SIMNCK] section. For the purposes of simulation, default values that will normally not require any additional memory settings in the NC are entered in DPSIMNCK.INI, section [DP_SIMNCK]. These offset values have an additive effect on machine data of the same name. Negative input values will not be considered.

DPSIMNCK.INI [DP_SIMNCK] Section [DP_SIMNCK] contains the following default value inputs. ... [DP_SIMNCK] DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES_OFFSET = 0 corresponding machine data: 18118 MM_NUM_GUD_MODULES DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK_OFFSET = 5 corresponding machine data: 18120 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_NCK DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN_OFFSET = 30 corresponding machine data: 18130 MM_NUM_GUD_NAMES_CHAN DP_SIMNCK_MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM_OFFSET = 20 corresponding machine data: 18150 MM_GUD_VALUES_MEM DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_USER_MACROS_OFFSET = 10 corresponding machine data: 18160 MM_NUM_USER_MACROS


IM4/5-111


11.02

DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES_OFFSET = 40 corresponding machine data: 18170 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_NAMES DP_SIMNCK_MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM_OFFSET = 350 corresponding machine data: 18180 MM_NUM_MAX_FUNC_PARAM

DP_SIMNCK_MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE_OFFSET = 400 corresponding machine data: 18242 MM_MAX_SIZE_OF_LUD_VALUE ...

5.2.5

Accelerating simulation startup

Starting simulation By default, the simulation package is not started until requested by the operator. Consequently, the system is loaded by the SW components only when the simulation function is actually used. However, this method significantly increases the time required to start the simulation function when it is first called. The "start time" is the period that elapses between simulation being selected and the first NC command being executed ("visible" result).

Loading during HMI booting To accelerate the simulation start process, the loading times can be moved to the HMI boot phase. The necessary settings are made in file REGIE.INI (OEM or USER directory). [StartupConfiguration] Startup12 = name:=dpncsim, Timeout:=0 [TaskConfiguration] Task27 = name := dpsim, Timeout := 30000 Note The entry in the [StartupConfiguration] section must not have been used elsewhere in the configuration. Check the REGIE.INI file in the MMC2, ADD_ON, OEM and USER directories.

IM4/5-112


11.02


Loading during SimNCK booting Configuration data for the NC environment (tool data, cycles) can be loaded to the SimNCK during the boot phase. Simply load the program to be executed and its subroutines to the simulation NCK. This boot procedure is controlled via the [PRELOAD] and [MAIN] sections in the DPSIM.INI file. The simulation starting time can be reduced by [PRELOAD] CYCLES=1 All cycles (from the NCK and the hard disk) are preloaded when the simulation NCK is booting (DPNCSIM.EXE). TOOLS=1 The files for the tool images (TO_INI.INI and TO_ADDON.INI) (if configured) are preloaded when the simulation NCK is booting.


IM4/5-113


11.02

5.3 Setting parameters using ini files 5.3.1

Editing ini files

Notations [xxx] Identifier=value

; Section identifier ; ; Value assignment ; Introduction to the comment. Comments usually indicate ; the range of values that may be assigned.

,

; Separator (comma) for multiple assignments

REM

; Introduction to comment

General 1. The system directory structure is organized so that any changes made by the user are maintained even after a software upgrade. A clear distinction is made between: • HMI system software and • Customer-specific extensions 2. System directories "MMC2" and HMI_Adv (and their subdirectories) must only be read. They include the delivered original software. They are only overwritten in the event of an upgrade. Any modifications by the user to the original are made in parallel directories. The content of these directories is maintained even after a software upgrade. The diagram below shows a sequence of priorities. This means: Entries in the directory further to the right will overwrite corresponding entries in directories displayed further to the left.

F:\ Priority

HMI_ADV

- Area applications - DLLs - HMI-specific data

IM4/5-114

mmc2

add_on

oem

user

Basic system


11.02


The content of the directories is as follows: • HMI_ADV: The directory includes area applications, DLLs and HMI-specific data. • mmc2: HMI basic software system directory • add_on: Directory for additional Siemens products (e.g. AUTOTURN, DIGITIZING, SINDNC, etc.) This directory may have the same directory structure (e.g. language subdirectory) and content as mmc2. Entries for the add-on product as in regie.ini and re_*.ini are also stored here. • oem: Directory for OEM users containing OEM applications with the same directory structure (e.g. language subdirectory) and content as mmc2. Entries for the OEM product as in regie.ini and re_*.ini are also stored here. • user: User directory in which differences between customer-specific data and the .ini files supplied are stored. You can also use this directory to store any changes you make to the appearance of the user interface by means of settings in the HMI user interface (e.g. language settings, file selection, file manager view, etc.). Other settings, which do not affect OEM or add-on products, are also stored in the user directory, e.g. settings for alarm servers. Changes to "zus files", such as the assignment of specific access rights for functions or the masking out of specific soft keys, must also be stored in the user directory. The parallel directories to mmc2 only ever contain ini file entries that are different from the original entries in mmc2. For example, a complete "regie.ini" is not created when an OEM application is added to "oem"; only the modified sections of the ini file are stored in "oem". For example, "regie.ini" will be structured as follows: [TaskConfiguration] Task7:=oem1appl, ..... Note None of the INI files in the "MMC2" and "HMI_Adv" directories may be modified.


IM4/5-115


11.02

Procedure for user-specific entries 1. Copy the required INI file into the "MMC2" directory. 2. Create an empty INI file of the same name as in "MMC2" in the F:\USER directory (if necessary, also create subdirectories, e.g. LANGUAGE, in USER). Note Do not copy the complete "MMC2" file! Only enter differences. 3. In the INI file in USER, write only the header of the section in which you wish to make modifications; write the new or modified entry underneath. Example: Entry in MBDDE.INI for PLC error message/process message and scrolling in alarm line MBDDE.INI in USER: ;Section header [TextFiles] User PLC = F:\DH\MB.DIR\MYPLC_ [Alarms] ;Scrolling in alarm line Rotation cycle = 1000 The same procedure also applies to the F:\ADD_ON and F:\OEM directories. \ADD_ON is reserved for Siemens products, e.g. AUTOTURN. All OEM applications should be installed in \OEM.

!

Important The associated entries e.g. in REGIE.INI should be made in these directories and not in \MMC2\!

Deactivating settings If there are concrete entries available in a directory of lower priority that are to be canceled in a higher priority directory, this is done by entering instead of a value. Example: Directory mmc2, file xxx.INI: [
] = Directory user, file xxx.INI: [
] =

IM4/5-116


11.02


Maximum data length The maximum data length of INI files in Windows systems is 60 KB. If this limit is exceeded, the entries at the end are ignored. Remedy: Omit the detailed comments in USER\PARAMT.ini, as these are also included in MMC2\PARAMT.ini.

5.3.2

Tool management For all information required for startup please see: References:

5.3.3

/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

MD for Actual Value Setting, Scratch, PRESET

Introduction The behavior of the Scratch and Actual Value Setting, PRESET functions is determined by a number of machine data items. The selected settings also have an effect on operation (display of soft keys and values, storage of entered values). References:

/BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced

With the introduction of system frames in SW version 6, two versions exist for the functions. The versions are distinguished by a channel-specific MD: MD 28082: $MC_SYSTEM_FRAME_MASK Bit: 0 Actual value setting, scratch 1 External zero offset 2 TCARR, PAROT 3 TOROT, TOFRAME Version 1 without system frame: The MD does not exist (older NCK SW versions) or bit 0 for system frame for scratch, actual value setting is not set. Version 2 with system frame: Bit 0 for system frame for scratch, actual value settings is set in the MD. Display machine data MD 9422: $MM_MA_PRESET_MODE defines the PRESET/Basic Offset function in JOG mode. 0: No soft key 1: Old PRESET in the Machine operating area (default) 2: Actual value setting


IM4/5-117


11.02

Actual value setting Actual value setting with system frame G500 active - The values are written to the system frame G500 not active - An error message is output

Actual value setting without system frame G500 active (settable frames reset) - The values are written to the first basic frame (up to SW version 4) or (SW version 5 and higher) depends on the entry in display machine data 9245: $MM_MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX = index of the basic frame in the selected basic frame G500 not active - An error message is output

Scratching After selection, the active frame is offered. You can select another frame using the input field "Work offset" (zero offset).

Scratching with system frame (software version NCK 6.4) In the case of G500 in the "Work offset" field, the values are written into the system frame. In the case of non-G500 in the "Work offset" field, the values are written into the then present frame. No other but the tool present in the spindle can be selected. If no tool is present in the spindle, the tool can be freely selected.

Scratching without system frame In the case of G500 in the "Work offset" field, the values are written into the first base frame (SW 4 and lower). With SW 5 and higher, the values are written into the selected base frame depending on the entry in the display MD 9245: $MM MA PRESET FRAMEIDX = index of base frame. In the case of non-G500 in the "Work offset" field, the values are written into the then present frame. The tool can be freely selected

IM4/5-118


11.02

5.3.4


Execution from hard disk for M : N

NETNAMES.INI The file includes descriptions of: • The configuration of the channel menu for multi-channel systems. • The configuration of the assignment of several HMI/MMC components and several NCU components (M : N configurations). • If you have assigned more than one HMI/MMC component to an NCU, you will have to indicate the component that is to provide the parts programs for "Execution from external (hard disk)". In order to execute external programs located in the data management on the HMI hard disk from the parts program with the EXTCALL program command, the following entries are examples of those that must be made in the "Connections" area of the NETNAMES.INI file: ; MMC identifier [own] owner=

MMC_3

; Description of possible connections ; Connections [conn MMC_3] conn_1= NCU_1 conn_2= NCU_2 conn_3= NCU_3 conn_4= NCU_4 EXTCALL_conns=conn_1, conn_2, conn_3, conn_4 ; conn_i Identifier for the NCUs from which the HMI can be accessed. See Note below. ; Description of significant net-parameters [param network] bus= btss ; MMC descriptions [param MMC_3] mmc_typ = 0x40 mmc_...... ; Description of NCU components [param NCU_1] type =NCU_573 nck_address= 11 plc_address= 11 name = NCU1 ...


IM4/5-119


11.02

Note The EXTCALL_Conns ... entry is only required on the main control panel in the NETNAMES.INI file and not on secondary control panels. For details see References:

5.3.5

/FB/, B3 Several Operator Panels and NCUs

Editor

AEDITOR.INI Information about the ASCII editor can be found in file aeditor.ini. Section [MEMORY] MemFactor=f

contains information about the size of the editable files. ; f indicates the number of 8 MB units permitted 1 ETC. If network drives exist, the cycle directory soft keys will be in the continuation bar --> ETC.

Configuring the drive/computer MD 9676: CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 to MD 9679 contains the entries for the names of the external drive/computer with/without directory. Up to 4 connections can be set up. Connections can be specified in MD 9676 to 9679 as a • DOS path (e.g. "E:" or ("G:\VORBEREI\MPF_DAT") or • Network address consisting of node identifier + directory (e.g. "\\R111\MPF_DAT").


IM4/5-121


11.02

Example: MD9677 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2=F:\R4711 ; Drive + name of computer MD9678 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3=\\R4712\TEIL1 ; Computer name with directory identifier MD9679 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4=\\R4713\MPF_DAT ; Computer name with directory identifier The network connection that can be entered under MD9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 is reserved for SINUMERIK ShopMill/ShopTurn.

Configuring texts for soft keys Plaintext identifiers for selecting network connections via soft keys can be stored in a user text file (see MBDDE.INI, [TextFiles] section) as language-specific user (alarm) texts under the numbers 89901–89905 in a user file declared to the signal block. In this case, text number 89901 correlates with MD 9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1, etc. Example: mbdde.ini: ... [TextFiles] USER_PLC=F:\DH\MB.DIR\MYTXT_ MYTXT_GR.COM: 89901 0 0 "" 89902 0 0 "F:\R4711" 89903 0 0 "R4712/ MMC1" 89904 0 0 "R4713/ MMC2"

Reserved Soft key text for soft key 2 Soft key text for soft key 3 Soft key text for soft key 4 (2 blanks means line break)

...

HMI display The network drives are • displayed in the MACHINE operating area on the extended soft key bar after the "Program Overview" soft key • and in the PROGRAM operating area as an extended soft key bar of the main menu. • in the operating area SERVICES under "Manage data" (if three networks are configured, three appear directly as horizontal softkeys, the forth will appear after pressing the ETC key) • in the operating area SERVICES under "Data ON" and "Data OFF" under the second vertical softkey "Networks" ... The soft keys in the relevant (extended) soft key bar are assigned according to MDs 9676 (SK1) to 9679 (SK4) (i.e. with gaps if necessary). The plaintext identifier will appear as the soft key text; if this is not configured, the value of the corresponding MD is displayed. With effect from SW release 6.2, soft keys are arranged as described above under "Operation".

IM4/5-122


11.02


Error messages An evaluation of the network configuration is carried out when the HMI boots. During the evaluation, no checks are made to ascertain if the connection actually exists. This check is only carried out when the drive is selected during operation. If the configured path cannot be accessed, an error message "No files to display" is output.

5.5 Setting the parameters for display MD The following table describes the significance of the display machine data. The data has been sorted in ascending order. Information relating to the display machine data is structured as follows: No.

Identifier

Name Significance Units Default value

QV : References

Minimum value

Maximum value:

9000

LCD_CONTRAST (only OP 010 with STN display) QV : A2 Contrast The machine data can be used to adapt the contrast of LCD operator panels to the environmental conditions: Lower value: Darker Higher value: Lighter Control via "LCD lighter", "LCD darker" soft keys 7 0 15 9001 DISPLAY_TYPE (not relevant for PCU 050) QV: A2 Operator panel type 0 OP 031 LCD display monochrome 1 OP 031 LCD display color 2 OP 032 color monitor 1 0 2 9004 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION QV : A2 Display resolution The machine data defines the number of decimal points for position displays on the operator panel. 3 0 5 9008 KEYBOARD_TYPE (not relevant for HMI Advanced) QV: A2 Keyboard type 0: OP 1: MFII/QWERTY 0 0 1 9009 KEYBOARD_STATE QV: A2 Shift behavior of keyboard during boot 0: CAPSLOCK OFF on external keyboard 2: CAPSLOCK ON on external keyboard 0 0

2


IM4/5-123


11.02

9010

SPIND_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION QV : A2 Display resolution for spindle values The machine data defines the number of decimal points for position displays for spindles on the operator panel. 3 0 5 9011 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH QV : A2 Display resolution for INCH system of units The machine data defines the number of decimal points for position displays on the operator panel. 4 0 6 9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE QV: IM1, IM3, A2 Setting action mode for action log This MD can be used to switch the action log on/off and to select data to be logged. 254 0 0xffff 9014 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA QV: FBT, FBSP, EMB, ADV Use channel-specific display MD General display MD for switching the display to the new channel-specific display MDs in HMI_ADV =6.02.01 and NCK 6.2 and higher 0 0 1 9020 TECHNOLOGY QV: A2 Basic configuration for simulation and free contour programming 0: No assignment, 1: Turn, ≠ 1: Types of machining other than turning 0 0 2 9021 LAYOUT_MODE QV: User interface design Significance: 0 = Colors and soft keys changed 1 = Previous appearance (default) 0 0 1 HMI_MONITOR QV: IM4 Define PLC data for screen information The current HMI task number is transferred in the data block indicated by the MD. String 9033 MA_DISPL_INVERT_DIR_SPIND_M3 QV: IM4 Direction of spindle rotation display Bit[n]=0 M3 is displayed as clockwise rotation in the symbol Bit[n]=1 M3 is displayed as counterclockwise rotation in the symbol Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9033 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. 0 0 0x7FFFFFFF 9032

IM4/5-124


11.02

9050


STARTUP_LOGO

QV: FBT, FBSP, ADV

Activate OEM startup screen The OEM has the option of adding a dedicated startup screen in WINDOWS BMP file format with 256 colors. This MD can be used to select the OEM startup screen instead of the default screen. 0 0 1 9052

SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE

QV: FBT, FBSP

Change cross-channel status display Toggle value for cross-channel status display: 0 = Display previous [program status in the bottom left of the header] 1 = Display in the [program status in the bottom left of the header] line acc. to configuration in Header.ini file. 0 0 1 9053 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT QV: BAD Sort algorithm for PLC symbols The following sort algorithms are available: 0: Not sorted, i.e. acc. to the sequence in the PLC symbol file 1: Sort acc. to symbolic address in ascending alphanumeric order 2: Sort acc. to symbolic address in descending alphanumeric order 3: Sort acc. to absolute address in ascending alphanumeric order 4: Sort acc. to absolute address in descending alphanumeric order 0 0 4 9054 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER Filter settings for PLC symbols The Filters function can be used to show/hide individual groups of symbols (I/Q/M/T/C/DB) (bit = 1). Bit0 : Inputs (I/E) Bit1 : Outputs (Q/A) Bit2 : Markers (M) Bit3 : Timers (T) Bit4 : Counters (C/Z) Bit5 : Data blocks (DB) 0 0 0xffff 9055 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE QV: Selection of acknowledgment symbol for PLC alarms Selects which image will be displayed as the acknowledgment symbol for PLC alarms -1: Do not display a symbol 0: Display symbol with text "PLC" 1: Display "Cancel" (BigMac) symbol 1 -1 1 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA Protection level Read tool offsets The machine data defines the protection level for reading tool offsets. 7 0 7 9200

QV: A2


IM4/5-125


11.02

9201

USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO QV : A2 Protection level Write tool geometry The machine data defines the protection level for writing tool geometry data. 7 0 7 9202 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR QV : A2 Protection level Write tool wear data The machine data defines the protection level for writing tool wear data 7 0 7 9203

USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE QV : A2 Protection level Write fine The machine data defines the protection level for fine writing to the machine data: MD 9450: MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451: MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT 7 0 7 9204 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC QV: A2 Protection level Change tool sum offsets The machine data defines the protection level for changing the tool sum offset. 7 0 7 9205 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC QV : A2 Protection level Change tool setting offsets The machine data defines the protection level for changing the tool setting offset. 7 0 7 9206 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS QV : A2 Protection level Change tool monitoring limiting values The machine data defines the protection level for changing the tool monitoring limiting values. One authorization is valid for all limiting values: quantity, service life, wear and monitoring type. 7 0 7 9207 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO QV : A2 Change assigned D no. of a tool cutting edge The machine data defines the protection level for changing assigned D numbers of a tool cutting edge. 7 0 7 9208 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP QV : A2 Change wear group magazine location/mag. The machine data defines the protection level for changing the wear group of the magazine location/magazine. 7 0 7 9209 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT QV : A2 Protection level Write tool adapter data The machine data defines the protection level for writing tool adapter geometry data. 7 0 7

IM4/5-126


11.02


9210

USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA QV : A2 Protection level Write settable zero offset The machine data defines the protection level for writing settable zero offsets 7 0 7 9211 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD QV : A2 Protection level Read user variables -

7

0

9212

USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD Protection level Write user variables

7 QV : A2

9213

7 0 7 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH QV: A2 Protection level Extended overstore The machine data defines the protection level for extended overstore. 7 0 7 9214 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT QV: A2 Protection level Program control The machine data defines the protection level for changing program control settings. 7 0 7 9215 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA QV: A2 Protection level Write setting data The machine data defines the protection level for writing setting data. 7 0 7 9218 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM QV : A2 Protection level Parts program selection The machine data defines the protection level for executing a program selection 7 0 7 9219 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN QV : A2 Protection level TEACH IN The machine data specifies the TEACH IN protection level for executing the "Write traversing movements to MDA buffer". In MMC103 SW 5.3 and HMI-Adv 6.1 and higher, it is possible to prevent the transfer of axis positions to the Teach program with display MD 9219. The selection of Teach-In via the machine control panel can only be locked from the PLC. 7 0 7 9220 USER_CLASS_PRESET QV : A2 Protection level PRESET The machine data defines the protection level for input of a new machine zero in the machine coordinate system. 7 0 7 9221 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA QV : A2 Protection level Delete R parameters The machine data defines the protection level for deleting R parameters. 7 0 7


IM4/5-127


9222

USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA Protection level Write R parameters The machine data defines the protection level for writing R parameters. 7 0 7 9231 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_1 Write protection for the first RPA area The machine data defines the write protection for the first RPA area. 7 0 7

11.02

QV : A2

QV : A2

9232

USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_1 QV : A2 Start of the first RPA area The machine data defines the start of the first RPA area. 0 0 9233 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_1 QV : A2 End of the first RPA area The machine data defines the end of the first RPA area. 0 0 9234 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_2 QV : A2 Write protection for the second RPA area The machine data defines the write protection for the second RPA area. 7 0 7 9235 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_2 QV : A2 Start of the second RPA area The machine data defines the start of the second RPA area. 0 0 9236 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_2 QV : A2 End of the second RPA area The machine data defines the end of the second RPA area. 0 0 9237 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_3 QV : A2 Write protection for the third RPA area The machine data defines the write protection for the third RPA area. 7 0 7 9238 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_3 QV : A2 Start of the third RPA area The machine data defines the start of the third RPA area. 0 0 9239 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_3 QV : A2 End of the third RPA area The machine data defines the end of the third RPA area 0 0 9240 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME QV : A2 Change tool name and duplo The machine data defines the protection level for changing the tool name and duplo. 0 0 7 9241 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_TYPE QV : A2 Change tool type The machine data defines the protection level for changing the tool type. 0 0 7

IM4/5-128


11.02

9242


MA_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE Numeric basis for displaying joint position STAT The MD defines the number system (bin, dec, hex) for displaying the "STAT" position of the joint rods of special kinematics and robots. Possible values: 2: Representation as a binary value with STAT="B00001101" 10: Representation as a decimal value with STAT=13 16: Representation as a hexadecimal value with STAT='H0D' 10 2 16 9243 MA_TU_DISPLAY_BASE Numeric basis for displaying the rotary axis position TU Availability in the Machine operating area depends on the access level.

QV : K2

QV : K2

The MD defines the numeric system (bin, dec, hex) for displaying the "TU" position of the rotary axes of robots. Possible values: 2: Representation as a binary value with TU='00001101' 10: Representation as a decimal value with TU=13 16: Representation as a hexadecimal value with TU='H0D 10 2 16 9244 MA_ORIAXES_EULER_ANGLE_NAME QV : K2 Display the orientation axes as Euler angle Availability in the Machine operating area depends on the access level. The MD defines whether the axis identifiers of the orientation axes shall be the name of the Euler angle or the name of the channel geometry axis. Possible values: 0: Name of orientation axis from the geometry axis name channel block with index 3 to 5 1: The name of the orientation axis is the name of the Euler angle taken from the general machine data 0 0 1 9245 MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX QV: K2 Storage of values for Scratch and Actual Value Setting Index of the basic frame in which the values for the Scratch and Actual Value Setting functions are entered. The index must lie within the frame defined by the channelspecific machine data: $MC_MM_NUM_BASE_FRAMES (number of basic frames required). The MD has no relevance if the scratch and actual value setting values are entered in the system frame when system frame is active. 1 1 10 9246 USER_CLASS_SYS_ZERO_OFF QV: Access level for writing system frames Access level at and above which system frames can be written 7 0 7


IM4/5-129


9247

USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA

11.02

QV : IAM, IM1

Availability of Basic Offset in the Parameters operating area MD 9247 MM_USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA can be used to specify at and above which access level the "Basic ZO" soft key will be available in the "Zero Offset" window in the Parameters operating area. At the same time, the basic frames will be faded in/masked out in the "Zero Offset" and "Active ZO + Offsets" windows. 7 0 7 9248 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA QV : IAM, IM1 Availability of Basic Offset in the Machine operating area MD 9248 MM_USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA can be used to specify at and above which access level in the Machine operating area the "Basic ZO" soft key will be available in the "Scratch" function and the G500 entry can be made in the "Zero Offset" field. The availability of the "Preset" function also depends on this MD. Without the corresponding access right, the operator cannot make any more changes to the values of the basic zero offset. 7 0 7 9421 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST QV : K1 Display channel geometry axes first If the value of the machine data is 1, the channel geometry axes will be displayed first. 1 0 1 9422 MA_PRESET_MODE QV : K1 PRESET 0 = No preset, no actual value setting 1 = Preset 2 = Actual value setting NCK without system frame: Can only be set if G500 is active in basic offset 1, otherwise error message NCK with system frame: Can always be set in the system frame. Base no longer used. 3 = Actual value setting NCK without system frame: Can only be set if G500 is active in basic offset 1, otherwise error message NCK with system frame: Can always be set in the currently active frame. On G500 in the system frame. Base no longer used. 1 0 3 9423 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL QV : IM3, K1 In the Program Section operator panel window, (sub) programs are only displayed up to the level specified in the MD. The machine data defines how many skip levels are provided for use in the operation. 1 1 8

IM4/5-130


11.02

9424

MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Coordinate system for actual value display 0: WCS 1: SZS (Settable Zero System) Coordinate system for actual value display: 0 WCS 1 SZS (Settable Zero System) 0 0 1 9440 ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA Active data (frames) active immediately after change Active data (frames) active immediately after change 1 0 1


QV : K2

QV : K2

9449

WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK QV : K2 Effect of $MM_USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE on WEAR 0: Cutting edge data, 1: SC data, 2: EC data Bit 0: Application on cutting edge data, wear values Bit 1: Application on SC data (location-specific offsets, wear values) Bit 2: Application on EC data (location-specific offsets, setup values) Default value 7: Application on all data 7 0 7 9450 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT QV : A2, (K2) Limit value for fine wear When entering tool offsets, the absolute value of the change from the previous to the new value must not exceed the size of the value set here. WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT can be used to limit the value of a change in tool wear incrementally if the current protection level is the same as or higher than that set in USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE. If the current protection level is the same as or higher than USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR, incremental limiting is no longer applied. Absolute and incremental wear limiting can be combined, i.e. wear can be changed incrementally up to the absolute limit. See MD 9639. Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9450 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. Length 0 *** *** 9451 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT QV : A2, (K2) Limit value for fine offset When entering zero offsets, the absolute value of the change from the previous to the new value must not exceed the size of the value set here. Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9451 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. Length 0 *** ***


IM4/5-131


11.02

9460

PROGRAM_SETTINGS QV: A2 Settings in the PROGRAM area Data backup for settings in the PROGRAM area. The settings are maintained even if a RESET is applied. (Bit 0, bit 1 used internally) Bit 2: 1 Autom. enable for program 0 No automatic enable for programs, default for SW 5.1 Bit 3: 1 SK label contour calculator with icons 0 SK label contour calculator as text, default for SW 5.1 Bit 4: 1 The LF character is masked out in the editor (SW 6.1 and higher) 0 The LF character is displayed in the editor (SW 6.1 and higher) 0 0 FFFF 9510 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P QV : A2 Protection level for network drive1 Prog. The MD defines the protection level for network drive1 for the Program area. 7 0 7 9511 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P QV: A2 Protection level for network drive2 Prog. The MD defines the protection level for network drive 2 for the Program area. 7 0 7 9512

USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P QV: A2 Protection level for network drive3 Prog. The MD defines the protection level for network drive 3 for the Program area. 7 0 7 9513 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P QV: A2 Protection level for network drive 4 Prog.4 The MD defines the protection level for network drive 4 for the Program area. 7 0 7 9516 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M QV: A2 Protection level for network drive1 Mach.

The MD defines the protection level for network drive1 for the Machine area. 7 0 7 9517 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M QV: A2 Protection level for network drive2 Mach. The MD defines the protection level for network drive 2 for the Machine area. 7 0 7 9518 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M QV: A2 Protection level for network drive3 Mach. The MD defines the protection level for network drive 3 for the Machine area. 7 0 7 9519 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M QV: A2 Protection level for network drive4 Mach. The MD defines the protection level for network drive 4 for the Machine area. 7 0 7

IM4/5-132


11.02

9610


CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM Coordinate system position for turning technology (MD 9020 = 1) Coordinate system position for turning (MD 9020 = 1)

QV : K1

In the ManualTurn user interface the following will change automatically as per the selected position: - Help screens - Execution graphics - Input fields with circle direction values Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9610 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. 2 0 7 9639 CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR QV: K1 Upper limit for tool wear input CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR can be used to limit the maximum possible tool wear value absolutely, regardless of the current protection level (keyswitch setting), i.e. even regardless of USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR. Absolute and incremental wear limiting can be combined, i.e. wear can be changed incrementally up to the absolute limit. See MD 9450. Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9639 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. Length 1.0 10.0. 9650

CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM QV : Position of the coordinate system for technology other than turning (MD 9020 1) In the ShopMill user interface, the following change automatically in accordance with the selected position: - Help screens - Execution graphics - Simulation - Input fields with circle direction values Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9650 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. 0 0 47 9651 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT QV: FBSP, FBT Tool management concept Select one of two tool management variants (see Tool management chapter): 2: Tool management without load/unload 4: Tool management with load/unload 4 1 4 9652 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL QV: FBSP, FBT Tool monitoring This MD is used to enable tool monitoring. Tool monitoring monitors tool life and tool changes: 0 = Tool monitoring is not displayed 1 = Tool monitoring is displayed 1 0 1


IM4/5-133


9661

11.02

CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES

QV: FBSP

Input of customer-specific M functions This MD is used to enable the number of input fields for customer-specific M functions: 0= No display fields for customer-specific M functions 1= 1 field for one customer-specific M function is displayed 2= 2 fields for two customer-specific M functions are displayed 3= 3 fields for two customer-specific M functions are displayed 4= 4 fields for two customer-specific M functions are displayed 4 0 4 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM QV: FBSP, 9663 FBT

Radius/diameter display for tool This MD is used to specify how the tool should be displayed/entered: 0 = Radius 1 = Diameter 1 0 1 9672

CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE

QV : FBSP, FBT

Fixed tool location coding This machine data is used to define the status of the tools: 0 = Tools with variable tool location coding in magazine 1 = Tools with fixed tool location coding in magazine Note for ST: On a turret, tools are always assigned a fixed location, i.e. the MD must be set to "1". Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9672 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. 9673

QV: FBSP, FBT

CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION

Load station number This machine data can be used to define the load station via which the magazine is loaded and unloaded. 1 = Load station 1 2 = Load station 2 Remark: If MD 9014: USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA is set appropriately, MD 9673 can be managed on a channel-specific basis in the NC. 1 1 2 9674 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE QV: FBSP, FBT - Display magazine list 0 = Magazine list is not displayed 1 = Magazine list is displayed 1

IM4/5-134

0

1


11.02

9675


CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE

QV: FBSP, FBT

Customer startup screen The customer startup screen is activated if: 0 = Siemens customer startup screen 1 = Customer customer startup screen 0 0 1 9676 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 QV : FBSP Path for the drive names in the directory management This machine data can be used to define the path for the drive names for the second soft key (horizontal soft key bar) in the directory management with hard disk network connection. If you enter an empty string in the display machine data, the soft key will not be available. C:\NC_Files 9677 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 QV : FBSP Path for the drive names in the directory management This machine data can be used to define the path for the drive names for the third soft key (horizontal soft key bar) in the directory management with hard disk network connection. If you enter an empty string in the display machine data, the soft key will not be available. 9678 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 QV : FBSP Path for the drive names in the directory management This machine data can be used to define the path for the drive names for the fourth soft key (horizontal soft key bar) in the directory management with hard disk network connection. If you enter an empty string in the display machine data, the soft key will not be available. 9679 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 QV : FBSP Path for the drive names in the directory management This machine data can be used to define the path for the drive names for the fifth soft key (horizontal soft key bar) in the directory management with hard disk network connection. If you enter an empty string in the display machine data, the soft key will not be available. 9900 MD_TEXT_SWITCH QV : Plaintexts instead of MD identifiers If the machine data is set to 1, plaintexts appear on the operator panel instead of machine data identifiers. Bit field 0 0 1 9999 TRACE QV : Test flags for internal diagnostics Not for the user HEX 0 0 FFFF


IM4/5-135


5.5.1

11.02

Backing up display machine data On the HMI, the display machine data (MD 9000, ...) must be backed up via file functions (installation and startup). You can find these MD in the RAM. The data is located in the Diagnostics\MachDat/OperatorPanel directory. The directory displays the file name entered during backup. A current map of the display machine data is stored in file MMC.INI, OPI settings section.

SW 6.2 and higher When channel-specific display machine data is used, this is located in the NC. It is a component of NC series machine startup.

5.6 Ini files Only INI file parts that can be modified are listed in this chapter. All other parts must not be changed.

5.6.1

MMC.INI [GLOBAL] MMCScreenOffTimeInMinutes = 5 ; latency for screen saver ; 1 makes servers such as NCDDE, MBDDE, ; DH servers visible, i.e. they can be activated ; with ALT + TAB, in order if necessary to ; parameterize them for a trace (should service ; be required). ServerVisible=1 connectiontype=0 =1

; Standard SINUMERIK connection ; 810D/840D Connection to 840Di

[CONTROL] ; Resolution: 0=fixed (640x480), 1=variable, default:0 Resolution=0 ; BaseScreen specifies the resolution for which the ; applications were originally developed (typically: 640x480) ; BaseScreen – default: 640x480 BaseScreen=640x480 ; If a mouse is connected to the controller, the mouse pointer ; appears by default in the top right-hand corner of the screen. ; This can be deactivated using the following entry.

IM4/5-136


11.02


MoveCursor=0 [WP_SELECT] ; for displaying a message that TOA/TMA data on NCK will ; be overwritten ; TOA_WARNING_MESSAGE=yes/no TOA_WARNING_MESSAGE=yes [HEADER] ; BAGOn=0 BAGOn=1

5.6.2

Mode display in header OFF ; Mode display in header (default) ; No entry corresponds to default

NETNAMES.INI The file is used for defaults for M:N assignments for control units and NCUs. See References:

/FB/, B3, Several Operator Panels on Several NCUs, Distributed Systems and the definition of channel groups, if there is a 1:1 assignment between the control unit and the NCU.

Channel menu The channel menu configuration can be accessed with the extension to the "NETNAMES.INI" file.

Procedure These are the procedures: 1. Define the groups (max. 24) in "logChanSetList" 2. Assign unique names to the NCs and channels for the groups in "logChanList". 3. For the channels, define NC names in "logNCName", - Channel no. on the NC in "ChanNum" and - Avoid soft key yes/no (using the IsAGap" = True/False instruction). 4. For the HMI, define the default machine "DEFAULT_logChanGrp" and the default channel in "DEFAULT_logChan" for startup


IM4/5-137


11.02

Note The NC writes the HMI channel no. in DB19, DBB22. The example below is simplified with 1:1 assignment of HMI : NCU to the effect that: conn_2 does not apply and all channels are on NCU_1 Example:

NETNAMES.INI [own] owner = MMC_1 ; Description of possible connections [conn MMC_1] conn_1 = NCU_1 conn_2 = NCU_2 ; Description of significant net-parameters [param network] bus = btss ; On SINUMERIK 810D, the MPI should be used [param MMC_1] mmc_address = 1 [param NCU_1] nck_address = 12 plc_address = 12 ; Kernel name for the PLC symbol files for displaying signals with symbols SymbolFile= ... [param NCU_2] nck_address = 14 plc_address = 14 ; Kernel name for the PLC symbol files for displaying signals with symbols SymbolFile= ... [chan MMC_1] DEFAULT_logChanGrp = Mill1 DEFAULT_logChan = Channel13 ShowChanMenu = TRUE logChanSetList = Mill1, Mill2 [Mill1] logChanList = Channel11, Channel12, Channel13, Channel14, Channel15 [Channel11] ; Logic channel logNCName = NCU_1 ; Logic NCU identifier see above ChanNum = 1 ; Channel number within the NCU [Channel12] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 2 [Channel13] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 3 [Channel14] logNCName = NCU_1

IM4/5-138


11.02


ChanNum = 4 [Channel15] logNCName = NCU_1 ChanNum = 5 [Milling2] logChanList = Channel21, Channel22, Channel23, Channel24, Channel25 [Channel21] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 1 [Channel22] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 2 [Channel23] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 3 [Channel24] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 4 [Channel25] logNCName = NCU_2 ChanNum = 5

5.6.3

MBDDE.INI

Hard disk protection Writing to alarm files will load the same hard disk regions again and again. The following control options can be used to select from various procedures. For a detailed description, see 5.1.1 Alarm log. The multi-file strategy can also be selected using the DiskCare Ini file entry. File: section: entry:

"mbdde.ini", [PROTOCOL], "DiskCare". See below.

[Alarms] ; determines the maximum size of the alarm list MaxNo=200 ; determines the order in which the alarms are inserted in the alarm list ; possible values: ; FIRST: makes newer alarms stand on top of the list ; LAST: inserts the newest alarm at the bottom ORDER=LAST ; the alarm/message line is able to scroll the occurred alarms ; possible values: ; 0 or negative value: no scrolling ; 500–32767: interval in ms


IM4/5-139


11.02

RotationCycle=0 ; determines if the alarm server should connect to ALARM_S/SQ ; or not ; possible values: ; 0 Alarm_S/SQ not handled ; 1 Alarm_S/SQ handled (default) Alarm_S=1 ; if Alarm_S/SQ handling is enabled this key determines if Quits ; should be entered into the alarm log ; possible values: ; 0 Alarm_SQ quits are not entered into the alarm log ; (backwards-compatible) ; 1 Alarm_SQ quits are entered into the alarm log (default) Protocol_Alarm_SQ=1 ; path and file names of the alarm text lists ; The filename fragments must not exceed 6 chars, because it is ; extended automatically by the message module according to the ; selected language. ; The alarm texts in the files specified under UserMMC, UserNCK ... ; overload the corresponding texts of the files defined in MMC, NCK ... ; Therefore the user should modify files according to the needs of his ; system exclusively in UserMMC, UserNCK ... ; Creating alarm text with any DOS editor may cause problems with special ; characters like ä, ö or ü. To nevertheless import DOS generated files, ; add a blank and the string "DOS" after the name of the text file ; Example: UserPLC=F:\dh\mb.dir\myplc_ DOS ; If you add or remove the parameter DOS, you have to touch (new date ; of file) the corresponding file (*.com) otherwise the change is not ; accepted. [TextFiles] MMC=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alm_ NCK=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\aln_ PLC=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alp_ ZYK=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alz_ CZYK=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alc_ STANDARD_CYCLES=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alsc_ SHOPMILL_MANUALTURN_CYCLES= MEASURE_CYCLES=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\almc_ PLC_PMC= USER_CYCLES= UserMMC= UserNCK= UserPLC= UserZYK= UserCZYK= UserSTANDARD_CYCLES= UserSHOPMILL_MANUALTURN_CYCLES= UserMEASURE_CYCLES= UserUSER_CYCLES= UserPLC_PMC=

IM4/5-140


11.02


[net TextFiles] ;NCU_RECHTS=F:\dh\mb.dir\rechts (Name of NCU=Path of texts) ;NCU_MITTE=F:\dh\mb.dir\mitte ;NCU_LINKS=F:\dh\mb.dir\links ; Maximum 8 entries [IndexTextFiles] ALNX=F:\MMC_52\dh\mb.dir\alnz_ ; default definition of the priorities of the different alarm types [DEFAULTPRIO] CANCEL=100 RESET=100 POWERON=100 NCSTART=100 PLC=100 PLCMSG=100 MMC=100 ; This section defines different characteristics of the protocol that ; specifies how particular error messages are to be registered. [PROTOCOL] ; Criteria for selecting the alarm messages to be recorded. The notation ; is described in SINUMERIK 840D OEM package MMC User's Manual. Filter=expression ; Details for generating filter expressions for controlling the ; incidences of messages can be found in: 5.1.1 Alarm log ; Characterizes the numbers of entries in the log file. If the actual ; number exceeds this value, the server starts to override old entries ; (principle: ring buffer) Records=150 ; Mode of alarm log writing ; if a number less than 0 is specified, ; the log file is not automatically updated ; if 0 is specified the log file is immediately updated ; if a number above 0 is specified, ; the log file is updated after the specified ; number of seconds elapsed with no intermediate ; alarm state changes. ; the log file is always updated when you send the ; DDE-Command: ; "AlarmProt" to the MBDDE server ; (principle: ring buffer)


IM4/5-141


DiskCare=-1

11.02

# attention: the mode changed from V4 to V5!

; This section specifies the names and paths of the help files that ; contain help texts in WinHelp format. ; This list include a maximum of 10 entries. ; The file name fragments must not exceed 6 chars, because it is extended ; automatically by the message module according to the selected language. ; For additional information see SINUMERIK 840D OEM package ; MMC User's Manual. [Helpcontext] File0=hlp\alarm_ ; Configuration of the colors of the alarm/message line [COLOR] ForeColor_Alarm=000000FF BackColor_FirstAlarm=00FFFFFF ForeColor_FirstAlarm=000000FF BackColor_Message=00FFFFFF ForeColor_Message=00000000 BackColor_ApplMessage=00FFFFFF ForeColor_ApplMessage=0000FF00 BackColor_Alarm=00FFFFFF

5.6.4

AEDITOR.INI [MEMORY] ; default factor for maximum size of file ; valid values are: from 1 to 31 ; factor x (1= EXTERN_SIZE ; only if EXTERN_MODAL0 EXTERN_SIZE=150000 ; only if EXTERN_MODAL0 EXTERN_CHECK=1 ; 0: reset tool data, if new workpiece is selected ; =0: use current tool data, if new workpiece is selected SIM_LOAD_TOOLS=1 [PRELOAD] ;=1: TO_INI.INI and TO_ADDON.INI are preloaded by DPNCSIM.EXE ;=0: TO_INI.INI and TO_ADDON.INI are loaded by simulation TOOLS=0 ;= 1: all cycles are preloaded by DPNCSIM.EXE ; if section MAIN, entry CYCLE is set, additionally all cycles from shadow directory are preloaded by DPNCSIM.EXE ;= 0: cycles are loaded by simulation, if cycle is called CYCLES=1 ;=2: load for simulation to \CUS.DIR, \CMA.DIR or \CST.DIR (default) ; load only cycles from NCK ; only evaluated if [MAIN]CYCLE is set and [PRELOAD]CYCLES=1 ;=0: load all cycle (from NCK and MMC) for simulation to ; \CUS.DIR, \CMA.DIR or \CST.DIR ; only evaluated if [MAIN]CYCLE is set and PRELOAD]CYCLES=1 ;=1: use the cycle interface under \DP.DIR\SIM.DIR CYCLEINTERFACE=2

5.6.10

MASCHINE.INI In the [AccessLevel] section, use the "machine.ini" file to set access rights for functions. Extensive comments accompany this file. [ACCESSLEVEL] ; ; 7 = Key position 0 everyone in front of the machine, Permission only for NC start, no selection of parts program ; 6 = Key position 1 operator of the machine, the man at the shop-floor of production ; Suggestion: Permission to select Part-Program, no editing ; 5 = Key position 2 machine setter (more experienced), the one to setup tools ; and test and run in new Part-Programs ; Suggestion: Permission to modify (edit) Part-Programs ; 4 = Key position 3 not yet used, same permissions as 5

IM4/5-146


11.02


; 1 = only manufacturer of machine, system specialist ; ; 0 = only manufacturer of Numeric Control (Siemens experts) ; at the state of delivery all users got (nearly) all permissions for work JOG_PRESET=7 ; Preset or Set actual value in JOG mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter JOG_HAND=7 ; Handwheel in JOG mode ==>6 Suggestion operator JOG_ANKRATZ=7 ; Scratch ==>6 Suggestion operator JOG_INCREM=7 ; Set increment in JOG mode ==>6 Suggestion operator JOG_SYNAKT=7 ; Synchronized actions in JOG mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter JOG_V_ISTW=7 ; Watch windows of actual values, ==>7 Suggestion everyone ; Spindles, M Functions, Aux. Functions, ; Feedrate, Tools or Axis feedrate in JOG mode JOG_V_ZOOM=7 ; Zoom actual values in JOG mode ==>7 Suggestion everyone JOG_INCHMET=7 ; Switch inch/metric in JOG mode ==>6 Suggestion operator REF_SISITEC=4

; Commit safety integrated Ref.Point ==>4 Key 3 in order to remain compatible

MDI_PROGBE=7 ; Program control in MDI mode ==>6 Suggestion operator MDI_HAND=7 ; Handwheel in MDI mode ==>6 Suggestion operator MDI_EDITOR=7 ; Edit program in MDI mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter MDI_ED_DAT=7 ; Editor functions in MDI mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter MDI_ED_CLR=7 ; Clear buffer in MDI mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter MDI_V_ISTW=7 ; Watch windows of actual values, ==>7 Suggestion everyone


IM4/5-147


11.02

; Spindles, M Functions, Aux. Functions, ; Feedrate, Tools or Axis feedrate in MDI mode MDI_V_ZOOM=7 ; Zoom actual values in MDI mode ==>7 Suggestion everyone MDI_SYNAKT=7 ; Synchronized actions in MDI mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter MDI_DATEI=4 ; File functions in MDI mode MDI_INCHMET=7 ; Switch inch/metric in MDI mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_OVERST=7

; Overstore in AUTO mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter AUTO_DRF=7 ; DRF in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_PROGBE=7 ; Program control in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_SASUCH=7 ; Block search in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_HAND=7 ; Handwheel in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_KORREK=7 ; Correct program in AUTO mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter AUTO_V_ISTW=7 ; Watch windows of actual values, ==>7 Suggestion everyone ; Spindles, M Functions, Aux. Functions, ; Feedrate, Tools or Axis feedrate in AUTO mode AUTO_V_ZOOM=7 ; Zoom actual values in AUTO mode ==>7 Suggestion everyone AUTO_V_NCPR=7 ; Program overview in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_OP_NCPR=7 ; Load + select program in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator AUTO_ED_NCPR=7 ; Alter enable status of Prog in AUTO mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter AUTO_SYNAKT=7 ; Synchronized actions in AUTO mode ==>5 Suggestion machine setter AUTO_INCHMET=7 ; Switch inch/metric in AUTO mode ==>6 Suggestion operator

IM4/5-148


11.02


[Customer] MDASingleSTEP=yes ONLY_MKS_ToolBaseDistToGo=no NcVersionCheck=true ; Due to performance issues the functionality offered with respect to ; block correction, block view and block search depends on the ; NC version currently used. ; However, to get access to the whole functionality, regardless of the ; NC version in use, ; set the flag NcVersionCheck to False. [BlockSearch] ; Shows (SeruproEnabled=1) or ; hides (SeruproEnabled=0) ; the soft key used to do a block search in mode "program testing". ; The soft key appears in both dialogs ; "Block search Searchposition" and "Block search Searchpointer" SeruproEnabled=1 ; When doing a block search in mode "program testing" you can do ; a multi-channel block search. There are 4 channel-configurations which ; define the NC-channels being affected by the block search: ; SeruproConfig = ; 1: selected/active channel ; 2: selected/active channel and all channels having selected the same ; workpiece as the active channel ; 3: selected/active channel and all channels belonging to the active ; channel's mode group ; 4: all NC-channels SeruproConfig=1 [SetZero] ; Display_Sign_Switch switch the sign of the tool length in the scratch picture ; Display_Sign_Switch=0 ; Display_Sign_Switch=1 Display_Sign_Switch=1

mean - tool length mean + tool length


IM4/5-149


5.6.11

11.02

PARAM.INI [ACCESSLEVEL] READ_SYSVAR=7 EDIT_VIEW=7 ;Tool offset user data ;Tool-specific parameters [ToolParams] UserDataParamName1=T_Param_1 UserDataParamName2=T_Param_2 UserDataParamName3=T_Param_3 UserDataParamName4=T_Param_4 UserDataParamName5=T_Param_5 UserDataParamName6=T_Param_6 UserDataParamName7=T_Param_7 UserDataParamName8=T_Param_8 UserDataParamName9=T_Param_9 UserDataParamName10=T_Param_10 ;Cut-specific parameters [ToolEdgeParams] UserDataParamName1=D_Param_1 UserDataParamName2=D_Param_2 UserDataParamName3=D_Param_3 UserDataParamName4=D_Param_4 UserDataParamName5=D_Param_5 UserDataParamName6=D_Param_6 UserDataParamName7=D_Param_7 UserDataParamName8=D_Param_8 UserDataParamName9=D_Param_9 UserDataParamName10=D_Param_10

5.6.12

PARAMTM.INI References:

/FBW/, Description of Functions Tool Management

In HMI Advanced SW 6.3 and higher, it will be possible to specify default values for grinding-specific tool data when setting up the tools. Make the entries in the [DEFAULT_SETTINGS] as follows: [DEFAULT_SETTINGS] ; Default selection of grinding-specific tool data during setup: ; Spindle number (as $TC_TPG1) TOOLGRINDspinNoDress=1 ; Chain rule (as $TC_TPG2) TOOLGRINDconnectPar=1050629

IM4/5-150


11.02


; 0000 0000 0001 0000 0000 1000 0000 0101, ; Bit 0 (Typ), 2 (Geo-L1), 11 (Wear-L1), 20 (Base-L1) ; Minimum grinding wheel radius (as $TC_TPG3) TOOLGRINDminToolRadius=0 ; Minimum grinding wheel width (as $TC_TPG4) TOOLGRINDminToolWide=0 ; Actual width of grinding wheel (as $TC_TPG5) TOOLGRINDactToolWide=0 ; Maximum speed of rotation of grinding wheel (as $TC_TPG6) TOOLGRINDmaxRotSpeed=0 ; Maximum peripheral speed of grinding wheel (as $TC_TPG7) TOOLGRINDmaxTipSpeed=0 ; Angle of inclination of oblique grinding wheel (as $TC_TPG8) TOOLGRINDinclAngle=0 ; Compensation parameter for GWPS (as $TC_TPG9) TOOLGRINDparamNrCCV=3

Access rights during operation User authorizations for the soft keys involved can be set in paramtm.ini ([ACCESSLEVEL] section, "SKNCTOOLGRIND" entries).

Setting parameters for direct magazine selection If there are a large number of magazines, the option of selecting them with "Magazine +" or "Magazine -" (up to SW 6.2) will not be supported on the user interface. In SW version 6.3 and higher, the entries in paramtm.ini and patm_xx.ini (for language-specific soft key labels, with xx language identifier) can be used to configure direct selection. Up to 5 soft keys can be configured for direct magazine selection via TOA. Settings in paramtm.ini: [GeneralSettingsForMagAndToolList] ; Activation of direct selection MagListMagSelectSoftkey=SelectMag ; MagListMagSelectSoftkey=NextMag (default) The entries in the [ShortcutSoftkeysForMagSelect] section will only take effect if SelectMag is entered. [ShortcutSoftkeysForMagSelect] ; Direct selection soft keys can be configured for different magazines ; if these magazines are located in different TOAs. ; Parameter settings for magazines that can be selected directly


IM4/5-151


11.02

; Syntax: ; magIdent=ShortkeyNumber, AutoReturn ; where: ; magIdent: Magazine identifier acc. to $TC_MAP2 ; or magazine configuration for "Maintenance ; tool management" application ; ShortkeyNumber: Direct selection number, values 1 – 5 ; AutoReturn: ; NoAuto "Back to Previous Menu" Return to the previous menu

7.4.3

Restoring the PCU hard disk from PG/PC, CD

LPT1:

LPT:

PCU

PG/PC

CD

Fig. 7-5 Restore hard disk content

Requirements • Ghost program version 6.x installed on the PCU and the PG/PC. • Directory in which the restore image file is stored is available on the PG/PC. • One of the MS-DOS 6.X, Windows 3.x, Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems is installed on the PG/PC. • PCU and PG/PC are linked via the parallel cable (6FX2002-1AA02-1AD0) or a LapLink cable. • The parallel interface must be set to EPP or ECP in the BIOS of the PCU and PG/PC.

Procedure 1. Switch on the PG/PC, insert CD in drive. While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 2. Select the "Service menu" [concealed menu item] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9]?

3. Press 7.


IM4/7-205

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 7 Installation Variants / Data Backup

11.02

The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd:

4. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With Ghost 4 Partition Backup/Restore With Ghost 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 9]? 5. Press 1. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Hard Disk Backup to , Mode ... 3 Hard Disk Restore from , Mode ... 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 9]?

Note The path data are default settings and dependent on the drive. You may modify these paths. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

"Possible" start The following is only necessary if the default setting is not suitable.

Configuring the Ghost parameters 6. Set the parameters for the Norton Ghost program. "Configure GHOST Parameters":

IM4/7-206


11.02


The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Set Connection Mode PARALLEL (LPT:) 2 Set Connection Mode LOCAL/NETWORK 3 Change Backup Image File Name 4 Change Restore Image File Name 5 Change Machine Name (for Windows and DOS-Net) 6 Manage Network Drives 7 Change Split Mode 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9]? You can use this menu to set the interface type and the path of the restore image.

Configuring the interface 6.1 Changing the interface: Set Connection Mode PARALLEL (LPT:) Select and confirm (default setting). Attention: The PARALLEL interface type must always be selected for the parallel link described in this Guide.

Configuring the restore image 6.2 Changing the restore image path: Change Restore Image File Name (select the complete path name for the restore file "HMI.GHO" on the PG/PC, e.g. D:\SINUBACK\PCU\HMI.GHO), enter and confirm the path.

Exit menu 6.3 Back to previous menu Back to Previous Menu Answer the prompt: "Save GHOST parameters?" with Yes.

"Possible" end The following steps are usually necessary. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


IM4/7-207


11.02

Restoring the hard disk 7. Copy content of hard disk Hard disk Restore from , PARALLEL Mode If you select option 3, the following menu will appear:

For partitioning the disk it's important to know the SYSTEM BASE of the imaged configuration. Please select the SYSTEM BASE the image was created by! PLEASE SELECT: [Basic SW NT Vers. 7.3.2] 1 Windows NT 2 Win95 3 WfW3.11 4 DOS (spare)

[Basic SW XP Vers. > 7.3.2] 1 Windows XP 2 Windows NT 3 Win95 4 WfW3.11 5 DOS (spare)

9 Back to Previous Menu


Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 9]?

Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9]?

Select the appropriate operating system for the image to be restored. This choice will determine which method of hard disk partitioning is used. Another menu appears once you have selected the appropriate operating system: What kind of disk partitioning do you want? 1 Standard Partitioning (default setting) 2 User-Defined Partitioning 3 Image-Defined Partitioning Your Choice [1, 2, 3]? Specify whether standard partitioning should be applied to the hard disk, i.e. (depending on the operating system) with a fixed number of partitions of fixed size or if user-defined partitioning should be applied. While the Norton Ghost SW is automatically set to the appropriate partition parameters with the first option, you will need to enter the partition parameters in the Norton Ghost SW yourself with the second. The partition is based on the GHOST image in the third option. * When you select this menu, a message window appears: You will be asked to check whether a link has been made between the PCU and PG/PC. The path on the PG/PC where the restore image is to be loaded is displayed.

IM4/7-208


11.02


You will be asked to check whether the file with the Restore image is actually stored on the PG/PC. * PG/PC: Open a DOS window or go into DOS to enter command ghost -Ips to start the Norton Ghost program. * PCU: Start the restore by entering "Y" in the message window. * PCU: The message window for the Norton Ghost SW appears: Display of current transmission status Display of paths used Details of data quantities to be transferred * Cancel transmission, if necessary PG/PC: Press "Control" + "C". The PCU boots up.

!

Attention A boot floppy disk is required to boot the PCU.

Booting 8. A boot must be carried out following a restore.

7.4.4

Hard disk/PCU replacement spare

HMI A description of how to reload a complete backup of an HMI hard disk in order to ensure that in the event of maintenance being required, both user data and system data will remain consistent, appears below.

Norton Ghost ®

The Norton Ghost software can be used to save the entire content of a PCU hard disk as a disk image file. You can retain this disk image file on different data carriers for subsequent hard disk restoration. ® The Norton Ghost program is supplied on every PCU module and the spare hard disk. You can find further information on the Internet at "www.ghost.com" or in the previous chapter. Note Recommendation: Archive the hard disk image - including the "Norton Ghost" program - to CD.


IM4/7-209


11.02

Loading the data backup Requirements: • Ghost program installed on the PG. • New spare hard disk available. • Connect the HMI to the PC/PG via parallel cable. • One of the Windows 3.x, Windows 95 operating systems and a CD drive is installed on the PG. 1. Insert the new spare hard disk into the PCU or the new HMI (see the instructions supplied with the hard disk) – Latch the hard disk tight in the hinges – Plug in the interconnection cable for the hard disk PCU – Fix the hard disk in place using the 4 knurled screws – Detach the transport lock: turn to "operating" until it locks in. References: /BH/ Operator Components Manual ÉÉÉ

Note The spare hard disk does not include a Windows NT operating system or HMI system software. 2. Switch on the PG, insert CD in drive. 3. Switch the control off and on and select the Service menu in the Boot Manager. Select menu "4: Backup/Restore". 4. Select: 7 Backup/Restore 5. Type in password 6. Select menu 1 "Hard Disk Backup/Restore With Ghost" 7. Set the parameters for the Norton Ghost program: – Configure Ghost Parameters: See above – Hard Disk Restore from , PARALLEL Mode * A message window appears if you select this menu: You will be asked to check whether a connection has been made between the PCU and the PG/PC. Image file of the HMI to which the restore should be copied. * PG/PC: Open a DOS window or go to DOS level and enter the command ghost -lps to start the Norton Ghost program. * MMC: Start the restore by acknowledging (Yes) the message window. * MMC: The message window for the Norton Ghost SW appears: Display of current transmission status Display of paths used Details of data quantities to be transferred

IM4/7-210


11.02


Note If transmission is interrupted during the restore process, the system on the hard disk will not be consistent. You therefore require an HMI boot disk containing the MS DOS _ 6.X boot and the Norton Ghost SW. – Back to Previous menu Return to main menu 8. Once the restore process has been completed successfully: HMI is booted automatically. Time required: Approx. 15–20 minutes to generate a compressed disk image =130 MB from a 540 MB hard disk via LPT.


IM4/7-211


11.02

7.5 Data backup/restore with Ethernet connection 7.5.1

Back up PCU hard disk to PG/PC hard disk

Ethernet

PCU

Ethernet

PG/PC

Fig. 7-6 Backing up the hard disk

Requirements • Ghost program version 6.x/7.x (must be >= 7.x on Windows XP) installed on the PCU and the PG/PC. • The Ghost versions must be the same on the PCU and PG/PC. • Directory in which the backup image file is to be stored is available on the PG/PC. • Sufficient free memory is available on the PG/PC. • Any version of Windows is installed on the PG/PC. • PCU and PG/PC connected with the Ethernet cable.

Procedure While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the "Service menu" [concealed menu item] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9]?

2. Press 7. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd:

IM4/7-212


11.02


3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With GHOST 4 Partition Backup/Restore With GHOST (Locally) 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Back to Main Menu Your Choice [1,4,9]? Press 1. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Hard Disk Backup to , Mode ... 3 Hard Disk Restore from , Mode ... 4 Switch to other Version of GHOST 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1,2,3,9]? Note The path data are default settings and dependent on the drive. You may modify these paths. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


Configuring the Ghost parameters Set the parameters for the Norton Ghost program Configure GHOST Parameters The following menu appears:


IM4/7-213


11.02

PLEASE SELECT: 1 Set Connection Mode PARALLEL (LPT:) 2 Set Connection Mode LOCAL/NETWORK 3 Change Backup Image File Name 4 Change Restore Image File Name 5 Change Machine Name (for Windows and DOS-Net) 6 Manage Network Drives 7 Change Split Mode 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9]? You can use this menu to set the interface type, the network connection, the backup image path and the splitting of the backup image.

Configuring the interface • Changing the interface: Set Connection Mode LOCAL/NETWORK Select and confirm. Attention: The LOCAL/NETWORK interface type must always be selected for the network connection described in this Guide.

Connect to drive • Make/change network connection: Manage Network Drives For a detailed description, see 7.2

Configuring the backup image • Change the backup image path: < 3 > Change Backup Image File Name: Enter the complete path name for the backup file on the PG/PC, e.g. C:\SINUBACK\PCU\HMI.gho.

IM4/7-214


11.02


Split backup image • Splitting the backup image: < 7 > Change Split Mode Specify whether the backup image should be split into portions and, if it should, enter the size of each split (max. split size: 2048 MB; default split size: 640 MB). The split file names are entered as follows: .gho .001 .002 . ...

Exit menu • Return to the previous menu: < 9 > Back to Previous Menu Answer the prompt: "Save GHOST parameters?" with Yes.

"Possible" end -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following steps are generally necessary.

Backing up the hard disk You can now start the transmission: Back up hard disk < 2 > Hard Disk Backup to , LOCAL/NETWORK Mode When you select this menu item, if local partition backups exist, the following menu appears (see section Backing up/restoring partitions): PLEASE SELECT: 1 Backup WITHOUT Local Images 2 Backup WITH Local Images Your Choice [1,2]? If you do NOT wish to back up the local partition images with other data (to significantly reduce transmission time and memory space), press: 1 "Backup WITHOUT Local Images", otherwise 2 "Backup WITH Local Images".


IM4/7-215


11.02

* A message window then appears: You will be asked to check whether a link has been made between the PCU and PG/PC. The target path for the directory in which the backup image will be stored on the PG/PC is displayed. You will be asked to check whether this directory actually exists on the PG/PC. * PCU: Start the backup by entering "Y" in the message window. * PCU: The message window for the Norton Ghost SW appears: Display of current transmission status Display of paths used Details of data quantities to be transferred PCU After abort of backup the prompt: "Do you want to try to back up again [Y,N]?" appears. If you answer "N", you will return to the main menu. "Y" restarts the backup process.

Exit menu "Back to Previous Menu". Return to the previous menu

Disconnect from all connected drives: You can disconnect all drives connected to the PG/PC. See 7.2.

IM4/7-216


11.02

7.5.2


Restore PCU hard disk from PG/PC hard disk

Ethernet

Ethernet

PCU

PG/PC

Fig. 7.7 Restoring the content of the hard disk

Requirements • • • •

Ghost program version 6.x/7.x installed on the PCU and the PG/PC. Directory in which the restore image file is stored is available on the PG/PC. Any version of Windows is installed on the PG/PC. PCU and PG/PC connected with the Ethernet cable.

Procedure 1. Switch on the PG/PC, insert CD in drive. While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 2. Select the "Service menu" [concealed menu item] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1,2,3,4,5,7,8,9]?



IM4/7-217


11.02

4. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With Ghost 4 Partition Backup/Restore With Ghost 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Return to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]? 5. Press 1. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Hard Disk Backup to , Mode ... 3 Hard Disk Restore from , Mode ... 4 Switch to other Version of GHOST 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 9]? Note The path data are default settings and dependent on the drive. You may modify these paths. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------


IM4/7-218


11.02


Configuring the Ghost parameters 6. Set the parameters for the Norton Ghost program Configure GHOST Parameters The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Set Connection Mode PARALLEL (LPT:) 2 Set Connection Mode LOCAL/NETWORK 3 Change Backup Image File Name 4 Change Restore Image File Name 5 Change Machine Name (for Windows and DOS-Net) 6 Manage Network Drives [see 7.2] 7 Change Split Mode 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9]? You can use this menu to set the interface type, the network connection, the backup image path and the restore image path.

Configuring the interface 6.1 Changing the interface: Set Connection Mode LOCAL Select and confirm.

!

Important The LOCAL/NETWORK interface type must always be selected for the network connection described in this Guide.

Connect to drive 6.2 Establish/change network connection Manage Network Drives See 7.2


IM4/7-219


11.02

Configuring the restore image 6.2 Change the image path: < 4 > Change Restore Image File Name Complete path name for restore file HMI. Set up gho on PG/PC, e.g. C:\SINUBACK\PCU\HMI.gho.

Exit menu 6.3 Return to the previous menu: < 9 > Back to Previous Menu Answer the prompt: "Save GHOST parameters?" with Yes.

"Possible" end --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Restoring the hard disk Copy content of hard disk Hard Disk Restore from , PARALLEL Mode When you select this menu, the following menu appears: For partitioning the disk it's important to know the SYSTEM BASE of the imaged configuration. Please select the SYSTEM BASE the image was created by! PLEASE SELECT: [Basic SW NT Vers. 7.3.2] 1 Windows NT 2 Win95 3 WfW3.11 4 DOS (spare)

[Basic SW XP Vers. > 7.3.2] 1 Windows XP 2 Windows NT 3 Win95 4 WfW3.11 5 DOS (spare)



Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 9]?

Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9]?

Select the appropriate operating system for the image to be restored. This choice will determine which method of hard disk partitioning is used.

IM4/7-220


11.02


Another menu appears once you have selected the appropriate operating system: What kind of disk partitioning do you want? 1 Standard Partitioning (default setting) 2 User-Defined Partitioning 3 Image Partitioning Your Choice [1, 2, 3]? Specify whether standard partitioning should be applied to the hard disk, i.e. (depending on the operating system) with a fixed number of partitions of fixed size or if user-defined partitioning should be applied. While the Norton Ghost SW is automatically set to the appropriate partition parameters with the first option, you will need to enter the partition parameters in the Norton Ghost SW yourself with the second. The partition is based on the image to be loaded in the third option.

< 9 > Back to Previous Menu Return to the previous menu Only for first startup or restore (automatic for Ghost mode or restore): In menu "1 Configure GHOST Parameters", select the menu:

Configuring the PCU Network Name If your machine is part of a NETWORK, it needs a machine name that is unique in the overall network. The restore image suggests a machine name. You can change this machine name now. CAUTION: The machine name shouldn't be changed, if 1. the restore image is a backup image of your machine AND 2. the name of your machine hasn't been changed since creating the backup image. NOTE for networks that require Microsoft Domain security: Whenever you change the machine name (even if you input a name identical to the machine name contained in the restore image), your machine and its users will NO LONGER belong to the Microsoft network domain. (See also the Microsoft documentation) Press any key to continue . . . Do you REALLY want to input a new machine name?


IM4/7-221


11.02

If you want to input the new machine name MANUALLY, 1. don't use "/\[]:;|+=,?*" and blanks AND 2. the new machine name has to be EXACTLY as long as the old machine name used within the restore image. If you don't want to input a new machine name, the machine name used within the restore image remains valid. HINT: if you want to input a machine name with a different length, you have to do this in Windows! PLEASE SELECT: 1 Input Machine Name MANUALLY 2 Input Machine Name RANDOMLY 9 No new Machine Name Your Choice [1,2,9]? You may enter a user-defined computer name for the PCU or generate a name automatically: * Entering a user-defined name: < 1 > Input Machine Name MANUALLY An interactive screen form appears in which the new 10-digit name can be entered. Once the name is confirmed with Input, the name is modified in the system. Default name: PCUxxxxxxx [10 digits]. * Entering the name automatically: < 2 > Input Machine Name RANDOMLY A name is generated automatically and modified in the system. If necessary, the name can be viewed in Windows via the Control Panel NT: Start→Settings→Control Panel→Network:Identification XP: Start→Settings→Control Panel→"System" system→Computer Name tab * PCU: The message window for the Norton Ghost SW appears: Display of current transmission status Display of paths used Details of data quantities to be transferred If series machine startup is to be executed from a GHOST image, the current PCU name must be set instead of the name in the GHOST image. The new computer name (incl. the name generated RANDOMLY with 2) and the new system ID (SID) are assigned on the PCU using the Ghostwalker tool. Once the Ghostwalker run is complete, the user is given the opportunity to repeat the import. This will be necessary if the first import has not been carried out correctly (for example connection problems, program aborted by the operator, etc.). If you do not make an entry within five seconds, the PCU will be restarted automatically.

IM4/7-222


11.02


If necessary, the computer name can be modified under Windows according to requirements. It seems, that Ghost Restore succeeded. But if there was no connection or a cancel of the Restore, Ghost reports NO Errors! So you have the chance to: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Reboot the System (default after 5 seconds) 2 Try the Hard Disk Restore again 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 9]?

If you would like to change the computer name again subsequently, you can do this via entry 5 "Change Machine Name (for Windows and DOS-Net)" in the Backup/Restore->Hard Disk Backup/Restore with GHOST->Configure GHOST Parameters menu. The change is also made via Ghostwalker.

Booting 8. A boot must be carried out following a restore.

!

Important If the restore process is interrupted, the hard disk will be inconsistent. In this situation, you need a boot floppy disk with Norton Ghost SW and network SW. You can obtain the boot floppy disk from eSupport.


IM4/7-223


11.02

7.6 Hard disk spare The electrical/mechanical procedure for replacing an HMI hard disk is described in: References: /BH/, Operator Components Manual For loading/restoring software and data for the replaced hard disk, please follow the instructions in: • 7.3 SW installation/update • 7.4 Data backup/restore with parallel connection • 7.5 Data backup/restore with Ethernet connection

7.7 Saving and restoring PCU partitions locally 7.7.1

Backing up/restoring partitions, General As well as performing a complete backup of the entire content of the hard disk to an external drive, you can also back up partitions C:, E:, and F: of the PCU locally to partition D: of the PCU (partition data backup).

PCU hard disk C:

E:

F:

Partition im age backup to partition D:

D:

Local backup im age

Fig. 7.8 Partition data backup

The local backup image created when partition data is backed up can be used if required to restore partitions C:, E: and F: as required (partition data restore).

IM4/7-224


11.02


PCU hard disk C:

E:

F:


D:

Local backup im age

Fig. 7.9 Partition data restore

At the same time, it is also possible to use a local backup image to just restore partition E: (Windows). This may be necessary for example if, following a system crash or an uncontrolled shutdown of the PCU, Windows cannot be booted (partition E data restore).

PCU hard disk C:

E:

F:


D:

Local backup im age

Fig. 7.10 Partition E restore

For a partition data restore or a partition E: data restore, you can use any local backup image currently available on partition D:. However, you will have to be very careful when selecting the local backup image for a partition E: data restore. The registry entries of all applications installed on partition F: will be expected on partition E:, which is to be restored. It is therefore advisable to configure an emergency backup image, which, in the event of an emergency (Windows cannot be booted), can be restored by means of a partition E data restore without affecting the operation of installed applications. Particular support is given in the Service menu for defining a local backup image for a possible emergency and the simple initiation of a partition E: data restore should an emergency occur. The maximum number of local backup images that can be stored simultaneously on partition D: is configurable ( Configure GHOST Parameters: The following menu appears: GHOST Connection Mode: LOCAL Maximum Backup Images : 1 Current Backup Images : 0 PLEASE SELECT: 1 Change Maximum Backup Images 2 Define Emergency Backup Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1,2,9]?


IM4/7-227


11.02

If you want to change the preset maximum number for local backup images, select menu 1: Enter a new number (max. 7). Answer the prompt: "Save GHOST parameters?" with Yes.

-

Exit menu < 9 > Back to Previous Menu Return to the previous menu

"Possible" end -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------The following is generally valid.

Backup partitions 6. Press 2. < 2 > Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode You will be prompted to enter the name under which the new local backup image should be saved, e.g. BACKUP1. Length of name: max. 7 characters. Under "Description", you will be prompted to indicate whether you wish to save an additional description for the local backup image, e.g. "DataBackup1 by Hugo". When the data is restored, this additional description is offered as text for selection in the list of available backup images (if this description is missing, the list displays the name of the backup image). You are asked whether you want the new local backup image to function as emergency backup image (possibly replacing a backup image previously defined as the emergency backup image). The partition data backup to D: then starts. Under D: a file is created for each partition in the IMAGES directory, e.g. BACKUP1.gh1, BACKUP1.gh3, BACKUP1.gh4. When the data is restored, these will be detected logically as belonging to 1 Backup Image. Once the partition data has been backed up, the "Backup finished" message will appear.


IM4/7-228


11.02

7.7.3


Restore partitions

PCU hard disk C:

E:

F:


D:

Local backup im age

Fig. 7.12 Partition data restore


2. Press 7. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd: 3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service


IM4/7-229


11.02

The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With GHOST 4 Partition Backup/Restore With GHOST (Locally) 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Back to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]? 4. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode 3 Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode 4 Partition E (Windows only) Restore, LOCAL Mode 8 Delete Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1,2,3,4,8,9]?

Restore partition 5. Press 3. < 3 > Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode You will be asked which local backup image should be restored, e.g. "DataBackup1 by Hugo".

PLEASE SELECT IMAGE: 1 EMERG

2 .

PCU Base Software V06.00.02 Win NT 4.0 [02-01-2000: 05:32:32pm] DataBackup1 by Hugo [02-03-2000; 04:53:24pm] ...

9

Back to Previous Menu

Your Choice [1, 2, ... , 9]?

Select the required backup image. After confirmation, a warning appears: "All data will be overwritten" and the restoration of the selected backup image in partitions to C:, E: and F: is initiated.

IM4/7-230


11.02


Once the partition data has been restored, the "Restore finished" message will appear. Every time data is reimported, partitions E: and F: will be checked using the CHKDSK program the next time Windows is restarted. There is a reboot between the check of E: and F:.

7.7.4

Partition E: (Windows) - Restore to PCU

PCU hard disk C:

E:

F:


D:

Local backup im age

Figure 7.13 Partition E data restore




IM4/7-231


11.02

3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With GHOST 4 Partition Backup/Restore With GHOST (Locally) 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Back to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]? 4. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode 3 Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode 4 Partition E (Windows only) Restore, LOCAL Mode 8 Delete Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1,2,3,4,8,9]?

Restore partition E 5. Press 4. < 4 > Partition E (Windows only) Restore, LOCAL Mode You will be asked for the local backup image whose partition E: (= WindowsPartition) you wish to restore, e.g. "DataBackup1 by Hugo".

IM4/7-232


11.02


PLEASE SELECT: - As for Restore partition

Select the required backup image: After confirmation, a warning appears advising caution: "The Windows partition will be overwritten" and the restoration of partition E: is initiated. Once the partition E data has been restored, the "Restore finished" message will appear. The next time WinNT is booted, partition E: is checked by the test program CHKDSK.

7.7.5

Delete backup image

Procedure While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the "Service menu" [concealed menu item] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9]?


IM4/7-233


11.02


3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With GHOST 4 Partition Backup/Restore With GHOST (Locally) 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Back to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]? 4. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode 3 Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode 4 Partition E (Windows only) Restore, LOCAL Mode 8 Delete Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 8, 9]?

Delete backup image 5. Press 8. < 8 > Delete Image Select the backup image you wish to delete. Once you make your selection, you will be prompted to confirm that you want delete the image. The backup image will be deleted once you confirm your choice with "Y".

IM4/7-234


11.02



7.7.6

Define emergency backup image



3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0–2. - System - Manufacturer - Service


IM4/7-235


11.02

The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Hard Disk Backup/Restore With GHOST 4 Partition Backup/Restore With GHOST (Locally) 5 ADDM Backup/Restore 9 Back to Main Menu Your Choice [1, 4, 5, 9]? 4. Press 4. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Configure GHOST Parameters 2 Partition Backup, LOCAL Mode 3 Partition Restore, LOCAL Mode 4 Partition E (WinNT only) Restore, LOCAL Mode 8 Delete Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1,2,3,4,8,9]?

Define emergency backup image 5. Press 1. < 1 > Configure GHOST Parameters: The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Change Maximum Backup Images 2 Define Emergency Backup Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 9]? 6. Press 2. You will be asked for the local backup image that (until withdrawn) will serve as an emergency backup image in future.

IM4/7-236


11.02


PLEASE SELECT EMERGENCY IMAGE: 1 PCU Base Software V06.00.02 Win NT 4.0 [02-01-2000: 05:32:32pm] EMERG 2 Data backup 1 by Hugo [02-03-2000; 04:53:24pm] 3 Data backup 2 [02-05-2000; 07:07:14pm] N No Emergency Image 9 Back to Previous Menu Your Choice [1, 2, 3, N, 9]?

Select the required backup image, e.g. "DataBackup2". The "EMERG" identifier for the currently valid emergency backup image is set to the selected backup image: PLEASE SELECT EMERGENCY IMAGE: 1 PCU Base Software V06.00.02 Win NT 4.0 [02-01-2000: 05:32:32pm] 2 Data backup 1 by Hugo [02-03-2000; 04:53:24pm] EMERG

3 DataBackup2 [02-05-2000; 07:07:14pm] N No Emergency Image 9 Back to Previous Menu

Your Choice [1, 2, 3, N, 9]?



IM4/7-237


7.7.7

11.02

Restore emergency backup on partition E: If, following a system crash or an uncontrolled shutdown of the PCU, Windows cannot be booted, partition E: can be restored by using the backup image defined under 7.7.6. a) Based on one of the local backup images (see Subsection 7.7.2) You need: One of the passwords for levels 0-2. b) Based on the emergency backup image (as long as a local backup image has been defined as an emergency backup image, see Subsection 7.7.6) You need: One of the passwords for levels 0-3 Partition E: data restore via the emergency backup image can be initiated directly in the main menu.

Procedure While the PCU is booting (after control power OFF and ON): 1. Select the "Service menu" [concealed menu item] in the Boot Manager. The following menu appears: PLEASE SELECT: 1 Install/Update SINUMERIK System 2 SINUMERIK Tools and Options 3 DOS Shell 4 Start Windows (Service Mode) 5 SINUMERIK System Check 7 Backup/Restore 8 Start PC Link 9 Reboot (Warm Boot)

E Restore Windows Partition E (Emergency) Your Choice [1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9, E]?

2. Press E. The system prompts you to enter a password with: passwd:

IM4/7-238


11.02


3. Enter one of the passwords for levels 0-3. - System - Manufacturer - Servicer - Customer A warning appears advising caution: "Windows partition E: will be overwritten" and, following a second prompt, the restoration of partition E: is initiated. Once the partition E data has been restored, the "Restore finished" message will appear. The next time WinNT is booted, partition E: is checked by the test program CHKDSK.

7.8 SINUMERIK desktop (Windows) The SINUMERIK desktop is designed to operate as a service mode, which can use Windows functions to start up the controller. It is used as the platform for network operation (e.g. for installing HMI system software), for setting the execution environment of HMI system software or for accompanying system measures such as authorizing SIMATIC STEP7, hard disk check, version check, etc. More detailed information can be found in 3.5, Basic functions of the SINUMERIK desktop.

7.8.1

Networking The PCU has one network connection as standard. Windows NT

Windows XP

Most of the network connection is already installed on delivery. Once you have connected the Ethernet cable, you need only enter the IP address of the PCU or select use of a DHCP server in order to set up a TCP/IP communication link. The entry is made under: Start→Settings →Control Panel→Network, Protocols tab, where the TCP/IP protocol properties can be selected. By this stage you must have already specified a unique computer name for the PCU across the entire network. You can enter the required name under Start→ Settings→Control Panel→Network, Identification tab.

Connect the Ethernet cable for TCP/IP communication. The default setting is DHCP.

The properties can be modified under Start→Settings→Network Connections→Local Area Connection→Properties. By this stage you must have already specified a unique computer name for the PCU across the entire network. You can enter the required name under Start→Settings→Control Panel →Computer Name tab, Change button.


IM4/7-239


11.02

In addition to the TCP/IP protocol, the NETBEUI protocol is also preinstalled for network operation.

7.8.2

Subsequent installation of Windows components Windows NT Windows XP Directory I386 from the WinNT CD is A Windows XP Recovery CD is stored in D:\Updates\Base\I386 on the supplied with Service Pack 1, which PCU, for example if drivers should need to can be used to reload individual be installed subsequently. components. In addition, D:\Updates\Base also contains software, which may be needed for subsequent installation in conjunction with the installation of external applications: 1. \MDAC21.SP2: Data Access Components V2.1 SP2 (year-2000-compatible) 2. \SP6a: See above Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a 3. \DRIVERS\SYSTEM.INI 3. \DRIVERS\SYSTEM.INI Keyboard table (to be copied to Keyboard table (to be copied to E:\WinNT.40 if necessary) E:\Windows if necessary) 4. \DRIVERS\E100B: On the Recovery CD Network software 5. \DDEFIX The installation path to be entered for "Install New Fix" is: D:\Updates\Base\DDEFIX\hotfix.inf 6. \VBFIX Visual Basic Hot fix The 6 system components are executed Components may have to be installed via D:\Updates\Base\instspa6a.exe. individually.

IM4/7-240


11.02


7.8.3

Installing SIMATIC STEP7 for SINUMERIK HW SIMATIC STEP7 V5.1 can be loaded/transferred on the PCU50 as an AddOn. Windows NT Scope of delivery SIMATIC STEP7 V5.1 for PCU50/ 70/MMC103 on CD Order no.: 6FC5252-5AY01-1AG0 Components: SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.1 SP2 and AddOn for SINUMERIK 810D/840D(i) delivery format: , Data volume: approx. 430 MB System prerequisites PCU50/70 with basic software 6.1.9 or higher

Windows XP Scope of delivery SIMATIC STEP7 V5.2 for PCU50/ 70 on CD Order no.: 6FC5252-5AY01-2AG0 Components: SIMATIC STEP 7 V5.2 and AddOn for SINUMERIK 810D/840D(i) delivery format: , Data volume: approx. 480 MB System prerequisites PCU50/70 with basic software 7.3.2 or higher

Recommendation: Mouse connector To install this software release you need: A network connection or an external CD-ROM drive

Recommendation: Mouse connector To install this software release you need: A network connection or an external CD-ROM drive

Note (NT) We recommend that if STEP7 5.0 is already installed, this is uninstalled first and the associated Add_on\step7 directory deleted.

!

Important The "MPI-Driver" available on the PCU50/70 / MMC103 is part of the HMI/MMC103 software and must not be uninstalled! The software comprises two installation packages, STEP7 V5.1 and an extension for operation with SINUMERIK 810D/840D(i). This extension is entered on the system under the name "SINUMERIK 810D/840D V2.2".

The software comprises two installation packages, STEP7 V5.2 and an extension for operation with SINUMERIK 810D/840D(i). This extension is entered on the system under the name "SINUMERIK 810D/840D V2.6".


IM4/7-241


11.02

Operation on Windows NT This procedure also applies to MMC103 with WinNT 4.0. You must follow the installation sequence described here! 1. Boot the PCU50 in the WinNT desktop (via service menu item 4, then 1). 2. Access the STEP7 CD (via the network or an external CD-ROM drive). 3. Browse to the STEP7_V5.1 directory on the CD and select SETUP.EXE. Installation is operator controlled. You are prompted to enter the ID no. (see CD label). In PCU basic software version 6.1.9, the installation directory must be F:\Add_on\step7; in basic software version 6.1.10 and higher, the directory may be located anywhere on F:. The prompt for the authorization floppy disk should be confirmed with "Skip". Once this setup is complete, you do not need to boot the PCU50. 4. Browse to the Sinumerik_Add_on directory on the CD and select SETUP.EXE. Installation is operator controlled. Once this SETUP is complete, you do need to boot the PCU50. Return to the WinNT desktop to boot the system. 5. Call the "STEP7-Authorizing" desktop icon. This authorizes STEP7, which can then be started from within the HMI Advanced software (second menu bar in the area-specific menu, protected with protection level 3). The following entries are made automatically in F:\Add_on\oemframe.ini: [s7tgtopx] ; with HMI-Advanced: eliminate minimize/maximize buttons ; in the Step7 window WindowStyle_Off=196608 ; with HMI-Advanced: switch to previous task when Step7 is terminated nSwitchToTaskAfterTermination= -2 6. These entries may need to be modified in the OEM configurations.

IM4/7-242


11.02


Operation on Windows XP The operating process is the same as for Windows NT. However, a version of STEP7 with software version ≥ 5.2 must be installed.

Note STEP7 should not be installed on partitions D: or E:. If the initial boot after installation of STEP7 under HMI Advanced produces the warning message "WARNING: Application rngofrm didn´t post InitComplete", the PCU50 must be rebooted. If there is a STEP7 Version 5.1 on the control and a Version 5.0 is to be installed again later, after uninstalling Version 5.1 and before installing Version 5.0, you must totally delete the following directory: F:\mmc2\step7\dat.


IM4/7-243


11.02

7.9 PCMCIA interface software The PCU 50/70 HMI components have an interface for PCMCIA components. The provision of the interface software differs for Windows NT and Windows XP.

7.9.1

PCMCIA interface software for Windows NT To enable you to use memories/devices on this interface, we have provided the software CardWare V6.0 for Windows NT, order no. 6FC5 264-6BX10-0AG0 (single-user license).

Scope of supply The software is supplied on CD and includes a Readme file (English).

Requirements Windows NT 4.0 with Service Pack 6 is required.

Installation Establish a connection between the PCU 50/70 and the CD drive as described under "Set up access to external drives/computer". Activate SETUP.EXE on the CD. The InstallShield user prompts will guide you through the process.

Compatible media Once the CardWare V6.0 software has been installed, the PCMCIA interface is ready (Pluck and Play) to operate the following components (tested for PCU 50): • • • • •

PCMCIA – 3Com MHz 589E network card PCMCIA – Xiron RealPort Ethernet card 10/100 + Modem56 REM56G - 100 PCMCIA – Toshiba TH6SS160402A flash card (40 MB) SanDisk 32 MB flash disk PCMCIA/PC CARD ATA Callunacard 1040 MB type III hard disk drive

The Internet pages of the CardWare V6.0 software manufacturer contain a PC card knowledge base, which you can access. It contains additional supported PCMCIA components.

IM4/7-244


11.02


Notes for use Make sure that you switch the card to "Slot Power Off" before you remove a flash card. (See README.TXT.) SINUCOPY is not intended for use with this software and has not been taken into consideration in the test. Once Windows NT 4.0 is booted, CardWare needs approx. 30 seconds to become active. This does not affect PCU50/70 booting with standard HMI Advanced. CardWare V6.0 is not intended for Windows 2000.

Boundary conditions The current boundary conditions can be found in PRODIS.

Software supplier's address APSoft Sonnenstraße 26b 85622 Feldkirchen, Germany Internet: www.tssc.de Tel.: +49 (89) 900 479 0 Fax: +49 (89) 900 479 11

7.9.2

PCMCIA interface software for Windows XP Standard PCMCIA applications are supported directly in Windows XP.


IM4/7-245


11.02

7.10 Directory structure of HMI Advanced Area-specific applications are stored in the "HMI_ADV" directory. The directory structure (in ascending order of priority) is: • HMI_ADV • MMC2 • ADD_ON • OEM • USER. The HMI_ADV software contains • The area-specific applications with INI files • DLLs and • HMI-specific data. MMC2 contains: • Server and COM objects, • Master control and • The associated INI and NSK files with MMC.INI from HMI Base. ADD_ON, OEM and USER are used as before.

Data management configuration limits Data management (DM) limit: The following data management directories: • Workpieces • Parts programs • Subroutines • User cycles • Default cycles • OEM cycles may contain a maximum of 100,000 files, with the maximum number of files per directory (with workpieces, per workpiece directory *.WPD) being 1000. The other data management directories are not taken into consideration in this total of 100,000, but here as well, the maximum of 1000 files per directory applies, for example, max. 1000 archives in the Archives directory. The 1000 file maximum per directory also applies to network drives. The actual options also depend on the size of the files and the available storage space. If there are a large number of files, this will be reflected in the additional time required to construct the screen when viewing directories. n

IM4/7-246


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 8 Diagnostics

8

8 Diagnostics

8.1 Action log ................................................................................ IM4/8-248 8.1.1 Log file ................................................................................. IM4/8-251 8.1.2 Display log file/Set action log............................................... IM4/8-251 8.1.3 Outputting the log file........................................................... IM4/8-252 8.2 SW version information........................................................... IM4/8-253


IM4/8-247


11.02

8.1 Action log The Action Log function can be used to log operating sequences. The following functions are provided: • • • • •

IM4/8-248

Logging of alarms Logging of keyboard actions (SINUMERIK ShopMill, ShopTurn, ManualTurn) Output of log file via RS-232 The action log is password-encrypted. It can be enabled/disabled either via • MD 9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE or • using the "Action Log Settings" input screen form in the Installation and Startup operating area.


11.02


9012 ACTION_LOG_MODE MD number Action log settings Default value 254 Min. input value: 0 Max. input value: 0xffff Change valid after POWER ON Protection level (R/W): 2/2 Unit: Data type: DWORD Valid from SW release: 5.2 Significance This MD can be used to enable/disable the action log and to define which data should be logged. Bit 0 =1 Action log ON (default) =0 Action log OFF Bit 1 =1 MMC 103: Variable services (write access to geometric data, e.g. tool offset) are logged, see the help under Variables View in the Parameters operating area for the meaning of the variables (default) =0 Variable services are not logged Bit 2 =1 MMC 103: PI services (e.g. program selection) are logged, see the help under Variables View in the Parameters operating area for the meaning of the variables (default) =0 PI services are not logged Bit 3 =1 MMC 103: Domain services (e.g. load/unload program) are logged (default) =0 Domain services are not logged Bit 4 =1 Changes in the alarm status are logged (default) =0 Changes in the alarm status are not logged Bit 5 =1 Keyboard actions are logged - only SINUMERIK ShopMill, ShopTurn, ManualTurn (default) =0 Keyboard actions are not logged Bit 6 =1 Channel status/override is logged (default) =0 Channel status/override is not logged Bit 7 =1 MMC 103: Soft key actions and menu changes are logged. Only for Siemens internal use (default). =0 Soft key actions and menu changes are not logged

Action log settings screen The Action Log Settings screen in the Installation and Startup operating area, "MMC -> System Settings" menu, can be used to define: • The control system actions to be logged. • Logging ON/OFF • Logged data: • Change in alarm status • Keys (ShopMill only) • Channel status/override • Writing data • File accesses • Instructions


IM4/8-249


11.02

• The required action log settings: • File write interval (logging frequency in seconds), default: 1 • Log file size, default 4 MB • Log file path (path entry) • Logged alarms: The alarms entered here (entered by their alarm number separated by commas) are direct triggers for immediate saving of the current action log on the hard disk. If the action log is enabled, the files that can be logged are logged by default. The following events can be logged:

Variable services All variables written via an input field (e.g. write access to geometrical data such as tool offset and zero offsets) can be logged. You can call up a description of the variables using the Help function under Variable Views in the Parameters operating area.

Keyboard actions All operator panel and MF2 keyboard actions can be logged.

PI services All PI services such as program selection, delete file, delete tool, can be logged. You can call up a description of the variables using the Help function under Variable Views in the Parameters operating area.

Domain services All domain services (e.g. load/unload program) can be logged.

Alarm status All displayed NC/PLC and MMC alarms and messages can be logged.

Channel status/Override NC/PLC states can be logged using the information regarding the channel status and the position of the override switch. If they can be recorded on a temporal basis, these states can be used to partially verify the operation of the MCP.

IM4/8-250


11.02

8.1.1


Log file The log is output in English.

File structure The log file is divided into four columns: • Date • Time • NCU name • Event Example for a log file: Date Time NCU-Name Event-Specification 01.09.99 06:22:48 local ======================================================================== 01.09.99 06:22:48 local ACTIONLOG: HMI Booting (OutputSelect:0x0 CommitLatency: -1, FileSize: 40000) 01.09.99 06:22:48 local ACTIONLOG: Monitored Variable /Plc/Datablock/Byte[c19,0] 01.09.99 06:22:48 local ACTIONLOG: Monitored Variable /Channel/ProgramInfo/msg 01.09.99

06:22:48

01.09.99 01.09.99 01.99.99 01.09.99

06:24:52 06:24:52 06:25:05 06:37:58

8.1.2

MachineSwitch ACTIONLOG: variable " /Channel/ProgramInfo/msg " = NCU840D application:RE;state:-992;soft key:-1;etc:0 NCU840D application:RE;state:-990;soft key:-1;etc:0 NCU840D application:RE;state:-992;soft key:-1;etc:0 local ACTIONLOG: HMI Terminates

Display log file/Set action log

Display log file The display is password-encrypted. The current log file is displayed on the operator panel screen in the Diagnostics operating area in the Service Displays -> Action Log menu, "Action Log Log File" screen. The "Readout via RS-232-C" vertical soft key can be used to read out and archive the log file.

Setting the action log The action log settings are password-encrypted. The "Action Log Settings" screen form is displayed in the Installation and Startup operating area in the menu MMC -> System Settings -> Action Log. The following functions can be accessed in this screen:


IM4/8-251


11.02

• Enable/disable logging • Select the data to be logged • Change the alarm status • Action soft keys • Channel status/override • Write data • Access files • Instructions The selected setting must be confirmed by pressing the "Save settings" soft key.

8.1.3

Outputting the log file The log file can be read out via the boot file. A boot menu is displayed whenever a crash event is pending (PLC bit DB19, byte0, bit6). The bit is set and reset by the PLC on the user interface (e.g. key disable, screen darkening, etc.). The MMC evaluates the rising edge of the signal (i.e. a transition from 0 to 1) and creates the log file when the signal arrives. The MMC only has read access to the data, i.e. signals are reset by the PLC/user program. If the bit has already been set when the MMC starts up, the MMC will not react to the value of the bit until a reset and set has been applied.

Reading out the file If the log files are to be read out, proceed as follows:

Operator input sequence 1. Switch on the control and select the installation mode (press "6" when the DOS/Windows window appears). 2. Activate the "A Actionlog" menu option in the Service menu (press "A"). The "A Actionlog" menu will only appear if there is a log file. 3. The available log files (AC_LOGA.TXT and AC_LOGB.TXT) are copied to the parts program directory. The message "The action log is filed in the parts program directory for output (files AC_LOG?.TXT)" then appears on the screen. 4. Press any key to return to the main menu. 5. After rebooting the control, you can read out the log files via the Services operating area by activating the Data Out -> Via RS-232-C menu option (e.g. to floppy disk).

IM4/8-252


11.02


Reading out the file after the control has crashed Should events causing the control to crash occur, log file crash files are created in the data management. If you can no longer select the Service menu, please proceed as follows:

Operator input sequence 1. Switch on the control. 2. During booting, the system searches for log file crash files. If one or more files are found, the message "The action log (crash) is filed in the parts program directory for output (files AC_LOG?.TXT). Please confirm that you will file out the files immediately after start of MMC (RS-232, Disk,..)" appears on the screen. The available crash files (AC_LOGP1.TXT to AC_LOGPn.TXT) are copied to the parts program directory. 3. After booting the control, you can read out the log files via the Services operating area by activating the Data Out -> Via RS-232-C menu option (e.g. to floppy disk).

8.2 SW version information Function The version screen displays the version data of the incorporated system software.

Procedure 1. Select the DIAGNOSTICS area. 2. Press the "Service displays" soft key. 3. Press the "Version" soft key. The versions of the NCK software are displayed first by default. In order to view the HMI software version, press the "MMC" soft key. n


IM4/8-253


IM4/8-254

11.02


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 9 Installing HMI Software on PC

9

9 Installing HMI Software on PC

9.1 Installing the HMI software on PC .......................................... IM4/9-256


IM4/9-255

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 9 Installing HMI Software on PC

11.02

9.1 Installing the HMI software on PC Requirement • • • • •

Target system: PC Operating system: Windows NT 4.0 with SP 6 Software: None NC connection: CP5511, CP5611 You must select "Small Fonts" under "Control Panel/Display, Settings".

• • • •

Name: Installation language: Distribution medium: Uninstallable:

SW HMI Advanced for PC/PG German/English CD Yes

Target path Freely selectable

SW scope • • • • • • •

MPI driver V5.0 NCDDE server Alarm server Data/archive server Language tool Startup tool HMI standard system

Operator input sequence 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Insert the CD into the CD drive Start setup.exe Select language Specify destination folder Choose: -

Online (with communication to the NC), prompt to check if the MPI drivers should be installed

-

Locally (without communication to the NC, with NC simulation)

6. Select the programming/simulation technology -

Milling

-

Turning

7. The system will display all entries in the form of a list. 8. After confirmation, the copying process will start. 9. Once all data has been copied, you will be asked whether you want to reboot the PC.

IM4/9-256

n


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) 10 Configure Window Using NC Program

10 Configure Window Using NC Program

10

10.1 Installation and startup ...................................................... IM4/10-258 10.2 Structure of statements ..................................................... IM4/10-259 10.3 Example statements .......................................................... IM4/10-260 10.4 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgment................................................................ IM4/10-262 10.5 Example program 2: Hold time and optional text variables ............................................................................ IM4/10-263 10.6 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode...................................................... IM4/10-265 10.7 Example program 4: Positioning of the input and output field .................................................................................... IM4/10-266 10.8 Example program 5: Fading in images.............................. IM4/10-268 10.9 Example program 7: OPI variables.................................... IM4/10-269 10.10 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgment mode with soft keys ........................................................... IM4/10-270 10.11 List of files for the dialog screen files ................................ IM4/10-272


IM4/10-257


11.02

Introduction MMC/HMI Embedded/HMI Advanced software version 4.4 and higher supports the display of user-defined dialog boxes (dialog screens). The appearance of dialog boxes is determined solely by text-based configuration settings (COM file in the cycles directory). The dialog box is shown and hidden using function calls in the parts program. The HMI/MMC system software (user interface) is not affected by these calls. User-specific dialog boxes cannot be called in different channels at the same time. The "Configure Window Using NC Program" window is referred to as a "command channel".

Application User dialog boxes can for example be used to assign specific values to specific user variables (GUD) before a parts program is run.

10.1 Installation and startup Up to 2 channels: The "Command channel" is enabled for channels 1 and 2 by default. • More than 2 channels: The "command channel" must be activated for the MMC 103/PCU50 (if the SIEMENS measuring cycles have not been installed). This requires a modification to file C:\MMC2\ COMIC.NSK in the Installation and Startup operating area: - Select file c:\mmc2\comic.nsk in the "Installation and Startup" operating area with the "MMC" - "Editor" - "Load" soft keys - Append the following text (after channel 1 and 2): REM CHANNEL TOPIC(machineswitch) COMIC_START(COMIC001MachineSwitch"...) [see text for channels 1 and 2] The command channel is enabled for the appropriate channel the next time the control system is restarted (OFF/ON).

IM4/10-258


11.02


10.2 Structure of statements Syntax MMC ("operating area, command, COM file, dialog screen name, user data definition file, graphics file, display time or acknowledgment variable, text variables, etc.", "acknowledgment mode") Parameters:

Operating area Name of soft key with which the configured user dialogs can be called. Default entry: CYCLES, appears as "Cycles" on soft key 14; can be accessed via the ETC key.

Command Picture_on select screen Picture_off deselect screen

COM file Name of the dialog screen file (max. 8 characters, in user cycle or default cycle directory CST.DIR). The appearance of the dialog screen is defined here. The dialog screen is used to display user variables and/or comment texts.

Dialog screen name The individual screens are selected using the dialog screen name.

User data definition file GUD file access on reading/writing of variables.

Graphics file File name of a BMP graphic to be faded in • If the graphics file is stored in directory CST.DIR, the graphics file must be renamed *.AWB (the control system will not accept *.bmp). • If the graphics file is stored in directory "Dialog Programming/Help", the name *.BMP can be maintained. In HMI SW version 6.2, *.bmp files are stored in resolution-specific subdirectories: These are: For default cycles: \CST.DIR\HLP.DIR\640.DIR For 640 dpi resolution \CST.DIR\HLP.DIR\800.DIR For 800 dpi resolution \CST.DIR\HLP.DIR\1024.DIR For 1024 dpi resolution


IM4/10-259


11.02

For user cycles: \CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR\640.DIR \CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR\800.DIR \CUS.DIR\HLP.DIR\1024.DIR

For 640 dpi resolution For 800 dpi resolution For 1024 dpi resolution

For OEM cycles: \CMA.DIR\HLP.DIR\640.DIR \CMA.DIR\HLP.DIR\800.DIR \CMA.DIR\HLP.DIR\1024.DIR

For 640 dpi resolution For 800 dpi resolution For 1024 dpi resolution

Display time or acknowledgment variable Display time Acknowledgment variable

for acknowledgment mode "N" for acknowledgment mode "A"

Text variables Screen header or comment text from a COM file text variable

Acknowledgment mode "S"

Synchronous, acknowledged using "OK" soft key

10.3 Example statements MMC command in parts program MMC("CYCLES;PICTURE_ON;T_SK.COM,PIC- MGUD.DEF, PICTURE TEST_1, A1", "S") _3.AWB, TURE1, Operating area Command "Picture ON/OFF" Com file name*) in cycle directory Dialog screen name User data definition file Graphics file (not MMC100.2) Acknowledgement variable (or display time in "N" mode) (not MMC100.2) Screen header or comment from text variable (from COM file) Acknowledgement mode: Synchronous, Asynchronous, No ack. *)

On the MMC103/PCU50, the file name is e.g. T_SK_GR.COM but it is called without the "GR" language identifier.

IM4/10-260


11.02


User variables (in the Definitions directory)

%_N_UGUD_DEF ;$PATH=/_N_DEF_DIR DEF

CHAN REAL TEST_1

Channel-specific scope Data type Name of the user variable

Dialog screen file (in the Cycles directory) (*.COM) //C3(Picture3) R/

15

75

5/ COMMENT;%1,%2,%3/ W,RJ

Variable type Real Integer String

TEST_1/ ...)

User variable

Innput limits: min. 15, max. 75 Default value for user VAR Comment text with optional text variables

Type of access: W = Write/read Read only R= W, rj = Write/read with comment No j: Left-justified toward input or output field j: Right-justified toward input or output field

Note The variable name, text variables and cycle name should be written in upper case.


IM4/10-261


11.02

Text variables

[TEXTVARIABLES ] A1

= Example2: MMC command without ack.

Reference parameter for MMC command Screen header or comment text

Soft key assignment for calling screens Soft key assignment for MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgment mode [SCREEN3] SK1 = END SK2 = Screen2 Soft keys SK0 to SK15 can be configured

10.4 Example program 1: MMC command without acknowledgment Parts program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,A1", "N") N20 TEST_1 = 1 N25 G4 F10 N30 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF", "N") M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C1(SCREEN1) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable [TEXTVARIABLES] A1 =............Example1: MMC command without acknowledgment............

IM4/10-262


11.02


Sequence The user variable TEST_1 in GUD4.DEF is displayed briefly with the title A1. The hold time is determined by parts program N25.

Example 1: MMC command without acknowledgement ANW.VAR TEST_1

1.000000

10.5 Example program 2: Hold time and optional text variables Parts program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN6,GUD4.DEF,,10, T1,G1","N") N15 G4 F15 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C6(Screen6) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1,%1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable [TEXTVARIABLES] T1 = Example2: Hold time and optional text variables.... G1 = Optional text variable


IM4/10-263


11.02

The seventh parameter is interpreted as the display time for the mode without acknowledgment (10 seconds). The content of the table is then deleted. The screen form is displayed until Picture_off. The eighth parameter (T1) is the text variable for the screen title. If no entry is present, the name of the operating area (Cycles) is displayed. Parameters 9 to 23 are optional text variables (in this case "G1=optional text variable"). The optional text variables must be preassigned in this COM file under the "[Text variables]" section.

Example 2: Dwell time and optional text variables ANW.VAR TEST_1, optional text variable

1.000000

Sequence In this example, the comment text from the COM file (USER.VAR TEST_1) is extended to the position of the first wildcard (%1) in order to take account of the content of the "G1 optional text variable". Messages or names can be "combined" in this way by calling text variables in the MMC command (9th to 23rd parameters).

IM4/10-264


11.02


10.6 Example program 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode Parts program N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,, F1","S") N18 STOPRE N20 TEST_1 = 5 N25 MMC(CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C1(SCREEN1) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) Text variable F1 = ...Example 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode...

Example 3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgement mode

ANW.VAR TEST_1

1.000000

OK

Sequence The user variable Test_1 is displayed until the "OK" soft key is pressed. The user variable in the program is also overwritten with the value 5. Without STOPRE, this assignment would be made before the key is pressed (with STOPRE, it is made afterwards).


IM4/10-265


11.02

10.7 Example program 4: Positioning of the input and output field The comment field or input and output field can be displayed anywhere within the display range by entering position parameters in the COM file. N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON, T_SK.COM; Screen2, GUD4.DEF,,,C1","S") N20 TEST_3 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C2(Screen12) (R///Var.Name/R/TEST_3/6000,2800,8000/ 200,3000,7500)

Position of the input/output field Position of the comment field: First value = 0 --> Automatic positioning on default value No specification --> Default positioning as with PCU 20 Each of the two parameters comprises two numerical values, which indicate the position and length of the field. The values are given in twips, where 15 twips corresponds to approximately one pixel. The size of the field is set at 250 twips. Meaning of the values: (./6000,2800,8000/....) Distance from left screen edge Distance from upper screen edge Field length

Graphic configuration is possible for 16 comment fields and 16 input or output fields. If there are more than 16 fields, they can be controlled using scroll bars.

IM4/10-266


11.02


Example 4: Position parameters

ANW.VAR TEST_2 1.000000 OK

The configured fields must overlap to ensure smooth cursor control (see below):

Example 4: Position parameters 1.000000 1.000000 1.000000

1.000000 OK


IM4/10-267


11.02

10.8 Example program 5: Fading in images It is also possible to fade in graphics that have been created for example with Paintbrush by selecting a graphics file in the dialog screen. A comment text can be preassigned to the screen via the COM file. The comment text can also be positioned using position parameters. Note

The image itself can only be positioned by applying an offset in the graphics program.

Parts program N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN8,GUD4.DEF, GRA.AWB,,M1","S") N20 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N30 M30

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C8(Screen8) (I/// Fade in image no. 2///4000,3000,7500) (I/// Created with Paintbrush ///4000,3250,7500)

Text variable M1 = ......Example 5: Fade in image....... Images can for example be created using the "Paintbrush" drawing tool. Image size: 300X500 pixels; the size of the image can only be modified in the Paintbrush tool.

Example 5: Fade in image

OK

IM4/10-268


11.02


10.9 Example program 7: OPI variables It is also possible to fade in OPI variables via the COM file.

Parts program MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN7,GUD4.DEF,,TEST_1,J1","S")

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C7(Screen7) (R///Test_1/R/Test_1) (I///); (Interpreted as a blank line) (R///Actual value of axis 1/R/$ActualValue) (R//1/R parameter 12/W/$R[12])

Text variable J1 = ...Example 7: OPI variables [OPIVar] $ActualValue=/Channel/machineaxis/actToolbasePos[u1,1] $R[12]=/Channel/Parameter/r[u1,12]

Example 7: OPI variables USER.VAR TEST_1 1.000000 Actual value of axis1

20.00000

R parameter12

1.000000

OK

Sequence A blank line is created under test variable TEST_1. The actual value of the axis can only be read. The default value of R12 is 1.


IM4/10-269


11.02

10.10 Example program 8: Asynchronous acknowledgment mode with soft keys Soft keys can be displayed in asynchronous mode by means of default settings in the COM file, linked to the acknowledgment variable and evaluated in the parts program.

Parts program N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 N60 N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130

ACK_1 = "START" MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN3,GUD4.DEF,, ACK_1,K1","A") LABEL0: STOPRE IF MATCH (ACK_1,"SK1") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL1 IF MATCH (ACK_1,"SK2") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL2 GOTOB LABEL0 LABEL2: MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,, N1","N") G4F10 LABEL1: MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") M30

Dialog screen file (*.COM) //C3(Screen3) (S/// USER.VAR ACK_1/W/ACK_1//) [TEXTVARIABLES] K1 = ..Example8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgment mode N1 = ..Example8: Screen2

Text variable [SCREEN3] SK1 = END SK2 = Screen2

IM4/10-270


11.02


Soft key 8 Soft key 9

Example 8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgment mode

Soft key 10

USER.VAR TEST_1

START Soft key 11 Soft key 12 Soft key 13 Soft key 14

OK END Soft key 0

Soft key 15

Screen2


Soft key 3

Soft key 4


Soft key 7

Sequence The image called using the synchronous MMC command is displayed until one of the two configured soft keys is pressed: Pressing the "END" soft key immediately quits the user dialog box. Pressing the "Screen2" soft key fades in another image for 10 s.

Program • The acknowledgment variable is defined as a string. String length: >= 20 (values < 20 are only evaluated internally, entries are made in positions 17...20 if soft keys SK0 ... SK15 are pressed) • In the parts program, a value is assigned to the string and this deletes any old soft key information. • Before the parts program can branch on the basis of the acknowledgment variables, the block search must be halted using the STOPRE command. • IF Match (Ack_1," SK1") >= 0 GotoF Label1 the search is applied to a string within the string. If no soft keys have been pressed, the loop starts again.


IM4/10-271


11.02

Example 8: Screen 2 USER.VAR TEST_1

5.00000

OK

10.11 List of files for the dialog screen files Parts programs %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE1_MPF N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,A1", "N") N20 TEST_1 = 1 N25 G4 F10 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE2_MPF N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN6,GUD4.DEF,,10, T1,G1","N") N15 G4 F15 N20 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE3_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,F1", "S") N20 TEST_1 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE4_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN2,GUD4.DEF,,,C1", "S") N20 TEST_3 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30

IM4/10-272


11.02


%_N_MMC_EXAMPLE5_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN8,GUD4.DEF, GRA.BMP,,M1","S") N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE6_MPF N10 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN4,GUD4.DEF,,,H1","S") N20 TEST_2 = 12 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN5,GUD4.DEF,,,I1","S") N35 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") N40 M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE7_MPF N15 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN7,GUD4.DEF,,,J1","S") N20 TEST_1 = 5 N30 MMC("CYCLES,PICTURE_OFF","N") M30 %_N_MMC_EXAMPLE8_MPF N10 ACK_1 = "START" N20 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN3,GUD4.DEF,, ACK_1,K1","A") N30 LABEL0: N40 STOPRE N50 IF MATCH (ACK_1,"SK1") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL1 N60 IF MATCH (ACK_1,"SK2") >= 0 GOTOF LABEL2 N70 GOTOB LABEL0 N80 LABEL2: N90 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_ON,T_SK.COM,SCREEN1,GUD4.DEF,,,N1","N") N100 G4 F10 N110 LABEL1: N120 MMC("CYCLES, PICTURE_OFF","N") N130 M30 Dialog screen files (*.COM) %_N_T_SK_GR.COM ;$PATH=/_N_CST.DIR //C1(SCREEN1) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1///) //C2(SCREEN2) (R///USER.VAR TEST_2/W/TEST_2/6000,2800,8000/200,3000,7500) //C3(SCREEN3) (S///USER.VAR ACK_1/W/ACK_1///) //C4(SCREEN4) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1/W/TEST_1/4000,250,2000/6000,250,1500/) (R///USER.VAR TEST_2/W/TEST_2/4000,1000,2000/6000,1000,1500/) (R///USER.VAR SINUM_1/W/SINUM_1/0,250,2500/1900,250,2000/) (R///USER.VAR SINUM_3/W/SINUM_3/0,1000,2500/1900,1000,2000/) //C5(SCREEN5) (R///USER.VAR TEST_2/r,rj/TEST_2///) //C6(SCREEN6) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1,%1/W/TEST_1///) //C7(SCREEN7) (R///USER.VAR TEST_1/W,RJ/TEST_1///)


IM4/10-273


11.02

(I///) (R///Actual value of axis1/R/$ActualValue) (R//1/R parameter12/W/$R[12]) //C8(SCREEN8) (I///Fade in screen///4000,3000,7500) (I///Created in Paintbrush///4000,3250,7500)

Definition of text variables [TEXTVARIABLES] A1 = Example1: MMC command without acknowledgment T1 = Example2: Hold time and optional text variables C1 = Example4: Position parameters G1 = Optional text variable F1 = Example3: MMC command with synchronous acknowledgment mode H1 = Example6: Cursor assignment I1 = Access method and user variable J1 = Example7: OPI VARIABLES K1 = Example8: MMC command with asynchronous acknowledgment mode M1 = Example5: Fade in image N1 = Example8: Screen2 [SCREEN3] SK1 = END SK2 = Screen2 SK3 SK4 [OPIVar] $ActualValue=/Channel/machineaxis/actToolbasePos[u1,1] $R[12]=/Channel/Parameter

n

IM4/10-274


11.02

Starting Up HMI Advanced (IM4) I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index 6 6 Change TCP/IP Settings ...........IM4/7-188

A ac ....................................................IM4/5-69 Accelerated WIN XP booting..........IM4/4-42 Access level....................................IM4/5-69 Access rights ..................................IM4/4-45 Action log Outputting the log file ................IM4/8-252 ACTION_LOG_MODE MD 9012....................................IM4/5-124 ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA MD 9440....................................IM4/5-131 Activating data transfer via PLC Request sequence ......................IM4/5-60 Active data (frames) active immediately after change..........................IM4/5-131 Actual value display: Configurable zero system ....................................IM4/5-64 ANSI tables/fonts..........................IM4/6-179 Availability of Basic Offset Machine operating area ............IM4/5-130 Parameters operating area .......IM4/5-130

B Backing up/restoring partitions ....................IM4/7-224, 7-226, 7-229, 7-231 Basic configuration for simulation ......................................................IM4/5-124 Block search in program testing mode, multiple channels ....................IM4/5-65 Boot Manager .................................IM4/3-18 Boot virus Check ..........................................IM4/5-75 Booting

Simulation ................................. IM4/5-102 Booting ........................................... IM4/4-41

C Change DNS Extension ................. IM4/3-22 Change Domain Name .................. IM4/3-22 Change Gateway ........................... IM4/3-22 Change IP Address ........................ IM4/3-22 Change Machine Name ................ IM4/3-22 Change Network Settings menu items..................................... IM4/7-187 Change Network Settings .............. IM4/3-22 Change Subnetmask ..................... IM4/3-22 Change TCP/IP Settings................ IM4/3-22 Change tool name and duplo....... IM4/5-128 Change tool type .......................... IM4/5-128 Change User Name ....................... IM4/3-22 Changing the language................ IM4/6-180 Channel change Simulation ................................. IM4/5-105 Channel menu NETNAMES.INI ........................ IM4/5-167 CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE MD 9675 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 MD 9676 ............ IM4/5-133, 5-134, 5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 MD 9677 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 MD 9678 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 MD 9679 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES MD 9661 ................................... IM4/5-134 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE MD 9674 ................................... IM4/5-134 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM MD 9663 ................................... IM4/5-134 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL MD 9652 ................................... IM4/5-133


IM4/I-275


CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION....IM4/5-134 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT MD 9651....................................IM4/5-133 Connect to Network Drives.............IM4/3-22 Contrast ........................................IM4/5-123 Controlling booting..........................IM4/4-42 Coordinate system for actual value display...................................IM4/5-131 Coordinate system position for turning ...................................IM4/5-133 Cross-channel status display with symbols...................................IM4/5-76 CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR MD 9639....................................IM4/5-133 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9610....................................IM4/5-133 Cycles of the NC Simulation..................................IM4/5-102

11.02

End of the third RPA area ............ IM4/5-128 Error messages to the PLC............ IM4/5-61 EXIT button REGIE.INI ................................. IM4/5-167

F Files Simulation ................................. IM4/5-101 First-time boot .............................. IM4/7-190

H Hibernate.............................IM4/4-42, 5-155 HMI Advanced.............................. IM4/7-246

I D Data management (DM) limit .......IM4/7-246 Define emergency backup image ....................................IM4/7-235 Disconnect from all network drives ......................................IM4/3-22 Display channel geometry axes first ........................................IM4/5-130 Display of the axis names/axis values Simulation..................................IM4/5-103 Display resolution for INCH system of units ..................................IM4/5-124 Display resolution for spindle values....................................IM4/5-124 Display resolution .........................IM4/5-123 Display simulation data ................IM4/5-106 Display the orientation axes as Euler angle............................IM4/5-129 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9004....................................IM4/5-123 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD 9011....................................IM4/5-124 DISPLAY_TYPE MD 9001....................................IM4/5-123 Domain Name Server .....................IM4/3-22 DPSIM.INI.....................................IM4/5-113

E Effect of $MM_USER_CLASS_WRITE_ FINE......................................IM4/5-131 EMC/ESD measures ........................IM4/1-9 End of the first RPA area..............IM4/5-128 End of the second RPA area........IM4/5-128

IM4/I-276

Initial startup................................. IM4/7-190 Input monitoring Development diameter peripheral surface................................... IM4/5-110 Install From Floppy Disk ............... IM4/3-22 Installation PCU basic software .................... IM4/3-21 Installation via parallel connection in FAT16 file structure .......... IM4/7-192 Installation via parallel connection in FAT32 file structure .......... IM4/7-194

K Keyboard type .............................. IM4/5-123 KEYBOARD_STATE MD 9009 ................................... IM4/5-123 KEYBOARD_TYPE MD 9008 ................................... IM4/5-123

L Language selection soft key .......... IM4/5-67 Languages supported .................. IM4/6-178 LAYOUT_MODE MD 9021 ................................... IM4/5-124 LCD_CONTRAST MD 9000 ................................... IM4/5-123 Limit value Fine offset ................................. IM4/5-131 Fine wear .................................. IM4/5-131 Log file.......................................... IM4/8-251


11.02

M M:N assignments NETNAMES.INI.........................IM4/5-167 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST MD 9421....................................IM4/5-130 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9424....................................IM4/5-131 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL MD 9423....................................IM4/5-130 MA_ORIAXES_EULER_ANGLE_NAME MD 9244....................................IM4/5-129 MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX MD 9245....................................IM4/5-129 MA_PRESET_MODE MD 9422....................................IM4/5-130 MA_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE MD 9242....................................IM4/5-129 MA_TU_DISPLAY_BASE MD 9243....................................IM4/5-129 Manage Network Drives .................IM4/3-22 Match cycles Simulation..................................IM4/5-108 Match MD Simulation..................................IM4/5-107 Match setup data Simulation..................................IM4/5-108 Match tools Simulation..................................IM4/5-107 Matching simulation data..............IM4/5-107 MD_TEXT_SWITCH MD 9900....................................IM4/5-135 Mechanical and electrical installation ..............................IM4/2-12 Memory extension Simulation..................................IM4/5-111 Mirror tools Simulation..................................IM4/5-109 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9450....................................IM4/5-131 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451........................ IM4/5-131, 5-132 MMC .......................................... IM4/10-259 Multi-channel block search.............IM4/5-65

N NCU-specific alarm texts for several operator panels/NCUs ..........IM4/6-180 Network link Installation .................................IM4/7-184 Networking with Windows NT 4.0 .....................................IM4/3-16


Numeric basis for displaying joint position STAT....................... IM4/5-129 Numeric basis for displaying the rotary axis position TU ......... IM4/5-129

O Operator panel type ..................... IM4/5-123

P Parallel link FAT32 file structure .................. IM4/7-194 Parallel link for FAT16 file structurer ................. IM4/7-192 Parallel link for FAT32 file structure .................. IM4/7-194 Partitioning of the hard disk ........... IM4/3-19 Path for the drive names in the directory management ................IM4/5-133, 5-135 PCU 50........................................... IM4/2-13 PCU basic software ....................... IM4/3-17 Plaintexts instead of MD identifiers .............................. IM4/5-135 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE MD 9055 ................................... IM4/5-125 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER MD 9054 ................................... IM4/5-125 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT MD 9053 ................................... IM4/5-125 Position of joint STAT .................... IM4/5-64 Position of rotary axis TU............... IM4/5-64 Power ON....................................... IM4/4-40 PRESET....................................... IM4/5-130 Program selection Simulation ................................. IM4/5-104 PROGRAM_SETTINGS MD 9460 ................................... IM4/5-132 Protection level Change assigned D no. of a tool cutting edge ........................... IM4/5-126 Change tool monitoring limiting values .................................... IM4/5-126 Change tool setting offsets ....... IM4/5-126 Change tool sum offsets ........... IM4/5-126 Delete R parameters................. IM4/5-127 Program selection..................... IM4/5-127 Write fine................................... IM4/5-126 Write R parameters................... IM4/5-128 Write settable zero offset .......... IM4/5-127 Write tool adapter data ............. IM4/5-126 Write tool geometry................... IM4/5-126 Write tool wear data.................. IM4/5-126


IM4/I-277


Protection level Extended overstore ...............................IM4/5-127 Protection level for network drive1 MACHINE..................................IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive2 MACHINE..................................IM4/5-132 PROGRAM................................IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive3 MACHINE..................................IM4/5-132 PROGRAM................................IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive4 PROGRAM................................IM4/5-132 Protection level PRESET .............IM4/5-127 Protection level Program control ..IM4/5-127 Protection level Read user variables ...............................IM4/5-127 Protection level TEACH IN ...........IM4/5-127 Protection level Write setting data .......................................IM4/5-127 Protection level Write user variables ...............................IM4/5-127

R Redo .............................................IM4/5-142 REGIE.INI.....................................IM4/5-112 Rotate coordinate system Simulation..................................IM4/5-109

S Screen saver ................................IM4/5-166 se....................................................IM4/5-69 Search configurations Multi-channel block search..........IM4/5-66 Search strategy Simulation..................................IM4/5-104 Service menu Call ..............................................IM4/3-22 Service menu..................................IM4/3-18 Set action log................................IM4/8-251 Setting action mode for action log .........................................IM4/5-124 Setting parameters using ini files........................................IM4/5-114 Settings for network drives ...........IM4/7-185 Settings for saved protocol...........IM4/5-144 Shift behavior of keyboard............IM4/5-123 Show Connected Network Drives...IM4/3-22 Show server name .......................IM4/5-166 SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE MD 9052....................................IM4/5-125 SINUMERIK desktop Call ..............................................IM4/3-21

IM4/I-278

11.02

SINUMERIK desktop ..................... IM4/3-18 Skip levels .................................... IM4/5-130 Soft key properties ......................... IM4/5-68 SPIND_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9010 ................................... IM4/5-124 st .................................................... IM4/5-69 Start of the first RPA area ............ IM4/5-128 Start of the second RPA area ...... IM4/5-128 Start of the third RPA area........... IM4/5-128 STARTUP_LOGO MD 9050 ................................... IM4/5-125 Startup.......................................... IM4/6-179 STAT .............................................. IM4/5-64 Status display with symbols ........... IM4/5-76 Status ............................................. IM4/5-69 Storage of values for scratch and actual value setting............... IM4/5-129 Subsequent installation of Windows NT components .................... IM4/7-240 SW components PCU basic software .................... IM4/3-17 SYSLOCK Boot virus check ......................... IM4/5-75

T TCP/IP settings ............................ IM4/7-189 TECHNOLOGY MD 9020 ................................... IM4/5-124 Temporary save of tool center point path Simulation ................................. IM4/5-110 Test flags for internal diagnostics ........................... IM4/5-135 Toggle Logon to Domain ............... IM4/3-22 Toggle Protocol .............................. IM4/3-22 TRACE MD 9999 ................................... IM4/5-135 TU .................................................. IM4/5-64

U Undo............................................. IM4/5-142 Upper limit for tool wear input ...... IM4/5-133 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA MD 9014 ................................... IM4/5-124 User control file .............................. IM4/5-60 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9232 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9235 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9238 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA MD 9248 ................................... IM4/5-130


11.02

USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA MD 9247....................................IM4/5-130 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA MD 9221....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M MD 9516....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M MD 9517....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P MD 9511....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M MD 9518....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P MD 9512....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M MD 9519....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P MD 9513....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH MD 9213....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_PRESET MD 9220....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD MD 9211....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA MD 9200........................ IM4/5-124, 5-125 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM MD 9218....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_SYS_ZERO_OFF MD 9246....................................IM4/5-129 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN MD 9219....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE MD 9203....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD MD 9212....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP MD 9208....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT MD 9214....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA MD 9222....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9231....................................IM4/5-128


USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9234 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9237 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA MD 9215 ................................... IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT MD 9209 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO MD 9207 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC MD 9205 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO MD 9201 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME MD 9240 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC MD 9204 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS MD 9206 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_TYPE MD 9241 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR MD 9202 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA MD 9210 ................................... IM4/5-127 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9233 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9236 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9239 ................................... IM4/5-128

W Write protection For the first RPA area ............... IM4/5-128 For the second RPA area ......... IM4/5-128 For the third RPA area.............. IM4/5-128 WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK MD 9449 ................................... IM4/5-131

n


IM4/I-279


IM4/I-280

11.02


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) Contents


Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1)

1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................................TX1/1-3 1.1 Preconditions .........................................................................................................................TX1/1-4 1.2 Language families..................................................................................................................TX1/1-4 1.3 Windows tools........................................................................................................................TX1/1-5 1.4 Terms.....................................................................................................................................TX1/1-6 2 Editing Files............................................................................................................................TX1/2-11 2.1 Starting WordPad.................................................................................................................TX1/2-12 2.2 Creating a new file ...............................................................................................................TX1/2-12 2.3 Opening an existing file........................................................................................................TX1/2-13 2.4 Setting the font and language family....................................................................................TX1/2-13 2.5 Checking the settings...........................................................................................................TX1/2-16 2.6 Saving files ..........................................................................................................................TX1/2-17 3 Input of Text ...........................................................................................................................TX1/3-19 3.1 Special characters of various language families ..................................................................TX1/3-20 3.2 Numeric input.......................................................................................................................TX1/3-20 3.3 Input via the character map (Windows 95 only) ...................................................................TX1/3-21 3.4 Compound input...................................................................................................................TX1/3-23 3.5 Permanent changes to the keyboard layout (without quick switchover)...............................TX1/3-24 3.6 Variable changes to the keyboard layout (with quick switchover) ........................................TX1/3-28


TX1/i

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) Contents

11.02

3.7 Variable keyboard layout with the correct language assignment .........................................TX1/3-33 3.7.1 Supplementary conditions for the variable keyboard layout.............................................TX1/3-33 3.7.2 Concept of the keyboard language property....................................................................TX1/3-34 3.7.3 Managing the language property in word processors ......................................................TX1/3-35 3.7.4 Language property for text files in WordPad....................................................................TX1/3-36 3.7.5 Text with several language properties .............................................................................TX1/3-40 3.7.6 Restrictions with Windows 95 ..........................................................................................TX1/3-41 3.8 Special considerations when working with Greek and Cyrillic texts .....................................TX1/3-42 4 Problems and Remedies .......................................................................................................TX1/4-45 4.1 Problems and Remedies.....................................................................................................TX1/4-46 5 References .............................................................................................................................TX1/5-51 5.1 References for text creation .................................................................................................TX1/5-52 I Index .........................................................................................................................................TX1/I-53 I.1 Subject index .........................................................................................................................TX1/I-53

TX1/ii


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 1 Introduction

1

1 Introduction

1.1 Preconditions ..............................................................................TX1/1-4 1.2 Language families.......................................................................TX1/1-4 1.3 Windows tools.............................................................................TX1/1-5 1.4 Terms..........................................................................................TX1/1-6


TX1/1-3


11.02

1.1 Preconditions This document describes the procedure how to create a text with the following specifications: The text is to be created on a Microsoft Windows operating system (Windows 95 or Windows NT 4). The text is to be created in a language not identical to the language of the operating system (= default language). The present description uses German as the default language for all examples provided herein. The described procedure, however, will work just as well with all localized variants of Microsoft Windows. The text is to be created as a so-called text file, i.e. without formatting, such as font, font size, underlining etc. In other words: In addition to the text characters, the file merely contains ASCII control characters, such as Tab, CR and LF (tabulator, carriage return and line feed). The language of the text requires a different Windows code page to that of the default language, i.e. the target language does not belong to the same language family as the default language. The text file is to be coded using this code page, not as a Unicode file. The target language does not belong to the pictorial languages using a double-byte character set (Japanese, Korean, Chinese) or to the languages using so-called complex scripting (Arabic, Hebrew, Urdu, etc.). For the pictorial languages, refer to the information provided in Section 4.1 "Problems and remedies". The means used to create the text are to be as simple as possible, i.e. especially without the need of installing any additional software.

1.2 Language families A language family is a group of languages for which Microsoft operating systems use the same code page. Microsoft uses the term "language group" Language family Central European Cyrillic Western Greek Turkish Baltic Table 1-1

TX1/1-4

Windows code page Languages 1250 Albanian, Croat, Polish, Romanian, Serbian (Latin), Slovakian, Slovenian, Czech, Hungarian 1251 Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Serbian (Cyrillic), Ukrainian, White Russian 1252 German, English, Finnish, French, Indonesian, Icelandic, Italian, Netherlands, Norwegian, Portuguese, Swedish, Spanish 1253 Greek 1254 Turkish 1257 Estonian, Lettish, Lithuanian

Language families


11.02


Operating system and target language from one language family If the language of the operating system (e.g. German) belongs to the same language family as the target language (e.g. Portuguese), then some difficulties could possibly occur with the input of certain characters. Remedy: • Switch the keyboard or • use the ALT+digit combination to enter these characters, or • use the Windows "Character Map" In this case, no further problems should to occur. Section 2.4 and Chapter 3 must not be observed.

Operating system and target language from different language families If the language of the operating system (e.g. German) does not belong to the same language family as the target language (e.g. Hungarian), difficulties will occur with the input and the display of certain characters.

1.3 Windows tools Standard scope The present document describes the use of the Windows program "WordPad" and other aids which are included in the standard scope of the Microsoft Windows operating system, but which are not necessarily installed on your particular PC. The procedure described here requires that you did not exclude certain components from your Windows installation. You should have installed the following components: • • •

WordPad (required) Language support (required) Character Map (recommended)

Checking the installation The components listed above are possibly already installed on your computer. To check your installation, proceed as follows: • Open the "Control Panel" (on the "Start" menu under "Settings"). • Open the "Software" entry at "Control Panel". • Open the "Windows Setup" tab on the Software dialog box. • Make sure that the "Language Support" option is checked. Older versions of Windows 95 only offer the language support for the language families Greek, Cyrillic and Central European (incl. "East Europe"). Later versions of Windows 95 (4.00.950b, so-called OSR2, OEM Service Release 2) additionally offer Baltic and Turkish.


TX1/1-5


11.02

This component is not included in Windows NT 4. Windows NT4 already contains the language support for most of the European languages. • •

Make sure that the subcomponent "WordPad" is installed under "Accessories". To do so, select "Accessories" and click on "Details". Make sure that the "Character Map" is installed under "Accessories".

Post-installing components not yet installed If the components or subcomponents mentioned above are not yet installed, please install them before you continue. To do so, mark the appropriate checkboxes. Keep the system CD ROM ready to install the components. You may need the system CD ROM again later to install the appropriate keyboard.

Windows 98 Windows 98 includes WordPad in the version 5.00. With this version, however, it is not possible to create text files belonging to a language family different to that of the system language.

Recommendation Use Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.

1.4 Terms Default user If you have activated the user management in Windows 95, there is a special user without name and password – the default user. Copy the settings of this user to create a new user.

Logging in as the default user 1. To log in as the default user, press the ESC key when the log-in dialog box appears. When logging in, the keyboard settings of the default user are active. 2. If you are using a different keyboard layout other than that of the default user, then the processes "Start à Exit à Exit all applications and log-in using another name" will remove the current keyboard layout from the memory (with Windows 95!), without loading the keyboard layout for the default user. The log-in screenform will then no longer function.

TX1/1-6


11.02


To avoid this, proceed as follows: Before you log out, either reset the keyboard settings to the original keyboard layout or restart Windows. If the log-in screenform is already blocked, proceed as follows: Press Ctrl-Alt-Del and choose "Shut down" or press ESC (to log in as the default user) and choose "StartàExitàRestart Windows".

Diacritical characters (diacritical = distinguishing) In most cases, a relatively small supplementary character is attached to a letter to give the letter a specific stress, a specific pronunciation or even a new meaning. A list of diacritical characters is to be found in Section 3.1 "Special characters...". If the combination of basic letters and diacritical characters belongs in a languagespecific alphabet, this combination is contained in the appropriate Windows character sets (code page, Unicode) as a separate character.

Use of diacritical characters A diacritical character is used • to designate the combined character (e.g. Ģ = G cedilla, Õ = O-tilde), • for the combined input (see Section 3.4) if there is no separate key that possesses the required combined character, • for output (only in typographically compound texts): Diacritical characters and basic letter are output separately whereby any combinations are possible, e.g. with ancient languages and phonetics. In all the other cases, the combined letter is always considered as a compound unit. In some cases, however, the combined letter is wrongly also treated as the diacritical character.

Input Method Editor An aid for entering the CJK characters (CJK: abbreviation for Chinese, Japanese and Korean).

Language property A property (attribute) which is managed in Microsoft text processing programs as other text properties per character. In such cases, the program will remember the language to which the character, the character sequence, the word or the whole sentence belongs. Word and WordPad support this property, NotePad does not. In both programs, this property is not directly visible.


TX1/1-7


11.02

Saving the language property Word documents also save this property, but text files do not. This property is used (evaluated) for the spell checker (Word) and for the automatic keyboard switchover (see Section 3.7). It is specified by the default key setting (with text from text files, new files) and by the current keyboard setting (newly entered text).

Changing the language property In Word, the language property can be changed using the menu command "Toolsàlanguage". In WordPad, this property cannot be changed. In WordPad, the language property is independent of the font language family. For example, a Cyrillic character can possess the language property "German". There will be an influence only in the following cases: •

When the keyboard is automatically switched to another language, WordPad will also switch the font language family to the appropriate language family.

•

When changing the text property "Font language family", WordPad will automatically change to the appropriate keyboard setting if a keyboard setting with the appropriate language property is existing. This change, however, is undone with the next key actuation.

Managing the language property The language property is managed internally as a combination of main language and sublanguage, e.g. "French (Canada)". Microsoft sometimes uses the designation "Area scheme" for the language property whereby this term also covers properties, such as currency, date format, decimal separators etc.

Language family A language family is a group of languages which uses the same code page. This requires the use of the same basic alphabet (e.g. Latin or Cyrillic), but it does not mean that the alphabet of all languages of this group is the same. Windows NT4 and Windows 95 (with the "Language Support" installed) do not use font files stored separated by the code page, but instead so-called "Big Fonts"; these are fonts that contain the character set for several code pages, saving memory capacity for the common characters.

TX1/1-8


11.02


The selection of the appropriate subset of this total character set is not done via code page numbers, but via the language family. But there is a 1:1 assignment between Windows code page and language family. Section 1.2 contains a list of the language families in Table 1-1.

Default language The term "default language" is used in this guide for the language of the operating system, i.e. in a German Windows – German, and in an English Windows English.

Default keyboard setting One setting is defined as the default keyboard setting under "Control Panel"àKeyboard in the "Language" tab (Windows 95) or in the tab "Input" (Windows NT 4). This setting is selected when the dialog is opened. The default keyboard setting consists of a language property and a keyboard layout. This language property of the default keyboard setting need not absolutely match with the default language.

Unicode A 16-bit character set with which no more code pages are required. Unicode programs do not offer code page-dependent interpreting of characters and thus also not display in another way by selecting the font language family.

Undeletable line feed At the end of the text file, WordPad displays a last line feed which can be selected, but not deleted. The font properties of this line feed can be changed, but not the language property. When positioning the cursor at the end of the file, the font properties and the language property of this line feed will be used for the text added at the end of the file. A new, empty file also contains such an undeletable line feed. To see the undeletable line feed, select the whole empty file, as described in Section 2.2. It will not be saved with the file. n


TX1/1-9


TX1/1-10

11.02


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 2 Editing Files

2

2 Editing Files

2.1 Starting WordPad......................................................................TX1/2-12 2.2 Creating a new file ....................................................................TX1/2-12 2.3 Opening an existing file ............................................................TX1/2-13 2.4 Setting the font and language family ........................................TX1/2-13 2.5 Checking the settings ...............................................................TX1/2-16 2.6 Saving files................................................................................TX1/2-17


TX1/2-11


11.02

2.1 Starting WordPad Start the program "WordPad" (under StartàProgramsàAccessories). The procedure for editing files is different, depending on whether you want to create a new file or edit an existing file.

2.2 Creating a new file When you start WordPad, an empty document will appear. WordPad can manage multi-language texts. The new file will be treated as belonging to the language which is the default setting of the keyboard. This, however, can first be ignored if the keyboard need not be switched (see Chapter 3 "Changing the Keyboard Layout"). 1. Use the mouse to select the whole empty document by clicking on it, e.g. left of the cursor.

Fig. 2-1

à Click à

Fig. 2-2

2. Set the font and language family, as described in Section 2.4.

TX1/2-12


11.02


2.3 Opening an existing file 1.

In Word Pad, select "Open" from the "File" menu.

2.

From the "Open" dialog box, choose the setting "Text Documents (*.txt)" under "File Type". Search for the file you want to open and then click on "Open". If your file has a different extension, then select "All Documents (*.*)" from the "File Type" menu. The file will be opened. WordPad can manage multi-language texts. Since the text file does not contain language information, the text is treated as belonging in that language which is the default setting of the keyboard. This, however, can first be ignored if the keyboard need not be switched (see Chapter 3 "Changing the Keyboard Layout"). No text attributes are stored in the text file, meaning that the text will under certain circumstances be displayed using the wrong code page and that language-specific special characters will not appear correctly. Therefore, first you must set the font and the language family.

3.

To do so, choose the entry "Select All" from the "Edit" menu or press Ctrl-A to select the whole file.

4.

Set the font and language family (see Section 2.4).

2.4 Setting the font and language family -

Select an appropriate font, together with the desired language family. For better differentiation of the language-specific special characters, such as ü, ũ, ů, ű, and û or even í, ì, ı and i, it is reasonable to select a font with a fixed character width (i.e. no proportional font) and to choose the font size not too small, such as Courier New 12 or larger:

-

In addition, select the language family acc. to the list in Section 1.2.

ü, ũ, ů, ű, û, í, ì, ı, i.

!

Important These settings have to be carried out every time when the file is opened!


TX1/2-13


11.02

You can choose the font in two different ways:

Font type list box 1.

In the font type list box, the language family is specified in brackets after the font name in the editing line. All fonts that support several fonts appear several times. If the editing bar is not visible, you can use the "View" menu to activate it.

Fig. 2-3

TX1/2-14


11.02


Font type dialog box 2. Use the font type dialog box to select font type and language family separately. Choose the "Font Type" command from the "Format" menu to open the font type dialog box. From the "Font Type" menu, choose the name of the font, and from "Font", the language family of the font.

Fig. 2-4

These settings will change the appearance, but not the coding, of the existing text. Example: Character 140 Western: Œ

Cyrillic: Њ

Windows 98 Under Windows 98, the text already existing remains unchanged, i.e. the formatting with the desired font language family remains without effect. In WordPad, version 5.0, the characters are saved internally in Unicode so that changing the language family would be the same as to change the code page. Example: Unicode U+0152: Œ

Unicode U+040A: Њ

Note It is not possible to use Windows 98 for this purpose.


TX1/2-15


11.02

2.5 Checking the settings 1.

First check whether the desired font type and the language family are displayed in the editing line. If a language family other than the selected is displayed, then you possibly may have an unsuitable installation: • The language support is possibly not installed. Check whether the Windows component "Language support" is installed, as described in Section 1.3. • Your Windows system possibly includes a variant of WordPad which does not permit the language family settings you have chosen for the existing text (e.g. Windows 98, WordPad version 5.00 and higher). In this case, you should use an older Windows version, e.g. Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.

Special characters of various language families 2.

If you have opened an already existing file, then check visually whether the special characters contained therein are displayed correctly. The sequence is always 2.3 – 2.4 – 2.5. Since some special characters appear in several language families, you should focus on those characters that do not appear in other languages or language families:

Table 2-1

Special characters

Language family

Characters that only here occur

Characters that also occur in other language families

Baltic languages Central European

ėĖģĢįĮķĶļĻņŅūŪųŲ ąĄćĆęĘłŁśŚżŻ (Polish) čČěĚřŘůŮ (Czech) őŐűŰ (Hungarian) ĞĞıİşŞ

ĄĄęĘčČäÄåÅöÖõÕšŠ üÜžŽ óÓ

Turkish 3.

áÁéÉíÍýÝžŽ áÁéÉíÍóÓöÖúÚüÜ

çÇöÖüÜ

Type a special character to test whether your settings are correct. If you have opened an already existing file, no text may have been selected (for example press Ctrl-End to go to the end of the file). Use the input method ALT+numerical key group to type a special character which is displayed differently in each language.

Example: Table 2-2

TX1/2-16

Example: Special characters

Input

Language family

Display

ALT+0254

Baltic

Ž

ALT+0254 ALT+0254 ALT+0254 ALT+0254 ALT+0254

Greek Cyrillic Central European Turkish Western

Ώ Ю Ţ Ş Þ


11.02


2.6 Saving files Save the entered text as a text file: 1. Choose the command "Save As ..." from the "File" menu of WordPad.

Fig. 2-5

2. 3.

4.

Choose the settings "Text Document" and "File Type". Type the complete name with extension (e.g. ".txt") in the "File Name" field. This extension is not automatically created in WordPad. If you keep the extension ".doc", the text file will be saved with this name and interpreted as a Word document. If you click on "Save", the following message will appear at the first time:

Fig. 2-6

5.

Click here on "Text Document". Your file will now be saved as a text file. When the document is next opened, font type, language family and language property will be reinitialized, since these properties will not be saved.

Retaining the language property If you are using the variable keyboard layout with the correct language assignment (see Section 3.7), you possibly first want to maintain the language properties of the entered text to further edit the file later. To do so, select the file type "Word for Windows 6.0" when saving and use the extension ".doc". After you have finished your work, save the file as a text document to obtain the final file format.


n

TX1/2-17


TX1/2-18

11.02


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 3 Input of Text

3

3 Input of Text

3.1 Special characters of various language families ......................TX1/3-20 3.2 Numeric input............................................................................TX1/3-20 3.3 Input via the character map (Windows 95 only) .......................TX1/3-21 3.4 Compound input........................................................................TX1/3-23 3.5 Permanent changes to the keyboard layout (without quick switchover) ...............................................................................TX1/3-24 3.6 Variable changes to the keyboard layout (with quick switchover) ...............................................................................TX1/3-28 3.7 Variable keyboard layout with the correct language assignment ...............................................................................TX1/3-33 3.7.1 Supplementary conditions for the variable keyboard layout..TX1/3-33 3.7.2 Concept of the keyboard language property .........................TX1/3-34 3.7.3 Managing the language property in word processors ...........TX1/3-35 3.7.4 Language property for text files in WordPad .........................TX1/3-36 3.7.5 Text with several language properties...................................TX1/3-40 3.7.6 Restrictions with Windows 95................................................TX1/3-41 3.8 Special considerations when working with Greek and Cyrillic texts ..............................................................................TX1/3-42


TX1/3-19


11.02

3.1 Special characters of various language families Latin language family With the Latin-based language families (Baltic, Central European, Turkish, Western), you can enter most of the characters, namely the basic Latin alphabet, directly with your (e.g. Western) keyboard. Most of the special characters, such as ĄáâåçđéèÍïŁŇñöőÓťŤůū , consist of the Latin letters A-Z a-z combined with diacritical characters, such as acute , breve , cedilla , circumflex (caret) , colon (dieresis) , point , doubleacute , grave accent , háček , macron , ogonek (nasal hook, crooked hook) , squiggle , slash /, hyphen – or tilde .

´ ˝

˘

˚

¸

`

ˇ

˜

¯

ˆ

¨

˙

˛

Other characters of the alphabet are special letters (Þþ, Ðð, ß ) or ligatures (Ææ, Œœ, Ĳĳ ). These are added by language-specific abbreviations and punctuation marks, e.g. for the endings of the ordinal numbers in Spanish (ª and º ) as well as the exclamation and interrogation marks put upside down (¡ and ¿ ). The input methods described in the following will apply for the Latin-based language families without limitations.

Greek/Cyrillic language family The input of texts using Greek or Cyrillic fonts is subject to some special features to be observed. Refer to Section 3.8.

3.2 Numeric input Press the ALT key, and while holding down the key, enter zero and then the threedigit decimal coding of the desired special character on the numerical key group. Only then release the ALT key. Example (Turkish): ALT+0222 results in Ş (S with cedilla). To produce this character, you will only need the character map of the appropriate code page (see Section 1.2). You will find overview tables of the code pages e.g. at Microsoft under http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?URL=/library/books/dev intl/s2570.htm

TX1/3-20


11.02


3.3 Input via the character map (Windows 95 only) Windows NT 4 offers the Unicode character map. Here you can use this method only if you additionally switch the keyboard layout to the target language (see Section 3.7). This method is therefore described here only for Windows 95.

Selecting the character map On the Start menu, choose ProgramsàAccessoriesàCharacter Map to open the character map. From "Font Type", choose the same font type as you have selected for the text file. Depending on the version of your Windows 95 operating system, you will see the language families listed as font type variants:

Fig. 3-1

Language codes The following abbreviations are used for the language families: Baltic Baltic Greek Greek Cyrillic Cyr Central European CE ("Central Europe") Turkish Tur Western without supplement

Prerequisite In the case of later Windows 95 versions (4.00.950b, so-called OSR2, OEM Service Release 2), all language families mentioned in Section 1.2 will appear here. If you are using the original version of Windows 95 (with or without Service Pack 1), it is possible that you will not be offered these language versions. In this case, you cannot use this method.


TX1/3-21


11.02

Entering characters 1. 2. 3. 4.

Choose the characters you want to enter. After each character, click on "Select". After you have selected all characters, click on "Copy". The characters will be copied to the clipboard. Go back to WordPad and press Ctrl-V. The characters are pasted from the Clipboard into the text

Note The characters are always inserted with font size 12. The font type you have chosen in the "Character Map" is assigned to the characters as the font type setting when pasting into WordPad. If this is not the same font type as you have previously set in WordPad, a font type mix or even a font family mix will result in WordPad.

TX1/3-22


11.02


3.4 Compound input With many compound special characters, it is possible to enter first the diacritical character and then the letter. The diacritical character will first not appear and will then be combined with the letter to form a special character.

Example For example, press the keys character á (a-acute).

´ (acute) and "a" one after the other to obtain the

The keys with the diacritical characters, which are thus dealt with in a special way, are marked in the descriptions of the keyboard layouts with a special color.

Keyboard layout The table below shows some keyboard layouts for the diacritical characters supported:

X

˙

X

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X

Tilde

˛

Squiggle

˘

Double-acute

X

ˇ

Cedilla

X X X X X

ˆ

Colon

X X X X X X X

Point

X X

Ogonek

X

Breve

`

Háček

´

Circumflex

German French Polish Spanish Czech Hungarian U.S.A. International

Grave accent

Keyboard layout

Acute

Table 3-1

¨

¸

˝

˚

˜

X

X

X

X X

X X

X X

X X X X X X

X X

X

Obtain a graphical representation of your keyboard layout to learn which key combinations produce the diacritical characters.

Keyboard layout in picture form Images of the keyboard layouts can be obtained from Microsoft via the Internet at the following address: http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/keyboards/keyboards.asp If you press the space bar after the diacritical character, you will see the character itself. Note It can be reasonable to switch the keyboard layout to "U.S.A. International" which corresponds mainly to the American keyboard, but additionally contains 5 diacritical characters and provides many special characters.


TX1/3-23


11.02

3.5 Permanent changes to the keyboard layout (without quick switchover) Using the procedure described in this Section, you will change the keyboard layout for your whole user interface, i.e. also for Windows itself. This is the simplest method of changing the keyboard layout. Under Windows 95, you can only use this variant. Under Windows NT 4, you can additionally also set up the keyboard such that it can be switched over; see Section 3.6.

Changing the keyboard layout To change the keyboard layout (description of the dialogs here as in Windows 95), proceed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Keep the installation CD of your operating system ready. From the Start menu, select SettingsàControl Panel. On the "Control Panel", click on "Keyboard". Select the "Language" tab (in NT 4: "Input"). Here you will see the assignments "Keyboard Language" (left column; NT 4: "Language and Region Support") and "Layout" (right-hand column) already set up. One entry is defined by default: Your default language (the language of your operating system) with your default keyboard layout. This entry is selected and specified below as the default entry. At least one entry exists (the default entry).

Fig. 3-2

5.

TX1/3-24

Make sure that the default entry is selected and click on "Properties". The dialog box "Language Properties" (NT 4: "Language and Region Support Properties") will appear.


11.02


6.

Select there a keyboard layout which is reasonable for the target language and click on OK.

Fig. 3-3

7.

Click on "OK" to quit the dialog. Now, some keyboard drivers are possibly loaded from the CD so that you will then have to restart Windows.

Fig. 3-4

Note Important for Windows 95: Do not try to set up the target language as such using "Add"! This still requires some further prerequisites; see Section 3.6.


TX1/3-25


11.02

Result You will create text with a keyboard layout suitable for the target language. The representation of the text has already been adapted by setting the font with the language family, which was described further above. As a language property of the texts, which is managed internally by WordPad, your default language will be used as you have set it, e.g. German. In other words: WordPad assumes that your texts are German texts. If you were to transfer the text to Word by using "Copy" and "Paste", then the German spell checker would be used. If you were to set the target language as the keyboard language, then the language property would be correct, but you still would have to note some other points; see Section 3.7. Note

TX1/3-26

•

All menus will also use the changed keyboard layout. You will no longer find your key combinations with Alt and the appropriate letter key (e.g. Alt-D for the "File" menu) or Ctrl + letter key (e.g. Ctrl-V for "Paste") and could by mistake even initiate a wrong command. You should therefore better use the mouse or, in menus, the arrow keys.

•

Provide for the keyboard layout in picture form. For appropriate Internet addresses, see Section 3.4.

•

To be able to work with the keyboard layout to which you are accustomed, i.e. to switch back to your original keyboard layout, you must carry out the described procedure once again, and in this case you must select your original keyboard layout.

•

Before you shut down your PC, you must switch back to your original keyboard layout. If your screen saver is password-protected, you could have some difficulty when entering the password.

•

If you use a user identification under Windows 95, the function "Quit all applications and log in with a different name" will possibly only work if you first have switched back to your original keyboard layout.

•

For the Windows log-in, the keyboard layout set for the default user is used. To log in as the default user, press the ESC key when the log-in dialog box appears.


11.02


Change to the keyboard layout needed When is a change in the keyboard layout necessary? If you have to enter much text. If your translator is accustomed to a certain language-specific keyboard. If you are German and only need to make minor changes to existing files, you may get by using the German keyboard layout if you do not need to enter a large number of special characters which are not available on the German keyboard. You can enter such characters using the Character Map or by entering their numeric code.

Example In Hungarian, e.g., you would have to enter these characters as follows: őŐűŰ numerical öÖüÜ directly áÁéÉíÍóÓúÚ compound input


TX1/3-27


11.02

3.6 Variable changes to the keyboard layout (with quick switchover) Recommendation for Windows NT4 Our recent experience has shown that we can recommend the variable keyboard layout only for Windows NT 4. Under Windows 95, this procedure does not produce sufficient results. This procedure is only reasonable if you frequently have to switch the keyboard. Changing the keyboard layout (NT4 only): 1. Keep the installation CD of your operating system ready. 2.

From the Start menu, select SettingsàControl Panel.

3.

On the "Control Panel", click on "Keyboard".

4.

Select the "Input" tab. You will see here at least one assignment "Language and Region Support" (left-hand column) and "Keyboard Layout" (right-hand column) already set up. One entry is defined by default: Your default language (the language of your operating system) and your default keyboard layout. This entry is selected and specified below as the default entry.

Fig. 3-5

TX1/3-28


11.02


5.

Click there on "Add". The dialog box "Add Language and Region Support" will appear.

Fig. 3-6

6.

Select your standard language, e.g. German. Do not select the target language for your text!

Note Windows NT 4 will offer here once more the languages already set up, Windows 95, however, will not. 7. 8. 9.

Disable the field "Use default properties for this language and region support". Click on "OK". The dialog box "Properties of Language and region Support" will appear. Select there a keyboard layout which is reasonable for the target language and click on "OK". The layout already selected will not appear again here any more.

Fig. 3-7

10. Use "Switch Language and Region Support" to select the way how you want to switch the keyboard layout. If you select "none", you can only switch using the mouse. 11. Enable "Enable indicator on taskbar". This provides you the possibility of switching over quickly using the mouse. 12. Click on "OK" to quit the dialog. Now, some keyboard drivers are possibly loaded from the CD so that you will then have to restart Windows.


TX1/3-29


11.02

Fig. 3-8

Result You will create text with a keyboard layout suitable for the target language (for the input of your texts in a foreign language) or with your previous default keyboard layout (for the remaining operation). You can switch between the two layouts as required. The representation of the text has already been adapted by setting the font with the language family, which was described further above. As a language property of the texts, which is managed internally by WordPad, your default language, however, will be used as you have set it, e.g. German. In other words: WordPad still assumes that your texts are German texts. If you would transfer the text to Word by using "Copy" and "Paste", then the German spell checker would be used. If you would set the target language as the keyboard language, then the language property would be correct, but you still would have to observe some further points which are described in Section 3.7. Now, a small blue field with a two-letter language abbreviation should appear in the taskbar for the language you have set:

TX1/3-30


11.02


If you position the mouse pointer on this field (without clicking on it), the complete setting is displayed (language and keyboard layout).

Fig. 3-9

If you click with the left mouse button on this field, the languages you have set will be offered in a small menu. The current setting is marked by an arrow.

Fig. 3-10

If you click with the right mouse button on this field, an abbreviation of the dialog box "Keyboard Properties" is displayed above the "Properties" menu option.

Fig. 3-11

Keyboard layout specific to input window The Windows operating system will memorize the current keyboard layout for each input window. • The keyboard layout is switched automatically if you switch to another window. •

A new window is always started with the default setting. After starting WordPad, you may have to reselect the keyboard layout.

•

Enable the window in which you want to enter texts before you select the keyboard settings for this window.


TX1/3-31


11.02

Further notes •

If you unhide a dialog window in WordPad, e.g. FormatàFont Type, it may happen that the keyboard will automatically switch back to the default layout.

•

If you do not want to switch back to the second keyboard layout so often, you can also declare the new, second combination with the special keyboard layout as the default in the "Keyboard Properties" dialog box: To do so, select the second entry and click the "Set As Default" button. Please note that the display text "standard input locale: German (Germany)" does not change because only the language property, and not the keyboard layout, is displayed. Both settings have the same language property. You will identify the current default setting as follows: Click "OK" to close the dialog. Open it again. The setting now selected is the default setting. Please note that all new windows, the Start menu and the desktop will now also use the new keyboard layout. See also the warning notes with regard to screensavers in the previous Section.

Menu operation All menus will also use the changed keyboard layout. You will possibly no longer find certain key combinations with ALT and the letter key or Ctrl with a letter key or even initiate a wrong command by mistake. You should therefore use the mouse or, in menus, the arrow keys.

Keyboard layout in picture form Provide for the keyboard layout in picture form. For the appropriate Internet addresses, see Section 5.1.

Checking the keyboard layout Compare the keyboard layouts and note a key with two different assignments. If you are not sure, press this key when entering the text to test which layout is active. Example: If the German keyboard layout is active, pressing key "1" (letter group) will produce a "1", and if the Czech keyboard layout is active, a "+".

Switchover Switching method via keyboard: "Left Alt + SHIFT" and "Ctrl + SHIFT"

TX1/3-32


11.02


3.7 Variable keyboard layout with the correct language assignment The correct language assignment will here only be discussed for the sake of completeness and for better understanding; in most cases, however, the simpler variant (see Section 3.5 / 3.6) will do. This Section describes what is to be observed to make sure that the language property of the keyboard setting (not to be mixed up with the keyboard layout itself) matches with the target language.

Recommendation for Windows NT4 The variable keyboard layout with the correct language assignment is currently only recommended for Windows NT 4.

First set up the keyboard switchover feature, then start WordPad Before you enter the text you must decide whether or not you want to use this keyboard setting. When starting WordPad, e.g. with the German language property, do not try to switch it subsequently to the Polish or Hungarian language property. If you have already started WordPad, then save the work you have done until now and quit the program. Carry out the keyboard settings (see below) and restart WordPad.

3.7.1

Supplementary conditions for the variable keyboard layout You want to enter certain parts of the text with German keyboard layout and edit this later also with the German keyboard layout whereas other parts of the text are to be created and edited with the keyboard layout of the target language.

Examples This can be necessary in the following cases: • With Greek and Cyrillic texts, the Latin letters and other ASCII characters are missing in the appropriate keyboard layouts. •

With some keyboard layouts, e.g. Czech, no access to the digits is granted on the standard keyboard level.

•

The arrangement of the Latin letters deviates substantially from the arrangement to which you are accustomed to (e.g. Turkish-F keyboard layout).

•

You as a German want to prepare a part of the text and only a second part have created by your translator.


TX1/3-33


3.7.2

11.02

Concept of the keyboard language property Windows manages for the keyboard pairs consisting of language ("Language and Region Support") and keyboard layout. The set keyboard language determines which language property is assigned to the entered characters. The associated keyboard layout will determine which key produces which character. Several of such settings can be set up between which it is possible to switch. One setting is defined as the default setting. The keyboard driver assigns the entered key characters a language property. This defines that this piece of text has been created in this language. The simpler keyboard switchover variant described in the previous Sections leaves this language property of the key characters in the original status, i.e. in the standard language of the operating system (German). It is also possible to assign, e.g. a Polish "Ł" the property German.

Keyboard setting under Windows NT 4 Under Windows NT 4, several keyboard settings can possess the same language property, but different keyboard layouts must be assigned (example, see previous Section). This is not possible under Windows 95. The procedure normally intended by Microsoft assumes two or several keyboard settings possessing different language properties with a keyboard layout matching with the appropriate language:

Fig. 3-12

TX1/3-34


11.02

3.7.3


Managing the language property in word processors This language property transmitted by the keyboard is evaluated, in particular, by text processing programs, such as Word (Word 97 and higher) etc. and – similarly to other text properties – for each character separately. As examples for such text properties, you know font name, font size, font style, font language family, underlining and much more. The text property language is not so obvious. In particular, Microsoft Word and Outlook use this property to carry out the spell check for the appropriate language. WordPad also manages this language property; simple text editors, such as NotePad, however, do not.

Changing language properties Whereas in Word you can change this language property subsequently (menu "Tools"à"Language"), in WordPad, it remains to a large degree hidden and cannot be changed. Changing the language family when setting the font (see Section: 2.4) will also not change this property! Supposed, in Word, Outlook or WordPad, you position the cursor, e.g. in the center of a bold word, then all characters entered then will also be inserted in bold. The language property of the text will be treated in the same way: If several different languages are set up, then Word, Outlook and also WordPad will switch the keyboard automatically when moving the cursor so that the keyboard language matches with the language property of the cursor position. This property, however, can produce significant confusion if parts of the text are assigned a wrong language property by mistake. Caution is therefore required when using the language switchover feature.


TX1/3-35


3.7.4

11.02

Language property for text files in WordPad Word and WordPad are intended not only to manage the language property of the individual characters, but also to save them (in Word format) in order to have them available when the file is next opened. When editing the texts with WordPad as described further above, but saving them as a text file, then the language property will be lost when saving, as all the other text properties.

Language property is reinitialized When reopening the file, WordPad will reinitialize the language property of the whole text: 1. The whole text is assigned the language of the default keyboard setting as the language property. This will come into effect if you position the cursor in the already existing text. 2. At the end of each file, there is a line feed (or end of paragraph) which can be selected, but not deleted. If you are using WordPad to create a new file (see Section 2.2), this file will also receive this undeletable line feed. To see this line feed, select the entire empty document; see Section 2.2. The language of the default keyboard setting is also assigned as the language property of this line feed. This will come into effect if you position the cursor on the end of the document. This results in the following screenform: Existing text inherits the language property of the default keyboard setting when the file is opened. New text entered inherits the language property of the current keyboard setting. The undeletable line feed at the end of the file inherits the language property of the default keyboard setting when the file is opened.

Fig. 3-13

!

TX1/3-36

Important The language properties assigned in this way cannot be changed in WordPad.


11.02


Example Carry out the following example to understand the effects: 1.

Set up two keyboard settings (Windows NT 4):

Table 3-2

Taskbar

Language

Keyboard layout

DE CS

German (Germany) Czech


2. 3.

4. 5.

6.

7. 8.

Set (or keep) German as the default setting. Disable the property "Automatically to back" in the taskbar property window and enable the property "Always on top". The taskbar will thus always remain visible and you can check the language setting. (Click with the right mouse button on a free space in the taskbar and then on "Properties" to adjust the taskbar properties.) Open WordPad with an empty file. Format the empty file with "Courier New (Central European)", as described in Chapter 2, by selecting the undeletable line feed, and then select the font type. Now watch the taskbar. You will see that the keyboard has automatically been switched to Czech. Once you cancel the selection again or enter a character, the keyboard will return to German. Formatting with the font and the font language family did not change the language property of the undeletable line feed. This line feed has "inherited" the language property German from the default setting of the keyboard. Switch the keyboard, e.g. to Czech, as described in the previous Section (either click with the mouse on the symbol in the taskbar or use the key combination "Left Alt + SHIFT" or "Ctrl + SHIFT"). Type a Czech text. On the German keyboard, use the numerical keys 2345 for example to enter the Czech Haček characters ěščř. Then press the input key. The text will now look as shown below.

Fig. 3-14


TX1/3-37


11.02

Press the ArrowUp key ↑ and enter another few Czech characters in the first line. Press the ArrowDown key ↓, while watching the taskbar. The keyboard has been switched to German again! Explanation: In the second line, the undeletable last line feed has been existing until now, and this still possesses the language property German. Even the font has been switched to "Courier New (Western)"! 10. Position the cursor on the end of the first line. The keyboard will switch back, e.g. to Czech, because the first line has been entered with the language property Czech. Press the input key again and then type some Czech characters. Thus you can enter Czech without undue problems. 11. Once you position the cursor on the end of the file again, the setting will switch back to German again. 9.

12. 13. 14. 15.

16.

TX1/3-38

Example: Here you want to type the word "Haček". Only at the third letter, the "č", you will realize that the keyboard has been switched to German , because a "4" appears. You will delete the "4", switch the keyboard back to Czech and will go on typing. In the middle of the text there is thus a small piece, i.e. the first two letters "Ha" of the word, with the language property German! Whenever you position the cursor there, the keyboard will switch to German again. Save this file as a text file (see Section 2.6) and quit WordPad. Then restart WordPad and open this file. The Czech characters will now appear incorrectly. Format the whole text with "Courier New (Central European)", as described in Section 2.3. The Czech characters will appear correctly again. The keyboard is switched to Czech. Position the cursor on any position in the text (the keyboard will switch to German), switch the keyboard explicitly to Czech and enter the Czech text. However, once you position the cursor on another position in the previous text (with the mouse or the arrow keys), the keyboard will switch back to German again! Result: The old text even if with the Czech characters displayed correctly possesses the language property German! What is worse, whenever the keyboard switches to German as a result of setting the cursor, the "Courier New (Western)" font is displayed in the editing bar, even if the characters to the left and right of the cursor are formatted with "Courier New (Central European)". Only moving the cursor again (e.g. with the Right Arrow key à) will display the right font type again.


11.02


Result It is also possible that a mixture of smaller sections results which possess different language properties and font type family properties.

Remedy with NT4 With Windows 95 only possible with slight restrictions (see Section 3.7.6) 1. Set up two keyboard settings – one with German and one with your target language: Table 3-3

Taskbar

Language

Keyboard layout

DE CS



2. 3. 4.

Leave the dialog box "Keyboard Properties" first open. Select the line that contains your target language (e.g. Czech) and click on "Set as Default". Then click "OK" to quit the dialog box. Disable the property "Automatically in the back" in the taskbar property window and enable the property "Always on top". The taskbar will thus always remain visible and you can check the language setting. (Click with the right mouse button on a free space in the taskbar and then on "Properties" to adjust the taskbar properties.)

If you start WordPad, the undeletable line feed will receive the language property Czech (or of your target language) at the end of the file. If you open an existing text file with WordPad, the text already existing will also receive the language property of your target language. If you do not switch the keyboard explicitly to German, the keyboard setting will remain without changes at your foreign language.


TX1/3-39


3.7.5

11.02

Text with several language properties

Table with two language properties To create a multi-column text with which, e.g. the first column possesses the German language property and the second column, e.g. the Russian, you can proceed as follows: • Switch to the German keyboard and enter the first column of the first line. Then switch to the Russian keyboard and enter the second column: • [Text 103][Mode 28] "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" • Select the whole line, copy this to the clipboard by using Ctrl-C and paste this line several times by pressing Ctrl-V. You will obtain two columns; the left one is German, and the right one Russian, and this is not only the font language family, but also the language property so that the keyboard is switched automatically when the two text colums are edited: Table 3-4

[Text 103][Mode 28] [Text 103][Mode 28] [Text 103][Mode 28] [Text 103][Mode 28] [Text 103][Mode 28] [Text 103][Mode 28] German

"йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" "йцукенгшщзхъфывапролджэячсмить" Russian

Saving language properties If you want to save the file, keeping the language property, and you want to edit it further with its language properties, then save the file in WordPad first in the "Word for Windows 6.0" format. Only after complete editing, select "Save As ..." and then "Text file" as the file type. Note Make sure that you do not use characters by mistake which are not contained in the code page of your target language, e.g. the superior digits ¹ ² ³ and the fractions ¼ ½ ¾ are not contained in the code pages 1250 (Central European) and 1251 (Cyrillic)! If the whole text is formatted with the same font language family, you still are conform with the code page.

TX1/3-40


11.02

3.7.6


Restrictions with Windows 95 Set up the keyboard layout of your target language and set this language as the default setting, as described above. If you click on "Accept" or "OK", the following message can appear with some languages:

Fig. 3-15

The acceptance as the default language will possibly not come into effect. Restart Windows. The new default setting will then be effective. If you have the original version of Windows 95 or the original version with Service Pack 1, then the definition of the target language as the default keyboard setting will possibly only act on the undeletable line feed at the end of the file, but not on the language property of existing text when opening a text file. This restriction does not apply to version Windows 95 OSR2 ("OEM Service Release 2").


TX1/3-41


11.02

3.8 Special considerations when working with Greek and Cyrillic texts Note If you create texts in the Greek or Cyrillic language for the first time, then you MUST read this section! From the view of the language sciences, the Greek and Cyrillic alphabets are considered as separate and independent alphabets, and not as an extension of the Latin alphabet. This means that Greek and Cyrillic letters which in their appearance are identical to Latin letters, are not the same characters and may therefore also not be coded identically. This becomes partially also evident by the fact that despite uppercase letters looking identically the appropriate lowercase letters look differently. Table 3-5

Font Latin Greek Cyrillic Latin Greek Cyrillic

Examples

Character

P, Ρ, Р, H, Η, Н,

p ρ р h η н

Function Latin letter P Greek letter RHO Cyrillic letter ER Latin letter H Greek letter ETA Cyrillic letter EN

Example The effects of incorrect coding can be fatal: Supposed you write the Russian word for "NO" ("HET") using Latin letters instead of "НЕТ" using Cyrillic letters. First you will see no difference. But the search for "нет" in lowercase letters with the search option "Ignore uppercase/lowercase letters" will not find the incorrectly coded spelling.

Keyboard layout for Greek/Cyrillic font For this reason, the keyboard layouts for the Greek and Cyrillic fonts have been designed such that the Latin letters are not available at all, also not via AltGr key combinations. These keyboard layouts have normally only two levels (standard and SHIFT).

Keyboard layout for the Russian font In the Russian keyboard layout, there are additionally missing some ASCII special characters, such as #$[]{}'`|~&. With these languages, you will therefore normally not do without the variable change of the keyboard layout with the possibility of switching over, as described in Sections 3.6 and 3.7.

TX1/3-42


11.02


!

Important Switch the keyboard to Latin only if this is absolutely necessary! When doing so, do not switch over for individual letters, but only for complete words and sentences. Under no circumstances may words with different coding be used!

Note Inform yourself whether and how far certain German, English or international abbreviations (e.g. DIN/ISO) may or must be written using Latin fonts or whether a conversion (ДИН/ИСО) should rather be preferred according to the conventions of the country in question. The key assignment for combinations, such as Ctrl-C, Ctrl-V, Ctrl-Z, Alt-A, etc. normally depend on the U.S. American keyboard layout.

n


TX1/3-43


TX1/3-44

11.02


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 4 Problems and Remedies

4

4 Problems and Remedies

4.1 Problems and Remedies .........................................................TX1/4-46


TX1/4-45


11.02

4.1 Problems and Remedies Keyboard layout switches unintentionally Problem: You have set your keyboard to the target language and have already entered some texts. However, when you want to change something in another place in the text, the German keyboard layout appears to be active again. Remedy: You have set up at least two keyboard settings with different language properties. In Windows 95, set up only one keyboard setting (see Section 3.5) or, in Windows NT 4, use the same language property for all keyboard settings. Then save your file and restart WordPad.

Version of Windows 95 Problem: Identifying the version of Windows 95 Remedy: Open SettingsàControl PanelàSystem. You will find the system version on the page "General". The following version numbers are displayed here: 4.00.950 Windows 95, original version 4.00.950a Windows 95, original version, with "Service Pack 1 for Windows 95" 4.00.950b Windows 95, OEM Service Release 2 The version last mentioned is only available as a full version, not as an update.

Microsoft Word Problem: Using Microsoft Word instead of WordPad Remedy: When creating texts under Word, observe the following: • If you have already an existing text file and you want to use Word 6.0, then open the file with Word 6.0 and format the text as described in Section 2.3. • If you have already an existing text file and you want to use Word 97, then open and format the file with WordPad, as described in Section 2.3, and then save the file as a "Word for Windows 6.0" file. Open this file with Word 97. • Enter your text in Word, as described. What was told in Chapter 3 with regard to different input methods applies here analogously. • Save your text as a Word document (*.doc). When doing so, the text properties, such as font type and language property, will not be lost. • When reopening the file, you need not set the font again. • Disable the automatic conversion of straight quotes (") to smart quotes (“) also any other automatic formattings, to avoid incorrect special characters.

TX1/4-46


11.02


• If required you can change the language property of parts of the text by using "Tools"à"Change Language". • Not all Word versions switch the keyboard in dependence on the language property. In such a case, you can ignore the language property. • In Word 6.0, you will be offered the font family with language family, as described in Section 3.2. • In Word 97, you cannot set the font language family! A character displayed incorrectly is coded incorrectly. Reenter the character or check your procedure until now. Finally, convert your file to a text file, as described in the next point. If necessary create a copy of your Word document if you must edit the text later once more in Word.

Converting a Microsoft Word document to a text file Problem: Converting a Microsoft Word document to a text file. Remedy: You have created a Word document in your target language and want to convert it now to a text file. If you are using Word 6.0, you can use either Word or WordPad to open the Word file and save it as a text file. • If you are using Word 97 or a later version, then first save the file in Word as a "Word 6.0/95" document, and subsequently carry out the conversion with WordPad. • Alternatively, you can also use "Copy" and "Paste" to accept the text into WordPad. Word97 files internally use Unicode. Your last action in all cases should be a check of the result in such a way that you open and format the text file with WordPad as described in Section 2.3. When doing so, take into account the special characters and compare with the Word document. If individual special characters do not appear correctly, you possibly may have used characters that do not occur in the code page of the target language.

Hungarian keyboard layout Problem: In the Hungarian keyboard layout, the key combination AltGr+8 is marked by color as a diacritical character. However, a dot will appear in the middle (character 183 "Middle dot"). Remedy: This is obviously an error in the documentation or in the keyboard driver. In the Polish or Czech keyboard layout, this key combination will correctly produce the diacritical character "Dot above letter", e.g. for ė and ż.


TX1/4-47


11.02

WordPad 5.0 Problem: WordPad 5.0 does not work. Remedy: WordPad 5.0 uses Unicode (as Word 97, too). Here you cannot use the font language property to set the code page with which the characters are to be displayed, since the code pages are no longer used. A code page character can be interpreted with different code pages and thus also be displayed differently. A Unicode character has exactly one defined interpretation which cannot be changed.

Windows 98, Windows Millenium Edition and Windows 2000 Problem: Functionality of the described procedure for Windows 98, Windows Millennium Edition and Windows 2000 Remedy: Windows 98 comprises WordPad 5.0 with which it is not possible. The newer operating systems are fixed too much on Unicode. If necessary investigate the version of WordPad by searching for the Wordpad.exe in the Explorer and unhiding the "Properties" dialog box. WordPad is to be found at: C:\Programs\Accessories\Wordpad.exe or C:\Programs\Windows NT\Accessories\Wordpad.exe

No Central European or Cyrillic language family Problem: No font types with "Central European" etc. appear in the font type list of WordPad. Remedy: Check whether the language support is installed, as described in Chapter 1.

No Baltic or Turkish fonts Problem: Font types with "Central European", "Cyrillic" and "Greek" appear in the font type list, but not "Baltic" and "Turkish". Remedy: Your version of Windows 95 is probably too old. Use Windows 95 OSR2 (OEM Service Release 2).

TX1/4-48


11.02


Language family list box grayed out Problem: The "Font" list box for selecting the language family in the font type dialog box is hidden so that no language family can be selected. Remedy: You have selected a text area which currently still possesses different language family properties. Therefore, use the font type list box of the editing bar. You have possibly to unhide the editing bar first. Use the menu command "ViewàEditing Bar" to hide or unhide the editing bar.

Log-in no longer possible Problem: If you are using the function "StartàExitàQuit all applications and log in using different name" under Windows 95, then you can no longer log in. Remedy: If you are using a keyboard layout other than that of the default user, then the processes "Start à Quit à Quit all applications and log-in using another name" will remove the current keyboard layout from the memory (with Windows 95!), without loading the keyboard layout for the default user. The log-in screenform will then no longer function. To avoid this, proceed as follows: Before you log out, either reset the keyboard settings to the original keyboard layout or restart Windows. To go on working with the log-in screenform locked, proceed as follows: Press Ctrl-Alt-Del and choose "Shut down" or press ESC (to log in as the default user) and then choose "StartàExitàRestart Windows".

Creating text files in Chinese, Japanese or Korean Problem: Creating text files in Chinese, Japanese or Korean Remedy: To enter these languages, in particular, an Input Method Editor (IME) is required – an aid for composing the ideographs on a European keyboard which are contained in the language-specific variants of Windows. You will therefore need: A translator who is a native speaker of your target language A Windows operating system in the target language In addition, observe the following: Please distinguish carefully between Chinese (Simplified) and Chinese (Traditional). The former is used in the PR of China, whereas the latter is used in Taiwan. These two variants are coded differently and have therefore to be treated differently. You should therefore also make sure that this is clearly specified in your translation order.


TX1/4-49


11.02

Make sure that your texts are created as a text file. It is also common to use the following terms for the codings used there: Language Code page Designation Chinese (Simplified) 936 GB2312 Chinese (Traditional) 950 Big 5 Japanese 932 Shift-JIS Korean 949 Hangul, Wansung, KSC 5601

Converting CJK text files in Word format to a text file Problem: You have already received texts in Chinese, Japanese or Korean from your translator. Unfortunately, these texts are stored in the Word format. You want to create a text file from them. Remedy: Generally, you will need the language pack for the appropriate language for your operating system. With Microsoft, you can download this type of language pack only in conjunction with an Input Method Editor. Appropriate notes and possibilities of downloading can be found, e.g. at the address http://www.microsoft.com/windows/ie/features/ime.asp Please note that the IME is offered per language each with and without Language Pack. You will need, in particular, the Language Pack. A direct use of the IME on European Windows systems, i.e. a direct input of the Asian characters, can only be used directly with the Microsoft software of the latest generation, e.g. in input fields of the Internet Explorer 5, as well as with Word 2000. The IME is therefore offered especially for the Internet Explorer. After installing the appropriate Language Pack, you should be in a position of displaying the Word file correctly. To do so, format the text with an appropriate font type. These font types are included in the appropriate Language Pack: Language Font type Chinese (Simplified) MS Hei or MS Song Chinese (Traditional) MingLiU Japanese MS Mincho or MS Gothic Korean Gulim Please note that on an Asian Windows operating system the names of these font types are possibly also written in this font so that first illegible characters may appear in the font type list box. After you have assigned the whole text the right font type, correct characters should be displayed. If necessary request a fax copy of the text for comparison. First save this version of the Word file once more with another name. Now you can convert the text to a text file, as described in this Section under "Converting a Microsoft Word document to a text file". If the original text was created using Word 97 or a later version, an intermediate step is required via the format "Word 6.0", as described above.

TX1/4-50

n


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 5 References

5

5 References

5.1 References for text creation......................................................TX1/5-52


TX1/5-51

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) 5 References

11.02

5.1 References for text creation Please note that with Microsoft Web sites cannot be viewed with older versions of the Netscape Browser in some cases. In case of problems you should use a later version of Netscape or use the Internet Explorer. Book: Developing International Software for Windows 95 and Windows NT http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?URL=/library/books/dev intl/S24AC.HTM Overview tables of the Microsoft code pages http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?URL=/library/books/dev intl/s2570.htm Pictures of the keyboard layouts in Microsoft can be found at the following address: http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev/keyboards/keyboards.asp For printing: http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?URL=/library/books/dev intl/S25B8.HTM Microsoft Global Software Development http://www.microsoft.com/globaldev Unicode http://www.unicode.org A collection of useful hints is to be found at: Adam Twardoch, Europäische Universität Frankfurt (Oder) http://studweb.euv-frankfurt-o.de/twardoch/f/de/

n

TX1/5-52


11.02

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index

Dialog ........................................ TX1/2-15 List box....................................... TX1/2-14

C Character map Input ........................................... TX1/3-21 Select ......................................... TX1/3-21 Checking the installation ................ TX1/1-5 Checking the settings .................... TX1/2-16 CJK font characters ........................ TX1/1-7 Code page ....................................... TX1/1-4 Code pages Overview tables.......................... TX1/3-20 Converting a Word document to a text file ........................................ TX1/4-47 Converting Word format to text file format Chinese, Japanese, Korean....... TX1/4-50 Creating a new file ........................ TX1/2-12 Creating text files in Chinese, Japanese or Korean ...................... TX1/4-49

D Default language ............................. TX1/1-9 Default user log-in .......................... TX1/1-6 Default user ..................................... TX1/1-6 Diacritical characters Using ............................................ TX1/1-7 Diacritical characters ....................... TX1/1-7

E Entering characters ....................... TX1/3-22

F Font list in WordPad Baltic and Turkish missing ......... TX1/4-48 Fonts

G Greek/Cyrillic language family ..... TX1/3-20 Greek/Cyrillic texts Special considerations............... TX1/3-42

I Initializing the language property .. TX1/3-36 Input Method Editor ........................ TX1/1-7 Input Method Editor....................... TX1/4-49

K Keyboard assignment Variable change......................... TX1/3-28 Keyboard layout Checking ................................... TX1/3-32 for Greek/Cyrillic font ................ TX1/3-42 for Russian font.......................... TX1/3-42 Hungarian .................................. TX1/4-47 in picture form .................. TX1/3-23, 3-32 Permanent change ................... TX1/3-24 Permanent change .................... TX1/3-27 Variable, with correct language assignment ............................. TX1/3-33 Keyboard layout active.................. TX1/4-46 Keyboard layout specific to input window .......................................... TX1/3-31 Keyboard layout ............................ TX1/3-23 Keyboard setting Default.......................................... TX1/1-9 Examples ................................... TX1/3-37 Keyboard switchover under Windows NT .................... TX1/3-28 under Windows NT4 .................. TX1/3-33 Keyboard switchover..................... TX1/3-32


TX1/I-53

Creating Foreign Language Texts (TX1) I Index

L Language families ........................... TX1/1-4 Language family Language codes......................... TX1/3-21 Language family does not appear . TX1/4-48 Language family list box grayed out.................................................. TX1/4-49 Language family .............................. TX1/1-8 Language group .............................. TX1/1-4 Language properties Change....................................... TX1/3-35 Save ........................................... TX1/3-40 Two in one table ........................ TX1/3-40 Language property Change......................................... TX1/1-8 for text files in WordPad ............. TX1/3-36 Manage ........................................ TX1/1-8 Management in word processors .............................. TX1/3-35 Reinitialize .................................. TX1/3-36 Save ............................................. TX1/1-8 Language property .......................... TX1/1-7 Language support.......................... TX1/4-50 Line feed.......................................... TX1/1-9 Logging in as the default user ......... TX1/1-6 Log-in not possible ........................ TX1/4-49

M Menu operation.............................. TX1/3-32

O Open file ....................................... TX1/2-13

R Retaining the language property .. TX1/2-17

11.02

Saving language properties .......... TX1/3-40 Setting the font .............................. TX1/2-13 Setting the language family........... TX1/2-13 Special characters of various language families ......................... TX1/2-16 Special characters of various language families .......................... TX1/3-20 Suggested references................... TX1/5-52 Supplementary conditions for variable keyboard layout ............... TX1/3-33

T Text input Numeric ..................................... TX1/3-20 Text with several language properties ..................................... TX1/3-40

U Unicode ........................................... TX1/1-9

W Windows 95 Identifying the version................ TX1/4-46 Windows 98, Windows Millenium Edition, Windows 2000 ................. TX1/4-48 Windows tools Scope........................................... TX1/1-5 Windows95 Restrictions ................................ TX1/3-41 Windows98...................................... TX1/1-6 Word Creating texts............................. TX1/4-46 WordPad Language properties.................. TX1/3-36 Starting....................................... TX1/2-12 WordPad 5.0 ................................. TX1/4-48

S Saving files ................................... TX1/2-17 n

TX1/I-54


11.02

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide (IAM) Appendix

A A Appendix A.1 References General Documentation /BU/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802S, C, D Ordering Information Catalog NC 60 Order No.: E86060-K4460-A101-A9-7600

/IKPI/

Catalog IK PI 2000 Industrial Communication and Field Devices Order No. of bound edition: E86060-K6710-A101-A9-7600 Order No. of single-sheet edition: E86060-K6710-A100-A9-7600

/ST7/

SIMATIC SIMATIC S7 Programmable Logic Controllers Catalog ST 70 Order No.: E86060-K4670-A111-A3-7600

/Z/

SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE Accessories and Equipment for Special-Purpose Machines Catalog NC Z Order No.: E86060-K4490-A001-A8-7600

Electronic Documentation /CD1/

The SINUMERIK System DOC ON CD (includes all SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/802 and SIMODRIVE publications) Order No.: 6FC5 298-6CA00-0BG3

(11.02 Edition)


A-1


11.02

User Documentation /AUK/

/AUP/

/BA/

/BAD/

/BEM/

/BAH/

/BAK/

/BAM/

/BAS/

/BAT/

/BNM/

/CAD/

A-2

SINUMERIK 840D/810D AutoTurn Short Operating Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA30-0BP3 SINUMERIK 840D/810D AutoTurn Graphic Programming System Operator's Guide Programming / Setup Order No.: 6FC5 298-4AA40-0BP3

(10.02 Edition)

(02.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D MMC Operator's Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA00-0BP0

(10.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator's Guide HMI Advanced Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF00-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator's Guide HMI Embedded Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC00-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator's Guide HT 6 Order No.: 6FC5 298-0AD60-0BP2

(06.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Short Operating Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA10-0BP0

(08.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 810D/840D Operator's Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD00-0BP0

(08.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator's Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD10-0BP1

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Operator's Guide ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2

(03.03 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Measuring Cycles User's Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA70-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator's Guide CAD Reader Order No.: (included in online Help)

(03.02 Edition)


11.02

/DA/

/KAM/

/KAS/

/KAT/

/PG/

/PGA/

/PGK/

/PGM/

/PGT/

/PGZ/


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Diagnostics Guide Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AA20-0BP3

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD40-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 298-5AD30-0BP0

(04.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Short Guide ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AF20-0BP0

(07.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Fundamentals Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB00-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Advanced Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB10-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Short Guide Programming Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB30-0BP1

(02.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide ISO Milling Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC20-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide ISO Turning Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AC10-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Programming Guide Cycles Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AB40-0BP2

(11.02 Edition)

/PI/

PCIN 4.4 Software for Data Transfer to/from MMC Module Order No.: 6FX2 060-4AA00-4XB0 (GE, EN, FR) Order from: WK Fürth

/SYI/

SINUMERIK 840Di System Overview Order No.: 6FC5 298-6AE40-0BP0


(02.01 Edition)

A-3


11.02

Manufacturer/Service Documentation a) Lists /LIS/

b) Hardware /BH/

/BHA/

/EMV/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/ SIMODRIVE 611D Lists Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB70-0BP3

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Operator Components Manual (HW) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AA50-0BP2 SIMODRIVE Sensor Absolute Position Sensor with PROFIBUS DP User's Guide (HW) Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB10-0YP1 SINUMERIK, SIROTEC, SIMODRIVE EMC Installation Guideline Planning Guide (HW) Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AD30-0BP1

(11.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

(02.99 Edition)

(06.99 Edition)

/GHA/

ADI4 – Analog Drive Interface for 4 Axes Manual Order No.: 6FC5 297-0BA01-0BP0

/PHC/

SINUMERIK 810D Configuring Manual (HW) Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AD10-0BP1

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D Configuring Manual NCU 561.2-573.4 (HW) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC10-0BP2

(10.02 Edition)

/PHD/

/PMH/

/PMHS/

A-4

SIMODRIVE Sensor Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H Configuring/Installation Guide (HW) Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB30-0BP1 SIMODRIVE Measuring System for Main Spindle Drives Configuring/Installation Guide Order No.: 6SN1197-0AB00-0YP3

(09.02 Edition)

(07.02 Edition)

(12.00 Edition)


11.02

c) Software /FB1/


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/FM-NC Description of Functions Basic Machine (Part 1) (the individual sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC20-0BP2 A2 A3 B1 B2 D1 D2 F1 G2 H2 K1 K2 K4 N2 P1 P3 R1 S1 V1 W1

/FB2/

Various Interface Signals Axis Monitoring, Protection Zones Continuous Path Mode, Exact Stop and Look Ahead Acceleration Diagnostic Tools Interactive Programming Travel to Fixed Stop Velocities, Setpoint/Actual-Value Systems, Closed-Loop Control Output of Auxiliary Functions to PLC Mode Group, Channels, Program Operation Mode Axes, Coordinate Systems, Frames Actual-Value System for Workpiece, External Zero Offset Communication EMERGENCY STOP Transverse Axes Basic PLC Program Reference Point Approach Spindles Feeds Tool Compensation

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions Extended Functions (Part 2) including FM-NC: Turning, Stepper Motor (the individual sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC30-0BP2 A4 B3 B4 F3 H1 K3 K5 L1 M1 M5 N3 N4 P2 P5 R2 S3 S5 S6 S7 T1 W3 W4

(11.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

Digital and Analog NCK I/Os Several Operator Panels and NCUs Operation via PC/PG Remote Diagnostics Jog with/without Handwheel Compensations Mode Groups, Channels, Axis Replacement FM-NC Local Bus Kinematic Transformation Measurements Software Cams, Position Switching Signals Punching and Nibbling Positioning Axes Oscillation Rotary Axes Synchronous Spindles Synchronized Actions (up to and including SW 3) Stepper Motor Control Memory Configuration Indexing Axes Tool Change Grinding


A-5


/FB3/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions, Special Functions (Part 3) (the individual sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC80-0BP2 F2 G1 G3 K6 M3 S8 T3 TE0 TE1 TE2 TE3 TE4 TE5 TE6 TE7 TE8 V2 W5

/FBA/

/FBAN/

/FBD/

(11.02 Edition)

Operational Messages/Alarm Reactions Diagnostic Functions Speed Control Loop Extended Drive Functions Enable Commands Encoder Parameterization Linear Motor MD Calculation of Motor/Power Section Parameters and Controller Data Current Control Loop Monitors/Limitations

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 DIGITAL Description of Functions ANA MODULE Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB80-0BP0

(02.00 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions Digitizing Order No.: 6FC5 297-4AC50-0BP0

(07.99 Edition)

DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4

A-6

(11.02 Edition)

3-Axis to 5-Axis Transformation Gantry Axes Cycle Times Contour Tunnel Monitoring Coupled Motion and Leading Value Coupling Constant Workpiece Speed for Centerless Grinding Tangential Control Installation and Activation of Compile cycles Clearance Control Analog Axis Master-Slave for drives Transformation Package Handling Setpoint Exchange MCS Coupling Retrace Support Path-Synchronous Switch Signal Preprocessing 3D Tool Radius Compensation

SIMODRIVE 611D/SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions, Drive Functions (the individual sections are listed below) Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA80-0BP0 DB1 DD1 DD2 DE1 DF1 DG1 DL1 DM1 DS1 DÜ1

11.02

Start-Up Scan with Tactile Sensor (scancad scan) Scan with Laser (scancad laser) Writing Milling Programs (scancad mill)


11.02

/FBDN/

/FBDT/

/FBFA/

/FBFE/

/FBH/

/FBHLA/

/FBMA/

/FBO/


SINUMERIK 840D/810D IT Solutions NC Data Management Server (DNC NT-2000) Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE50-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D IT Solutions NC Data Transfer via Network SinDnC-FS, SinDNC-DB Version 5.1 Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AE70-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D ISO Dialects for SINUMERIK Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE10-0BP3 SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Remote Diagnosis Order No.: 6FC5 297-0AF00-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI Configuring Package Order No.: (supplied with the software) Part 1 User's Guide Part 2 Description of Functions

(09.01 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611 digital Description of Functions HLA Module Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB60-0BP3

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ManualTurn Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD50-0BP2

(08.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Configuring OP 030 Operator Interface Description of Functions (the individual sections are listed below) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC40-0BP0 BA EU PSE IK

/FBP/

(01.02 Edition)

(09.01 Edition)

Operator's Guide Development Environment (Configuring Package) Introduction to Configuring of Operator Interface Screen Kit: Software Update and Configuration

SINUMERIK 840D Description of Functions C-PLC Programming Order No.: 6FC5 297-3AB60-0BP0


(03.96 Edition)

A-7


/FBR/

/FBSI/

/FBSP/

/FBST/

/FBSY/

/FBT/

/FBTC/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D IT Solutions Computer Link SINCOM Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD60-0BP0 NFL Host Computer Interface NPL PLC/NCK Interface SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB80-0BP1

11.02

(09.01 Edition)

(07.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions ShopMill Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD80-0BP1

(05.03 Edition)

SIMATIC Description of Functions FM STEPDRIVE/SIMOSTEP Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA70-0YP4

(01.01 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Synchronized Actions Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD40-0BP2

(10.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions ShopTurn Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD70-0BP1

(01.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/810D IT Solutions SINUMERIK Tool Data Communication SinTDC Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-5AF30-0BP0

(01.02 Edition)

/FBTD/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D IT Solutions (02.01 Edition) SINTDI Tool Information System (SinTDI) with Online Help Description of Functions Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE00-0BP0

/FBU/

SIMODRIVE 611 universal/universal E Closed-Loop Control Component for Speed Control and Positioning Description of Functions Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB20-0BP6

/FBW/

/FBWI/

A-8

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Description of Functions Tool Management Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AC60-0BP1

(08.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Description of Functions WinTPM (01.03 Edition) Order No.: The document is an integral part of the software


11.02

/HBA/

/HBI/


SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Manual @Event Order No.: 6AU1900-0CL20-0BA0

(03.02 Edition)

SINUMERIK 840Di Manual Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE50-0BP1

(09.02 Edition)

/INC/

SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D Commissioning Tool SINUMERIK SinCOM NC (02.02 Edition) System Description Order No.: (an integral part of the online Help for the start-up tool)

/PFK/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide 1FT5/1FT6/1FK6 Motors AC Servo Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC20-0BP0

(02.03 Edition)

/PJE/

SINUMERIK 840D/810D Configuring Package HMI Embedded (08.01 Edition) Description of Functions: Software Update, Configuration, Installation Order No.: 6FC5 297-6EA10-0BP0 (the document CS Configuring Syntax is supplied with the software and available as a pdf file)

/PJFE/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Built-In Synchronous Motors 1FE1 Three-Phase AC Motors for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC00-0BP3

/PJLM/

/PJM/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Linear Motors 1FN1, 1FN3 ALL General Information about Linear Motors 1FN1 1FN1 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor 1FN3 1FN3 Three-Phase AC Linear Motor CON Connections Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AB70-0BP4

(11.02 Edition)

(06.02 Edition)

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Motors (11.00 Edition) Three-Phase AC Motors for Feed and Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA20-0BP5


A-9


/PJTM/

/PJU/

/PMS/

/POS1/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide Integrated Torque Motors 1FW6 Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD00-0BP0 SIMODRIVE 611 Planning Guide Converters Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AA00-0BP6 SIMODRIVE Planning Guide ECO Motor Spindle for Main Spindle Drives Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD04-0BP0 SIMODRIVE POSMO A User's Guide Distributed Positioning Motor on PROFIBUS DP Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA00-0BP3

/POS2/

SIMODRIVE POSMO A Installation Guide (supplied with every POSMO A)

/POS3/

SIMODRIVE POSMO SI/CD/CA Distributed Servo Drive Systems, User's Guide Order No.: 6SN2 197-0AA20-0BP3

/PPH/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide AC Induction Motors for Main Spindle Drives 1PH2-/1PH4-/1PH7 Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AC60-0BP0

11.02

(08.02 Edition)

(08.02 Edition)

(04.02 Edition)

(08.02 Edition)

(08.02 Edition)

(12.01 Edition)

/PPM/

SIMODRIVE Planning Guide (10.01 Edition) Hollow-Shaft Motors for Main Spindle Drives 1PM4 and 1PM6 Order No.: 6SN1 197-0AD03-0BP0

/S7H/

SIMATIC S7-300 – Manual: CPU Data (HW) – Reference Manual: Module Data – Manual: Technological Functions – Installation Manual Order No.: 6ES7 398-8AA03-8BA0

/S7HT/

/S7HR/

/S7S/

A-10

(2002 Edition)

SIMATIC S7-300 STEP7 Manual, Fundamentals, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BA0

(03.97 Edition)

SIMATIC S7-300 STEP7 Manual, Reference Manuals, V. 3.1 Order No.: 6ES7 810-4CA02-8BR0

(03.97 Edition)

SIMATIC S7-300 FM 353 Positioning Module for Stepper Drive Order together with Configuring Package

(04.97 Edition)


11.02

/S7L/

/S7M/

/SP/

d) Installation and Start-up /IAA/

/IAC/

/IAD/

/IAM/


SIMATIC S7-300 FM 354 Positioning Module for Servo Drive Order together with Configuring Package

(04.97 Edition)

SIMATIC S7-300 FM 357.2 Multimodule for Servo or Stepper Drive Order together with Configuring Package

(01.01 Edition)

SIMODRIVE 611-A/611-D SimoPro 3.1 Program for Configuring Machine Tool Drives Order No.: 6SC6 111-6PC00-0AA❏ Order from: WK Fürth

SIMODRIVE 611A Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6SN 1197-0AA60-0BP6 SIMODRIVE 810D Installation & Start-up Guide (including description of start-up software for SIMODRIVE 611D) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AD20-0BP0 SINUMERIK 840D/SIMODRIVE 611D Installation and Start-Up Guide (incl. description of SIMODRIVE 611D start-up software) Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AB10-0BP2 SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2 AE1 BE1 HE1 IM2 IM4 TX1

(10.00 Edition)

(03.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

(11.02 Edition)

Updates/Supplements Expanding the Operator Interface Online Help Starting up HMI Embedded (PCU 20) Starting up HMI Advanced (PCU 50) Creating Foreign Language Texts

n


A-11


A-12

11.02


11.02

I Index

I

I Index I.1 Subject index / //A ..................................................BE1/2-60 //B ..................................................BE1/3-87 //M..................................................BE1/2-23 //S ........................................ BE1/2-18, 2-35

6 6 Change TCP/IP Settings ...........IM4/7-188

A ac ......................... BE1/2-31, 2-52, IM4/5-69 Accelerated WIN XP booting..........IM4/4-42 Access level Softkey Basic ZO ........................IM2/5-63 Access level......... BE1/2-31, 2-42, IM4/5-69 Access mode Direct ..........................................BE1/2-62 Search ........................................BE1/2-62 Access protection Softkey Basic ZO ........................IM2/5-63 Access rights ..................................IM4/4-45 Access soft key.................... BE1/2-14, 2-18 Access soft keys..........................BE1/7-160 Accessories ......................................IM2/1-8 Action log Output log file, SINUMERIK HT6 ..................................... IM2/11-205 Outputting the log file ................IM4/8-252 Reading out the log file .............IM2/9-158 Set, SINUMERIK HT6 ............ IM2/11-205 Setting .......................................IM2/9-158 SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-203 Action log......................................IM2/9-156 ACTION_LOG_MODE MD 9012....................................IM4/5-124

ACTION_LOG_MODE 9012 ........................................ IM2/11-203 MD9012 .................................... IM2/9-156 Action .................................BE1/3-74, 5-123 ACTION-LOG-MODE MD 9012 ..................................... IM2/5-78 ACTIVATE _SEL_USER_DATA MD 9440 ..................................... IM2/5-86 ACTIVATE_SEL_USER_DATA MD 9440 ................................... IM4/5-131 Activating a tool offset immediately ............................ IM2/5-61 Activating data transfer via PLC Request sequence...................... IM4/5-60 Activating data transfer via PLC... IM2/8-149 Active data (frames) active immediately after change ..... IM4/5-131 Actual value display: Configurable zero system ............................ IM4/5-64 Actual value setting........................ IM2/5-64 ADDHTX ....................................... BE1/2-49 al ................................................... BE1/2-52 Alarm list Properties, SINUMERIK HT6 ........................IM2/11-194, 11-195 Alarm text files MMC 103 ................................. BE1/7-170 Alarm text files for HT6 .............. IM2/11-192 Alarm text variables ...................... HE1/1-17 Alarm texts .................................... IM2/6-92 Alarms Comments ................................. HE1/2-31 Analog spindles ............................. IM2/5-61 ANSI tables/fonts ........................ IM4/6-179 Application software SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-180 Array status ................................... BE1/2-65 Array.............................................. BE1/2-60 Arrray access ................................ BE1/2-62 ASCII editor................................... BE1/2-14 ATA card .............................IM2/3-28, 7-115


I-13

I Index

11.02

Attributes ............................. BE1/2-26, 2-42 Auxiliary variable ...........................BE1/2-54 Availability of Basic Offset Machine operating area ............IM4/5-130 Parameters operating area .......IM4/5-130

B Background color...........................BE1/2-43 Backing up data PCU20 with ATA/Compact Flash .....................................IM2/8-154 With HMI Embedded WIN32 with the PCU50 .....................IM2/8-153 Backing up/restoring partitions ...IM4/7-224, 7-226, 7-229, 7-231 Basic configuration for simulation..............................IM4/5-124 Basic offset .....................................IM2/5-63 bc ...................................................BE1/2-53 Binary representation ...................BE1/3-97 Block search in program testing mode, multiple channels ....................IM4/5-65 Block .............................................BE1/3-87 Boot Manager .................................IM4/3-18 Boot virus Check ..........................................IM4/5-75 Booting Simulation..................................IM4/5-102 Booting ...........................................IM4/4-41 Bus address ...................................IM2/3-21

C CALL..............................................BE1/3-88 Category ID ...................................HE1/1-14 Category ........................................HE1/1-12 Change DNS Extension ................IM4/3-22 Change Domain Name ..................IM4/3-22 Change Gateway ...........................IM4/3-22 Change IP Address .......................IM4/3-22 Change Language SINUMERIK HT6 .................. IM2/11-210 Change Language .........................IM2/5-52 Change Machine Name..................IM4/3-22 Change Network Settings menu items ....................................IM4/7-187 Change Network Settings ..............IM4/3-22 Change of operating area ...........BE1/6-149 Change Subnetmask .....................IM4/3-22 Change TCP/IP Settings ...............IM4/3-22 Change tool name and duplo .......IM4/5-128 Change tool type ..........................IM4/5-128 Change User Name .......................IM4/3-22

I-14

CHANGE ...................................... BE1/3-75 Changes from SW 4.3 (12.97) to SW 4.4 (05.98) ........................ AE1/1-3 Changes from SW 4.4 (05.98) to SW 5.1 (12.98) ....................... AE1/2-9 Changes from SW 5.1 (12.98) to SW 5.2 (08.99) ..................... AE1/3-13 Changes from SW 5.2 (08.99) to SW 5.3 (04.00) ..................... AE1/4-19 Changes from SW 5.3 (04.00) to SW 6.1/6.2 (10.00) ............... AE1/5-23 Changes from SW 6.1 (NC) (10.00) to SW 6.3 (11.01) and from HMI-SW 6.1 to SW 6.2 ......... AE1/6-29 Changes from SW 6.3 (NC) (09.01) to SW 6.4 (11.02) and from SW 6.2 (HMI) to SW 6.3 .................... AE1/7-33 Changing the language ............... IM4/6-180 Channel change Simulation ................................. IM4/5-105 Channel menu NETNAMES.INI ........................ IM4/5-167 Character map Input .......................................... TX1/3-21 Select ........................................ TX1/3-21 Checking the installation ................. TX1/1-5 Checking the settings.................... TX1/2-16 CJK font characters ........................ TX1/1-7 CLRHTX........................................ BE1/2-49 CM................................................. BE1/2-26 CMM_CUSTOMER_START_PICTURE MD 9675 .................................. IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 MD 9676 ............ IM4/5-133, 5-134, 5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH1 MD 9676 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH2 MD 9677 ..................................... IM2/5-89 MD 9677 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 MD 9678 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH3 MD 9678 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 MD 9679 ................................... IM4/5-135 CMM_DIRECTORY_SOFTKEY_PATH4 MD 9679 ..................................... IM2/5-89 CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES MD 9661 ................................... IM4/5-134 CMM_ENABLE_CUSTOMER_M_CODES MD 9661 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE MD 9674 ................................... IM4/5-134 CMM_ENABLE_TOOL_MAGAZINE MD 9674 ..................................... IM2/5-89


11.02

CMM_FIXED_TOOL_PLACE MD 9672......................................IM2/5-88 CMM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9650......................................IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM MD 9663....................................IM4/5-134 CMM_TOOL_DISPLAY_IN_DIAM MD 9663......................................IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL MD 9652....................................IM4/5-133 CMM_TOOL_LIFE_CONTROL MD 9652......................................IM2/5-88 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION MD 9673......................................IM2/5-89 CMM_TOOL_LOAD_STATION....IM4/5-134 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT MD 9651....................................IM4/5-133 CMM_TOOL_MANAGEMENT MD 9651......................................IM2/5-88 Code page ....................................... TX1/1-4 Code pages Overview tables ......................... TX1/3-20 Color table ..................................BE1/8-183 Colors ............................................BE1/2-43 Column alignment..........................BE1/2-26 Column index.................................BE1/2-62 Comment .......................................BE1/1-10 COMMON.COM ..........................BE1/7-154 Communication...............................IM2/3-18 Compact Flash card .....................IM2/7-115 Compare mode..............................BE1/2-62 Configuration Network Manager ........................IM2/3-36 Configuration example ................BE1/5-123 Configuration files MMC 100.2 ..............................BE1/7-165 MMC 103 .................................BE1/7-170 Configuration ..............................BE1/5-128 Configuring Caps Lock ..................IM2/5-51 Configuring rules ...........................BE1/2-23 Configuring text files in foreign languages SINUMERIK HT6 ...............IM2/11-196 Configuring text files in foreign languages ...............................IM2/6-96 TCP/IP protocol ......................IM2/3-32 Connect to Network Drives ............IM4/3-22 Constants .....................................BE1/3-99 Contrast ........................................IM4/5-123 Control characters ......................BE1/7-154 Control file COMMON.COM ......................BE1/7-156 Controlling booting..........................IM4/4-42 Converting a Word document to a text file.................................... TX1/4-47

I Index

Converting Word format to text file format Chinese, Japanese, Korean ..... TX1/4-50 Coordinate system for milling ........ IM2/5-68 Coordinate system for actual value display .................................. IM4/5-131 Coordinate system position for turning .................................. IM4/5-133 Coordinate systems ...................... IM2/5-68 CP ................................................. BE1/3-94 Creating a new file ........................ TX1/2-12 Creating text files in Chinese, Japanese or Korean .............. TX1/4-49 Cross-channel status display with symbols .................................. IM4/5-76 CTM_ANGLE_REFERENCE_AXIS MD 9632 .................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_CROSS_AX_DIAMETER_ON MD 9611 .................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_G91_DIAMETER_ON MD 9619 .................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_MAX_TOOL_WEAR MD 9639 ................................... IM4/5-133 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9610 ................................... IM4/5-133 CTM_POS_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9610 .................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_VIS_AREA MD 9602 ..................................... IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_X MD 9600 .................................... IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_DEF_Y MD 9601 ..................................... IM2/5-87 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_VIS_AREA MD 9605 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_X MD 9603 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_MAX_Y MD 9604 ..................................... IM2/5-88 CTM_SIMULATION_TIME_NEW_POS MD 9606 .................................... IM2/5-88 custom.com ................................ BE1/6-148 CVAR ........................................... BE1/3-84 Cycles of the NC Simulation ................................. IM4/5-102

D D number ...................................... IM2/5-62 Data backup General .................................... IM2/8-142 HMI Embedded ........................ IM2/8-144 Transmission errors ................. IM2/8-147 Data management (DM) limit ....... IM4/7-246


I-15

I Index

11.02

Default language ............................ TX1/1-9 Default user log-in ........................... TX1/1-6 Default user ..................................... TX1/1-6 Define emergency backup image ....................................IM4/7-235 Descriptive text ..............................HE1/1-16 Diacritical characters Using ........................................... TX1/1-7 Diacritical characters ....................... TX1/1-7 Dialog line......................................BE1/3-85 Directories ...................................BE1/5-119 Disconnect from all network drives ......................................IM4/3-22 Display channel geometry axes first ........................................IM4/5-130 Display deselection........................BE1/2-21 Display line ....................................BE1/2-23 Display log file SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-205 Display number..............................BE1/2-19 Display of the axis names/axis values Simulation..................................IM4/5-103 Display resolution for INCH system of units ..................................IM4/5-124 Display resolution for spindle values....................................IM4/5-124 Display resolution .........................IM4/5-123 Display selection............................BE1/2-21 Display simulation data ................IM4/5-106 Display the orientation axes as Euler angle............................IM4/5-129 Display the user list Network Manager .......................IM2/3-38 DISPLAY_BACKLIGHT MD 9025 .....................................IM2/5-78 DISPLAY_BLACK_TIME MD 9006 .....................................IM2/5-77 DISPLAY_MODEMD 9002 ...........................................IM2/5-77 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9004....................................IM4/5-123 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9004 .....................................IM2/5-77 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD 9011....................................IM4/5-124 DISPLAY_RESOLUTION_INCH MD 9011......................................IM2/5-78 DISPLAY_TYPE MD 9001....................................IM4/5-123 DISPLAY_TYPE MD 9001......................................IM2/5-77 Display...........................................BE1/2-46 Displaying axes ..............................IM2/5-66 Displaying axis systems, SINUMERIK HT6 .............. IM2/11-211

I-16

Displays......................................... BE1/2-56 Distribution Configuration files .................... BE1/7-165 DLGL............................................. BE1/3-86 DLL file .......................................... BE1/3-97 Documentation ................................. IM2/1-9 Domain Name Server ................... IM4/3-22 DOS conventions ............................ BE1/1-9 DP ................................................. BE1/3-93 DPSIM.INI .................................... IM4/5-113

E Edit the user list Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-38 Editing the resource display........... IM2/5-70 Editor settings ................................ IM2/5-53 Effect of $MM_USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE........................ IM4/5-131 ELSE .......................................... BE1/3-100 EMC/ESD measures SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-179 EMC/ESD measures........................ IM4/1-9 End of the first RPA area ............. IM4/5-128 End of the second RPA area ....... IM4/5-128 End of the third RPA area ............ IM4/5-128 ENDIF ......................................... BE1/3-100 Entering characters ....................... TX1/3-22 ENTRY ........................................ BE1/3-107 Environment variable For Win32 ................................. IM2/7-122 For Windows 95/98................... IM2/7-122 For Windows NT/XP ................. IM2/7-122 EP ................................................. BE1/3-93 ERR............................................. BE1/3-106 Error Display selection........................ BE1/2-22 Error messages to the PLC HMI Embedded ........................ IM2/8-152 Error messages to the PLC............ IM4/5-61 Error variable .............................. BE1/3-106 ESD precautions ........................... IM2/1-10 EVAL ............................................ BE1/3-86 Event ............................................ BE1/3-74 EXE ............................................... BE1/2-38 EXIT button REGIE.INI ................................. IM4/5-167 EXIT ....................................BE1/2-37, 3-81 EXITLS.......................................... BE1/2-38 EXPONENT_LIMIT MD 9030 .................................... IM2/5-78 EXPONENT_SCIENCE MD 9031 .................................... IM2/5-78 Exponential representation ........... BE1/3-97


11.02

EXTCALL .......................................IM2/3-42 External functions .........................BE1/3-96

F FALSE ...........................................BE1/3-99 fc....................................................BE1/2-53 FCT................................................BE1/3-96 Features Custom .....................................BE1/6-146 File Check .........................................BE1/3-93 Copy ...........................................BE1/3-94 Delete .........................................BE1/3-93 Select .........................................BE1/3-93 Transfer ......................................BE1/3-92 File functions .................................BE1/3-89 Files Simulation..................................IM4/5-101 Find text.......................................BE1/4-111 Fine offset of tools in case of wear ....................................... IM2/5-61 FIRST_LANGUAGE MD 9003 .....................................IM2/5-77 First-time boot ..............................IM4/7-190 FOC .............................................BE1/3-106 Focus...........................................BE1/3-106 FOCUS ..........................................BE1/3-76 Folder sharing for PCU ..................IM2/3-39 Font list in WordPad Baltic and Turkish missing ......... TX1/4-48 Font size ........................................BE1/2-42 Fonts Dialog ......................................... TX1/2-15 List box ....................................... TX1/2-14 Foreground color ...........................BE1/2-43 Form Multi-column...............................BE1/2-51 Free contour programming.............IM2/5-67 fs....................................................BE1/2-52 Functions .......................................BE1/3-79

G GC .................................................BE1/3-89 Graph.............................................BE1/2-26 Graphic position.............................BE1/2-26 Graphics text .................................BE1/2-41 Greek/Cyrillic language family....... TX1/3-20 Greek/Cyrillic texts Special considerations ............... TX1/3-42 gt....................................................BE1/2-52

I Index

H Hardkey blocks ........................... BE1/5-117 Hardkey event ............................. BE1/5-120 Hardkeys ..................................... BE1/5-117 Hardware Requirements ............................. IM2/3-20 Hardware/software requirements..... IM2/1-8 Hd.................................................. BE1/2-27 Header .......................................... BE1/2-26 Help function ................ HE1/1-7, 1-17, 2-26 Help loop ....................................... BE1/2-44 Help references Multiple....................................... HE1/1-16 Help screen ................................... BE1/2-43 Help......................................BE1/2-43, 2-49 Hexadecimal representation ......... BE1/3-97 Hibernate.............................IM4/4-42, 5-155 Hiding axes .................................... IM2/5-65 Hlp........................................BE1/2-27, 2-52 HMI Advanced...............BE1/1-6, IM4/7-246 HMI boot with network ................... IM2/3-27 HMI boot without network .............. IM2/3-27 HMI Embedded ............................... BE1/1-6 HMI software version ................... IM2/9-159 HMI_HELP_SYSTEMS (SM/ST) MD 9991 .................................... IM2/5-89 HMI_MONITOR MD 9032 .................................... IM2/5-79 HMI_TESTAUTOMAT_OPTION MD 9992 .................................... IM2/5-89 HMI_WIZARD_OPTION MD 9993 .................................... IM2/5-89 HMI-specific shared folders ........... IM2/3-39 HT6 Action log ................................ IM2/11-203 Alarm text files ........................ IM2/11-192 Installing the application software ............................... IM2/11-183 Installing the system software .............................. IM2/11-181 Language add-ons.................. IM2/11-188 PLC installation and start-up... IM2/11-202 Requirements ........................ IM2/11-178 Setting the time and date ....... IM2/11-202 Software replacement ............ IM2/11-180 Software upgrade .................. IM2/11-190 HTML Viewer ................................ IM2/3-41 htx ................................................. BE1/2-53

I I/O field.......................................... BE1/2-39 ID parameters ................................. BE1/1-9


I-17

I Index

11.02

Identifier Variable ......................................BE1/2-40 Identifier.........................................BE1/2-23 IF .................................................BE1/3-100 Inch/metric switchover ...................IM2/5-60 INI files Sections ...................................BE1/5-127 Initial startup ................................IM4/7-190 Initialization file If.ini.........................HE1/1-7 Initializing the language property... TX1/3-36 Input Method Editor ................TX1/1-7, 4-49 Input mode.....................................BE1/2-42 Input monitoring Development diameter peripheral surface ...................................IM4/5-110 Install From Floppy Disk .................IM4/3-22 Installation HMI Embedded Win32 on PC ...IM2/7-133 PCU basic software.....................IM4/3-21 Installation and mounting of PCU...IM2/2-15 Installation via parallel connection in FAT16 file structure ..........IM4/7-192 Installation via parallel connection in FAT32 file structure .............IM4/7-194 Installing the system software, SINUMERIK HT6 ................IM2/11-181 Installing Win32 on PCU50/70 .....IM2/7-117 Instruction definition Sections............................ HE1/1-10, 1-13 Instruction text ...............................HE1/1-16 Instruction ......................................HE1/1-13 Integer extensions .........................BE1/2-46 Integration Custom ....................................BE1/6-147 Interface PLC ............................................BE1/2-19 Interfaces on PCU20 .....................IM2/2-13 Intermediate storage Keys .........................................BE1/5-129 Interpreter ........................................BE1/1-6 ISNUM ...........................................BE1/2-46 ISSTR ............................................BE1/2-46

K Keyboard assignment Variable change ......................... TX1/3-28 Keyboard layout Checking .................................... TX1/3-32 For Greek/Cyrillic font ................ TX1/3-42 For Russian font ......................... TX1/3-42 Hungarian .................................. TX1/4-47 In picture form ...................TX1/3-23, 3-32 Permanent change............TX1/3-24, 3-27

I-18

Variable, with correct language assignment ............................. TX1/3-33 Keyboard layout active.................. TX1/4-46 Keyboard layout specific to input window................................... TX1/3-31 Keyboard layout ............................ TX1/3-23 Keyboard setting Default.......................................... TX1/1-9 Examples ................................... TX1/3-37 Keyboard switchover Under Windows NT.................... TX1/3-28 Under Windows NT4.................. TX1/3-33 Keyboard switchover..................... TX1/3-32 Keyboard type .............................. IM4/5-123 KEYBOARD_STATE MD 9009 ................................... IM4/5-123 KEYBOARD_STATE MD 9009 ..................................... IM2/5-77 KEYBOARD_TYPE MD 9008 ................................... IM4/5-123 KEYBOARD_TYPE MD 9008 ..................................... IM2/5-77 Key Configuration........................ BE1/5-128 Keys.ini........................................ BE1/5-120

L LA.................................................. BE1/2-61 Language add-ons SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-188 Language families ........................... TX1/1-4 Language family Language codes ....................... TX1/3-21 Language family does not appear .................................. TX1/4-48 Language family list box grayed out ......................................... TX1/4-49 Language family ............................. TX1/1-8 Language group ............................. TX1/1-4 Language option SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-210 Language option ............................ IM2/5-52 Language properties Change ...................................... TX1/3-35 Save........................................... TX1/3-40 Two in one table ........................ TX1/3-40 Language property Change ........................................ TX1/1-8 For text files in WordPad ........... TX1/3-36 Manage ........................................ TX1/1-8 Management in word processors .............................. TX1/3-35 Reinitialize.................................. TX1/3-36 Save............................................. TX1/1-8


11.02

Language property .......................... TX1/1-7 Language selection soft key...........IM4/5-67 Language support.......................... TX1/4-50 Language-dependent texts..........BE1/7-154 Languages supported...................IM4/6-178 LAYOUT_MODE MD 9021....................................IM4/5-124 LAYOUT_MODE MD 9021......................................IM2/5-78 LB ..................................................BE1/3-88 LCD_CONTRAST MD 9000....................................IM4/5-123 LCD_CONTRAST MD 9000......................................IM2/5-77 li .....................................................BE1/2-52 Limit value Fine offset .................................IM4/5-131 Fine wear...................................IM4/5-131 Limit values.......................... BE1/2-40, 2-68 Line feed.......................................... TX1/1-9 Line index ......................................BE1/2-62 Linear Flash Memory card............IM2/7-114 LM........................................ BE1/2-36, 3-79 Load block .....................................BE1/3-88 LOAD.............................................BE1/3-75 Log file Displaying .................................IM2/9-158 Reading out ..............................IM2/9-158 Structure....................................IM2/9-157 Log file ..........................................IM4/8-251 Logging in as the default user ......... TX1/1-6 Log-in not possible ........................ TX1/4-49 Long text........................................BE1/2-41 LS ........................................ BE1/2-36, 3-80 lt .....................................................BE1/2-52

M M key ...........................................BE1/5-125 M:N assignments NETNAMES.INI.........................IM4/5-167 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST MD 9421....................................IM4/5-130 MA_AXES_SHOW_GEO_FIRST MD 9421......................................IM2/5-85 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9424....................................IM4/5-131 MA_COORDINATE_SYSTEM MD 9424 .....................................IM2/5-86 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL MD 9423....................................IM4/5-130 MA_MAX_SKP_LEVEL MD 9423 .....................................IM2/5-86

I Index

MA_ONLY_MKS_DIST_TO_GO MD 9420 .................................... IM2/5-85 MA_ORIAXES_EULER_ANGLE_NAME MD 9244 ................................... IM4/5-129 MA_PRESET_FRAMEIDX MD 9245 ................................... IM4/5-129 MA_PRESET_MODE MD 9422 .................................... IM2/5-85 MD 9422 ................................... IM4/5-130 MA_SCRATCH_DEFAULT_MODE MD 9425 ..................................... IM2/5-86 MA_STAT_DISPLAY_BASE MD 9242 ................................... IM4/5-129 MA_TU_DISPLAY_BASE MD 9243 ................................... IM4/5-129 Machine data for the operator panel ...................................... IM2/5-77 Main body of form ......................... BE1/2-26 Manage Network Drives................. IM4/3-22 Master screen form ....................... BE1/3-79 Match cycles Simulation ................................. IM4/5-108 Match MD Simulation ................................. IM4/5-107 Match setup data Simulation ................................. IM4/5-108 Match tools Simulation ................................. IM4/5-107 Matching simulation data ............. IM4/5-107 Mathematical functions ................. BE1/3-99 Mathematical operators ................ BE1/3-98 Max ............................................... BE1/2-52 MD_TEXT_SWITCH MD 9900 ................................... IM4/5-135 MD_TEXT_SWITCH MD 9900 ..................................... IM2/5-89 Mechanical and electrical design PCU20 ........................................ IM2/2-12 Mechanical and electrical installation .............................. IM4/2-12 Memory extension Simulation ................................. IM4/5-111 Memory utilization ......................... BE1/2-46 Menu operation ............................. TX1/3-32 Menu Select ................................ BE1/5-125 Merge ............................................ BE1/3-80 Method of operation ........................ BE1/1-8 Methods ........................................ BE1/3-74 MFII keyboard ............................. BE1/5-140 Milling simulation 3D graphic ......... IM2/5-66 Min ................................................ BE1/2-52 Mirror tools Simulation ................................. IM4/5-109 MM_CONTOUR_END_TEXT MD 9461 ..................................... IM2/5-86


I-19

I Index

11.02

MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9450....................................IM4/5-131 MM_WRITE_TOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9450......................................IM2/5-86 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451......................................IM2/5-86 MD 9451........................ IM4/5-131, 5-132 MM_WRITE_ZOA_FINE_LIMIT MD 9451......................................IM2/5-86 MMC .......................................... IM2/10-162 MMC byte ......................................BE1/2-20 MMC ......................................... IM4/10-259 Modified MD, backing up..............IM2/8-148 Mouse support................................IM2/5-51 MPI card Operation, SINUMERIK HT6 . IM2/11-202 MPI/OPI network rules ...................IM2/3-18 Multi-channel block search.............IM4/5-65 Multiple keypress.........................BE1/5-120

N NC code Generate ....................................BE1/3-89 NC code.......................................BE1/4-113 NC functions ..................................BE1/3-95 NC variables Read...........................................BE1/3-82 Write ...........................................BE1/3-82 NC variables ..................................BE1/3-82 NC_PROPERTIES MD 9500......................................IM2/5-87 NCK Reset......................................IM2/5-51 NCK software version...................IM2/9-159 NCU-specific alarm texts for several operator panels/NCUs ..........IM4/6-180 NETNAMES.INI File extension ..............................IM2/5-56 Network Configuration data.......................IM2/3-23 Network configuration examples Company network .......................IM2/3-26 One Embedded/one server .........IM2/3-25 Three Embedded/two servers .....IM2/3-25 Network link Installation .................................IM4/7-184 Network Manager Removal ......................................IM2/3-35 Network Manager Installation ..................................IM2/3-34 Network Manager ...........................IM2/3-34 Network operation HMI Embedded, TCP/IP protocol ....................................IM2/3-23

I-20

With HMI Embedded................... IM2/3-23 Networking with Windows NT 4.0..................................... IM4/3-16 NUM_AX_SEL (HT6) MD 9027 ..................................... IM2/5-78 Numeric basis for displaying joint position STAT....................... IM4/5-129 Numeric basis for displaying the rotary axis position TU.......... IM4/5-129

O Online help Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-41 OP 010 operator panel fronts......... IM2/2-14 OP 012 operator panel front .......... IM2/2-14 OP010 .....................................IM2/1-8, 2-14 OP012 .....................................IM2/1-8, 2-14 OP015 operator panel fronts.......... IM2/2-14 OP015 .....................................IM2/1-8, 2-14 Open file........................................ TX1/2-13 Operating area Custom .................................... BE1/6-144 Operating areas ............................ BE1/2-22 Operating system share................. IM2/3-39 Operating the Network Manager.... IM2/3-35 Operator panel type ..................... IM4/5-123 OUTPUT ....................................... BE1/3-76

P Parallel link FAT32 file structure .................. IM4/7-194 Parallel link for FAT16 file structure .................. IM4/7-192 Parallel link for FAT32 file structure .................. IM4/7-194 Parameters...................................... BE1/1-9 Partitioning of the hard disk ........... IM4/3-19 Path for the drive names in the directory management .............IM4/5-133, 5-135 PCMCIA card image ................... BE1/7-168 PCU Installation/mounting................... IM2/2-15 PCU 50........................................... IM4/2-13 PCU basic software ....................... IM4/3-17 PCU booting................................... IM2/4-48 PCU20 Accessories ................................ IM2/2-12 Component ................................. IM2/2-12 Creating a PC card .................. IM2/7-114 Interfaces .................................... IM2/2-13 Mechanical/electrical design....... IM2/2-12 Ready to receive....................... IM2/7-105


11.02

PCU20 ..............................................IM2/1-8 PCU20 accessories ........................IM2/2-12 PCU20 component .........................IM2/2-12 PCU50 .............................................IM2/1-8 PCU70 ..............................................IM2/1-8 Permanent connection Network Manager ........................IM2/3-36 PI services .....................................BE1/3-95 PI_SERVICE .................................BE1/3-95 Picture/logo in start-up screen form......................................BE1/6-148 Plaintexts instead of MD identifiers...............................IM4/5-135 PLC alarm acknowledgment icon...IM2/5-53 PLC byte........................................BE1/2-19 PLC installation and start-up SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-202 PLC interface...............................BE1/5-129 PLC program ...............................BE1/5-129 PLC soft key ...............................BE1/5-130 PLC variables Read ..........................................BE1/3-82 Write ...........................................BE1/3-82 PLC variables ................................BE1/3-83 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE MD 9055....................................IM4/5-125 PLC_ALARM_PICTURE MD 9055 .....................................IM2/5-79 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER MD 9054 ...................................IM4/5-125 PLC_SYMBOL_FILTER MD 9054 .....................................IM2/5-79 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT MD 9053 ...................................IM4/5-125 PLC_SYMBOL_SORT MD 9053 .....................................IM2/5-79 Pocket calculator help Activating ....................................IM2/5-52 Deactivating.................................IM2/5-52 Position of I/O field ........................BE1/2-43 Position of joint STAT.....................IM4/5-64 Position of rotary axis TU ...............IM4/5-64 Position of short text ......................BE1/2-43 Positional parameters....................BE1/1-10 Positions ........................................BE1/2-49 Power ON .......................................IM4/4-40 Powerline boot screen....................IM2/4-48 PP ..................................................BE1/3-92 Preparation for operation ...............IM2/4-48 PRESET .......................................IM4/5-130 Preset .............................................IM2/5-64 PRESS ................................ BE1/2-35, 3-74 PRG_DEFAULT_DIR MD 9005......................................IM2/5-77

I Index

Program selection Simulation ................................. IM4/5-104 Program simulation ........................ IM2/5-66 PROGRAM_SETTINGS MD 9460 ................................... IM4/5-132 PROGRAM_SETTINGS MD 9460 ..................................... IM2/5-86 Protection level Change assigned D no. of a tool cutting edge ........................... IM4/5-126 Change tool monitoring limiting values .................................... IM4/5-126 Change tool setting offsets ....... IM4/5-126 Change tool sum offsets ........... IM4/5-126 Delete R parameters................. IM4/5-127 Program selection..................... IM4/5-127 Write fine................................... IM4/5-126 Write R parameters................... IM4/5-128 Write settable zero offset .......... IM4/5-127 Write tool adapter data ............. IM4/5-126 Write tool geometry................... IM4/5-126 Write tool wear data.................. IM4/5-126 Protection level Extended overstore .............................. IM4/5-127 Protection level for network drive1 MACHINE ................................. IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive2 MACHINE ................................. IM4/5-132 PROGRAM ............................... IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive3 MACHINE ................................. IM4/5-132 PROGRAM ............................... IM4/5-132 Protection level for network drive4 PROGRAM ............................... IM4/5-132 Protection level PRESET ............. IM4/5-127 Protection level Program control.. IM4/5-127 Protection level Read user variables ............................... IM4/5-127 Protection level TEACH IN........... IM4/5-127 Protection level Write setting data....................................... IM4/5-127 Protection level Write user variables ............................... IM4/5-127 Protection levels............................ BE1/2-32

R RAMDISK .................................... IM2/7-122 Range of values .......................... BE1/5-121 Reading ISO programs in/out ..... IM2/8-153 RECALL key.........................BE1/2-18, 2-34 Recompile ................................... BE1/4-113 Redo............................................. IM4/5-142 REG ............................................ BE1/3-104


I-21

I Index

11.02

REGIE.INI.....................................IM4/5-112 Register status.............................BE1/3-105 Register value..............................BE1/3-105 Register .......................................BE1/3-104 Relational operators ......................BE1/3-99 Remote diagnostics for PCU 20 .....IM2/5-70 Retaining the language property ... TX1/2-17 RETURN........................................BE1/3-89 RI suppression measures.................IM2/1-9 RNP ...............................................BE1/3-82 Rotate coordinate system Simulation..................................IM4/5-109

S Saving files .................................... TX1/2-17 Saving language properties........... TX1/3-40 Saving network data to card.........IM2/7-116 SB ................................................BE1/4-111 Scope of functions ...........................BE1/1-7 Scope of supply Expanding the operator interface ................................BE1/7-152 Scratching.......................................IM2/5-64 Screen darkening Enabling, SINUMERIK HT6 .. IM2/11-210 Via PCU.......................................IM2/5-51 Via PLC .......................................IM2/5-51 Screen form change mode ............BE1/3-79 Screen form definition block ..........BE1/2-23 Screen form elements ...................BE1/2-39 Screen form header.....................BE1/6-148 Screen form properties ..................BE1/2-26 Screen form tree............................BE1/2-17 Screen form ...................................BE1/2-23 Screen kit Add new languages...................IM2/7-112 Screen saver ................................IM4/5-166 se.................................. BE1/2-31, IM4/5-69 Search configurations Multi-channel block search..........IM4/5-66 Search order Help ............................................HE1/2-28 Search strategy Simulation..................................IM4/5-104 Selecting tools via a D number (flat D no.) ...............................IM2/5-62 SER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH MD 9213......................................IM2/5-80 Series start-up ..............................IM2/8-142 Service menu Call ..............................................IM4/3-22 Service menu..................................IM4/3-18 Set action log................................IM4/8-251

I-22

Setting action mode for action log......................................... IM4/5-124 Setting parameters using ini files . IM4/5-114 Setting the date .............................. IM2/5-52 Setting the font ............................. TX1/2-13 Setting the language family........... TX1/2-13 Setting the PLC time and date SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-202 Setting the screen brightness, SINUMERIK HT6 ....................... IM2/11-211 Setting the time ............................. IM2/5-52 Settings for network drives........... IM4/7-185 Settings for saved protocol .......... IM4/5-144 SF ............................................... BE1/4-112 Shift behavior of keyboard ........... IM4/5-123 Shipped state ................................ IM2/3-18 Short text As image .................................... BE1/2-46 Short text....................................... BE1/2-41 Show Connected Network Drives .. IM4/3-22 Show server name ....................... IM4/5-166 SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE MD 9052 .................................. IM4/5-125 SHOW_CHANNEL_SPANNING_STATE MD 9052 ..................................... IM2/5-79 Simulation Milling.......................................... IM2/5-66 Turning........................................ IM2/5-66 SINUCOPY_FFS......................... BE1/7-168 SINUMERIK desktop Call.............................................. IM4/3-21 SINUMERIK desktop ..................... IM4/3-18 SINUMERIK HT6 ...................... IM2/11-178 Size Configuration file...................... BE1/7-155 Image file ................................. BE1/7-155 Skip levels .................................... IM4/5-130 Soft key Horizontal................................... BE1/2-23 Vertical ....................................... BE1/2-23 Soft key menu ............................... BE1/2-34 Soft key properties ........BE1/2-30, IM4/5-68 Soft key ......................................... BE1/2-30 Software replacement SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-180 Software upgrade SINUMERIK HT6 .................... IM2/11-190 Software version display .............. IM2/9-159 SP ................................................. BE1/3-93 Special characters of various language families ......... TX1/2-16, 3-20 SPIND_DISPLAY_RESOLUTION MD 9010 ................................... IM4/5-124 st ..........................BE1/2-31, 2-52, IM4/5-69


11.02

Standard application Return.........................................BE1/2-17 Standard configuration ...................IM2/3-20 Standard control file HMI Embedded .........................IM2/8-150 Start of the first RPA area ............IM4/5-128 Start of the second RPA area.......IM4/5-128 Start of the third RPA area ...........IM4/5-128 STARTUP_LOGO MD 9050....................................IM4/5-125 STARTUP_LOGO MD 9050 .....................................IM2/5-79 Startup .........................................IM4/6-179 STAT ..............................................IM4/5-64 State ...........................................BE1/5-122 Status display with symbols ...........IM4/5-76 Status ........................... BE1/2-31, IM4/5-69 Storage of values for scratch and actual value setting ...............IM4/5-129 SUB ..............................................BE1/3-87 Subroutine Abort ..........................................BE1/3-89 Call .............................................BE1/3-88 Define .........................................BE1/3-87 Subroutine .....................................BE1/3-87 Sub-screen form ...........................BE1/3-79 Subsequent installation of Windows NT components ....................IM4/7-240 Suggested references ................... TX1/5-52 Supplementary conditions for variable keyboard layout........ TX1/3-33 SW components PCU basic software.....................IM4/3-17 SW_OPTIONS (SM/ST) MD 9990......................................IM2/5-89 SWITCH_TO_AREA MD 9016......................................IM2/5-78 Switching channels over on 1 NCU................................................IM2/5-55 Switching over channel Example ......................................IM2/5-56 Foreign language texts................IM2/5-58 Switching over channels/operator units SINUMERIK HT6 ......IM2/11-197 Switching over channels.................IM2/5-55 Switching over operator units .........IM2/5-55 Switchover zero offset display........IM2/5-63 Syntax rules.....................................BE1/1-9 SYS_CLOCK_SYNC_TIME MD 9013......................................IM2/5-78 SYSLOCK Boot virus check ..........................IM4/5-75 System software SINUMERIK HT6 ................... IM2/11-180

I Index

System variable Indirect addressing .................... BE1/2-53 System variable............................. BE1/2-43

T Table ............................................. BE1/2-60 TABULATOR_SIZE MD 9007 ..................................... IM2/5-77 Task ............................................ BE1/5-122 TCP/IP protocol Installing/configuring under HMI Embedded ............................... IM2/3-23 Installing...................................... IM2/3-31 TCP/IP settings ............................ IM4/7-189 Teach mode Disabling/enabling transfer, SINUMERIK HT6................. IM2/11-211 TEACH_MODE (HT6) MD 9026 ..................................... IM2/5-78 TECHNOLOGY MD 9020 ................................... IM4/5-124 TECHNOLOGY MD 9020 ..................................... IM2/5-78 Technology.................................... HE1/1-14 Temporary save of tool center point path Simulation............................. IM4/5-110 Terms .......................................... BE1/8-180 Test flags for internal diagnostics ........................... IM4/5-135 Testing PC/PG environment MMC 100.2 ........................... BE1/7-169 PC/PG environment MMC 103 BE1/7-171 Text alignment............................... BE1/2-42 Text file names............................ BE1/7-153 Text file........................................ BE1/7-154 Text files.............................BE1/1-11, 7-159 Text input Numeric ..................................... TX1/3-20 Text with several language properties .............................. TX1/3-40 Texts ..................................BE1/2-41, 7-153 TM_DEFAULT_DELETE_TOOL MD 9419 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLPLACESPEC MD 9415 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSIZE MD 9412 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLSTATE MD 9417 ..................................... IM2/5-85 TM_DEFAULT_TOOLTYPE MD 9416 ..................................... IM2/5-85


I-23

I Index

11.02

TM_KIND_OF_TOOLMANAGAMENT MD 9414......................................IM2/5-85 TM_LOAD_PLACE MD 9410......................................IM2/5-85 TM_NUM_MAG MD 9411......................................IM2/5-85 TO_MAG_PLACE_DISTANCE MD 9479......................................IM2/5-87 TO_OPTION_MASK MD 9478......................................IM2/5-86 TO_TRACE MD 9477......................................IM2/5-86 Toggle field Variables ....................................BE1/2-50 Toggle field extension ...................BE1/2-50 Toggle field ....................................BE1/2-41 Toggle Logon to Domain ................IM4/3-22 Toggle Protocol ..............................IM4/3-22 Tool management ShopMill.......................................IM2/5-61 ShopTurn.....................................IM2/5-61 Standard......................................IM2/5-61 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS1 MD 9400......................................IM2/5-85 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS2 MD 9401......................................IM2/5-85 TOOL_REF_GEO_AXIS3 MD 9402......................................IM2/5-85 TRACE MD 9999....................................IM4/5-135 TRACE MD 9999......................................IM2/5-89 Transfer user files HMI Embedded .........................IM2/8-152 Transfer variables..........................BE1/3-81 Troubleshooting Network Manager ........................IM2/3-41 TRUE.............................................BE1/3-99 TU...................................................IM4/5-64 Turning simulation ..........................IM2/5-66

U Undo .............................................IM4/5-142 Unicode ........................................... TX1/1-9 Unit text .........................................BE1/2-41 UNLOAD........................................BE1/3-75 UP..................................................BE1/3-92 Upgrading the HMI Embedded software on a PCU20............IM2/7-100 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win 32 software on a PCU50/70.......IM2/7-116 Upgrading the HMI Embedded Win32 software on PC .....................IM2/7-132

I-24

Upper limit for tool wear input ...... IM4/5-133 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA MD 9014 ................................... IM4/5-124 USE_CHANNEL_DISPLAY_DATA MD 9014 ..................................... IM2/5-78 User control file .............................. IM4/5-60 User interface................................ BE1/2-23 User management Network Manager ....................... IM2/3-37 User variable ................................. BE1/2-43 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9232 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9235 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_BEGIN_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9238 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA MD 9248 ................................... IM4/5-130 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_MA MD 9248 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA MD 9247 ................................... IM4/5-130 USER_CLASS_BASE_ZERO_OFF_PA MD 9246 ..................................... IM2/5-81 MD 9247 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA MD 9221 ................................... IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_CLEAR_RPA MD 9221 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY_CHG MD 9509 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M MD 9516 ................................... IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_M MD 9516 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY1_P MD 9510 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M MD 9517 ................................... IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_M MD 9517 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P MD 9511 ................................... IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY2_P MD 9511 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M MD 9518 ................................... IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_M MD 9518 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P MD 9512 ................................... IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY3_P MD 9512 ..................................... IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M MD 9519 ................................... IM4/5-132


11.02

USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_M MD 9519......................................IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P MD 9513....................................IM4/5-132 USER_CLASS_DIRECTORY4_P MD 9513......................................IM2/5-87 USER_CLASS_INCH_METRIC MD 9182......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_OVERSTORE_HIGH MD 9213....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_PRESET MD 9220....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_PRESET MD9220.......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_BD MD 9230......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_CST MD 9225......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_CUS MD 9226......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_DEF MD 9229......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD MD 9211....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_READ_GUD_LUD MD 9211......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_IN MD 9224......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_PROGRAM MD 9216......................................IM2/5-80 MD 9217......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_READ_SYF MD 9228......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_READ_TCARR MD 9180......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA MD 9200........................ IM4/5-124, 5-125 USER_CLASS_READ_TOA MD 9200......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM MD 9218....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_SELECT_PROGRAM MD 9218......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_SET_V24 MD 9223......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_SHOW_SBL2 MD 9227......................................IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_SYS_ZERO_OFF MD 9246....................................IM4/5-129 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN MD 9219....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_TEACH_IN MD 9219......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_TM_SKACTPLACE MD 9270......................................IM2/5-82

I Index

USER_CLASS_TM_SKFINDPLACE MD 9269 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKLDTOOLDAT MD 9271 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGBUFFER MD 9260 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGFIND MD 9261 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLISTPOS MD 9262 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR2 MD 9256 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGLREPR3 MD 9257 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKMGNEXT MD 9263 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCDELTOOL MD 9259 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKNCNEWTOOLE MD 9258 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLIST MD 9251 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR1 MD 9265 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR2 MD 9266 .................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLLREPR3 MD 9267 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTLNEWTOOL MD 9264 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLLOAD MD 9252 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLMOVE MD 9254 ..................................... IM2/5-82 USER_CLASS_TM_SKTOOLUNLOAD MD 9253 ..................................... IM2/5-81 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE MD 9203 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_FINE MD 9203 ..................................... IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD MD 9212 ................................... IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_GUD_LUD MD 9212 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_MAG_WGROUP MD 9208 ................................... IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT MD 9214 ................................... IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_PRG_CONDIT MD 9214 ..................................... IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA MD 9222 ................................... IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA MD 9222 ..................................... IM2/5-80


I-25

I Index

11.02

USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9231....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9234....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9237....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA MD 9215....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_SEA MD 9215......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TCARR MD 9181......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT MD 9209....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ADAPT MD 9209......................................IM2/5-80 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_ASSDNO MD 9207....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_EC MD 9205....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO MD 9201....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_GEO MD 9201......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_NAME MD 9240....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SC MD 9204....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_SUPVIS MD 9206....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_TYPE MD 9241....................................IM4/5-128 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR MD 9202....................................IM4/5-126 USER_CLASS_WRITE_TOA_WEAR MD 9202......................................IM2/5-79 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA MD 9210....................................IM4/5-127 USER_CLASS_WRITE_ZOA MD 9210......................................IM2/5-80 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_1 MD 9233....................................IM4/5-128 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_2 MD 9236....................................IM4/5-128 USER_END_WRITE_RPA_3 MD 9239....................................IM4/5-128 User-configurable displays Expanding ...................................IM2/5-54 USERE_CLASS_VERT_MODE_SK MD 9249......................................IM2/5-81 ut....................................................BE1/2-52 Utilization display............................IM2/5-70

I-26

V V24_PG_PC_BAUD MD 9325 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_CONTROLS MD 9323 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_DATABITS MD 9326 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_EOF MD 9322 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_LINE MD 9329 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_PARITY MD 9327 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_RTS MD 9324 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_STOPBIT MD 9328 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_XOFF MD 9321 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PG_PC_XON MD 9320 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_BAUD MD 9315 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_CONTROLS MD 9313 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_DATABITS MD 9316 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_EOF MD 9312 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_LINE MD 9319 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_PARITY MD 9317 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_RTS MD 9314 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_STOPBIT MD 9318 ..................................... IM2/5-84 V24_PRINTER_XOFF MD 9311 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_PRINTER_XON MD 9310 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_BAUD MD 9305 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_CONTROLS MD 9303 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_DATABITS MD 9396 ..................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_EOF MD 9302 .................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_LINE MD 9309 .................................... IM2/5-83 V24_USER_PARITY MD 9307 ..................................... IM2/5-83


11.02

V24_USER_RTS MD 9304 .....................................IM2/5-83 V24_USER_STOPBIT MD 9308......................................IM2/5-83 V24_USER_XOFF MD 9301......................................IM2/5-83 V24_USER_XON MD 9300......................................IM2/5-83 Val............................. BE1/3-105, 2-53, 2-54 Var ....................................... BE1/2-27, 2-53 Variable Calculate ....................................BE1/2-55 Check .........................................BE1/3-84 Pre-assignment ..........................BE1/2-48 S_CHAN...................................BE1/3-107 Variable property Changing ....................................BE1/2-52 Variable property ...........................BE1/2-40 Variable status...............................BE1/2-52 Variable type..................................BE1/2-40 Variable value................................BE1/2-52 Variable .........................................BE1/2-40 Variables Defaults ......................................BE1/2-41 Defining ......................................BE1/2-40 Variant ...........................................BE1/2-46 Virtual keys ..................................BE1/5-121 vld .................... BE1/2-53, 2-54, 2-65, 3-105 Vocabulary words ............................BE1/1-9

W

I Index

Windows 98, Windows Millenium Edition, Windows 2000 ......... TX1/4-48 Windows tools Scope........................................... TX1/1-5 Windows95 Restrictions ............................... TX1/3-41 Windows98 ..................................... TX1/1-6 Wizard ............................................ BE1/1-6 WNP.............................................. BE1/3-82 Word Creating texts ............................ TX1/4-46 WordPad Language properties.................. TX1/3-36 Starting....................................... TX1/2-12 WordPad 5.0 ................................. TX1/4-48 Workpiece Template ..................................... IM2/5-62 wr .................................................. BE1/2-52 Write protection For the first RPA area ............... IM4/5-128 For the second RPA area ......... IM4/5-128 For the third RPA area.............. IM4/5-128 WRITE_TOA_LIMIT_MASK MD 9449 ................................... IM4/5-131

Z Zero offset Fine ............................................. IM2/5-63 Zero offset ..................................... IM2/5-63

Windows 95 Identifying the version ................ TX1/4-46 n


I-27

I Index

I-28

11.02


To Siemens AG A&D MC BMS P.O. Box 3180 D-91050 Erlangen, Germany

Suggestions Corrections For publication: SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D HMI/MMC Installation and Start-Up Guide

Phone: +49-(0)180-5050-222 [Hotline] Fax: +49-(0)9131-98-2176 [Documentation] E-Mail: [email protected]

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

From

Installation and Start-Up Guide

Name:

Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2 11.02 Edition

Company/Dept.

Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.

Address:

Phone: __________ / Fax: __________ /

Suggestions and/or corrections

Siemens AG Automation & Drives Motion Control Systems P.O. Box 3180, D-91050 Erlangen Germany www.ad.siemens.de

© Siemens AG, 2002 Subject to change without prior notice Order No.: 6FC5 297-6AE20-0BP2 Printed in Germany